RANGELAND 

• INVENTORY & 

MONITORING 

Supplemental Studies 

TR 4400-5 1992 

United States 

Department of the Interior 

Bureau of Land Management 

Rangeland Inventory & Monitoring 

Supplemental Studies 

Technical Reference 4400-5 

September 1992 

BLM/SC/PT-92/005+4400 
Copies are available from: 

Bureau of Land Management 

Service Center, SC-657B 

Denver Federal Center, Building 50 

Denver, Colorado 80225 
Supplemental Studies 

INTRODUCTION '. .: .1 

I. RANGE SURVEY 3 

A. Foreword : 5 

B. Object ;... 5 

C. Responsibility .6 

D. Preliminary Considerations .6 

1. Preparation for Field Work 6 

2. Field Season ...7 

-3. Control for Range Classification 8 

E. Procedure in the Field : 8 

1. General Statement 8 

2. Size, Organization, and Qualifications of Party 8 

3. Chief of Party ... 9 

4. Other Members of Party ,. ; 9 

F. Field Methods ,: 10 

1. Forage Types 11 

2. Soil Erosion .... , 12 

3. Topography 12 

4. Drainage and Watering Places 12 

5. Culture ...' ...„ ......12 

6. Alienated Lands 13 

7. Field Notes :..... ..:...... , .'. 13 

G. Palatability...: 14 

H. Density and Composition 15 

- 1. Reconnaissance Method 15 

2. Square Foot Density Method 16 

I. Grazing Capacity Computations (Either Method) 21 

J. Estimating Grazing Capacity of Annuals .'.; 22 

K. Progress Report 22 

L. Classification of Forage Types 22 

1. Type Designations 22 

2. Symbols^ : 23 

3. Color Legend 23 

M. Type Descriptions ...: 23 

II. PARKER 3-STEP METHOD 33 

A. Parker 3-Step Method ..33, 

B. Factors in Establishing Permanent Transects 33 

C. Recording the Cluster Location .34 

D. Step One - Establishing a Line Transect 34 

1. Reading the Tape 35 

2. Recording Transect Information : 36 

3. Equipment 36 

4. Optional 36 

5. Paced Transect ; 37 

6. Coverage 37 

E. Step Two - Photographic Record 37 

iii 
Supplemental Studies 

F. Step Three - Score Card 38 

1. Density 38 

2. Composition 38 

3. Vigor and Condition 38 

4. Soil and Erosion 39 

5. Supplemental Information 39 

G. Summary Records 39 

H. Records 39 

III. DEMING TWO-PHASE 51 

A. Procedures for Using Two-Phase Method 51 

1. Observations 51 

2. Local Plant Classification List 51 

3. Range Condition Survey Field Record 51 

4. Numerical Ratings 51 

5. Unit or Allotment Summary 52 

6. Condition Classes 52 

7. Observation Noted on Map 52 

8. Zones by Condition Class 52 

9. Using Type and Topographic Maps 52 

10. Range Condition Criteria Index 53 

B. Phase 1- Range Forage Condition Index Ratings 53 

1. Rating Plant Stands for Quality 53 

2. Rating Density and Occupancy by Desirable Forage Plants 54 

3. Rating Vigor of Desirable Plants 54 

4. Rating Reproduction Abundance and Survival of Desirable Plants 55 

C. Phase 2 - Site and Soil Mantle 56 

1. Rating the Protective Cover and Its Efficiency 56 

2. Rating the Natural Vulnerability of the Site 56 

3. Rating Surface Runoff Resistance 57 

4. Rating Soil Stability 58 

D. Preparation of Maps 59 

1. Map Zone Legends 59 

2. Map Reference Dates 59 

3. Special Separate Phase Maps 59 

4. Resurvey Work Maps 59 

IV. TREND SCORE CARD 73 

V. GUIDES FOR ESTIMATING TREND 79 

VI. EXCLOSURES 81 

VII. PELLET STUDIES 83 

VIII. WEIGHT ESTIMATE AND OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE 85 

A. Introduction 85 

B. Forage Survey Methods 85 

C. Objective 85 
Supplemental Studies 

i 

D. Technical Considerations ....: 86 

1. Range Types 86 

2. Weight and Density 86 

3. Animal Unit Ratios 89 

4. Plant Symbol Lists :...: .!...... 89 

5. Proper Use Factors .._. 89 

6. Proper Use Objective '. 92 

7. Game Factor Considerations ......92 

8. Derivation of Proper Use Factors : , 92 

9 Utilization Deductions 96 

10. Forage Requirements , 96 

E. Forage Survey Procedures 98 

1. Presurvey Considerations ? 99 

2. Field Procedures ; 101 

F. Final Maps .'. „.. 108 

1. Unit Base Maps..'. : ,.:.:..?...-.. .'.. 108 

2. Resource Township Plats 108 

3. Special Status and Survey Maps 109 

G. Compilations '. 109 

1. Work Map (Resource Township Plat) Data .............. 109 

2. Acreage and Grazing Capacity Compilations .-. :.... 110 

3. Allowance for Superabundant Species Il l 

H. Narrative Report Il l 

I. Survey Cost Report.. 112 

1. Preliminary Work 112 

2. Field Survey : :..„ 1.. 112 

3. Survey Summarization 113 

4. Relative Difficultness and Cost of Survey 113 

OCULAR ESTIMATE METHOD 123 

A. Equipment and Supplies 123 

B. Training 123 

1. Weight Units 123 

2. Establishing Weight Unit for Species .". 124 

3. Estimating Present Percent Composition by Weight 124 

C. Sampling Process 124 

1. Location Plots 124 

2. Listing Plant Species 124 

3. Estimating Weight - Calculating Composition , 125 

4. Estimating Composition 125 

5. Entering Climax Composition 125 

D. Determining Condition (Serai Stage) Class ; 125 

APPARENT TREND , 127 

SOIL-VEGETATION INVENTORY METHOD 129 

A. Pre-Planning Analysis 129 

1. Inventory Plan 129 
Supplemental Studies 

2. Progress Reviews 130 

3. Pre-Inventory Preparation 130 

4. Inventory Party 130 

5. Preparing for the Inventory 131 

6. Training 134 

B. Field Inventory Mapping 135 

1. Sources and Criteria for Mapping 135 

2. Potential Plant Community Mapping 136 

3. Present Plant Community Mapping 136 

4. Feature Mapping 138 

5. Water Resources 139 

6. Planimetric Control 139 

C. Soil Considerations 139 

1. Mapping Intensity 139 

2. Map Scales 140 

3. Soil Symbols and Recording 140 

D. Vegetation Field Inventory 140 

1. Stratification 140 

2. Step-Point Transect 141 

3. Vegetation Production and Characterization Plots 142 

4. Vegetation Species Occurrence 145 

5. Endangered, Threatened, or Locally Endemic Plants 145 

6. Data Collection for Phenology Adjustment Factor 145 

7. Obtaining Air-Dry Weight Conversion Data 145 

8. Comparison Area Data 146 

9. Determining Erosion Condition Class 148 

E. Forest Lands Inventory 148 

1. Conducting Inventory 148 

2. Recording 148 

F. Wildlife Resources Field Inventory 148 

1. Opportunistic Animal Sightings 149 

2. Special Habitat Features 149 

3. Riparian Areas 149 

4. Optional Data - Identifying Sagebrush Species 149 

G. Recreation Field Inventory 149 

H. Inventory Narrative Report 150 

I. Additional Required Data 150 

XII. FECAL ANALYSIS 233 

A. Introduction 233 

B. Procedures 233 

1. Sampling Area 233 

2. Sampling Procedures 233 

3. Sample Identification 234 

4. Sample Preservation 234 

5. Sampling Analysis 235 

6. Sampling Plan 235 

7. Vegetation Composition 236 

vi 
Supplemental Studies 

C. Use of Data .„ .... : .- ...........237 

1. Diet Similarity .....; .... ..;..... ........237 

2. Stocking Exchange Rates . ...240 

3. Habitat Suitability .241 

4. Dietary Preference .....:... ......................243 

Xm. MEDITERRANEAN ANNUAL STUDY METHOD .....257 

A. Introduction „, 257 

B. Plot Location : 257 

1. Photo Plots 257 

2. Mulch Residue Plots ..........; ...........:: 257 

C. Collection of Data :.... :.......... 257 

1. Photographs •....;...;.....:-.-..... 257 

2. Composition :.....„ 257 

3. Mulch Residue Determination 258 

4. Observed Apparent Trend .....:......: ; .258 

5. Climate ...„ '. ..................258 

6. Actual Use ; 258 

D . Trainin g ..... ......~...... 25 9 

E. Production.......... ,...: 259 

XIV. MISSOURI RIVER BASIN STUDIES 265 

A. Introduction..... ; 265 

B. Species Categories ;.... 265 

1. Decreasers 265 

2. Increasers ; 265 

3. Invaders ; ..:........ 265 

C. Range Condition .....265 

D. Stocking Rate ....; 266 

XV. PHOTOGRAPHIC UTILIZATION METHOD... 277 

A. Introduction. .....277 

B. Objective .- .'.-. ........277 

1. Density .... 277 

2. Making Observations '. 277 

3. Degree of Utilization 277 

C. California Mediterranean Annual Ranges..... .......277 

1. Area of Use .....: 278 

2. Advantages and Limitations ....278 

3. Equipment Needed 278 

4. Use of Standards 278 

XVI. SOIL SURFACE FACTOR .....:287 

A. Introduction ...287 

B. Criteria 287 

VII 
Supplemental Studies 

XVH. PHOTO PLOT METHOD 291 

A. General Description 291 

B. Areas of Use 291 

C. Advantages and Limitations 291 

D. Equipment 291 

E. Training 292 

F. Establishing Plots 292 

1. Site Selection :-. 292 

2. Number of Plots 292 

3. Plot Size and Shape 292 

4. Plot Location 293 

5. Reference Post or Point 293 

6. Plot Identification 293 

7. Plot Documentation 293 

G. Taking Photographs 293 

H. Sampling Process 293 

1. Number of Plants 293 

2. Measuring Cover 294 

3. Estimating Cover 294 

4. Combining Measurements and Estimates 295 

I. Calculations 295 

1. Composition 295 

2. Vegetation Cover 296 

3. Seedlings 296 

4. Litter 296 

XVni. COMMUNITY STRUCTURE ANALYSIS 313 

A. Genera] Description 313 

B. Areas of Use 313 

C. Advantages and Limitations 313 

D. Equipment 313 

E. Training 314 

F. Establishing Transects 314 

1. Site Selection 314 

2. Number of Transects 315 

3. Transect Layout 315 

4. Reference Post or Point 315 

5. Transect Identification 315 

6. Transect Documentation...: 315 

G. Taking Photographs 315 

H. Sampling Process 316 

1. Collecting Cover Data 316 

2. Collecting Density and Frequency Data 317 

I. Calculations 317 

1. Cover 317 

2. Density 318 

3. Frequency 318 

4. Importance Value 318 

VIII 
Supplemental Studies 

m 

XK. STEM COUNT METHOD . 327 

A. Areas of Use 327 

B. Advantages and Limitations ......327 

G. Equipment. ; ..327 

D. Training ......327 

E. Establishing Studies ; „.. '. 327 

F. Sampling Process 328 

G. Calculating Percent Utilization ...328 

ix 

Supplemental Studies 

ILLUSTRATION TITLE PAGE 

NUMBER 

I. RANGE SURVEY 

1. Range Survey Write-up Worksheet Form 764a .;:...25-26 

2. Range Survey Write-up Worksheet Form 764b:.~. ...27 

3. Forage Type Description :.... ....; ..........28-32 

D. PARKER 3-STEP METHOD 

4. Record of Permanent Line Transect Form 4-1420 41-42 

5. Transect Photographic Identification Card ......;. 43-44 

6. Range Condition Transect Score Card Form 4-1419 ...45-48 

7. Plant Classification List •. ..{..:... 49-50 

m. DEMING TWO-PHASE , 

8. Two-Phase Supplemental Instructions .: ........;.......:........61-70 

9. Two-Phase Range Condition Field Record Form 4-1529.... 71-72 

IV. TREND SCORE CARD 

10. Range Trend Score Card Form 4rl422 75-78 

Vm. WEIGHT ESTIMATE AND OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE 

11. Forage Survey Type Write-up (Weight Estimate) Form 4-1276..... ...............114-116 

12. Forage Survey Type Write-up (Ocular Reconnaissance) Form 4412-1 ...'.....117-118 

13. Allotment Grazing Capacity Tabulation (Weight Estimate) Form 4412-5.. .......119 

14. Allotment Grazing Capacity Tabulation (Ocular Reconnaissance)'Form 4412-2 ......120 

15. Allotment Grazing Capacity Summary (Weight Estimate) Form 4412-6 ........121 

16. Allotment Grazing Capacity Summary (Ocular Reconnaissance) Form 4412-3; ..122 

IX. OCULAR ESTIMATE METHOD • 

17. Condition (Serai Stage) Worksheet Form C-l 1....126 

X. APPARENTTREND 

18. Observed Apparent Trend Worksheet Form AT-1 .;....:............. 128 

XL SOIL-VEGETATION INVENTORY METHOD 

19. Equipment list for SVIM ....'. ..........152-153 

,20. Documentation of Comparison Areas Form 4412-41..; .......155-156 

21. Ecological Site, Serai Stage and SWAMapping ..157 

22. Soil Description Field Data Form 4412-38 (SI) ....158 

23. Transect Data Sheet Form 4412-26 (VI) '. ...159-160 

24. Stratification Data and General Characteristics Form 4412-30 (VB) 161-162 

25. ADP Codes for Vegetation Typing Form 4412-30a 163-166 

26. Standard Land-Form Coding and Descriptions Form 4412-30b 167-169 

27. Transect Layout 171-175 

28. Projected Hits With Obstructions '..."... .....176 

29. Diagrammatic Sketches of Step-Point Data and Recording Procedures 177 

XI 
Supplemental Studies 

30. Vegetation Characterization Plot Layout - Circular Plots 179-180 

31. Weight Estimate and Vegetation Characterization Form 4412-27 (V2) 181-182 

32. Weight Estimate Plot Layout 183 

33. Sampling Precision and Probability 185-192 

34. Dry/Green Weight Conversion Factor Data Form 4412-28 193-194 

35. Plot Sample Record & Codes for Forest Data Element Dictionary 

Form 4412-37 195-210 

36. Relationship Between SVIM and Wildlife Habitat Inventory 211 

37. Wildlife-Recreation Observation Report Form 4412-39 212 

38. Animal Species Occurrence (IHICS) Form 6602-1 Wl) 213-214 

39. Special Habitat Feature Form 6602-2 (W2) 215-216 

40. Site Write-up Area Acres Form 4410-29 (VA) 217-218 

41. Forage Requirement Data Form 4412-31 (VF) 219-220 

42. Livestock Use Data Form 4412-32 (VL) 221-222 

43. Phenological Adjustment Data Form 4412-33 (VP) 223-224 

44. Ecological Site Description Form 4412-34 (VR) 225-226 

45. Diet and Use Factors by Animal and Season Form 4412-35 (VU) 227-228 

46. Wildlife Use Data Form 4412-36 (VW) 229-230 

47. Suitability for Livestock Grazing Form 4412-40 (VI) 231-232 

Xn. FECAL ANALYSIS 

48. Table of Forage Categories Found in the Diet 244 

49. Wildhorse Fecal Analysis Study Sampling Plan 245-254 

50. Weighted Average Computation for Two Vegetation Types 255 

Xm. MEDITERRANEAN ANNUAL STUDY METHOD 

51. Composition Studies Mediterranean Annual Ranges Form 4412-23 261 

52. Determining Utilization of Mediterranean Annual Ranges—Mulch Method 

Form 4412-22 262 

53. Allotment Evaluation Summary Form 4413-1 263-264 

XTV. MISSOURI RTVER BASIN STUDIES 

54. Range Site and Condition Write-Up (Ecological Site Method) 267 

55. Technicians' Guide to Range Sites, Condition Classes and Recommended 

Stocking Rates 269-276 

XV. PHOTOGRAPHIC UTILIZATION METHOD 

56. Utilization Photos 279-285 

57. Range Utilization Form 4412-21 286 

XVI. SOIL SURFACE FACTOR 

58. Determination of Erosion Condition Class Soil Surface Factor 

Form 7310-12 289-290 

XVn. PHOTO PLOT METHOD 

59. Study Location and Documentation Data Form 297-298 

60. Trend Study Data - Photo Plot Method Form 299-302 

xii 
Supplemental Studies 

61. Photo Identification Label 303-304 . 

62. Photo Plot Frame 3- x 3-foot Plot ........305 

63. Photo Plot Frame 5- x 5-foot Plot 306 

64. Permanent Photo Plot Location 307 

65. Study and Photograph Identification ..........!.., 308-310 

66. Vegetation Growth Forms and Measurement Techniques 311 

XVm. COMMUNITY STRUCTURE ANALYSIS 

67. Trend Study Data - Community Structure Analysis Method-Foliar Cover 

Data Form.... ,... ..; ......319-320 

68. Trend Study Data - Community Structure Analysis Method-Density and 

Frequency Data Form.. ..;.... ...321-322 

69. Trend Study Data - Community Structure Analysis Method-Summary Form ....323-324 

70. Community Structure Analysis Method Transect Layout 325 

XIX. STEM COUNT METHOD 

71. Utilization Study Data - Stem Count Method Form 329-330 

XIII 

Supplemental Studies — Introduction 

INTRODUCTION 

This Technical Reference contains the rangeland inventory and monitoring techniques 

historically used in the Bureau since the formation of the Grazing Service; It does not 

include local or regional techniques. Where manuals could not be located, the best available 

documentation was used. 

Every effort has been made to accurately transcribe the original manuals. Editing was limited to the introductory Editor's Notes in Sections I - XII and XVII - XTX to preserve the 

original wording intact. However, Sections XIII - XVI were rewritten for clarity, since 

there was no need to be concerned about preserving an original manuscript. 

This technical reference is designed to be a reference document. It is not intended as an 

endorsement of these methods as Bureau-approved procedures. 

Many existing case files (allotment and operatorfiles) and district files contain resource 

information gathered using procedures that are no longer approved methods. Some of this 

data is still being used to determine the grazing preference on public land and the carrying 

capacity on nonfederal lands. The procedures employed by some of these methods are now 

obscure. Since this resource information is still being used, this document will help to 

explain how the data was collected. It also provides instructions on how to collect data for 

future comparison. 

Historical inventory and monitoring data are often useful for making long-term analyses of 

trends and ecological change. Although some historical techniques may be considered to be 

technically inadequate, the data may still be useful in making general interpretations. 

Knowledge of the intent or purpose of historical methods aids in understanding why previous 

range managers managed the range the way they did, and in determining if certain reports, 

e.g., range condition, can be compared to the concepts and reports used today. 

It is very important for future reference that any old monitoring and inventory data not be 

disposed of. 

If a description in this document does not accurately portray a historical technique, comments and supporting documentation should be sent to the National Applied Resource 

Sciences Center (RS-140). 

1 

Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

I. RANGE SURVEY 

Editor's Note: The Range Survey procedures were transcribed from the original text from 

the Inter-agency Range Survey Committee. The only changes involved the text format. 

The following narrative reflects a writing style and choice of language different from many of 

today's commonly accepted standards. To preserve the integrity of the original document, 

the wording has been left untouched. " .. ' 

INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR 

RANGE SURVEYS • 

As formulated by the Inter-agency Range Survey 

Committee 

and adopted by the 

Western Range Survey Conference 

April 34, 1937 

Approved: 

John Collier , 

Commissioner, Bureau of Indian Affairs 

F. R. Carpenter 

Director, Division of Grazing 

L.C. Gray " 

Assistant Administrator 

Resettlement Administration 

H.H. Bennett 

Chief, Soil Conservation Service 

F.A. Silcox ___ 

Chief, U.S. Forest Service 

3 

Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

INTERAGENCY 

mSTRUCTIONS FOR RANGE SURVEYS 

A. Foreword 

The purpose of these instructions is to outline the present policy for the conduct of range 

surveys, and to standardize the methods used to the extent necessary to obtain the desired 

accuracy and uniformity in results. 

Former instructions are herein revised to include modern procedure and acceptable new 

methods that have proved desirable and generally satisfactory. Promising new field practices 

are described in detail. 

The instructions provide for the continued use of the reconnaissance method with minor 

changes, but also describe the so-called "square-foot density or point observation plot" 

method of determining density and composition, fully recognizing it as an acceptable and 

optional variation of the reconnaissance method. 

Recognition of the square-foot density method for determining density necessitates a few 

other changes in procedure since that method measures density to as nearly as possible true . 

ground cover whereas the reconnaissance method in actual practice results in much higher 

density estimates. 

It may be generally assumed that these differences in density estimates are later compensated 

in final grazing capacity determinations by the use of proportionately different forage acre 

requirement standards. For this and similar reasons it becomes desirable in future projects to 

drop the "forage acre" as a common unit of measure, except as it is used in computation, and 

to summarize project results directly in terms of grazing capacity in future tabulations and 

graphic presentations. 

It is recognized that each agency may wish to issue supplementary written instructions to its 

field officers, based upon the principles herein outlined, regarding methods not lending 

themselves to standardization or requiring the collection of specific data, not provided for in 

these instructions, in accordance with the unified procedure. 

B. Object 

There is an ever present need for the fullest and most accurate, up-to-date information 

practical to secure, in connection with the use and administration of the range and related " 

resources for such purposes as livestock production, watershed protection, game conservation, recreation, and other legitimate demands. The closest integration and coordination of 

these uses are essential if serious conflicts are to be avoided. As the demands for the various 

uses increase conflicts develop, the setdement of which requires accurate information regarding all the factors involved. It is for the purpose of obtaining these basic facts, analyzing the 

various problems and from them developing a comprehensive plan for managing the resource, the range surveys are conducted. A completed plan of range management should 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

show what the range resource is, its physical condition, its relation to other resources, and 

how it may be best utilized, developed, and improved. 

The collection of field data and the preparation of management plans, while essential, are of 

no greater importance than the training of the men who take part in the work. This activity is 

essentially field laboratory work in range management. It involves every phase of invoicing 

range resources, studying and analyzing problems, working out solutions, and providing for 

the application of thorough-going plans. In view of the recognized need for thoroughly 

trained range technicians and administrators, it is essential that training in the conduct of 

survey projects be stimulated in every way and adequately provided for. 

Co Responsibility 

The instructions that follow are set up as minimum standards of requirement. Each agency 

may issue such additional instructions as they may find necessary in connection with specialized work or projects, provided, however, that such instructions do not alter the minimum 

requirements herein described or conflict with the principles herein approved. Each agency 

assumes full administrative responsibility for the adequacy and accuracy of the results 

obtained. 

D. Preliminary Considerations 

1. Preparation fFor Field Work 

Before the beginning of field work the responsible surveys man will obtain the necessary 

equipment and assemble and review all maps and other available data that will be 

needed, including the following: 

a. Sufficient number of sets of topographic maps preferably on a scale of 2 inches to 

the mile, or aerial contact prints. Aerial photographic maps are preferable when 

obtainable. If aerial maps cannot be procured and the available base map is not on 

the desired scale, photographic enlargements or reductions may be made. Unmounted copies may be used by the examiners for typing in the field. Where maps 

of satisfactory accuracy are not available, accurate field maps on a 1- or 2-inch scale 

must be prepared, either prior to or in connection with the range survey work. 

Minimum control requirements as described on page 8 must be followed in connection with the field mapping and typing work. 

b. Status of land. Where covered by G.L.O. surveys, proper township assemblage of 

Land Office surveys for the area to be covered. 

c. Location of known section corners and of as many as possible of such cultural 

features as buildings, fences, corrals, roads, trails, driveways, improved water 

developments, telephone lines, etc., including locations by special surveys. 

d. Names and class of range users, numbers and classes of stock grazed, and allotments 

or units used. 

6 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

e. Table of forage palatability ratings for each class of stock and all important forage 

plants, expressed in percentages. Agencies working in the same general localities 

should jointly develop and agree on the palatability ratings used. 

f. In connection with the correlation of grazing and other uses of forested lands, the 

following information and data should also be obtained to the extent that it is 

available: 

(1) Under timber use, the cut-over lands, lands being cut, and lands proposed to be 

cut within 5 years, planted areas and proposed plantations, as well as a timber 

type map for field use if available. 

(2) The value of each watershed, as for municipal water supply, irrigation, or 

power; and areas closed to grazing or on which grazing is restricted for the 

purpose of watershed protection. 

(3) Population estimates of important big game species; approximate range; seasonal use of areas; areas of introduced game; plans for handling, developing and 

utilizing; boundaries of refuges, present and proposed; and any restrictions on 

grazing to provide for game. In addition careful notes should be made of the 

occurrence of smaller fur-bearing animals, upland bird species; etc., and of the 

means by which grazing can be better correlated with the management and 

protection of these forms of wildlife. 

(4) The general recreation plans, public camping grounds, summer home sites, and 

other recreational features which might have a bearing on future grazing plans. 

(5) On forested lands where fire protection is unusually important, it may be 

advisable to determine the areas of greatest fire hazard, generalfire-trail plan, 

and possibly the fire-control plan. 

(6) Data regarding any areas used for experimental purposes. 

The above data will be secured from administrative records or from any other reliablesource. 

As much of the data as possible should be entered on maps for reference in the field. 

Before the party goes into the field, the chief of party should familiarize himself with the area 

to be covered, in order that he may be able, upon consultation with his superior officers, to 

decide upon the place to start work, the route for covering the area, the location of camp sites, 

general conditions, and general phases of present management. 

2. Field Season 

Within practical limits the survey should not begin until the season is sufficiently 

advanced that there will be a representative growth of forage on the ground. The work 

should continue in the fall until grazing or weather conditions prevent accurate classification. 

7 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

3. Control for Range Classification! 

a. Base Maps. A reliable base map is essential. Aerial photographs or recent U.S. 

Geological Survey topographic maps are preferable. Timber survey maps or those 

prepared by other organizations may serve as a base where they conform to satisfactory accuracy standards. 

b. Control. In connection with the accurate mapping of vegetation types, it is necessary to have definitely located points on the area being covered in order to properly 

tie in the work. Every three sections, and preferably every two, should have an 

accurate tie point. If satisfactory Land Office surveys have not been obliterated, 

they will serve admirably, provided they have been reconciled to the primary control 

and the topographic map. This reconciliation and the establishment of control where 

necessary should be done by personnel fully qualified for technical work of that 

nature. The project man responsible will decide upon the adequacy of or additional 

control needed in each case. 

Where mapping or typing is done by triangulation, using U.S.G.S. or C.&G.S. primary 

control, it is essential to correlate the triangulation control with G.L.O. corners at a frequency 

of one to three corners per township. Approximately nine secondary control points in each 

township should be accurately located and marked. A minimum of five secondary control 

points per township is considered essential for intensive work. When recent G.L.O. surveys 

are being used for control in mapping and typing, the minimum tie requirement should be one 

corner per section. 

E. Procedure im the Field 

1. General Statement 

It is impracticable to set up one arbitrary standard to which the field work in every 

project should conform. The general character of information obtained should not vary 

materially as between projects - it should be consistently accurate and reliable, but the 

intensity of the field examination and the amount of detail in the data may vary according to the importance and complexity of the grazing and related problems. The Chief of 

Party or responsible project man will decide when the proficiency of the men has 

reached a point that will assure the examination work being carried on in accordance 

with minimum standards of requirement set up. 

2. Size, Organization, and Qualifications off Party 

Experience has shown that under national forest conditions a party made up of a chief, 

three or four temporary or permanent assistants, and one combination cook and camp 

mover constitutes the most efficient, economical, and practical organization where the 

field work is done intensively. A larger party requires too frequent moving of camp and 

too much camp equipment. On the other hand, a crew of less than four field men cannot 

be handled with much less outlay for cook and moving equipment than is required for a 

party of four or five men. When aerial photographic maps are used, whereby the 

detailed typing work is materially speeded up in the field, smaller crews and horseback 

8 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

work may prove more satisfactory. In level or undulating country many agencies find 

the use of a car saves much valuable time in traveling between sampling plots or reaching advantageous starting points. The accessibility of the country to be covered, the 

number of qualified men available, etc., should be considered in determining the size 

and make-up of the crew. 

Individual examiners not working under the direction of a chief of party should have 

sufficient training under a qualified man as to enable them to carry on the examination 

work in accordance with the standards herein provided for. 

3. Chief of Party 

Where projects are conducted on a party basis, the importance of selecting the best 

qualified man available to serve as chief of party deserves repeated emphasis. The 

uniformity and quality of the party work.often importantly depends upon his judgment 

and training ability. The position is looked upon as important enough to justify using 

men up to the $3200 grade where qualified men in that grade are obtainable. 

The chief of party should be a man of good judgment, thoroughly trained in the technical 

work, and with considerable administrative experience. He must be able to handle and 

direct his men and cooperate with local officers and stockmen. He should be experienced in range survey field practices. He will be directly responsible for the conduct of 

the work on the ground, and will be expected to lay put the work of the men in the field, 

see that the project plan and field methods are thoroughly understood and followed by 

the men, train them to observe and analyze conditions, take measures to secure uniform 

results, exercise discipline, keep the data in proper form so that if necessary it may be 

turned over in understandable shape to a successor, order supplies when good business 

so directs, and maintain a check on expenditures. He should make a thorough study of 

range conditions, utilization and management needs on the area as a whole, in order to 

be able to participate in the preparation of a comprehensive management plan at the 

completion of the project. At the close of the field season he should direct and aid in the 

assemblage and compilation of all data for the management plan and help prepare the 

final plans for the range unit, or parts of the unit covered. 

4. Other Members of Party 

Men with a natural inclination toward the work, with suitable training or experience, and 

with promise of developing so as to assume greater responsibility in the future, will be 

selected for the regular party work or chosen as temporary assistants: Because of the 

strenuous character of the work, especially when done on foot, men must be in good . 

physical condition. 

Either technical or non-technical administrative men already in the agency will be 

encouraged to serve on the party for one or more years where such assignments are 

considered in the best interests of the work and the men. 

By every means possible the whole party should be given insight into the broader phases 

of the work, its purpose, and the use of results. This is of utmost importance in arousing 

9 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

a personal interest, which is essential to a high degree of accuracy and efficiency. When 

interested students or other promising field men are obtained under local emergency 

employment programs for this type of work, the need for greatly increased field and 

office supervision becomes increasingly important and may involve the necessity of 

providing one or more assistants to the chief of party in order to maintain the work 

standards. If any members of the party do not take a proper interest in the work, it is 

advisable that they be replaced by men who will. 

The cook and teamster-packer fills a position of no mean importance in the field party. 

On him depends to a large extent the welfare and morale of the other members of the 

crew. He should be able to do good plain cooking in a sanitary and economical way, be 

willing to serve meals at whatever time the men get into camp, and possess an agreeable 

disposition. He should assume charge and take care of all equipment in camp during the 

absence of the other men. He should know how to handle horses and take over the 

responsibility of their care. If conditions justify a separate teamster or packer, he should 

be chosen because of his proficiency in such duties and his familiarity with the region. 

F. Field Methods 

In order that new men may early in the work gain a definite conception of the use to be made 

of the various data collected, all the steps connected with the field work and the preparation 

of a complete management plan should be covered for a sample unit. For this purpose a 

suitable allotment should be selected as soon as the men become familiar with the mechanics 

of the field work. 

Typing and note-taking in the field will be done ordinarily by each man working individually. 

The chief of party will designate the units or areas to be covered by each examiner from each 

camp. 

Legal subdivision or ownership will be used as the unit for the correlation of notes and type 

descriptions except in cases of large blocks of land under one jurisdiction where the topographic unit would be more satisfactory. 

In rough country, consideration should always be given to the topographic unit in deciding 

the area to be assigned each examiner so that there will be no undue crossing of steep canyons or high ridges in covering the area unless the type classifications would suffer through 

the adoption of such a course. 

Typing and Mapping in the Field. The intensity with which types should be examined will 

vary considerably. The minimum requirement is that the examiner should see enough of each 

type to obtain a reliable estimate of its density and composition and to determine the various 

conditions that would affect the practical use of the type. Where previously compiled type 

maps or aerial photos are used, each day's work should be so planned that the examiner will 

pass through the largest portion of each type without back-tracking or recrossing the general 

line of travel. 

10 
Supplemental Studies —: Range Survey 

Where topographic maps are used, and if the types are governed, largely by topography, the 

types and other data can be located and mapped with reference to topographic features or by 

pacing a sufficient distance from known points to make the work reliable. 

Where the planetable method of mapping is employed types are accurately mapped by point 

intersection and the forage estimates are made by going through representative portions of 

each type while travelling between vantage points or control stations. Each type or sub-type 

must be examined but type boundaries are located in connection with the mapping work. 

Very much the same principle applies to the use of aerial maps or photos. Where these are 

used, type and sub-type boundaries will be indicated by the examiner. Care must be taken ~ 

that each type and sub-type is satisfactorily examined and given a key number or other 

symbol to provide a reference from the photo to the write-up sheet. 

Where the "strip" system is used, the examiner will cross the area in a systematic manner by 

compass and pacing from established points, with checks on as many points as it is possibie 

and practicable to make. On areas surveyed by the G.L.O., section and quarter corners will 

be used as control points, and section lines and centers of sections will generally be followed. 

If there are no Land Office surveys, or if survey corners have been largely destroyed, other 

control points, either those located expressly for this purpose or monuments left from earlier 

topographic mapping, will be necessary. The areas should be covered oh a basis equivalent 

to passing twice through each section and mapping at least 20 chains on each side of the line 

traversed, with sufficient offsets to obtain the necessary information for all the types, and 

properly map their boundaries. 

Where the types are large and uniform, crossing the area the equivalent of once through each 

section may be sufficient The chief of party or responsible examiner will decide when a 

basis of less than twice through a section is sufficient to maintain the required standards of 

results. In very rugged or barren country, or where the forest cover is too dense to permit 

grazing, the types need examination only to the extent necessary to be assured that no usable 

feed areas are overlooked. 

On special projects requiring greater or lesser intensity of examination, the intensity standard 

to be used should be clearly specified by the responsible administrative agency in issuing 

supplemental instructions applicable to the specific project. 

The following data should be obtained by the examiner and shown on his field map. 

1. Forage Types 

The area should be classified into types and sub-types and mapped in accordance with 

the outline given under the section on "Classification of Forage Types." Typing of areas 

of less than 10 acres may be desirable at the discretion of the agency conducting the 

project. Such important areas as parks in dense timber, clumps of timber in parks, and 

other similar type changes down to 10 acres in size, if they are important landmarks may 

be mapped. Ordinarily, unless some marked contrast of this character exists, or specific 

instructions given, a change in type of less than 20 acres need not be mapped. Special 

11 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

attention must be paid to the mapping of inaccessible areas which come under Type 7. 

Areas which are inaccessible because of lack of development, lack of water, steepness, 

etc., should not be mapped as Type 7, but they should be typed and their degree of 

inaccessibility noted on the write-up sheet and map as a utilization cut. If definite 

determination as to accessibility cannot be made by the examiner, a note should be made 

of the areas, and the case should be referred to the chief of party for final decision. 

Types should be designated by number on the map. At the discretion of the agency, the 

density and composition of all plants used by game should be recorded in such form as 

may be compiled when needed for game management plans. 

2. Soil Erosioini 

Because of a depletion of native vegetation, accelerated erosion has attained such 

importance on range lands that it is necessary to take it into account in range management. It is equally evident that the character of the soil and the degree of slope are 

important considerations from the standpoint of range management and improvement. 

A summary of erosion conditions will be written for each management unit, recognizing 

the general erosional, slope and soil conditions. 

3. Topography 

The topographic map should be checked in the field during the course of the work. All 

topographic features which have local names should have such names included on the 

map or aerial photos whenever possible to do so. 

4. Brainnage audi Watering Places 

All drainage lines and watering places should be shown. Special attention should be 

given to the mapping of water facilities for stock, as they often are a controlling factor in 

range management. The examiner should check all the water on the original map and 

add the minor watering places which usually are omitted. On aerial photos it is important that running water in small streams be shown and the limits of such streams indicated. 

5. Culture 

Buildings, fences, corrals, roads, trails, telephone lines, and other cultural features 

should be located, and those already shown on the map should be checked for location. 

Fences, where they are important to range management, should be accurately located. 

On aerial photos such features should be inked with India ink. The standard symbols as 

adopted by the board of surveys and maps of the United States and published by the 

U.S.G.S. should be adhered to for range survey work so far as symbols are available. 

When additional symbols are needed it is recommended that all agencies make an effort 

to get them standardized and approved by the board of surveys. 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

6.

 . Alienated Lands 

Time need not be spent in the field in accurately checking the boundaries of lands shown 

in the status record, as it is assumed that the survey of such lands is correct. If private 

lands are or may be used in connection with the range unit they should be gone over and 

classified as a part of that unit. 

7. Field Notes 

Each type and sub-type will be written up on Form 764a or 764b in the manner called 

for thereon (Illustrations 1 and 2). 

Unit descriptions. Each examiner should summarize the important management features 

for each section, ownership tract or other unit if such a system is called for by the 

particular survey. It will be noted that many points are duplicated under the information 

to be gathered by the chief of party, however, it will be standard practice for individual 

examiners to cover all of the following subjects for each sub-division or natural topographic unit as a check for the chief of party on the information collected by him personally. On special projects this procedure may be modified so that it will be obtained as 

accurately and expeditiously as possible without undue duplication. 

a. Elevation, topography, and drainage as these affect the accessibility of range to 

stock; drainage systems whether flat, rolling, or rugged; depth of canyons, steepness 

of slope, rock, exposure, slides, boulders, cliffs, general accessibility. 

b. Character of watering places (stream, lake, pond^ spring, seep, well, tank, reservoir). 

Permanent or temporary (if temporary state usable period). State of development 

and need for improvement or maintenance; nearest permanent water; character of 

country, particularly the slopes; relative amount of water available as compared to 

carrying capacity of the range. . 

c. Numbers of stock now using the range, either estimated or known, current utilization, condition of the range and the forage, with recommendations for proper 

numbers of stock on basis of past use and condition. 

d. Class of stock now using the range and recommended class based on above factors. 

e. Proper seasonal use. Present date when stock enter or reach each portion of the 

range. Recommendation for changes within the limits of practicability, and based 

on the needs of the forage, when forage or water is available, etc. 

f. Proper distribution of stock. Over or under-grazed areas, with recommendations for 

improved handling. 

g. Handling of stock. The manner in which stock is being handled, including herding 

of cattle or sheep, bedding of sheep, conditions of bedgrounds, excessive trailing 

and other phases of management with recommendations of needed changes and 

reasons therefor. 

13 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

h. Recommendations for needed changes in present salting and reasons therefore. 

i. Range destroying rodents, species, location, area and damage. 

j . Poisonous plants. Species, abundance, area and location, losses, and recommendations for methods of avoiding future loss. 

k. Other pests such as grasshoppers, crickets, etc. Estimated damage. 

1. Game. Indications of game on the area, seasonal use by game and other important 

matters relating to game welfare. 

m. Predatory animals. Important species, approximate ranges, depredations. 

n. Extent to which other uses enter into or conflict with the use of the area and adjustments to be made. Timber production, watershed and soil protection, recreation or 

any other legitimate demands. 

o. Range improvements needed; water development, division or boundary fences, 

corrals, bridges, trails, driveways, reseeding and deferred grazing areas; others. 

G. Palalabilifty 

Palatability, as used in range surveys, is the percent of the total current year's growth, within 

reach of stock, to which a species is grazed when the range unit is properly utilized under the 

best practical range management. The class of stock, the composition of the vegetation, and 

the proper time of using the range as a whole, etc., must be considered when rating the 

palatability of individual species. This percentage should not be in excess of what may be 

grazed under proper use and still allow the plant to maintain its stand and vigor, year after 

year. As a basis for individual palatability figures, a palatability list should be prepared 

cooperatively where local associations are organized, by all the agencies concerned for each 

major vegetation region or smaller ecologic unit if desired. The ratings may be revised, if 

necessary, to fit local conditions or needs, upon recommendation of any agency, if agreed to 

by the local interagency committee. 

It is very important that members of the survey party learn the relative palatability of the 

principal range plants. Plants are eaten more readily under certain conditions than under 

others. Affecting palatability are such conditions as the combinations in which plants occur 

in the type, intensity of grazing, season in which they are grazed, mechanical features (awns, 

etc.), and, to some extent, the familiarity of the stock with the classes of vegetation. The 

palatability estimate must take all these factors into consideration and be based on the proper 

degree of utilization under the best practicable management. 

14 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

H. Density and Composition 

1. Reconnaissance Method 

a. Density. In estimating density the spread of vegetation above the ground must be 

carefully considered. The density of more or less upright weeds should be based on 

the amount of ground that appears covered when the vegetation is viewed from 

•> directly above. In estimating the density of spreading weeds or browse or open 

clumps of grass this forage should be pressed together or raised at an angle so that 

all of the normal interstices between the leaves are completely filled without compressing or unduly crowding the vegetation. The forage is then so compacted that it 

will represent a 10/10 density. All density should be judged on the basis of growth 

during a normal year. The density of browse should be determined by the portion of 

the ground covered by that part of the browse that is accessible to stock. This may 

exclude from the estimate the interior of dense clumps. Any oak or other brush that 

forms an upper story beyond the reach of stock does not enter into the density 

estimate. Where a double story of available vegetation exists, such as browse over 

grass, judge the density of each story separately. Both stories are included in the 

density estimates. Care must be exercised that the density estimate represents a true 

average for the type as a whole. Especially is this important in composite types 

which cannot be divided into separate types. 

In passing through the type the examiner will mentally calculate and carry with him 

a moving average of plant density and composition. In large types the examiner 

should jot down notes on density and composition changes in order to better analyze 

type averages and aid his mental calculations. 

b. Composition. Type composition estimates are based on the relative density abundance of each available vegetation species in the type. The examiner should not 

write up his type until he has seen a fair sample of the total type area. Preferably he 

should complete his write-up while still in a representative part of the type. Type 

composition is itemized on Form 764a expressed in terms of percentage. The sum 

of the percentage ratings for individual species should always total 100%. In 

determining composition the examiner should rate each species in accordance with 

his best judgment as to its individual abundance with relation to the total cover. 

In the interests of obtaining uniformity between examiners it is generally desirable 

to estimate composition by rating the species in accordance with their relative 

abundance in the type, starting with the most abundant species and rating each lesser 

species in turn. Such a rating scheme results in a definite expression of relative 

abundance. Afterward the individual initial ratings may all be slightly adjusted to 

total 100% without destroying the established ratio. 

c. Field Computation. After the composition rating for each individual species has 

been recorded, that rating is multiplied by the accepted palatability rating for the 

species, and the sum of all the individual products yields the weighted average 

palatability of the type. This last figure multiplied by the estimated density yields 

the forage factor or palatable density of the type. The forage factor is carried onto 

15 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

the camp map for type "jibing" purposes and otherwise used in compilation of the 

data but should no longer be placed on the final map or used in grazing capacity 

summaries. 

Square Foot Density Method 

Definition of Method. The square foot density method is a system of sampling 

vegetation by randomized and replicated plots. It differs from the reconnaissance 

method in the manner of estimating density and of obtaining average species composition and density on plant types of varying acreage. The procedure for computing 

grazing capacity following the determination of the forage factor is identical for the 

two methods. 

Procedure: 

(1) How to lay out a plot: The plot used in this method is a circle 100 square feet in 

area, with a radius of 5.64 feet (or 5 feet 7.8 inches). Two systems of describing 

the boundary of this circle have been found to be most convenient. 

(a) Compass system. - Two stakes connected by a light chain equal to the radius 

(5.64') of the circle constitute the apparatus. In laying out the plot one stake 

is struck in the center of the sample plot and the other stake is used as a 

compass to circumscribe the plot. Care must be exercised to keep both 

stakes erect and the chain tight and horizontal. 

(b) Radius rod system. - The apparatus consists of a stick equal to the radius 

(5.64') of the circle. By holding one end of the rod at the center of the plot, 

and using the other end as a marker, the boundary of the circular plot may 

be scratched in the soil. In marking out the circle, hold the rod horizontal, 

close to the ground and scratch short segments at intervals to indicate the 

plot boundary. 

Care must be exercised in marking the plot boundary. For example, a 6-inch 

mistake on the radius of a 100 sq. ft. circle introduces an error of 13.4 sq. feet in 

the area of the circle. Any method of describing the circle accurately and 

quickly is acceptable and should be left largely to the discretion of the estimator 

as influenced by the character of the vegetation to be sampled. 

(2) How to estimate density: In the square foot method the density of each species 

occurring on a particular plot is estimated individually. No attempt is made to 

estimate the percentage each species comprises of the total plot density. 

A square foot of ground completely covered by vegetation when viewed from 

above is standard for estimation of density. The vegetation is never viewed 

obliquely because this tends to increase the estimate by allowing plant height to 

hide the ground surface. It is essential that the estimator have a clear conception 

of a square foot area in his mind and that he constantly refresh his memory by 

means of a wire frame one foot square, divided into quarters, which he should 

carry out at all times. 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

In estimating weeds or grasses, if the herbage is spread or prostrate, it should 

mentally be compacted so that all the normal interstices are completely filled 

without compressing or unduly crowding the vegetation. Density of upright 

woods or grass should be based on the amount of ground that appears covered 

when the vegetation is viewed from directly above. Density estimates of 

shrubby species should consist only of the current year's twig growth and the 

leafage present on the plant; trunks, or heavy branches being excluded. In 

estimating for different classes of livestock, shrubby material within 30 inches 

from the ground should be taken as available for sheep and within 60 inches for 

cattle. Any vegetation unavailable to livestock owing to height or to other 

factors should be excluded from the density estimate. 

Density for each species should be based on the appearance of the plants when 

they have attained their full normal growth. In other words the plants should 

mentally be reconstructed to compensate for one or all of the following conditions; (1) for growth still to be attained; (2) for portions already eaten; and (3) 

for abnormal total forage production. 

In considering a double story of vegetation the density of each layer should be 

estimated. 

Using the square foot as a unit.of measure with the foregoing principles in mind, 

mentally amass individual plants of a species into square-foot units of total 

density and do this progressively until the total number of square-foot units of 

that species has been counted for the plot. As an aid to counting square feet, the 

unit of estimation may be

 XU, xli or 1 square foot depending on the density, 

abundance and growth character of the species. This procedure should be 

continued by species. 

The number of square foot to 10/10 density recorded for a given species represents the percentage of total ground area covered by that species because a 

square foot is one percent of the total plot area. 

Individuals should check their density concept at least once a day by picking the 

plants on a plot and placing them within the wire frame or on a square foot area 

that has been marked out on the ground. Plants should be so placed within the 

square-foot area that they constitute a 10/10 density without crushing plant parts 

together. This check preferably should be made by all members of the field 

party on the same plots to afford uniformity of results and also to evaluate the 

personal error of estimate. Each new species should be checked when encountered. The accuracy of this method depends to a great extent on the density 

estimate. Therefore, utmost care is essential in making this simple measurement. 

(3) How to record estimates 

(a) On the form to be used for recording density estimates, list all species 

occurring in density on the plot, either by name or by standard plant symbol. 

17 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

Species should be listed by the three common vegetative groups: grasses, 

weeds, and browse. 

(b) Density of species should be recorded directly in square foot or fractions 

thereof. 

(c) Before leaving each plot, make an estimate of total density and check the 

sum of the species estimates to see that it equals the total density of the plot. 

This is necessary to avoid the omission of important species. 

(d) All plots within a particular type or sub-type should be recorded on the same 

sheet or sheets. No plots in other types should be included. If the survey is 

by land lines set up a new set of sheets for each section. In any case, 

whether the survey is by land lines, topographic units or types it is essential 

to record on each and every sheet (1) the section, township and range or 

reference to aerial photograph where these are used in lieu of a base map; 

(2) examiner's name; (3) date; (4) plot numbers; (5) type and sub-type; (6) 

number of the plot series (transect or type number). 

(e) Locate each plot of a series or transect within each type by a dot on the field 

map. In every case show route of travel by progressive plot numbers or 

directional arrow. Also identify each transect on the map by its number. 

(4) Field Application: The square foot method is based on the premise that average 

values obtained from several definitely defined and impersonally selected small 

plots is more accurate, uniform, and representative of the type to be sampled 

than is a general opinion formulated in the estimator's mind as he walks through 

the type. By varying the procedure in sampling, increasing or decreasing the 

number of plots, or by a combination of the two, the method is sufficiently 

flexible to meet all ordinary field conditions. 

Six general conditions may be encountered in the field. These are: (1) a mixture of small vegetative types and sub-types with widely different grazing 

capacities; (2) a mixture of large types; (3) a mixture of small type with similar 

grazing capacities; (4) one or more large types with high grazing capacity, 

interspersed with small types of low grazing capacity; (5) a single, large , 

homogenous type, and (6) a mixture of large types relatively low in grazing 

capacity, interspersed with small distinct types of high grazing capacity. The 

procedure in sampling these conditions should be varied to obtain uniformly 

dependable data most economically. 

Three variations in sampling procedure are: (a) sampling within types (b) 

stripping or gridironing, and (c) a combination of the two whereby the major 

sample is obtained by the strip or gridiron method but is augmented by additional sampling where needed within specific types. A fourth procedure of 

sampling, whereby a so-called "typical" area is selected and sampled as being 

representative of a larger surrounding area, is not recommended because a 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

reliable average is not always obtained and because such data may not be 

applicable to the development of management plans. 

Procedure A should be used under condition 1 described above. It consists of 

first determining the location and extent of the type; secondly, of an estimation 

of the approximate acreage and the number of plots necessary to sample the 

type. The center of the first plot should be determined at random by throwing a 

stone into the type. The estimator ordinarily should proceed along the longitudinal axis of the type estimating plots at a pre-determined sampling interval until 

the necessary number of plots has been completed. All of the series should be 

well within the type boundaries. The minimum number of plots to sample 

various acreages is as follows: 

10-2 0 acres 3 plots 

20 ­ 80 acres 5 plots 

80-64 0 acres 10 plots 

It is not contended that 3 plots will give an adequate sample of a small type from 

a statistical viewpoint. However, in any management unit, the same type may 

occur many times. Therefore, it is believed that with the minimum per-acre set 

up, a dependable estimate of plant cover may be obtained. 

Procedure B should be used under conditions 2, 3,4, and 5. It consists of a 

uniform spacing of plots on a line or lines within a section, township or other 

arbitrarily bounded area. It may also be used within a definite topographic unit 

if conditions 2, 3, 4, or 5 are present. If the minimum sample is to be used, one 

line of 10 plots spaced at 8 chain intervals through the middle of each section is 

preferable. If greater intensity is desired in the survey two parallel lines of 10 

plots each one half mile apart may be used. If still greater intensity is desired, 

25, 36, etc., equidistant plots within the section necessitating 5, 6, etc., lines 

through each section should be used. In either the strip or grid system the type 

lines are indicated when crossed by or seen from the survey line and the estimated plots are segregated both according to the type in which they fall and by 

the section being surveyed. The estimator should leave his line of plots whenever necessary to close a type boundary or to indicate its extension to the next 

line of survey. 

Procedure C should be used when condition number 6 exists. This procedure is 

a combination of A and B, and consists of sampling the large low value type in a 

similar manner and with the minimum requirements stated under procedure B, 

and digressing from the survey line to sample the small important types as 

outlined in procedure A. 

With the foregoing suggestions as a guide it is left to the discretion of the chief 

of party to use the three procedures in a manner best suited to meet local needs 

and conditions. If, for example, rugged topography makes procedure B exceedingly laborious, procedure A may be used. 

19 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

(5) Supplemental Instructions 

(a) Reconstruction of vegetation: The density of vegetation should be based on 

the spread of the plants as they would appear when they have attained their 

full growth in a normal year in an ungrazed condition. 

(b) Elimination of unimportant species: Non-poisonous species of zero palatability when not important from a soil-conservation standpoint may be 

omitted from the density estimate, unless a full plant inventory is desired. 

(c) Minimum limit of estimation: In general, densities should not be counted 

that will not make V2 square foot unless in sparse vegetation it seems 

advisable to reduce the limit of estimation to 'At square foot. If a complete 

record of plant occurrence is desired, species present on the plot but not 

abundant enough to reach the lower limit of density should be recorded as a 

trace (T). 

(d) If species unimportant to grazing and individually not estimated are present, 

an estimate of total plant cover may be made if desired for erosion studies. 

(e) In addition to the forage inventory, the examiner should make field notes by 

types or topographic units which will enable him to prepare the unit description called for on page 13 Section I.F.7. of these instructions. 

(6) Field Computation: In the determination of the forage factor, the following 

order of computation should be observed: 

(a) Add the species densities for each plot and record the total estimated density 

in the space provided on the field sheet (764b). 

(b) Add the densities for each species horizontally across the form for all plots 

within the type and record the sum in the total density column. 

(c) Add the total densities of species. This sum should equal the total of the 

plot densities. 

(d) Divide each total species density by the number of plots in the type and 

record the quotients in the average density column. 

(e) Sum the average densities. This sum should equal the average total density. 

(f) Multiply the average density of each species by its percentage palatability. 

(g) Add the products thus obtained to secure the forage factor. This is expressed as forage acres per hundred surface acres and two decimal places 

should be pointed off to the left to obtain values expressed in terms of one 

surface acre. 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

I. Grazing Capacity Computations (Either Method)-Forage Acre 

>- Requirement 

Determination of the forage acre requirement base by means of which the forage acre data are 

converted to terms of grazing capacity is as important as any phase of the range survey work. 

Ordinarily the most satisfactory method of determining this base is to select for forage acre 

requirement studies those allotments, pastures or ranges that have every appearance of having 

been properly used for a period of years and that have been surveyed in the course of the 

season's work. These areas should be as representative of large portions of the range as it is. 

possible to find. Figures for controlled ranges, whenever obtainable, should be used. At the. 

close of the season the chief of party will make utilization and range condition studies of 

these ranges and will obtain the most accurate and detailed information possible on the rate of 

stocking and seasonal use that has been obtained on such areas for the past several years. 

Supplied with this information he is able to determine, as soon as compilation of the current 

survey data is complete, the number of forage acres per animal unit that have been used in the 

past, following up this determination with slight adjustments to correlate actual use with 

previously determined range conditions on the selected areas should yield a satisfactory base 

from which to determine approximate grazing capacity. Preferably these figures should be 

based on a slightly below indicated requirement pending actual trial of the recommended 

stocking. If actual use on the basis of recommended stocking indicates that the forage acre 

requirement determined is uniformly high or low, it should be adjusted to permit increased or 

reduced stocking. 

When the forage acre requirement proves unsatisfactory under general application, owing to 

important differences in forage composition or range conditions, there should be no hesitation 

in making additional studies to determine the appropriate requirement for different localities. 

There is a distinct danger in applying a predetermined forage acre requirement to a new 

project or to a new series of types without determining first, that the two ranges are similar in 

the main characteristics, and, second, that the bases for estimating density, composition, 

palatability and utilization are directly comparable! In the absence of these requisites a new 

test to determine the requirement should be made. 

The forage acre has erroneously been accepted as a constant. Actually it is a variable. This is 

evident because of the continual need of applying different forage acre requirements to obtain 

grazing capacity in different localities or in the same locality with different methods of 

estimation. Consequently, the forage acre has been misleading to stockmen, to economists 

who have attempted to capitalize it, and to agencies who have attempted to correlate grazing 

capacity on different ranges. ^ •'.-..-- ' 

In the future, forage acres will be omitted on all range maps and Graphic plans and grazing 

capacity in terms of animal months substituted therefor. This will bring all maps and plans to 

the same basis. 

To compute the grazing capacity, multiply the surface acreage of a type by its forage factor, 

and divide the result by the proper forage acre requirement. The forage acre requirement may 

be in terms of sheep or cow months, or years, according to the forage acre requirement used. 

21 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

Thus, the final maps will always show for each type the following: 

- Surface acreage 

- Grazing capacity (in sheep or cow months or years) 

Other converting factors or pertinent information may be added if desired. 

J. Estimating Grazing Capacity of Annuals 

In judging the value of ranges where the production of "annuals" importantly affects the 

grazing capacity it is first of all essential that sound range management objectives be clearly 

defined for the area or region. For example: Depleted ranges producing dependable crops of 

annuals may be managed with a view to getting fullest possible use of the annuals from a 

livestock economy standpoint or to making but very moderate use of the "annuals" from a 

broader viewpoint of eventually restoring the former perennial plant composition and density. 

As a general rule it is assumed that the objective will be to hasten recovery of the valuable 

perennial species. In such cases the value of annuals should be kept sufficiently low to allow 

for their extreme fluctuations with relation to climate and to insure against overutilization of 

associated perennial. At the discretion of the administrative agency, the density of annuals 

may be ignored in the type writeup and their value calculated in other terms such as a direct 

estimate of safe grazing capacity based on the actual season of dependable use. 

In unusual cases, where natural revegetation is out of the question, annuals may be considered under the same surveys procedure as for perennial but conservative forage acre requirement ratings should be assigned to compensate for extreme fluctuation in forage production 

and to provide a safety factor in soil conservation. 

K. Progress Report 

At the end of the field season, the chief of party will prepare a progress report of the work 

done during the season. This report will include the following: Acreage and part of unit 

covered, organization and qualifications of the crew, training given men in the field, methods 

used, recommendations for future work, and a statement of costs. The cost report will show 

in detail the various expenditures — total cost of various operations in the field; cost per acre 

of surveying, field examination, office, herbarium, moving, noneffective days other than 

moving; average cost per acre; and average acreage covered in the field per day. 

L. Classification of Forage Types 

1. Type Designations 

Types will be indicated by the proper type number followed by standard symbols to 

indicate the dominant species. Types containing a timber overstory will carry the 

principal timber species symbol after the type numbers. The governing rule should be 

that the number and symbols will give an accurate picture of the principal species. 

22 
Supplemental Studies — Range Survey 

Types will be designated according to aspect. For instance, if the type is predominantly 

a grass type with scattering timber, it will be shown as a 1 type, followed by the timber 

symbol. The conspicuous or most important species or genus symbol will be shown 

first, followed by minor species. Ordinarily, unless exceptional conditions prevail not 

more than three symbols will be shown in a designation. If less than three species are 

prominent the number of symbols should be reduced accordingly. 

2. Symbols 

Symbol lists for trees, shrubs, and herbaceous vegetation should be devised and standardized for regions. Standardization of symbols for. all common and widely distributed 

genera and species should preferably be standardized for the entire range area. 

The governing principle will be a three letter symbol; all capitals for the genus symbol 

and one capital and two lower-case letters for species. The genus symbol should, except: 

for trees, consist of the first three letters of the genus name. In case of conflict the least . 

common genus will carry the second or third letter changed to remove the conflict. r 

Species symbols will consist of the first letter of the latin generic name, followed by the 

first two letters of the specific name. In case of conflicts, the same rule will be applied 

as for removing conflicts in genus symbols. Where the species determination is unimportant and where the species cannot be readily identified the genus symbol may be 

used, When there is a difference in forage value or general characteristics between 

species in the same genus, the species symbol should always be used. 

3. Color Legend 

Standard colors are shown for each type by crayon numbers. 

The use of crayons contemplates a medium - light application of crayon, smoothed out 

through the use of a stomp dipped in gasoline. 

. M. Type Descriptions 

The descriptions of each type are found on Illustration 3. 

Illustration 1 Page 1 

Form 764a (front) 


(Revised Apr. 24, 1937) 


RANGE SURVEY WRITE-UP SHEET 

No. 

Project Date 

Examiner Location" 

ITnp. 4 Range-Aerial Photo No.) Type -• 

Tota Timberl Density '.' (Composition) . (Condition) Forage Density _& Pal._ 

F. A. Factor For (Reproduction) (Density) (Age) 

C & H or S *G 

• (Injury) (Cause) 

.Utilization Cuts ' Slope %, Timber %, Rocks ' %, Laok of Water % , 

Erosion. %, Unstable Soils Total Cut 

• * Principal Forage Species 

.' X 

x x : • * Weeds' % .% iPal * Grasses % \% 

x*­ .Pal . . Pal. Shrubs % 

: • s • : • ­

: . • : . • - - . ­ •: ~

: --i ; > 

i i . • s 

: : "> i : 

: t 

t 

: 

*:' 

: 

: r •: 

:; . v : : 

: : •. . -. : 

! t 

: : 

• : 

.-.- , 

4 

t .: 

t 

• 

: • • 

25 
Illustration 1 Page 2 

Form 764a (back) 

Type Comments 

Current Forage Utilization s (check one) over-proper-Under 

Plant Vigor (check one) poor-fair-good 

Range Condition: (check one) poor-fair-good 

Relative Productiveness of Sit e (cheok one )low-Av<, -High 

Watering Places 

(Kind-Lake,spring,tankt etc 0 ) (Distance) (Adequacy) (Permanent*Temp,, ) 

Poisonous Plants 

(Kinds)(Recommendations ) 

Kind of stock best suite d t o range: (check one or more) Cattle-horses-sheep-goats 0 

Proper Grazing Period: (check one or more): Spring-Summer-Fall-Winter-Year Longo 

Wildlif e . 

(Game, Predators, Rodents - Species and abundance) 

Soil Erosion (check one o r more) Soil Texture (t o si x inches deep) 

Check in appropriat e blocks. 

Sheet Erosion Eivdent ; Gravelly 5 Stony 

*Gully Erosion Light { I i Occasional gullies-shallow Medium : Occasional gullies-dee p 

Frequent gullies-shallow Heavy ! 

I I 

Frequent gullies-dee p 

Wind Erosion Alkali (check if evident) 

Deposition Evident 

Removal Evident 

Slope in percent (circl e appropriat e classification ) 0 t o 5, 6 t o 10, 11 t o 20, 21 

t o 40, 41 to 60, 61 t o 80, 81„ 

* Explanation of Gully Terms: Occasional gullie s are gullie s more than 100 fee t 

aparto Frequent gullie s are gullie s less than 100 fee t aparto Shallow gullie s 

a r e those easil y crossable by stocko Deep gullie s are those deep enough t o interfer e with stock movements o 

Additional Type Comments 

Note: 

The information oontained on this sheet is primarily a fcrage inventory,. 

When and if furthe r data is secured on timber, water, soils, erosion, wild 

life , et c by experts along thes e lines, such inforafition should be furthe r 

correlate d t o best serve range managemento. 

26 
Illustration 2 

Form 764 (b) 

(Revised Mar., 1937) 

Suggested Face of 764 (b) 

Adapted t o Square Foot Density Method. 

United States Department; of. Agriculture 

-> Forest Service 

Range Survey - Note Sheet 

Examiner John Doe Date 6/l/3 7 Hype 4 PP Sub-Type Mmo 

Sec. 36 T 12 N R. 42E N.M.P.M.Aerial Photo No. Transect No. 1 

SPECIES DENSITY 

Plot Number ' 1 j 2 . 3. 4 . a . b t r t a t a . 10 :Dengit y . Density. :pal: 

Density '18 | 11 : 23 : 22 110 : 36 : 24: 7 I19 : 12 : 182 1 : ! 

Species . 1 '. ­ : : :" : s :'- : : : : : : : . : : . : " : J s : ••• -: : . : : : 

: : : : t :* : s : : i :'"' ' : : 

Mmo ! 4 | 2 .' 8 '. 3 J 2^1.10 j 8j | 1$ | Z' \ 5^ ! 47 j 4.7 J2.3S 

Far : 1 { \ : : 2. { : 3§ { : .: 4: { 1 { 12 : 1.2 L48: 

Ker . . ! i 1 i . 1 \ k : 1 : 2 | • 1 ; i £ j. j ; 1 ; 10 i 1.0 3160: 

: : !

 ! 1 ! ! ! ! 1 ! i ! ! 

: : : : : : : : : : : 

I w r i 1 1 ! i ; ; 1 1 ; 3 ! 1 I e . 1 0.8 io.48: ! * ! . 

Lup : ; 2 '.• £ iT

 \ 1 i i 3 ; i i i 7 ; 0.7 loss; 

Bdi j 1 j 4 j ! ! ! 3| ! 1 ; 4J! | 14 I 1.4 I0.14; 

: : : : « : : : : : : : : : ' : : :.:.' : : : : 

Aga j 10: 5%" 9 j 14 ! 3j | 17 j lot | 4 { 1 j 74 j 7.4 3-82J 

Sor ; 1 .: i . : 1 : 2j : 2 ! I I 1 '. 2 ." 10 i 1.0 j .20s* 

: : : : : : : : : : : 

: : : ! • • • • t 1 \ : : : : : » : : s : : 

: s j : : . : : , : : : • : : : : 

• • * * • ! • ! I * I * X X 

I I ! ! 1 I ! 1 I I ! !PA P £542: 

Front of Form 

Printed Form wil l be half Letter siz e 

27 
Illustration 3 Page 1 

Color 

1. 

(s) 

Short Grass 

Light yellow 

Mongol 817 

(0 

Tall grass 

Dark Yellow 

Cadmium Orange 

Mongol 862 

Dixon Thinex 372 

3. Lake Red 

Dixon's best 

321V2 or Dixon 

Thinex 369 

4. Stone Brown 

Mongol 863 

Dixon Thinex 

378 

FORAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION 

mm 

Grassland 

Includes grassland other than meadow and secondary meadow. 

Perennial grasses predominate and determine the aspect, although 

weeds and browse may be present. 

Examples of types are: (s) grama-buffalo grass; (t) bunch grass, 

wheatgrass-sedge, alpine grassland, blue stem. 

Meadow 

Includes areas where sedges, rushes and moisture-enduring 

grasses predominate. Two classes of meadows are recognized: 

wet meadows and dry meadows. 

Wet meadows are characterized principally by sedges and remain 

wet or moist throughout the summer. These shall be designated as 

2W-Wet Meadow or Marsh. 

Dry meadows are dominated by grasses rather than sedges and occur 

as moist meadowlike areas in open timber or intermittent meadows, 

both of which become moderately dry by midsummer. These shall 

be designated as 2-D - Dry Meadow or Flood Plain. 

Perennial Forlbs (Weeds) 

(Not Desert Weeds) 

Includes all untimbered areas where perennial weeds predominate 

over other classes of vegetation. There is very litde true weed type, 

as a weed cover is usually more or less temporary in character and is 

soon replaced by a more permanent type if the disturbing factor is 

removed. If there is no great predominance of the weeds over the 

grass or brush vegetation, and if it is possible to judge that the weed 

predominance is due to some unnatural factor, the weeds should be 

disregarded in designating the type and the more stable vegetation 

should be used as an index. The weeds will then be cared for in the 

sub-type. 

Sagebrush 

This type includes all untimbered lands where sagebrush or shrubby 

species of similar appearance predominate. The sagebrush lands are 

usually of different range values and different in season of grazing 

from the areas which are listed below under browse. Areas dominated by shrubby species of sagebrush, including big sagebrush 

(Artemisia tridentate), shall be classed as sub-types, as: Artemisia 

filifolia, A. cana, and A. tripartitia. Other shrubby species such as 

28 
Olive Green 

Mongol888 

Dixon thinex 391 

6. Dark Green 

Mongol 858 

Dixon Thinex 

375 

7. Blue Green 

Mongol898 

Illustration 3 Page 2 

Chrysothamnus should be designated as sub-types when they 

become dominant in sagebrush areas. 

This and the browse type which follows are sometimes difficult to 

distinguish from the grass and weed types if aspect rather than the 

dominant class of forage is used as the distinguishing characteristic. 

Sagebrush may form only 15 percent of the total vegetation of a type 

and still its aspect may be that of a sagebrush type. 

It may prove desirable, in a given region, to decide on a certain 

percentage of all the vegetation in the type, say 20 percent, as the 

minimum proportion of sagebrush that may be present if the area is 

still to be classified as a 4 type, providing, of course, it does not 

already have the aspect of some other type. The same will hold true 

of the browse type. 

Browse Shrub , 

This type includes all untimbered lands where browse, except 

sagebrush or its sub-types, gives the main aspect to the type or is the 

predominant vegetation. Characteristically it occupies the transition 

zone of the lower mountain slopes, foothill, and plateau areas. 

Examples of sub-types are mountain mahogany, bitter brush, 

willows, Cennothus-Manzanita, California Chaparral, etc. 

Conifer 

This type includes all range in coniferous timber supporting grasses, 

weeds, browse, either singly or in combination, except as provided 

under Type 7 and 9. The forage may vary from a pure stand of 

weeds or browse. It usually, however, consists of grasses, weeds, 

and browse, and the proportion of each species varies so widely that 

it is not thought advisable to attempt a division into types with 

distinct colors. These variations can best be represented by 

sub-types. 

Waste 

This type includes all areas of dense timber and brush which have no 

value for grazing or have such slight value that they cannot be used 

economically, owing either to denseness of standing or down timber 

or sparseness of forage growth. Large areas of very sparse forage, 

unless within easy reach of a better type, shall be classified as waste 

because of the impracticability of running stock over so large an area 

to get such a small amount of feed. 

This type also includes other waste areas not strictly in timber or 

brush and not barren which are so rough or inaccessible as to make 

their future use improbable. The sub-type designations generally 

encountered in this type are as follows: 7T-Waste in Dense Timber; 

7D Waste in Down Timber; 7B - Waste in Brush; 7R -Waste Areas 
Illustration 3 Page 3 

where Rocky Character Prevents use; and 71 - Permanently 

Inaccessible Areas. Principal species of timber should be shown by 

symbols. 

8. (Blank) This type includes all areas on which there is naturally no vegetation, 

or practically none, including intermittent lake beds, saline flats, 

active sand dunes, shale, rock slides, lava flows, etc. Areas which 

have been denuded by overgrazing should not be confused with areas 

naturally barren, nor should areas containing only annuals for a part 

of the year be shown under 8, although these may be without 

vegetation for the remainder of the year. 

Pinon- Juniper 

Light Green This type includes pinon, juniper, pinon-juniper, and digger pine. 

Mongol 848 The character of the range in this type as regards location, grazing 

Dixon Thinex capacity, and management is sufficiently distinct from the conifer 

389 type to justify a separate color. The forage may vary from a pure 

stand of grasses, weeds, or browse to a combination of any two or 

all. This variation can best be shown by sub-type designations. 

Broadl leaf Trees 

10. 

Pink This type includes all range in deciduous timber. The combination 

Mongol 846 of grasses, weeds, and browse, and the proportion of individual 

Dixon Thinex species, will vary as in other types. 

381 The principal sub-types which will be encountered are: aspen, 

cottonwood, oak, birch, alder, ash-elm, etc., when they occur in tree 

form. 

Creosote 

11. Bottle Green This type includes areas where creosote bush (Covillen) constitutes 

Mongol 855 the predominant vegetation. 

12. Yellow Earth This type includes areas where various species of the Mesquite 

Mongol 853 (Prosopis) give the characteristic aspect or constitute the 

predominant vegetation. 

SfflltbmsSii 

13. Slate This type includes areas where the various salt desert shrubs of the 

Mongol 819 Atriplex family form the predominant vegetation, or give the 

Dixon Thinex characteristic aspect. There is sufficient significant difference in the 

399 range value and the use of salt bush areas to justify their separation 

from other desert or semidesert shrub types. 

30 
Illustration 3 Page 4 

Greasewood 

14. Royal Purple This type includes areas where greasewood (Sarcobatus) is the 

Mongol 864 predominant vegetation or gives a characteristic aspect. 

Dixon Best Characteristically this type occupies valley floors subject to overflow . 

323 V2 during flood periods or areas underlain with ground^water at shallow 

depths where the soil is more or less saline. It is sufficiently differentiated from other desert shrubs to justify an exclusive type. 

Winterfat 

15. Light Tan This type includes areas where winterfat (Eurotia) gives a 

Dixon Best characteristic aspect or constitutes the predominant vegetation. 

32472 Though commonly associated with other semi-desert shrubs, the 

Dixon Thinex occurrence of this plant in Utah and Nevada as a type character is of 

388 sufficient extent to justify a separate type. 

Desert Shrub 

16. Flesh Tint This is a general type which includes areas where other desert shrubs 

Mongol 867 aside from those separated into individual types, constitute the 

predominant vegetation or give the characteristic aspect. This type 

includes several genera which are quite distinctive in type habitat 

such as black brush (Coleogyjie), coffee berry (Simmondsia), 

Catclaw (Acacia Mimosa), gray molly (Kochia), hopsage (Grayja 

spjnosa), spiny horsebrush (Tetradymia spinescens), and little 

rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus stenophyllus) but pure types of each are 

so limited in extent as to hot justify separate type. The plant symbols 

used will be sufficient to indicate the predominant species present. 

Half Shrub 

17. Wisteria This type includes areas where half shrubs constitute the dominant 

Mongol 844 vegetation or give.the characteristic aspect. Half shrubs are semiDixon TTunex woody perennial of low stature such as Aplopappus. Gutierrezia. 

377 Artemisia frigida. Eriogonum wrightii. etc. They commonly consist 

• of a woody caudex from which herbaceous stems are produced that 

die back annually. These genera are sufficiently distinctive in habitat 

and of wide enough extent in certain localities to justify a separate 

type designation. 

Aiuiuals(Weeds or Grasses) 

18. Red Terra This type includes areas in which annual weeds or annual grasses 

Cotta constitute the dominant vegetation. Both transitory stages and semiMongol 876 permanent conditions should be included in this type as for example: 

Dixon Best Russian thistle, downy chess (Bromus tectorum) desert weeds. The 

351 plant symbols used will be sufficient to indicate the predominant 

species present. 

31 
Illustration 3 Page 5 

Abandoned Lands 

Abandoned lands should be classified according to aspect. In 

mapping, the boundaries should be hatched. 

32 
Supplemental Studies — Parker 3-Step 

II. PARKER 3-STEP METHOD 

Editor's Note: The Parker 3-Step procedures were transcribed from the original text in the 

old BIM Manual, Volume IX, Range Release No. 38, dated September 12, I960. 

A. Parker 3-Step Method 

The following instructions for establishing intensive range studies are largely derived from 

the Parker 3-step method and subsequent modifications approved by the Bureau.* The three 

steps used in this method are: 

1. The establishment of permanent line transects. 

2. A photographic record of each transect. 

3. A record of range condition and eventually of range trend at and adjacent to the 

transect site. 

•Note: For additional details about this method, consult A Method for Measuring Trend in 

Range Condition on National Forest Ranges, dated October 17, 1951, and supplement of March 31, 1953 by Kenneth W.Parker. 

New Equipment for the 3-Step Method by L. R. Short, Northern Rocky Mountain Experiment 

Station, Research Note, August 1952. 

Suggested Procedure for Use with the Loop-Transect Method by L. A. Sharp, University of 

Idaho, Research Notes, May 1955. 

B. Factors in Establishing Permanent Transects 

Essentially, line transects will accurately portray trend of condition on the transect site and 

will serve as benchmarks from which factors for judgment of surrounding range lands may be 

derived. Several important factors must be given consideration in the establishment of 

permanent transects: 

1. The selection of average or representative sites within the range types being studied 

is very important. Transects should not be located in areas of livestock concentration 

such as near watering places or on driveways, nor should they be placed in unusable or 

extremely remote range areas. They should be placed so as nearly as possible to sample 

conditions in areas which carry the major grazing load of an allotment or unit. 

2. Completion of the field work during the time of year when the important plant 

species are most easily identified is also important. (This applies to all methods of 

study.) 

33 
Supplemental Studies — Parker 3-Step 

3. It is necessary to accurately record the cluster location (a cluster is one or more 

permanent line transects at one site) with reference to a permanent identification marker, 

and clearly describe the location of each transect within the cluster. 

4. The delineation of tentative range condition classes on a map prior to establishment 

of transects will simplify and speed up the job. In this way intensive study can generally 

be limited to those types which may be expected to reflect changes in use and management. 

5. In instances when moderately intensive survey coverage has delineated range 

condition class zones prior to the installation of transects for more exact determinations 

of trends, the acreage of the key areas represented by the intensive study should be 

reported under Phase 1 in statistical reports and deducted from the acreage previously 

reported as coverage under Phase 2. 

C. Recording the Cluster Location 

The making of "repeat" records in future years will depend upon the examiner being able to 

relocate the initial and terminal transect stakes from information shown on the original 

record. For best results, successive readings should always be taken at the same season of the 

year. 

1. Where the cluster site cannot be readily located with relation to a known section 

corner, the site should be identified by regular range improvement project marker or any 

other permanent location tie set far enough away to avoid interference with the transects. 

2. A sketch map should be drawn on the back of the line transect record form showing 

roads, fences, close identifying landmarks, bearings and distances, or other pertinent 

data which will facilitate relocating the site for repeat recordings. Aerial photographs 

and the general transect photograph (Section II. E) are useful for this purpose. 

3. Each cluster established will be identified by number, and each district will maintain 

its own numbering series, starting with number one and continuing in consecutive order. 

Each separate transect should also be identified by number or letter and by exact bearing 

of the transect line. 

D. Step One - Establishing a Line Transect 

From one to three 100' transects (depending on the density and uniformity of the vegetation) 

will provide an adequate record at each cluster site. In moderately dense homogeneous 

vegetal types one transect will be sufficient. If the type is quite variable in composition or of 

relatively low density, a two transect cluster will provide more reliable data. In areas of very 

sparse vegetal cover, three or more transects per cluster may be required. The examiner will 

have to exercise his best judgment in deciding upon the number of transects per cluster to be 

installed. 

34 
Supplemental Studies — Parker 3-Step 

A completed sample form used for recording data (Form 4^1420, Record of Permanent Line 

Transect) is included as Illustration 4. 

1. Reading the Tape 

Readings are taken and recorded at one-foot intervals along a steel tape stretched taut 

between two permanent iron stakes. The stake at the zero end of the tape is referred to 

as the "initial stake", and the other located a few inches beyond the 100' mark (far 

enough so that the 100' reading is not disturbed) is called the "terminal stake". A third 

or "middle" permanent iron stake may be placed directly under the tape at approximately 

50 feet 6 inches. This third stake will aid materially in lessening tape movement by the 

wind and relocating the transect for repeat recordings in areas of heavy vegetation. Its 

exact location on the tape should be noted on the margin or reverse side of the transect 

record form. Normally the permanent stakes should not extend more than 6 inches 

above the ground level. 

a. In tall growing browse types, the stakes must of necessity be longer and extend 

higher above ground level in order for the tape to be properly placed. If the tape is 

stretched at a height of one foot or more above ground level it will usually be 

preferable to use a plumb bob suspended by a string in lieu of a wire loop to mark 

the points directly below the one foot measurement stations on the tape. In this 

instance the point of the plumb bob hit is visualized as the center of a 3/4 inch circle. 

. ,. Readings on vegetation are taken at any height up to 60 inches above ground level. 

(Plant growth above 5 feet is generally considered to be unavailable for use.) 

b. Of first importance is that measurement and recordation of data be done in as 

systematic and as nearly standardized manner as possible in order that 

remeasurement may be done with a minimum of error and inconvenience. For the 

sake of consistency when the tape is read either with a wire loop or with a plumb 

bob, readings should be made along the right side of the tape proceeding from the 0 

to the 100 foot mark. If a straight shank loop is used it is also important that the 

loop itself be consistendy held in the same position with relation to the tape. The 

practice to be followed will be to turn the loop out at right angles to the direction of 

the tape. If the loop is mounted on an offset handle as described by Short's Note of 

August 1952, less difficulty will be had in resetting the loop in an exact position. 

The use of a leveling bulb mounted on the loop handle will help to assure a vertical 

projection of the loop below the measurement point on the tape (Sharp's Note of 

May 1955). Any variation in procedure used in reading the tape should be carefully 

described and recorded on the transect record form for reference when a repeat 

measurement is made. 

c. Brass cap survey corners provide an excellent location tie for the establishment of 

transects but normally should not be used as an initial stake with the transect itself. 

Quarter corners, being less conspicuous, may provide a satisfactory reference stake 

or hub for a transect cluster provided they are not surrounded by a mound of rocks 

and the vegetation has not otherwise been subjected to disturbance. 

35 
Supplemental Studies — Parker 3-Step 

2. Recording Transect Information. 

To complete the line transect record (Illustration 4), readings are taken along the tape 

starting at the one-foot mark, and thereafter at one-foot intervals. 

a. Show in the proper spaces under Block (A) of the form the situation under each onefoot station on the tape as encompassed within a 3/4 inch circle. Use the lower half 

of each numbered block for recording readings of the plant understory, and the top 

half for recording the taller shrubs up to 5 feet in height (overstory). 

b. To be recorded as "hits" the root crowns or portions thereof of grasses and forbs 

must fall within the 3/4 inch circle. On browse species hits are recorded whenever 

the loop falls within the circumference of the perennial portions of the crown. 

c. Occasionally it may be impossible to establish a full 100 foot transect line at the 

selected site. In this case a 50-foot transect will suffice and 100 readings may be 

taken at 6 inch intervals on the tape. 

d. Block (B) is a summary of the data recorded in Block (A). 

e. In Block (C) list all perennial vegetation recorded in Block (A) by name, symbol, 

and number of "hits" (number of times it is recorded on the transect). Indicate by 

check mark (V) the species which are carrying the grazing load (Index plants). 

Note: In the bottom part of Block (B) the number of "hits" on these index plants 

are totaled. 

f. Block (D) is provided to record vigor measurements. Select two or three of the most 

desirable plant species along the transect and determine the average measurements 

for vigor. 

g. The remainder of the form provides supplemental information. Under the heading 

"Photographic Data", include information about additional pictures taken, type of 

film, camera used, etc. 

3. Equipment 

All transect directions should be determined by compass from the initial landmark stake 

or hub. A (K & E) Stevens Wyteface "A" 100 foot tape has proved to be ideal for laying 

out transects. Reinforcing steel, (3/8 inch or 1/2 inch) cut in the desired lengths, is 

suitable for the transect stakes. The tape can be held in a taut position between the two 

permanent stakes by means of clamps and temporary stakes or tape stretchers as suggested by Short, or by use of steel springs and a turn buckle arrangement devised by 

Sharp. 

4. Optional 

As an alternative procedure in areas of sparse vegetation, use of a 10-foot board notched 

or marked at 1-foot intervals may be substituted for the 100 foot tape in establishing 

transect lines. This procedure, developed in the Southwest, requires the placing of 
Supplemental Studies — Parker 3-Step 

permanent stakes at 10-foot intervals along a predetermined line. A minimum of 100 

feet of recorded line is required. 

5. Paced Transect 

To supplement data on plant density and composition, a paced transect system may be 

used. One or more straight lines may be paced at random through the area, recording the 

condition immediately in front of the right foot at the end of each pace. Readings may 

be recorded by a simple dot tally and summarized for comparison with the transect data. 

6. Coverage 

The number of transect clusters required in a given area must be left to the judgment of 

the individual making the study as the topography, uniformity of range types, time 

available for collecting data, and many other factors must be taken into consideration. 

Generally speaking, an attempt should be made to secure adequate samples of the major 

range areas producing the bulk of the forage within any given unit. It is especially 

important that one or more transect clusters be established in all key range areas which . 

because of their character, location, availability, or for other reasons, have unusual 

significance to livestock or game populations and management. 

E. Step Two - Photographic Record 

A minimum of two pictures will be taken at each transect site (with the tape in place), one a 

close-up, another giving a general view along the transect line. Although this is listed as 

Step 2, it is preferable to photograph the area immediately after the tape is stretched in order 

to more accurately portray undisturbed conditions. 

1. Photographs will be made in general conformance with the instructions given in the 

BLM publication, An Improved Method of Making a Photographic Record of Range 

Conditions, by French & Shuhk, July 1952. This publication provides instructions for 

photographic identification, filing, recommended photographic equipment, etc., which 

may be modified as necessary. 

2. Taking pictures with 35 MM cameras is.permissible as a temporary measure if more . 

suitable equipment is not available. However, this should be done only with black and 

white film in order that suitable enlarged prints, not less than 4x 5 inches, may be made 

and filed with the transect record. Use of a tripod is essential. Range photographs will 

be identified by use of a printed card. This form is included as Illustration 5. The 

importance of obtaining a good photographic record cannot be overemphasized. Good 

before and after photographs of an identical range area provide one of the best and most 

easily understood selling points on the value of good range management practices. 

3. Additional permanent photographic stations should be established to provide a more 

complete record of change in vegetation or soil condition. A periodically continuing 

picture record at such sites will be a valuable supplement to study data obtained by other 

methods and at other sites. In order for the record to be fully usable, careful notation of 

37 
Supplemental Studies — Parker 3-Step 

the location, season of year, general growing conditions, etc., should be made for each 

photograph at the time it is taken. 

E Step Three - Score Card 

The score card (Illustration 6, Form 4-1419) is designed to rate current range condition and 

aid in estimating range trend. The examiner determines from analysis of transect data and by 

observation of the surrounding area which of the various rating descriptions best fit the 

conditions he observes. One of the figures assigned to that description is entered on the right 

hand margin as his score. A "spread in value" is given which allows the examiner to use any 

figure between the minimum and maximum values listed. Although the area of observation is 

limited to the transect immediate vicinity, the condition rating will apply to adjacent and 

surrounding range lands of similar use pattern, type, and character. 

In the use of the score card and transect record, it is most important that all data be filled in 

on the forms while the examiner is on the ground. Though condition standards and score card 

values may change as a result of new research findings, the history of the site as measured in 

Step 1 will always be available for future reanalysis. 

Each district office must develop a list showing the ratings of the plant species to be listed in 

Section B "Composition", and decide whether "Vigor" will be based chiefly on perennial 

grasses, shrubs, or forbs or some combination of the three. In developing these ratings the 

District should stay within or near the general numerical values assigned in Illustration 6. 

1. Density 

Density should be rated directly from the number of hits on vegetation per 100 readings 

on the tape. This assumes that plant frequency along the transect line is in direct proportion to percentage of total vegetative cover present. Note: Hits on either shrub overstory or plant understory contribute to total plant density but a hit on both at any given 

transect point should, for the purpose of rating density, be counted as a single hit. 

2. Composition 

Careful consideration of vegetal composition is very important, especially as it pertains 

to range trend. To prepare the score card for local use, refer to the district plant classification list (Illustration 7, page 1) as a basis for listing plant species in category B(l) on 

Form 4-1419 (Illustration 6). The key plant species, indigenous to the vicinity, which 

indicate poor, fair, good or excellent stand composition, should be listed, in the proper 

sequence and appropriate statements made on reproduction and age class distribution. 

Probably in most cases plant composition criteria will differ somewhat for each major 

plant association within a district. However, once developed, frequent changes in 

standards should be avoided. 

3. Vigor amid Condition 

Vigor and condition criteria for all classes of vegetation are combined within this section 

rather than having a separate section for browse. If desirable browse or other classes of 

plants are missing or occur only in very minor amounts, the examiner should disregard 

38 
Supplemental Studies — Parker 3-Step 

them when rating vigor, major attention must go to the species of plant or plants which 

carry most of the grazing load for the type. 

4. Soil and Erosion 

Soil and erosion factors are judged on the basis of: 

a. The natural erosion hazard as determined from the percent of bare ground measured 

on the transect line, and 

b. Current soil erosion conditions noted along and in the vicinity of the transect line. 

The rating criteria listed on the score card are believed to be self-explanatory. f 

5. Supplemental Information 

It is important that the examiner take time to record any pertinent supplemental data 

' under the heading, "Current Situation." This information will do much to explain 

variation with subsequent readings, on such things as plant vigor, seed production, etc. 

G. Summary Records. 

The. summary record for intensive studies, formerly listed as illustration 3 in the Manual, has 

been discontinued because it fails to provide much usable information for the districts. 

However, this does not remove the necessity for keeping a cumulative record of soil and 

vegetal changes which takes place on any given study plot or transect site. But the range 

management plan for an allotment or unit will require a written summary of range condition 

and trend based upon the data from range study records. 

H. Records 

All field records pertaining to range studies will.be retained in the district offices. Since 

considerable material eventually will be accumulated for each allotment or unit being studied, 

separate files should be maintained. Double or triple compartment manila binders are well 

suited for the filing of these data. 

Illustration 4 Page 1 

Form 4-1420 UNITED STATES . 

Only 19S9) DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT 

RECORD OF PERMANENT LINE TRANSECT 

Allotment ot Unit District Date 

Cluster Number Location1 

Transect Number Location 2 

Examiner 

A. 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1Z 18 A9 20 

. , 

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 

- ,^'­

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 

61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 

^ 

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 

Note: - List overstory species in upper blocks. Show plants by interagency symbols and circle symbol when dead. 

L - Litter, R - Rock; S - Soil; A - Unidentified annual; E. P. - Erosion Pavement. 

a SUMMARY OF PART A C. LIST OF PLANT SPECIES* 

KEY NO. OF NO. OP PLANT NAME SYMBOL FORAGE "HITS" "HTTS" PLANTS 

BARE SOIL 

(Annuals ) Plant 

Ground (Perennials) Density Index3 

Cover (Litter 

Index (Rock 

(Erosion Pavement 

(Other (list) 

TOTAL 100 

Overstory ' 

Understorv 

Desirable Plant Index* •Include important species not recorded as hits on the 

transect 

D. VIGOR (Record any actual measurements E. PHOTOGRAPHIC DATA5 made of key forage species) 

PLANT SPECIES MEASUREMENT 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. ' 

41 
Illustration 4 Page 2 

l Pofmoncat Rofotcaco Point, ouch OO GLO ourvoy coraor or tie to corner. 

3

 Initial tronoect otohe by bearing end diotoace from GLO corner or reference point 

3

 Record noraore than 1 hit per raeaauremeat point. If both annual and perennial on same point, record 

the perennial. P.D.I. = total bits on vagotation. 

4 Conoalt Plant liot (Uluotratica Ha 9). 

5 Note cay deviation from otandard procedures, entra photoo tahea, etc. 

General Viow — Set up camera 35 feet bach of initial otnlio end focuo to chow full length of line and 

horison. (Ultn tope in place.) 

Closa tip — Set up Comoro over initial otako, focuo on point 6 feet out on transect line. (With tape 

in place.) 

6

 Additional Infotaatiaa: 

(o) Describe pcracaoat reference point cad note by obetch map, additional directions for reaching end 

identifying the transect site: 

(b) Briefly doccribo the type of equipment and method uoed to read tape in order that repeat readings 

trill escctly duplicate the procedures used for the initial reading, i.e., describe type of loop used, 

boa readingo ocso taken oith reference to pcaltira of the tcpo, etc. 

42 
Illustration 5 Page 1 

TRAHSBCT PHOTOGRAPH IDENTIFICATION CARD 


UNIT. 

43 
Illustration 5 Pag e 2 


Instructions for Preparation of Transect 


Photograph Identification 


This form will b© used to identify all photographo token during the inotalla= 


tion ®ad reroasursaent of Thre®°st@p transectso 


The printed forta (sampl© attached) is intended to be disposable, The infor­


mation needed to complete the transect identifications will be added using 


black "Magic Marker" ink, 


Tho tatuaa holder normally used in collecting field data and for carrying 


blank forms will furnish backing for the placard during photography, Two 


rubber bands or string loops say be used on the lid of the tatu® holder to 


keep the placard in place. The tatum stay be placed on the ground or, if 


elevation io necessary as in browse types, astride a stick or twig. 

Illustration 6 Page 1. 

TOITED

Date 5S?SM» W - ****** 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR BUREAU OP LAND MANAGEMENT 

pwffl tji 1 n#ty 

RANGE CONDITION TRANSECT SCORE CARD Cluster Number 

District 

Location 

Allotment at Unit Range Type 

L VEGETATION 

A SCORE . DENSITY OP PLANT COVER* 

KKTTKH} 

40% or mote = 10 30-40% = 8 Check if data were obtained bom more than one transect and are 

20-30% = 6 10-20% = 4 average number of hits per 100 readings [~~| 

' Less than 10% = 2 

•Determine directly from Part A and B of line transect record. Record no more than 1 hit per measurement 

point even though both nnderstory and overstory hits, listed. 

B. COMPOSITION AND AGE CLASS 

(Based upon transect data plus ocular estimate of adjoining area) 

With reference to the site potential, list vegetation present or which should.be present under the 

following categories: * 

(1) Desirable perennials: 

(2) Perennials of medium value or high quality annuals: 

(3) Annuals and undesirable or worthless perennials: 

» Refer to district plant list (Illustration No. 9JL 

1. Plants in (1) above making up more than 50% of the type total; 

Plants in (2) above generally present and may be moderately abundant but not in excess of 40% of 

type total; 

(16-20) Plants in (3) above rare or absent and never in excess of 10% of type-total. 

45 
Illustration 6 Page 2 

B. COMPOSITION AND ACE CLASS 

«» (Based upon trasect data plus ocular estimate of adjoining area) — Continued 

2. Perennials in (1) above present in decreased amount usually 30 to 50% of type makeup; plants in (2) 

above usually equaling or exceeding the percentage of those in group (1); less desirable plants such 

as those in (3) above in greater amounts but not exceeding 30%. of total type composition. Young 

plants present and some reproduction of desirable pereaniolo tolling piece. (11-15) 

3. Desirable perennials in groups (1) and (2) much reduced, togsther matting up from 20 to 60%. of type 

total; eanuals and undesirable perennials present in greatly increased emoants, usually making up 

40 to 80% of total vegetation; pure stands of palatable cnnuols may occur. Clay be young plants but 

little or no ceproductioa of desirable species. (6-10) 

4. Low value end noxious plants predominate, only remnants of desirable forage species remain. No 

reproduction of desirable species. (Or-5) 

C. VIGOR ANO CONDITION OF MAJOR FORAGE PLANTS 

1. Grasses and palatable fotrbs robust, numerous leaves, seed stalks tall and abundant. Sod and bunch 

grasses firm. Browse, flowers or fruits and current leaf growth abundant; plants show no grazing 

effect. Young plants of varying age usually occur throughout the type. (9—10) 

2. Grasses and palatable forbs strong with moderate amount of seed stalks and leafage. Sod and 

bunch grasses firm. Browse current leaf growth, flowers, or fruits plentiful; slight effect from 

grazing use; low shrubs erect, no evidence of hedging or browse line. (7—8) 

3. Grasses and palatable forbs apparently healthy but forage production poor, evidence of thinning, 

some bunch grasses loose (slight pedestaling of plants generally characteristic of this class). 

Browse, current .growth, flowers, or fruits scarce; tall shrubs with browse line forming; low 

shrubs hedged. (5—6) 

4. Grasses and palatable forbs weak, forage production poor, seed stalks few and short, plants pull 

up easily, sod grasses definitely breaking up (distinct pedestaling and abnormal death loss often 

characteristic of this class). Browse, current growth slight to none, tall ohrubs with distinct 

browse line, low shrubs prostrate or stubby. (3-4) 

5. Grasses extremely weak end dwarfed, leaves and seed stalks few to none; excessive thinning of 

Qod and deterioration of bunch grass root crowns; survival of much of gross cover doubtful. 

Polctable forbs generally absent (root exposure due to erosion of pedestals and high death loss 

generally characteristic of this class). Browse, no current growth; inferior species heavily 

grazed, many branches deed, some plants killed outright. (0—2) 

TOTAL SCORE FOR VEGETATION 


I I 

• 

111 

III 

11111 

ISIII 

_ 

1 

III 

1 

-

46 

Illustration 6 Page 3 

CURRENT SITUATION (Chick appropriate block) 

Precipitation: !~~1 Above normal ! | Normal ' £ 3 Below normal H ] Donght conditions prevail 

Current plant development is: • Early [^) Late , I Above average Q Average ,. £ 3 Below average 

Utilisation of current growth is: ! 1 Light - F~l Moderate ' !~~l Heavy. . !~~1 Excessive 

Ormsnal site faflaeacea: 

Record corrent stocking rate and condition of livestock from best-information source available: 

AcMU tonal remarks, if needed: 

47 
• 

• 

Illustration 6 Page 4 

IE. SOIL AND EROSION SCORE 

A. EROSION HAZARD INDEK 

(Rata on basis of ground cover iadaa oa transact line) 

SO to 100 hits = 13-15 00 to 60 hits = 7-9 

60 to 80 hits = 10-12 20 to 40 hits = 4-6 

0 to 20 hits = 0-3 

B. CURRENT EROSION • 

1. Erosion none; all soil layers intact end stabilized. (15) 

2. Erosion slight; might be detected by litter or small amounts of sediment or top soil deposited on 

or against grasses? or low shrubs; gullies or draws absent or completely bsaled. (11—14) 

3. Erosion moderate; occasional bare spots giving patchy appearance; few plants pedestaled; gully 

or channel sides not racy, but complete stabilisation doubtful; litter scarce; soil compaction 

•1 

ndiceeble but not excessive; concentration of runoff into minute channels often apparent; cat 

steps and terreces noticeable on slopes. (7—10) 

4. Erosion severe; numerous bare spots, sheet erosion and soil compaction on light soils definitely 

apparent; erosion pavement evident on stony or, gravelly soils; pronounced drift on sandy soils; 

ill! channels or gullies, if present, with raw sides; majority of plants pedestaled with some roots 

enpeaed. (3-6) 

5. Ercoicn very severe or critical; sheet erosion widespread; subsoil exposed in many places; shoe­

string gullies with raw sides generally common; large gullies with active side and head cutting 

11 

often present; complete erosion pavement on stony soils; blowouts and excessive drifts on 

sandy soil, rapid depletion of plant cover evident. (0—2) 

TOTAL SCORE FOR SOILS 

INTERPRETATION OF SCORE 

(Circle appropriate scores) 

CLASSIFICATION I VEGETATION n. SOILS HI. COMBINED RATING 

Excellent 

32 or more 24 or. more 56 to 70 

Good 24 to 31 18 to 23 42 to 55 

Pair 16 to 23 12 to 17 28 to 41 

Poor 

9 to 15 7 to 11 16 to 27 

Very Poor 

Oto 8 0 to 6 Oto IS 

48 
Illustration 7 Page 1 

4 a 8 H 

9 • 9 . 9 »o» g 

to 

* • * 

• 0. 

3 

§o § i i i 28*8 

:t 35

m 9 CO CO * 2 

9 ­

i o § 8 

a 3 o * 3 8 oBsSS* 3 8 §u iff 

1 9 9 CO 9 S s» 35 

IS CO 

§3 3d 3* 3 * a £ 1 

»oo» > 3 3 lilt 

I I I I 

OtOStlVi 

05 3 3 ocotoft co3 3 

S3 IT to 3

ir 33 |§2 3 nAUUUQHH' S M 3 PC £ , 

I i'fifb.il Mi 

m il» llliiilfiii n n: 2

49 

Supplemental Studies — Denting Two-Phase 

III. DEMING TWO-PHASE 

Editor's Note: The Denting Two-Phase procedures were transcribed from the original text 

from the old BLM Manual, Volume IX, Range Release No. 38, dated September 12, 1960. 

A. Procedures for Using Two-Phase Method 

The following procedural statements describe certain details of practice in surveys made by 

the Two-Phase method. Further amplification of these procedural hints is to be found in 

"Supplemental Instructions for Field Use" •'- March 1957, by Milo H: Derning (Illustration 8). . 

1. Observations 

Observations are made in the field at random but at such intervals as seem necessary to 

sample sufficiently all the important vegetational types and broadly generalized sites. 

Only a single observation record need be taken for any size of area where similar 

' conditions of site, vegetal cover, and use intensity patterns prevail. Substantial change 

. in any of these features will require another observation writeup record, and map entry. 

'-."•!.' Local Plant Classification List • ." * * -

- • - - J ' 

On the particular management unit or allotment under study the prevailing or anticipated 

circumstances of season of use and kind of grazing animal fix the appropriate basis for 

using the local plant classification list with reference to the Range Condition Index. 

3. Range Condition Survey Field Record 

The data for field observations on range condition is recorded on a Two-Phase Range 

Condition Survey Field Record Form 4-1529 (Illustration 9). This form provides for a 

brief description of each type and site at each observation location for which a.writeup 

and rating are made. The vegetal type is designated by the appropriate number and/or 

name (Section I, Illustration 3) and the most important species present are listed. The 

site is described with concise terms as to land form (as valley floor, mountain slope, 

etc.); topography (as broken, steep, etc.); exposure (by directional quadrants, as SE, 

^\ 

multiple, etc.); soil characteristics (as sandy loam, clay from tertiary shales, etc.); and 

moisture characteristics (approximate annual rainfall in inches and snow lay, as 8", snow 

cover intermittent, etc.). Space is provided for a location tie entry for each observation 

station, by section, township and range, if possible, otherwise by land feature names. 

4. Numerical Ratings 

Numerical ratings are assigned on the writeup form to each of the four items listed under 

each phase of Forage Stand and Site-Soil Mantle headings. Each item is judged appropriately by reference to the standard key descriptions contained in the Range Condition 

Index. These item ratings are entered on the field sheets and totaled separately for each 

phase. These totals are written thus (40/60) as "combined ratings" in which the first 

51 
Supplemental Studies — Deming Two-Phase 

figure always refers to the Forage Stand Phase total and the figure behind the slash mark 

always refers to the Site-Soil mantle total. 

5. Unit or Allotment Seminary 

Each field sheet has spaces provided for ten complete observation location records. This 

number is usually sufficient to describe an allotment or a small management unit adequately if the kind of livestock or big game and season of use therein are the same 

universally. After acreage of each condition class is computed from the zoned map the 

data is entered in the Unit or Allotment Summary spaces on the field sheet form. 

6. Condition) Classes 

The sum of the total rating obtained for both phases (i.e., both figures of the combined 

rating) determines the range condition class for that writeup and location. These condition classes are five in number: Excellent, Good, Fair, Poor and Bad. The appropriate 

condition class in which each combination rating total falls is determined with reference 

to the following scale index points: 

0 

25 

60 

95 

130 

160 

- 25 

- 60 

- 95 

- 130 

- 165 

- 200 

Equals 

Equals 

Equals 

Equals 

Equals 

Equals 

Waste or Unusable Range 

Bad 

Poor 

Fair 

Good 

Excellent 

7. Observation Noted on Map 

The approximate location of each observation place is shown on the map by entering the 

Two-Phase formula figures for the Forage Stand and Site-Soil Mantle conditions observed in that place. This is the "combined rating" for both phases and is entered thus 

60/80. The extent of the reference area of each observation location is not delineated on 

the map. 

8. Zones by Condition Class 

After all the ratings for the respective observation locations are plotted on a map, 

zonation of the area of each condition class is obtained by drawing exterior boundaries 

which contain all the locations at which the combination ratings fall within the prescribed arithmetic limits for each respective class. Any combined rating total of less 

than 25 is considered as waste and unusable and the area so rated is cross-hatched on the 

map. Acreage for each condition class zone or for unusable range is computed from the 

map by planimeter or other measuring device. 

9. Using Type and Topographic Maps 

The dividing lines or boundaries between the respective zones usually follow topographic relief and vegetational type lines. If type maps or topographic maps are available for field use they help to fix where the boundaries between such zones should be 
Supplemental Studies — Denting Two-Phase 

' drawn. Otherwise the boundaries are approximated or sketched in the field, using 

whatever controls are available from knowledge of the area.. 

10. Range Condition Criteria Index 

The Range Condition Criteria Index quoted hereafter (Sections III.B and III.C) constitutes the universal reference guides for judgment of the field examiner in assigning 

appropriate numerical ratings item by item for the conditions discovered in field surveys; 

Since this index is constantly used for reference in field work, it was published separately (Illustration 8). 

6. Phase 1-Range Forage Condition Index Ratings 

For consideration of the forage stand, the four items of Quality, Quantity, Vigor, and Reproduction are subject to independent rating and judgment. The suin of the ratings assigned each 

item produces the total Forage,Stand phase rating. 

Forage Stands - Phase 1 

1. Rating Plant Stands for Quality 

Judge proportionately the relationship of plants composing the stand which are of high 

forage value, of intermediate forage value, of low forage value and worthless for forage. 

Lists of local plants so classified are essential. Ratings will be applied as follows: 

25 - Outstanding predominance of high quality perennial forage plants in the stand. 

Remainder of the stand is principally of medium value or worthless plants negligible. 

20- At least half of the stand is composed of high quality perennial forage plants. 

Remainder of the stand may be mostly medium value plants with only minor 

percentages of low value arid few worthless plants. (High quality annual plants 

may be considered here if they persist and are available for use throughout the 

grazing season.) 

15 - At least one-third of the perennial forage plants are of high quality. Medium value 

plants may be gready predominant, but low quality and/or worthless plants may not 

exceed one-third of the stand. (Annual plants of high and medium quality but 

limited usefulness are considered here. Stands composed almost exclusively of 

medium value plants, either desirable annuals or perennial, also fall in this category.) 

10 - High quality perennial forage plants are few. A major proportion of the forage 

plants are of medium and low value. Worthless plants comprise a very significant 

percentage of the stand. (Annual plants of low value and short life or usefulness 

are considered here.) 

53 
Supplemental Studies — Deming Two-Phase 

5 - Outstanding preponderance of low value and/or worthless forage plants in the 

stand. (These may be either annuals or perennials.) Remaining percentage of stand 

may be composed principally of medium value plants. High quality plants are 

negligible or relics. 

0 - An extreme situation where only low value or worthless plants for forage comprise 

the stand. 

2. Rating Density and Qccepancy by Desirable Forage Plants 

Considering the site and environmental potentials for production of vegetation, judge the 

relative density of stand and degree of occupancy of available space by valuable and 

desirable forage plants, (i.e., those of high and medium values on local plant lists). 

25 - There is a very dense stand of valuable and desirable forage plants. Such plants 

occupy the available space almost exclusively. 

20 - There is a thick stand in density of valuable and desirable forage plants. There 

may be minor amounts of space occupied by undesirable and worthless forage 

plants. 

15 - There is a medium stand in density of valuable and desirable plants. Low value 

plants and/or those worthless for forage may be equally dense in patches or may 

occupy equal space with the desirable plants. 

10 - There is a thin, open, or patchy stand of valuable and desirable plants. Low value 

and/or Worthless plants may be denser or occupy a major portion of the available 

space. 

5 - There is a scanty and widely-spaced stand of valuable and desirable plants. There 

may be dense stands of low value and worthless plants. 

0 - An extreme situation where there is no appreciable density of valuable and desirable plants. Space occupancy may be almost entirely by worthless plants. 

3. Rating Vigor of Desirable Plants 

Judge the relative degree of health and thrift of the valuable and desirable forage plants 

which are available for grazing. This is evidenced by their size, height, shape, color, 

firmness of rooting, amount of leafage or shoot production and flower or seed stalk 

abundance. Consider relatively high vigor of competing undesirable plants as an 

adverse influence. Note any evidence of recent death loss of desirable plants. 

25 - Valuable and desirable plants are robust, of maximum height and excellent color, 

well formed and producing abundant leafage, seed stalks and shoots. They are 

firmly rooted and show no sign of weakness or malformation. 

20 - Valuable and desirable plants are thrifty and of good height, shape and color. 

Grass clumps or sods are intact and well filled. Shrubs are sturdy, with good form 

and have moderate numbers and length of shoots. 

54 
Supplemental Studies — Deming Two-Phase 

15 - Valuable and desirable plants are of medium size, fair height, and with a medium 

volume of leafage and shoot production. Grass clumps may be small or sods 

patchy. Shrubs may have relatively fewer and shorter shoots or may be somewhat 

distorted in form. 

10 - Valuable and desirable plants are low or short, poorly formed and unthrifty. Grass 

clumps may have dead centers, sod formations may be broken and irregular. 

Desirable shrubs are malformed or scrawny, or have some dead branches. 

5 - Valuable and desirable plants are critically weak and decadent with poor color, 

stunted form and with very limited leafage or shoot production. Grass tufts or 

shrubs often are infirmly rooted or pedestalled, and some recent death loss may be 

found. Undesirable plants may be thrifty 

0 - Extreme situation where valuable and desirable plants are barely existing relics, or 

have recently died in substantial amounts. 

4. Rating Reproduction Abundance and Survival of Desirable Plants 

Judge the comparative abundance and evidence of survival of seedlings, shoots, and 

younger age classes of the valuable and desirable forage plants. Usually these are in 

competition with undesirable plants for future increases and replacements in the stand. 

Consider which plants are gaining materially in replacement for death loss of their 

own kind. 

25 - Reproduction of valuable and desirable plants is abundant It is outstandingly 

predominant in all younger age classes and seedlings. This indicates the continual 

presence of sufficient reproduction to build or maintain dominance of the better 

forage plants. . 

20 - Reproduction of valuable and desirable plants is frequent and in the majority with 

respect to most new seedlings and younger age classes. Some low value or worthless plant reproduction may be present in minor amounts or in the older age classes 

of reproduction. 

15 - Reproduction of valuable and desirable plants is moderate. It may occur in nearly 

equal amounts and frequency with that of low value or worthless plants. 

10 - Reproduction of valuable and desirable plants is scanty. It is in the minority in 

most younger age classes and is usually outnumbered by that of low value and 

worthless plants. 

5 - Reproduction of valuable and desirable plants is rare or negligible in amount. That 

of low value or worthless plants is usually predominant in all younger age classes. 

This indicates that the undesirable plants are gaining dominance or definitely have 

control of the stand. 

55 
Supplemental Studies — Deming Two-Phase 

0 - Extreme situation where there is no evidence that valuable and desirable plants are 

reproducing and surviving in the stand in any appreciable amount. 

C. Phase 2 - Site aed Soil Mantle 

The second phase of this method refers to the Site-Soil Mantle condition. Here the physical 

influences of all plants both above and below the ground surface are of paramount importance. Four items of Protective Cover, Natural Vulnerability, Surface Runoff Resistance, and 

Soil Stability are judged and rated independently. The sum of these ratings produces the total 

rating for Phase 2. 

Site and Soil Mantle - Phase 2 

1. Eating the Protective Cover and Its Efficiency 

Judge the relative density and mass effectiveness of the cover formed by all kinds of 

vegetation, including trees, shrubs, and litter, which shields the soil mantle from disturbance by water and wind. Note the size and pattern of bare spaces. 

25 - Dense cover making a full and continuous canopy over the surface of the ground. 

It affords maximum protection against erosion by water or wind. 

20 - A thick cover in which there may be some small and widely spaced openings. 

Usually it affords good protection against erosive forces, but the nature of cover 

and dispersion of plants or litter leaves some marginal openings bare. 

15 - A medium cover of vegetation, or a thick cover with large and patchy openings; or 

thick stands of "annuals" or "perennials" which persist to maintain cover. These 

are moderately or partially effective as protection against erosive forces. 

10 - A thin cover of vegetation, or ephemeral and shortlived annual plants, or scattered 

clumps and islands of vegetation in large bare openings. These are only slightly or 

partially effective against erosive forces at certain times. 

5 - Widely dispersed and scanty cover of vegetation, or annual vegetation that vanishes 

quickly or appears only in some years. Ineffective against erosive forces as most of 

the ground surface is uncovered most of the time. 

0 - Extreme cases where the soil surface is barren of cover or nearly so, with no 

protection afforded. 

2. Rating the Natural VnilnerabiSity of the Site 

Judge comparatively the natural features of terrain and environment which tend either to 

accelerate or reduce the force and effectiveness of wind and water as erosion agents. 

Such features include position and land form, topographic relief, slope and exposure, the 

nature and properties of the soil, surface stoniness or rock outcrop, and characteristic 

extremes of local weather. Consider these factors under presently prevailing conditions 

56 
Supplemental Studies — Denting Two-Phase 

of cover and climate. The fating should reflect vulnerability to whichever erosion agent 

is most active locally. 

25 - Minimum erosion hazard from either water or wind because of natural feature. For 

water this usually means valleys, plains or terraces, gentle slope gradients, smooth 

terrain, and stable and absorptive soils. For wind action this usually means broken 

or rugged terrain and very stable soils amply sheltered. 

20- SUght erosion hazard from either water or wind because of natural features. For . 

•water this usually means some hilly or rolling terrain with moderate slopes, and 

fairly stable and absorptive soils.. For wind this usually means undulating or rough 

topography with few level areas subject to wind sweep.! . 

75 - Moderate erosion hazard from all erosive forces because of natural features. „ 

Intermediate conditions'of terrain relief and steepness of slope usuallyoccur; alsomoderately stable and absorptive soils;but with only partial shelter. 

10 - High erosion hazard from either water or .wind because of natural features. For 

water this usually means relatively steep slopes, dissected terrain, rather unstable 

soils, and sharply'cut water courses. For wind this usually means much smooth 

topography which offers little protection from wind sweep; and loose or light soils. 

5 - Critical erosion hazard from either water or wind because ofnatural features. For 

water this usually means precipitous slopes or badland areas with some shale or 

. bare rock exposure; and disintegrating types of soils. For wind this usually means 

. flat smooth terrain with little obstruction to wind sweep, and light or loose soils 

easily subject to blowing. , '. v ••• „ 

0 -'" Extreme situation such as bare rock, raw shale beds, exposed subsoil layers, or 

* ; active dunes. . ;: _ : 

3. Rating Surface Runoff Resistance 

Judge comparatively the rapidity with.which water from snowmelt or rainfall enters the ; 

soil or runs off over the soil surface and in drainageways or stream courses. Consider 

the nature,' amount and time of occurrence of all forms of precipitation. Consider 

channel form and drainage patterns of major and minor watercourses. 

25 - No or very slight indication of surface runoff occurrence. Most of the water from 

snow or rain is apparently absorbed or moves so gradually that litter and soil are 

practically undisturbed. Drainageways and stream courses are smoothly rounded 

and apparently well stabilized. 

20 - Some evidence that a small amount of surface runoff occurs. There is some 

disturbance of litter, fine soil, and small debris, but these are carried only short 

distances and moved in zigzag patterns. Water courses and drainageways are fairly 

stable though well-defined. 

57 
Supplemental Studies — Deming Two-Phase 

15 - There are marks of moderate amounts of over-surface flow occurring, indicating 

lessened absorption and percolation. Litter movement and soil or debris lodgment 

behind obstacles is common but in irregular patterns. Drainageways show evidence of high water flow and debris deposits and some minor or discontinuous 

cutting of streambanks is evident. 

10 - Many indications of rapid runoff, low absorption, and a large volume of oversurface flow. Straight rill gully patterns may show on exposed slopes, drainages 

will show evidence of instability and active bank cutting or deepening. Litter 

accumulation is sparse. Stream courses show silt, debris and rubble deposits 

intermittently, or at high water stage levels of overflow plains. 

5 - Much evidence of occurrence of quick runoff and torrential or flood flows of 

waters. There is no litter accumulation in place. Hood debris and rubble deposits 

occur along watercourse banks and as fans at stream junctions. Watercourse 

channels are commonly straight walled and deeply sunk in valley floors. 

0 - Extreme situation showing evidence of floods of great volume carried in thoroughly scoured channels. 

Judge comparatively the present rate of erosional activity by the degree of soil movement or disturbance. Results of either wind or water action or both should be considered. 

25 - Soil mantle is intact with no evidence of soil movement. The soil is developing in 

place with no sign of transportation. Surface litter is usually accumulating in place. 

20 - Slight evidence of some recent soil movement. There may be a limited movement 

of fine soil from bare ground or on certain exposures, but generally stable surface 

conditions prevail. 

75 - Moderate movement of soil is plainly apparent and recent. There may be some 

terracing, or occasional plants on pedestals, or a few small rill gullies in exposed 

places. Some sediment deposits occur intermittently in runoff channels or against 

small obstructions elsewhere. Some gravel is exposed in bare spots where fine soil 

has been removed. 

10 - Well advanced and active soil erosion is evident. Usually there are active gullies to 

aid soil carriage and plants are on pedestals of soil. Drifted soil or debris deposits 

are very noticeable against minor surface obstructions. Drainageways show silty 

deposits or sandy material along channels or in fans. Erosion pavement is well 

formed on gravelly or stony soil, but the pattern is open. Transported soil appears 

mounded about shrub clumps. 

5 - Severe soil erosion of recent occurrence. There is exposed subsoil or closed 

erosion pavement on stony soils: frequently many active gullies, sharply incised 
Supplemental Studies — Denting Two-Phase 

drainage channels, large fan deposits of soil and debris which includes gravel and 

rocks. There are wind scoured depressions and active hummocking or embryonic 

dunes in sandy situations. 

0- Extreme situation such as on barren lands, raw shalebeds, or shifting sand dunes. 

D. Preparation of Maps 

Maps are an indispensable part of the range condition survey record. Combination ratings 

(See Section III.A.4) at respective observation locations are plotted on them. From these 

reference points the extent and limits of zones for each condition class are drawn and respective acreage are computed. Range condition survey maps used in district reports or for other 

permanent records will be on scales of either

 xh or lh inch permile. Unit reports drfield 

work maps may be on any convenient scale. -'••'. 

1. Map Zone Legends 

All maps which serve cumulative or permanent record purposes should be colored by 

condition class zones according to the following standard legend; Excellent Condition, 

blue; Good condition, green; fair condition, yellow; Poor condition, orange; bad condition, red; waste or unusable areas, cross hatching in red. The combination ratings,. 

written thus (60/80), should also be entered at the appropriate locations. (Section IH.A.7) 

Field or work maps should be colored similarly for contrast to aid in the mechanics of 

determining acreage and percentage relationships for each zone. 

2. Map Reference Dates 

All field work and permanent record maps should carry the proper reference year dates. 

The permanent record maps will identify the years in which respective units or sectors of 

the district were surveyed. In addition a district diagram progress map may be kept to 

. show the sector survey dates and other pertinent information such as delineation of 

sectors covered by different intensities of study, location of key area transects, location 

of exclosure plots, photo stations, etc. 

3. Special Separate Phase Maps 

Separate maps or transparent overlays to illustrate the area and percentage relationships 

of either the Forage Stand Phase, or the Site-Soil Mantle Phase alone may be developed 

for such special purposes as particular problem analysis or for exclusive demonstration 

purposes. These may be prepared by entering only the rating figures for the particular 

phase concerned at each observation location; then zoning the area by 20 index point 

stage differentials in a manner similar to that followed when using the combination 

ratings. 

4. Resurvey Work Maps 

r Field work maps prepared in advance of resurveys of the Two-Phase method should 

have the location of each observation station indicated in place by a reference point 

symbol, (thus = HE].) The combination Two-Phase rating should not be used for this 

59 
purpose because it might tend to influence the resurvey rating. The type number or 

name may be entered on the map to aid more positive identification of the place and type 

involved. 

• 

60 
( Illustration 8 Page 1 

U:S. DEPARTMENT OF INTERIOR 

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT ­

TWO-PHASE RANGE CONDITION SURVEYS 

SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR FIELD USE 

By 1VHLO H. DEMING - REVISED MARCH 1957 

The Two-Phase Method for making comprehensive range condition surveys is described fully in 

Volume IX Range, Part 10 Studies, Chapter 10.3 Condition Surveys of the Bureau of Land , 

Management Manual, and amendments. These supplemental instructions are prepared for ready 

reference in the conduct of field work. They afford some additional hints and explanation of the 

local application and adaptation of general principles referred to in the accompanying Range 

Condition Criteria Index (Revised March 1957)­

The essentials for Two-Phase Method Surveys are: 

(1) A plant classification list—prepared locally in advance of field work. 

(2) A Range Condition Criteria Index-^4 pages, processed separately: 

(3) A supply of forms No. BLM 2-407 or similar—for field observation write-ups. 

(4) A map of the area to be surveyed—any convenient scale for field use. 

This method gives equivalent but separate ratings to the two most significant phases of the range 

resource complex; i.e. the forage stand and site and soil mantle of the habitat. The ratings for these 

two phases are further considered in combination for comprehensive classification of range 

condition by relative terms commonly used by range managing agencies. The recording system 

used on field sheets and maps maintains separate ratings for each phase at each observation station 

so that arithmetic computation of changes in each can be made locality by locality at the time of 

subsequent resurveys. 

Forage Stand Consideration—Phase I 

This phase deals with plants on the basis of their relative contribution to the crop of forage being 

produced on any particular site for the animals expected to use the range at a specific season of 

the year. The four items of Quality, Quantity, Vigor, and Reproduction are rated with particular 

reference to how well the valuable and desirable plants are faring in competition with undesirable 

plants under current circumstances of growth and grazing use. With 100 points as a maximum 

possibility, the aggregate numerical rating derived for the four forage stand items represents how 

closely the conditions obtaining approach what is consider to be the full potential capacity of the 

particular site for forage production. 

Site and soil Mantle Consideration—Phase II 

This phase deals with the physical features and environmental characteristics of the habitat which 

govern and limit the kind and abundance of native plants which can grow on any particular site. 

It considers all forms of vegetation and litter with reference to the protective cover it forms and 

61 
Illustration 8 Page 2 

the influence exerted on soil and water movement under prevailing climatic conditions. The four 

items of Protective Cover, Natural Vulnerability, Surface Runoff, and Soil Stability are rated 

independently. The aggregate numerical rating for these four items represents how near the 

situation as found approaches 100 points, or the ideal habitat conservation conditions for any 

particular site. 

Some Bask Principles 

(1) For range condition survey purposes the land areas to be surveyed are judged primarily 

from the viewpoint of usefulness for grazing purposes. Watershed, forest and other 

natural resource values present are not evaluated as such but are considered as environmental influences affecting the use and management of the area for range. 

(2) Range condition is judged relatively with reference to resource conservation goals which 

can be attained by proper management under specified circumstances of grazing use 

rather than with reference to a possible ecological climax attainable under undisturbed 

natural competition. 

(3) Where ranges are used jointly by livestock and big game animals the predominant use 

and the management objectives will govern which plant classification ratings are to be 

applied. 

(4) Resurveys of range condition after intervals of several years will reveal the direction of 

trend and magnitude of the changes which have occurred by numerical comparisons of 

the respective survey ratings. 

(5) The frequency of making field observation write-ups is governed by the necessity for 

sampling any significant changes in vegetational types, range sites, or use patterns. So 

long as these remain reasonably similar a single write-up will apply. Greater intensity 

of sampling makes the definition of condition class zone boundaries more exact. 

Comparison Areas 

Better understanding of the production potentials of various range sites may be had if ungrazed 

or lightly grazed areas are visited first and carefully rated. This helps to establish some definite 

criteria for making relative comparisons with findings on similar sites and in similar types. Local 

relict areas should be sought for observations on species composition, vigor and form of plants. 

Local Pliant Classification Lists 

Lists of all the important plant species found in the local native plant association are prepared in 

advance of field work. These lists show a relative desirability classification (as high, medium, 

low, or worthless) for each species at each season of the year for each particular kind of grazing 

animal. These local plant lists become the foundation for judging the local relationships of 

desirable and undesirable plants as described for rating purposes in the Range Condition Index. 

The relative desirability classification for each plant is decided primarily on its forage value, but 

the placing may be discounted if the plant is objectionable for other reasons. 

62 
Illustration 8 Page 3 

Combination Ratings and Map Color Legend 

Two-Phase combination ratings are written thus: (60/80), the first figure always representing the 

aggregate forage stand index rating and the second figure always representing the aggregate SiteSoil Mantle index Rating. Entry of this combination rating symbol on the field and record maps 

identifies the approximate location at which the corresponding field write-up was made. 

The sum of the two figures which comprise the combination rating determines the appropriate 

rang condition class according to where it falls within the following scale of numerical values for 

each condition class. 

From to Range Condition Class Map Zone Color 

0 25 Waste-unusable Red Hatchure 

*************** For Usable Range Only *************** 

.' 25 60 Bad Red 

60 95 Poor Orange 

95 130 Fair Yellow 

- 130 165 Good Green 

165 200 Excellent Blue 

Maps '•'•• . 

Maps are an indispensable part of range condition survey records. Entry of the Two-Phase 

symbol on the map identifies the approximate location where the corresponding field write-up. 

was made but the exact area of reference for each observation station is not bounded on the map. 

All observation stations for which the combination ratings fall within the numerical limits 

prescribed for each condition class are circumscribed by a zone boundary line. The zone or area 

occupied by each condition class is thus distinguished on the map for coloring and separate 

acreage computations. 

Field maps may be of any convenient scale available. Large scale maps often contain topographic 

detail or vegetation type lines which facilitate the location of condition class boundaries. For 

permanent district record purposes the field information obtained should be transferred to district 

maps no larger in scale than 1/4 or 1/2 inches per miles. The area covered by surveys each year 

should be identified by dating with the year of survey in order to plan the cycle for periodic 

resurveys of particular units. 

Trend and Trend Symbols 

Trends describe the progressive pattern of changes in range condition which develop over a 

period of at least several years times. These should be distinguished from the short term 

fluctuations which occur from year to year with more or less erratic patters usually associated with 

climatic variation. 

When former acquaintance of the examiner with any range area or when periodic resurveys 

permit a reliable observation of trend, the following symbols will be used to indicate trends 

appropriately on the field write-up form, No. 11-407, and on maps prepared to show trends. 

63 
Illustration 8 Page 4 

Symbol Name Imterpretaltioe 

++ Double plus Very marked upward trend, and/or great increase 

+ Single plus Definite and significant upward trend, and/or small 

increase 

(J) Balance Stable or indefinite position. Change is too small for 

positive determination of trend in either direction. 

Single minus Definite and significant downward trend, and/or small 

decrease. 

= Double minus Very marked downward trend, and/or great decrease. 

Correlation with Other Records 

Range condition surveys picture cumulative results but do not disclose definite reasons for the 

prevailing conditions. The reasons must be developed through correlated analysis of other 

historical and contemporary records which afford local details about the circumstances of forage 

production and its use. The cumulative influences most responsible for range condition and 

trends are seasonal and yearly variation in grazing pressure and weather. Consequently, timely 

records of actual stocking, utilization results, improvement installations, forage production 

circumstances, and weather influence must be kept or consulted to assign valid reasons for the 

existing situation. Correlation of such records with survey findings will indicate the nature and 

some measure of adjustment required to correct unsatisfactory or maintain satisfactory conditions. 

64 
Illustration 8 Page 5 

RANGE CONDITION CRITERIA FOR 

TWO PHASE METHOD SURVEYS 

PHASE I - FORAGE STAND INDEX RATINGS 

(Revised March 1957) 

QUALITY: Judge proportionate relationship of plants composing the stand which are 

respectively of high forage value^ of intermediate forage value, of low forage value and worthless 

for forage. Local lists of plants so classified are essential. 

25 - Outstanding predominance in the proportion of high quality perennial forage plants in 

the stand. Remainder of the stand is composed principally of medium value, with the 

percentage of either low value or worthless plants negligible. ..... . 

20- At least half of the stand.is composed of high quality perennial forage plants: 

Remainder of me stand is mosUy medium value plants, with minor percentages of low 

value and few worthless plants. (High quality annual plants may be considered here 

if they persist and are available for use throughout the grazing season.) 

75 - At least one-third of the perennial forage plants are of high quality. Medium value 

plants may be predominant. Low quality and/or worthless plants may not exceed onethird of the stand. (Annual plants of high and medium quality but short-lived 

usefulness are considered here.) 

10 - High quality perennial forage plants are few. A major proportion of the forage plants 

are of medium and low value. Worthless plants comprise a significant percentage of 

the stand. (Annual plants of medium and low value and with short life are considered 

here.) 

5 - Outstanding preponderance in proportion of low value and/or worthless forage plants 

in the stand. (These may be either annuals or perennials.) Remaining percentage of 

stand is principally composed of inferior or medium value plants. High quality plants 

- are negligible or relics. 

********************* 

0 - An extreme situation where only low value or worthless plants for forage comprise the 

stand. 

QUANTITY: Considering the site and environmental potentials for production of vegetation, 

judge the relative density of stand and degree of occupancy of available space by valuable and 

desirable forage plants, (i.e. high and medium values on lists). 

25 - There is a very dense stand of valuable and desirable forage plants. Such plants occupy 

the available space almost exclusively. 

20 - There is a thick stand in density of valuable and desirable forage plants. There may be 

minor amounts of space occupied by undesirable and worthless forage plants. 

65 
Illustration 8 Page 6 

15 - There is a medium stand in density of valuable and desirable plants. Low value plants 

and/or those worthless for forage may be equally dense or occupy equal space with the 

desirable plants. 

10 - There is a thin, open, or patchy stand of valuable and desirable plants. Low value 

and/or Worthless plants may be denser or occupy a major portion of the available space. 

5 - There is a scanty and widely-spaced stand of valuable and desirable plants. There may 

be dense stands of low value and worthless plants. St***************!):  

0 - An extreme situation - there is no appreciable density of valuable and desirable plants. 

Space occupancy is almost entirely by worthless plants. 

Judge the relative degree of health and thrift of the valuable and desirable forage 

plants. This is evidenced by their size, height, shape, color, firmness of rooting, amount of 

leafage or shoot production and flower or seed stalk abundance. Consider adversely comparative 

vigor of competing undesirable plants. 

25 - Valuable and desirable plants are robust, of maximum height and excellent color, well 

formed and producing abundant leafage, seed stalks and shoots. They are firmly rooted 

and show no sign of weakness or malformation. 

20 - Valuable and desirable plants are thrifty and of good height, shape and color. Grass 

clumps or sods are intact and well filled. Shrubs are sturdy, with good form and 

moderate numbers and length of shoots. 

15 - Valuable and desirable plants are of medium size, fair height, and with a medium 

volume of leafage and shoot production. Grass clumps may be small or sods patchy. 

Shrubs may have relatively fewer and shorter shoots or may be somewhat distorted in 

form. 

10 - Valuable and desirable plants are low or short poorly formed and unthrifty. Leafage 

and shoot production is limited. Grass clumps may have dead centers, sod formations 

may be broken and irregular. Shrubs are malformed or scrawny. 

5 - Valuable and desirable plants are critically weak and decadent with poor color, stunted 

form, and with very limited leafage or shoot production. Grass tufts or shrubs often 

are infirmly rooted or pedestaled. 

0 - Extreme situation - valuable and desirable plants are barely existing relics, or dying. 

66 
Illustration 8 Page 7 

REPRODUCTION: Judge the comparative abundance and evidence of survival of seedlings, 

and younger age classes of the valuable and desirable forage plants. Usually these are in 

competition with low value and worthless plants for future increases and replacements in the 

stand. 

25 - Reproduction of valuable and desirable plants is abundant. It is outstandingly 

predominant in all younger age classes and seedlings.. This indicates the constant 

presence of sufficient reproduction to build or maintain dominance of the better forage 

plants. 

20 - Reproduction of valuable and desirable plants is frequent and in the'majority with 

respect to most new seedlings and younger age classes. Some low value or worthless 

plant reproduction is present in minor amounts or in the older age classes of 

. reproduction. 

15 - Reproduction of valuable and desirable plants occurs in near equal amounts and 

frequency with that of low value or worthless plants. 

10 - Reproduction of valuable and desirable plants is scanty. It is in the minority in most 

younger age classes and may be overshadowed by of low value and worthless plants. 

5 - Reproduction of valuable and desirable plants is rare or negligible in amount. That of 

low value or worthless plants is usually predominant in all younger age classes. This 

indicates that the undesirable plants are definitely and dominantly in control of the 

stand. 

** ******************* 

0 - Extreme situation - no evidence that valuable and desirable plants are reproducing 

and surviving in the stand. 

67 
Illustration 8 Page 8 

Phase II = SITE AND SOIL MANTLE INDEX RATING 

PROTECTIVE COVER: Judge the relative density and mass effectiveness of the cover 

formed by all kinds of vegetation, including litter, shrubs, and trees, which shields the soil mantle 

from disturbance by water and wind. Note the size and pattern of bare spaces. 

25 - Dense cover making a full and continuous canopy over the surface of the ground. It 

affords maximum protection against erosion by water or wind. 

20 - A thick cover in which there may be some small and widely spaced openings. Usually 

it affords good protection against erosive forces, but the nature of cover and dispersion 

of plants or litter leaves some marginal openings bare. 

15 - A medium cover of vegetation, or a thick cover with large and patchy openings; or open 

stands of "annuals" or "perennials" which persist to maintain cover. These are 

moderately or partially effective as protection against erosive forces. 

10 - A thin cover of vegetation, or litter, or ephemeral and short-lived annual plants, or 

scattered clumps and islands of vegetation in large bare openings. These are only 

slightly effective against erosive forces. 

5 - Widely dispersed and scanty cover of vegetation and litter, or annual vegetation that 

vanishes quickly or appears only in some years. Ineffective against erosive forces as 

most of the ground surface is uncovered most of the time. 

0 - Extreme cases - barren of cover or nearly so. 

NATURAL VULNERABILITY: Judge comparatively the natural features of terrain and 

environment which tend either to accelerate or reduce the force and effectiveness of wind and 

water as erosion agents. Such features would include position and land form and position, 

topographic relief, slope and exposure; the nature and properties of the soils; surface stoniness 

or outcrops, and characteristic extremes of local weather. Consider these under presently 

prevailing conditions of cover and climate. The rating should reflect vulnerability to whichever 

erosion agent is most active locally. 

25 - Minimum erosion hazard from either water or wind because of natural feature. For 

water this usually means valleys, plains or terraces, gentle gradients, smooth terrain, 

and stable and absorptive soils. For wind action this usually means broken or rugged 

terrain and stable soils. 

20 - Slight erosion hazard from either water or wind because of natural features. For water 

this usually means some hilly or rolling terrain with moderate slopes, and fairly stable 

and absorptive soils. For wind this usually means undulating or rough topography with 

few level areas subject to wind sweep. 

68 
Illustration 8 Page 9 

75 - Moderate erosion hazard from all erosive forces because of natural features. Intermediate conditions of terrain relief and steepness of slope. Moderately stable and 

absorptive soils. ' {' 

10- High erosion hazard from either water or wind because of natural features. For water 

this usually means relatively steep slopes, dissected terrain, rather unstable soils, and 

sharply cut water courses. For wind this means much smooth topography which offers 

little protection from wind sweep, and loose or light soils. 

5 - Critical erosion hazard from either water or wind because of natural features. For water 

this usually means precipitous slopes, badland areas of shale or bare rock exposure, and 

disintegrating types of soils. For wind this usually means flat smooth terrain with little 

obstruction to wind sweep, and light or loose soils easily subject to blowing. 

********************* 

0 - Extreme situation as bare rock, exposed subsoil layers, or active dunes. 

SURFACE RUNOFF: Judge comparatively the rapidity with which water from snowmelt or 

rainfall enters the soil or runs off over the soil surface and in drainageways or stream courses. 

Consider the nature, amount and time of occurrence of all forms of precipitation. 

25 - No or very slight indication of surface runoff occurrence. Most of the water from snow 

or rain is apparently absorbed or moves so gradually that litter and soil are practically 

undisturbed. Drainageways and stream courses are smoothly rounded and apparently 

well stabilized. 

20- Some evidence that a small amount of surface runoff occurs. There is some disturbance 

of litter, fine soil, and small debris but these are carried only short distances and moved 

in zigzag patterns. Water courses and drainageways are fairly stable though well 

defined. 

15 - There are marks of moderate amounts of over-surface flow occurring, indicating 

lessened absorption and percolation. Litter movement and soil or debris lodgment 

behind obstacles is common but in irregular patterns. Drainageways show evidence 

of high water flow and debris deposits and some cutting of streambanks is evident. 

10 - Many indications of rapid runoff, low absorption, and a large volume of over-surface 

flow. Straight rill gully patterns may show on exposed slopes, drainages will show 

evidence of instability and active bank cutting or deepening. Litter accumulation is 

sparse. Stream courses show silt, and debris deposits intermittently or at high water 

stage levels of overflow plains. 

5 - Much evidence of occurrence of quick runoff and torrential or flood flows of waters. 

There is no litter accumulation in place. Gully patterns are incised on slops. Flood 

debris and coarse rubble deposits occur along watercourse banks and as fans at stream 

junctions. Watercourse channels are commonly straight walled and deeply sunk in 

valley floors. 

69 
Illustration 8 Page 10 

0 - Extreme situation - evidence of floods of great volume carried in thoroughly scoured 

channels. 

SOIL STABILITY: Judge comparatively the present rate of erosional activity by the degree 

of soil disturbance or movement. Results of either wind or water action or both should be 

considered. 

25 - Soil mantle is intact with no evidence of soil movement. The soil is accumulating in 

place with no sign of transportation. Surface litter is usually accumulating in place. 

20 - Slight evidence of some recent soil movement. There may be limited movement of fine 

soil from bare ground or on certain exposures, but generally stable surface conditions 

prevail. 

15 - Moderate movement of soil is plainly apparent and recent. There may be some 

terracing, or occasional plants on pedestals, or a few small rill gullies in exposed places. 

Some sediment deposits occur intermittently in runoff channels or against small 

obstructions elsewhere. Some gravel is exposed in bare spots where fine soil has been 

removed. 

10 - Well advanced and active soil erosion is evident. Usually there are active gullies to aid 

soil carriage and plants are on pedestals of soil. Drifted soil or debris deposits are very 

noticeable against minor surface obstructions. Drainageways show silty deposits or 

sandy material along channels or in fans. Erosion pavement is well formed on gravelly 

or stony soil, but the pattern is open. Transported soil appears about shrub clumps. 

5 - Severe soil erosion: There is exposed subsoil, closed erosion pavement on stony soils, 

many active and frequent gullies, sharply incised drainage channels, large fan deposits 

of soil and debris which includes gravel and rocks. There are wind scoured depressions 

and active wind cutting or embryonic dunes in sandy situations. 

0 - Extreme situation - as on barren badlands, or shifting sand dunes. 

70 
Illustration 9 Page 1 

rem 4-U19

Unit i960)

 UNITED STATES 

 DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

BUREAU OP LAND MANAGEMENT 

TWO-PHASE RANGE CONDITION FIELD RECORD 

BWfflla*f 

PRESENT USE BY 

Kind of Uveetock 

TRAVERSE ROUTE 

LOCATION TIE * 

DESCRIPTION 

OF TYPE 

-Kama—Number 

List of Principal 

Speclea 

DESCRIPTION 

OF SITE 

Land Pom 

Topography 

Ripuaiue 

SoU 

Molatiira 

FORAGE STAND 

Total at (Trend) 

Quality 

Qoastlty 

Vicar 

Rapradoction 

SITE-SOIL MANTLE 

Total m (Trend) 

Protective Cover 

VolnerablUtT 

Runoff Raalataaca 

BoU SUbUltr 

TWO-PHASE 

RATING. 

Stat* a District 

Unit or Allotment ' 

Data 

Hmbm Season Stocking Rat* (AUMs) 

Prom |T» ( ) 

PRESENT RANGE RESOURCE CONDITION INDEX 

1 2 3 4 5 

/ 

..,.• 

( ) ( ) ( ) < > > (

 > 

( ) ( ) ( ) ( > ( ) 

/ - • 

' 

•Identify aach nUaop atatloa by Section, Tomablp, Ranee, or W laasmsrk hater** 

71 
Illustration 9 Page 2 

SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION 

LOCATION TIE" 

DESCRIPTION 

OF TYPE 

Nemo—Number 

Llot of Principal 

Specteo 

(6) 

PRESENT RANGE RESOURCE CONDITION INDEX 

m (8) (9) (10) 

DESCRIPTION 

OF SITE 

Land Form 

Topography 

Espoaure 

SoU 

ESoiDture 

FORAGE STAND 

Total & (Trend) 

Quality 

Quantity 

Vigor 

Reproduction 

SITE-SOIL 

MANTLE 

Total & (Trand) 

Protective Cover 

Vulnerability 

•Runoff Reoiotance 

SoU Stability 

TWO-PHASE RATING 

(

(

 ) 

) 

( ) 

( ) 

( ) 

( ) 

UNIT OR ALLOTMENT SUMMARY 

(

(

 ) 

) 

(

(

 ) 

) 

Area:

(Acres) 

Federal Range

 Gross

 Unusable

 . ._ _ Alienated

 Game Use Only

 Federal Range 

 Usable by livestock 

Condition Classification (Usable Federal Range): Acres 

(Acres) Excellent Good Fair Poor Bad 

Percent, Each Class: 

Trend: Improving Static or Indefinite Declining .._ 

Percent _ : 

72 
Supplemental Studies -r- Trend Score Card 

IV. TREND SCORE CARD 

Editor's Note: The Trend Score Card procedures were transcribed from the original text in 

the old BLM Manual, Volume IX, Range Release No. 38, dated September 12,I960. : 

A . Changes in density and composition of perennial vegetation are measurable to a large 

degree and it should be possible to obtain direct trend values from study plots. Plant vigor 

and soil erosion are less easily measured and will depend chiefly upon careful descriptive 

evaluations of change. Form 4-1422 "Range Trend Score Card" (Illustration A 0) has been 

devised to aid in rating trend from information gathered by remeasurement of permanent 

study plots.v, ,•"•" ,""---.. :>: •'" . . • •'• -- ' " ••:>­

The criteria are presented for sake of illustration and are based upon positive or negative 

values assigned to the different elements listed. The indicated changes in both soil and 

vegetal conditions are weighted to* give plus or minus values, and added algebraically to 

reflect site condition changes if any. An excess of plus values indicates improving conditions;.an excess of minus values the reverse..; When.the two are approximately balanced the 

range is judged to be in a relatively static or unchanging condition. 

The numerical values assigned to this form were arrived at on a more or less arbitrary basis. 

Therefore, experience in use may dictate a change in the weights given to trend elements and 

in the number of transect hits required to meet the criterion of a moderate or great change in 

soil or vegetal condition. For example, let us consider "Density" under paragraph A of the 

form. In a sparsely vegetated desert type, an increase of 3 to 5 transect hits on vegetation 

might be equivalent to a 100 percent increase in plant density. The same increase in transect 

hits on an average Western range type might approximate a 10 percent to 15 percent increase 

in plant density. Thus, in the Southwest it seems certain that the scale of relative value 

accorded to hits on vegetation will have to be altered. This is permissible in any case, but in 

order to maintain uniformity of approach it is recommended that all such necessary changes -', 

be developed at the State or Area level, and that they not be allowed to vary appreciably 

within or between grazing districts. . 

B . ; In measuring trend, comparison is made with the data obtained from at least one prior 

measurement of the transect. As pointed out by Parker, the criteria forjudging trend of 

vegetal condition may differ in accordance with the initial condition rating given the type. 

For example, a sagebrush type initially judged as Poor might completely lack a perennial 

grass understory, in which case the later establishment of a low palatability perennial grass 

would probably indicate improvement. A similar type judged as Good would be almost 

certainly have had a fair understory of palatable perennial grasses. A subsequent invasion by 

the same low palatability grass would in this instance suggest range regression to be taking 

place. 

C . When considering the elements of composition and vigor as applied to major forage 

species in the type, the situation may arise where one class of desirable plants is deteriorating 

through overuse and another is improving and moving in as a replacement. This is most 

readily illustrated by winter game areas where palatable browse species may be decreasing in 

73 
Supplemental Studies — Trend Score Card 

vigor, condition, and area occupied, while perennial grasses are on the increase. In such an 

event, major use of the type must be carefully considered and greatest weight given to the 

condition of the plant species carrying most of the grazing use load. In instances of this kind 

full documentation of the situation should be made by explanation under the space for 

"Additional Remarks." 

1. To supplement the foregoing, the examiner should refer to the local plant classification lists (Section II, Illustration 7, Page 1) which are prepared as a foundation procedure of the Two-Phase study method and which provided the basic data for the preparation of the Intensive Study Score Cards. 

2. As an aid to recognition of plant species having value to wildlife, a supplemental 

list of common range plants is included as Illustration 7, Page 2. Districts may add to 

this list or assign different plant values as determined by local conditions. 

3. The plant classification lists will be of greatest value as they relate to measurement 

of changes in composition of a vegetative type. However, the presence or absence of 

desirable or undesirable plants may themselves under certain conditions be an indication 

of trend. 

74 
Illustration 10 Page 1 

Fonn 4-1422 . UNITED STATES Date (July 1<*0) DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT Examiner 

RANGE TREND SCORE CARD Cluster Number 

District Location 

Allotment or Unit Range Type 

I. VEGETATION 

A. DENSITY (as compared to prior transect measurements) 

1. Density of all perennial plants has increased 

a. Greatly (more than 10 bits on transect) 

b. Moderately (3 to 10 bits on transect) 

-2. Relatively unchanged (0 to 2 bits increase or decrease)' 

3. Density of perennial plants has decreased 

a. Moderately (3 to 10 bits on transect) 

•< / ­

b. Greatly (more than 10 bits on transect) 

B. COMPOSITION (as compared to prior transect measurements) 

1. Desirable perennial forage plants have increased in number; better species may be reestablishing (refer to district plant list); reproduction and young 

age groups of preferred species are present 

a. Change is moderate to great (more than 10 bits on transect) 

b. Change is slight to moderate (3 to 10 bits on transect) 

2. Relatively unchanged (0 to 2 bits increase or decrease) 

3. Desirable perennial forage plants have decreased in number; some species may have disappeared; reproduction of desirable plants is very scarce or absent; annuals or undesirables may have invaded the type 

a. Change is slight.to moderate (3 to 10 bits on transect) 

b. Change is moderate to great (more Iban 10 bits on transect) 

*4. Summary of composition change as compared to prior transect measurement 

(list species and plus or minus bits) 

a. Perennial plants increasing: 

' b. Perennial plants decreasing: 

c. Invading species: 

* For informational ptupoaoa only. Data doe* not •sta r Into nxmatical rating of composition. 

Transect Number 

CrcU .ptropriat. 

»TATIC 

1 

+2 •iiii-iiiiiiiu 

+ 1 

llilll 0 

lililiil ::::::::::::::: ::::::ll!:i:!:: 

::::::::::::::: !:::::::::::::: 

Ill 

+4' 

+2 

111 0

III 

•111 

:::::::::::::::

11 

III 

>'»» 

.=. .

•Ill 

•is 

ills 

•III 

•111

m 

- 1 

- 2 

111!! 

ISS1IIII 

llilll! 

IlilHI 

llill l 

III 

-2 

-4 

i l l 

ISISSIS 

ill! 

• I l l 

75 
Illustration 10 Page 2 

IM­ DEPROVING CLINING 

C. VIGOR (Judge any change in plant vigor and general condition relative to 

descriptive terms and scores or actual measurements listed on prior wrileups) 

!:::::::•• :: 

1. Vigor of perennial plant species is good to excellent; all forage plants appear 

strong end robust; no dead or dying plants and previously overused or un­

healthy species recovering; invasion of bare areas tailing place 

*TTH : 

a. Improvement in vigor and condition judged to be exceptional +2 

b. Improvement is definite but only moderately so +1 

.I.:.ITIIJIJI J 

2. Vigor of major forage species relatively unchanged from earlier writeups 

3. Vigor and condition are weakening; better forage species unhealthy, partially 

dead or dying; no reestablishment of desirable plants and range generally is 

an unhealthy condition 

a. Condition of major species has deteriorated from previous check but - 1 downward trend is moderate 

b. Condition of major forage species has deteriorated noticeably and at a -2 rapid rate; no signs of slowing up 

TOTAL OF VEGETAL FACTORS (+ OR -) 


Indicated trend of vegetative condition is £2 Upward "~] Static \^2 Downward 

H. SOILS AND EROSION 

A. EROSION HAZARD INDEX (Measure changing conditions directly from ground 

cover index on "Record of Permanent Line Transect") 

1. Measurable increase in Ground Cover Index 

: a.

 Great improvement; significant increase in ground cover (decrease of 

more +2 than 10 hits on bare soil) 

b. Moderate improvement; fair increase in ground cover (decrease 1 to 10 hits 

on hare soil) +1 

2. Ground cover index relatively unchanged (0 to 2 hits decrease or increase) 

3. Measurable decrease in Ground Cover Index 

a. Decrease in ground cover is moderate (increase of 3 to 10 bits on bare soil) 

b. Decrease in ground cover is serious (increase of more than 10 hits on 

bare soil) -2 

76 
Illustration 10 Page 3 

IM­ DE­ •TAT1C , 

PROVING CLINING 

B. SOIL CONDITION (Judge change in amount 0/ plant litter, relative stability of 

residual soil, degrees of depletion or accretion of transported soil layers and 

• healing of eroded areas) * 

1. Plant litter is accumulating and excellent layer is in place; little, if any, 

evidence of erosion and any formerly eroded areas completely healing;, nc 

evidence of plant pedestaling or wind movement of soils 

a. Degree of improvement from prior measurement is very High 

• 

b. Improvement is noticeable but only in a moderate amount 

-

2. Improvement, if any, is,minor and is compensated forby some slight deterioration 

3. Plant litter has diminished and little evidence of replacement; gully and sheet erosion are continuing and may have accelerated; little if any healing taking place; 

definite evidence of soil movement by loss or accumulation of transported soil 

a. Deterioration is noticeable but at a moderate rate 

b. Deterioration has been rapid and no signs of lessened erosion P-tivity 

or improvement 

- v 'Judgment may also consider increase or decrease of trampling activity by livestock 

and any significant change in rodent activity in the area 

TOTAL OF SOIL AND EROSION FACTORS (+or-) 

Indicated trend of soil condition is J Upward Q Static

CLASSIFICATION 

Improving (rapidly) 

Improving (slowly) 

Unchanged 

Deteriorating (slowly) 

Deteriorating (rapidly) 

INTERPRETATIO N

I. VEGETATION . 

+5 to +8 

+ 1 to +4 

0 

- 1 to - 4 

- 5 to - 8 

 O F OVERAL L SCORE * 

II. SOILS 

+4 to +6 

+1 to +3 

0 

- 1 to - 3 

- 4 to - 6 

III. ADDITIONAL DATA 

A. PRECIPITATION (Check condition observed) 

1. Current conditions _^\ Above normal , ~] Below normal ' I Normal

2. Estimate of average moisture condition during preceding 3 to 5 year period: 

::::::::::::::: ::::::::::::::: 

+4 . 

+2 . 

0 

- 2 

- 4 

..:.:;:::: 

:;::::::::::::: 

*"•»•••"--" * 

 [^ Downward 

IIL COMBINED 

+9 to +14 

+3 to + 8 

0 to ± 2 

- 3 to - 8 

- 9 to -14 

 __J] Drought conditions prevail 

! I Above normal Q ] Normal £ 3 Below normal 

* Circle the appropriate rating 

77 
Illustration 10 Page 4 

B. UTILIZATION OF FORAGE PLANTS BY CLASS OF ANIMAL0 

I. C&sweat eitilisatftoa: 

SUQEI« CMototo Pra^or Cleso Enttoco 

2. EottDDto of avosoQQ utiliso&iaa for prccodlOQ 3 to S yoar posicd: 

Slight Hcfcrate Proper Clooe Entaoso 

C. UNUSUAL SITE INFLUENCES ohich Eay havo affected Ibe ta2edratia0D: Liot ooch factosp oo prolonged drought, 

fise, insect iafectatica, etc., cad ouplata offset Ojjoa otudy oito. 

0. ADDITIONAL REMARKS: Uco t&ia opoco to docuaoaS- cay cddiaoaol ovidcncG of caaaeiag tcsad ia plant or soil 

ccaditioa ohich io isot ofcooa obovo. 

0

 Ecio? Syabol diractly ia blmh as C for cattlo. D for door, S for sbcap, ate. 

78 
Supplemental Studies — Guides for Estimating Trend 

V. GUIDES FOR ESTIMATING TREND 

Editor's Note: The Guides for Estimating Trend procedures were transcribed from the 

original text-in the old BLMManual, Volume IX,"Range Release No. 38, dated 

September 12, I960. 

The following factors or indicators of trend may be used as a guide in estimating current 

range trend. This listing is not complete and its application must be accompanied by the 

examiner's best judgment of conditions existing at each particular site. No one set of factors 

will give a positive determination and observations should be made of as many of these 

criteria as possible. 

A . From the standpoint of vegetal condition: 

Evidence of Upward Evidence of Static Evidence of Downward 

Trend Condition Trend 

* 

Good perennial forage plants The age class distribution of .• Evidence of decreasing • 

are represented in all age existing species is adequate perennial forage plants or 

classes from seedlings f to maintain the stand. As a unnatural age class distribuT . 

through mature plants. rule of thumb this should . tion such as absence or 

approximate: Seedlings and scarcity of seedlings or. 

young plants 10 to 50 percent. young plants. 

. . ; . _ - ' • ' • ' ' • • ' . ' " • - ' • " • r •-_.-" " * Mature plants - 40 percent ormore. Old plants 10 percent : . ' . . . • • . • . ' - '

" :' I - ' ' •' >' '- '"' *' ' 

• ' • " ' • " ' ' '•'•"'' • : • " l " . \ " ' " . '.: • or more 

Undesirable species „. Closed stand of mature plants Undesirable species 

decreasing or present only which maintain dominance. increasing in stand with a 

as relics. heavy percentage of young 

plants. 

A definite increase in density Desirable browse plants Desirable browse plants 

and vigor of good forage showing one year or more of heavily hedged. Current 

plants as based upon past ob­ twig regrowth present. Few growth heavily utilized (over 

servations or comparisons dead branches. Generally of 60 percent of annual growth). 

with comparable adjacent healthy appearance and vigor. Larger plants high-lined. 

areas. . No serious evidence of Many plants may be dead or 

replacement of palatable partially dying out. Inferior 

browse species by less species may be replacing 

desirable plants. palatable ones. Grass stands 

being invaded by inferior 

browse species. 
Supplemental Studies — Guides for Estimating Trend 

B. From the standpoint of Soil and Erosion: 

Evidence of Upward 

Trend 

Good accumulation of plant 

litter. Litter and duff relatively undisturbed and in well 

defined zones. 

Little or no evidence of wind 

erosion taking place. Any 

existing bare or dune areas 

being taken over by plants, 

most of which are desirable 

perennials. The above is 

especially indicative if establishment is by seed from 

palatable perennials. 

No evidence of soil deposition 

or buildup around base of 

plants. 

Any eroded gullies healed or 

healing. Sides as well as 

bottoms becoming covered 

with protective vegetation. 

Erosion pavement areas fully 

vegetated within limits of the 

site potential. 

Evidence off Static 

Condition 

Fair accumulation of litter, 

and little evidence of movement taking place. 

Any bare or dune areas are 

not increasing in size. Little 

or no evidence of change in 

marginal areas of vegetation. 

The deposition of soil is 

very slight and nonrecurring. 

Not noticeable on young 

plants. Old alluvial deposits 

largely vegetated. 

Gullies mostly healed. Not 

deepening and no apparent 

increase in head cutting; 

gully walls will be at least 

partly vegetated and nearing 

angle of repose. Erosion 

pavement, if present, is not 

increasing. 

Evidence off Downward 

Trend 

Litter, if any, being depleted. 

Top layers may be mixed 

with or covered by soil 

particles. 

Bare areas or sand blowouts 

or dunes, if present, appear to 

be deepening or increasing in 

size. No evidence of successful invasion of plant life. 

There is noticeable soil 

deposition around base of 

plants, including young age 

groups. Plants will often be 

pedestalled. If roots are 

exposed this is evidence of 

very recent soil removal. 

Gullies present and unhealed, 

active headcutting, gullies 

steep sloped and may be deepening. Rill channeling 

observable. Erosion pave 

ment forming. 

80 
Supplemental Studies — Exclosures 

VI. EXCLOSURES 

Editor's Note: Procedures for using exclosures to determine range condition were transcribed from the original text in the old BLM Manual, Volume IX, Range Release No. 38, ' 

dated September 12, 1960, and from a reference in the Journal of Range Management, July 

1958, "Exclosures in Big Game Management in Utah" by Stanford Young. 

It has been a practice of long standing to construct range exclosures as a means of providing 

an index of the effect of grazing use by different classes of animals and to give a record of 

changing range condition. 

A . Exclosure will often be set up in cooperation with State or other Federal agencies with a 

joint analysis being made of the use data obtained. 

B. Where common use of the range takes place, one section of the exclosure should exclude 

only livestock and another should be game-proof. If there is an indication of even moderate 

rodent or rabbit population in the area a third and smaller division should be fenced against 

these animals. Even experienced observers cannot always distinguish between deer and 

rodent use. In addition, it is always desirable to have one small portion of an exclosure 

completely protected against use by all animal life to serve as a check on other environmental 

factors affecting plant growth such as fluctuations of climate, disease, insect infestations, etc. 

A fourth section of the study area should be marked but left open to unrestricted normal use. 

C State game departments are doing a considerable amount of this work and may be 

consulted for fencing specifications if exclosures are to be constructed other than on a cooperative basis. However, if such plots are to be constructed with the study of game use as a 

major objective, it is strongly recommended that it be made a cooperative venture if this is 

possible. 

D . Selection of exclosure sites should be given as careful consideration as in the selection 

of any other area for study, taking all pertinent factors into consideration. It should be noted 

that exclosures are a valuable tool of management regardless of the type of range they are 

placed upon. 

E. Permanent transect studies and photographic stations should be established as a means 

of recording the change in range and soil condition which may result at the exclosure site. 

Pellet count records within the different exclosure sections will also provide data for establishing the ratio of game vs. livestock use of the areas (Section VII). (An excellent reference 

is found in the Journal of Range Management. July 1958 - "Exclosures in Big Game Management in Utah" by Stanford Young.) ' 

Editor's Note: The following information was summerized from the Journal of Range Management cited above and has been edited. 

81 
Supplemental Studies — Exclosures 

Construction of Exclosures should be guided by the following points: 

1. Exclosures should be located on representative parts of range, physiographically as 

well as vegetatively, and they should enclose ecological units of range that can develop 

naturally and independently of the surrounding range. The more heterogenous the 

conditions, the larger the exclosure should be. Total-protected, game-only, and openrange areas should be carefully selected to have equivalent conditions, thereby allowing 

for accurate comparisons. Experienced range ecologists should be delegated the responsibility of location and design. 

2. Exclosures should be permanent installations, with no more being constructed than 

can be properly maintained by the agency which built them. Once their upkeep is 

neglected and animals enter, much of the accrued development is destroyed. 

3. Exclosures should be located on the important vegetation types to sample use by 

the different kinds of range animals. 

4. Fencing should be of the most open design practical to minimize its effects on the 

range environment. However, log and block fencing, because of its durability, would 

possibly be necessary where deep snows prevail. Fencing that excludes deer should 

stand at least 8 feet high. Fencing excluding livestock while allowing deer to enter 

freely should stand 3 to 372 feet high and be railed. 

5. Where rabbits are abundant, part of the total-protected area should be made rabbitproof. This can be done with 1-inch by 1-inch mesh welded wire, supported against 

sagging, the lower edge of which should be buried 6 inches and pegged securely into the 

ground. 

<6>. A sign should be installed at a prominent location giving the name, date built, 

building agency, and purpose. The sign should also identify the structures and discourage their use as corrals. Stiles or ladders should permit access to the totally protected 

portion, since gates or doors may be left open. 

7. Included in the compiled records should be permanently located photo-hubs, along 

with aspect and fenceline photographs. Also recorded should be climate and animal use, 

including classes, seasons, and intensities. In addition, carefully designed studies 

sampling the different components of the range, ground cover, and browse should be 

established on the exclosures and surrounding range. These studies, standardized and 

regularly repeated, would chronicle the long-range effects of differential animal use on 

the range. 
Supplemental Studies — Pellet Studies 

VII. PELLET STUDIES 

Editor's Note: The Pellet Studies procedures were transcribed from the original text in the 

old BLM Manual, Volume IX, Range Release No. 38, dated September 12, I960. 

The counting of deer pellet (dung) groups as a method of determining the number of gameuse days per acre, the approximate big game population of an area; and the trend in use from 

year to year, was described by McCain, et al., in 1940 and 1948 (A Method for Measuring 

Deer Range Use. 13th trans, North American Wildlife Conference). Studies by Rassmussen, 

Doman, and Smith (1943) indicated that the defecation rate for mule deer averages approximately 13 pellet groups per day. - Recendy workers in California (Dasmann and Taber, 1955) 

. have found evidence that pellet deposition rates may vary with a change in diet Robinette, et 

al., discussion at the 23rd Trans. North American Wildlife Conference in 1958 found at the 

Little" Hills Experiment Station in Colorado, an average rate of 15 pellet-groups per day were 

deposited by mule deer using moderately stocked sagebrush - juniper type winter range which 

is in good condition, or thirteen groups per day if the deer were utilizing depleted winter 

ranges. 

A . It is not contemplated that Bureau technicians will initiate studies of this kind except in 

rare instances. Tins brief statement is for the purpose of explaining the procedures used, 

since it is likely that the Bureau may cooperate with State agencies in checks of game use on 

BLM ranges. 

B . By recording the pellet groups found in certain prescribed units of range such as 1/100­

acre or 1/10-acre plots, it is possible to obtain the number of game days use per acre or actual 

grazing use which has taken place: If the period (months or days) of use of the area.is known 

it is possible within reasonable limits to determine the game population numbers by dividing 

the total deer days use by the length of stay in the area. 

C Trend of use can be determined by noting the change in total deer days use from one 

year to the next. Then too, the game days use per acre can be correlated with" the browse 

production and utilization information gathered in the regular study program. No further 

instruction in conducting this type of study is believed to be necessary for the reasons stated. 

Should there develop a need, detailed procedures can be set up when required. 

83 

Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

VIII. WEIGHT ESTIMATE AND OCULAR 

RECONNAISSANCE 

Editor's Note: Because of the similarities in procedures, the Weight Estimate and the Ocular 

Reconnaissance methods of vegetation survey have been combined to reduce space. The 

procedures discussed here apply to both methods unless otherwise stated. 

The procedures for collecting data using these methods were transcribed from oldBLM 

Manual 4412.1 IB, "Weight Estimate Forage Survey Handbook," Release 4-4, dated 4/30/63, 

and BLM Manual 4412.11A, "Ocular Reconnaissance Forage Survey Handbook," Release 4,­

3, dated 3/30/63. 

A. Introduction 

Bureau of Land Management forage survey techniques are based on research findings of 

correlations between vegetation and soil conditions and environmental influences, including 

intensity of grazing. Surveys and studies are designed to rate ranges for maximum sustained 

use by livestock and game and to improve or to maintain ranges in a good productive condition. The ultimate test of surveys, and grazing capacities based on them, is trend in range 

condition. Capacity estimates are properly used only as a starting point in management. 

Permissible grazing rates will vary with changes in range condition due to changes in weather 

or intensity of use. Continuous studies which may include actual use, climate analysis, 

condition and trend, utilization and production studies are necessary to follow up a survey 

and adjust initially established grazing capacities. < 

B. Forage Survey Methods 

They will be used primarily for initial adjustments in stocking rates on ranges which have not 

before been subjected to reliable forage production or grazing capacity studies, and for 

equitable allottings to users and proper distribution of grazing use. The choice between these 

and other methods will be based on the apparent advantages that each offers for the particular 

range under consideration, and on any special study requirements. Prescribed methods 

include ocular reconnaissance and weight estimate plot procedures. Each has unique characteristics which make it more or less adaptable to specific ranges and special requirements. 

Some important considerations in objectively determining an appropriate method include the 

nature and amount of vegetative cover, the extent of fluctuations in annual forage production, 

the practical intensity of the survey, and the qualifications of survey personnel. 

C. Objective 

The primary objective of a forage survey is to determine the amount of forage which is 

currently available to livestock and game under proper range use. Under this .concept a 

forage survey is a forage production study. 

85 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

D. Technical Considerations 

WEIGHT ESTIMATE: The weight estimate forage survey method is a system of inventorying vegetation by estimating total green forage weight and converting to dry weight, by 

species, in a range type. 

OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE: The ocular reconnaissance forage survey is a system of 

inventorying vegetation by estimating total forage density and percentage composition, by 

species, in a range type. 

The more important technical elements involved in these procedure are described below. 

1. Range Types 

A range type is the mapping unit used in forage surveys and other range studies. It is a 

relatively homogeneous classification unit of appropriate minimum size consisting of a 

portion or sometimes all of a vegetative type as determined by general aspect. 

Derivation of Range Types. The 18 standard aspect vegetative types are first delineated 

and then subdivided as needed on the basis of several mapping criteria in deriving range 

types of desirable evaluation size. The segmenting criteria listed in the order of usual 

application are: 

(1) Abundance of vegetation 

(2) Species composition 

(3) Slope 

(4) Exposure 

(5) Kind of soil 

(6) Erosion 

Usually the practical minimum type size will be reached before all of these criteria are 

given specific consideration. The most important ones are first considered, and are 

commonly as listed above. 

2. Weight and Density 

a. WEIGHT ESTIMATE: Under the weight estimate method, current green weight 

production by plant species is estimated on plots. These green weights are then 

converted to air dry values after determination of moisture content. Species weights 

in grams are determined and recorded on Form 4-1276 (Illustration 11). The grams 

per plot are then converted to pounds per acre. Weights are recorded to the nearest 

five grams per plot except that any species having less than 2 grams is recorded as 1 

gram. 

(1) Stubble Height. Estimates and clippings will include all accessible herbage 

produced during the current year within appropriate limits of grazing use. 

Herbaceous plants are clipped to the root crown. 

86 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

(2) Height of Grazing. Weight estimates will include all current year's growth of 

each plant species that is available for use up to the grazing height of animals 

concerned. The standard heights of grazing for the different kinds of animals 

are: cattle - 5 feet; sheep - 3'/2 feet; deer - 4lh feet; elk andmoose - 7 feet; and 

antelope and mountain sheep - 3'/2 feet. The value used for a particular species 

will be the height for the animal making substantial use. If two or more animals 

make use, a proportionate height will be used. 

(3) Allowance for Utilization and Growth Stage. It will be necessary to make 

appropriate allowances in estimates for any grazing utilization that may have 

already occurred on current growth prior to the time of examination, and for the 

growth stage of each species at that time. The estimates should reflect as nearly 

as feasible the full current year's development of each species. 

(4). Old Plant Growth. Care must be exercised when clipping and weighing plot 

vegetation to remove all old growth of previous years. 

(5) Conversion to Dry Weight. The conversion of green plant weights to air dry 

values is of utmost importance and should be done as accurately as possible. 

Moisture contents vary considerably, not only between species but between 

seasons and with time of day and site conditions. Because of these complexities, moisture contents of different species should be determined at frequent 

intervals throughout the field seasons. Green samples of each species are , 

clipped within grazing height limits so as to represent average site conditions 

and diurnal fluctuations. The clippings are placed preferably in light weight, 

loose woven cloth bags and air dried until a constant weight is reached. Dry 

matter percentages are computed from sample weight differences and entered on 

the writeup form (Illustration 11). Pounds of dry weight per acre are derived by 

applying these percentage factors to estimated pounds of green weight per acre. 

Moisture content of plants generally becomes less and is more constant toward' 

the latter part of the field season. 

(6) Training for Weight Estimation. The efficiency and accuracy of the work of the 

members of the survey party depend a great deal upon the initial training given 

them. The entire crew should work together for at least a week, or until estimates of weight are uniform among them. Following the training period, the 

Chief of Party will work individually with each of the men requiring further 

improvement of his work and to check his progress. During the course of the 

survey, the crew should work together for a portion of a day each week in order 

to correlate estimates and to resolve problems in field procedure that may arise. 

OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE: Under the ocular reconnaissance method, density 

will consist of general estimates of overhead (vertical) ground cover for the current 

year's growth of all usable vegetation on each range type. Density will be recorded 

as the decimal proportion of the ground that is covered as viewed from directly 

above. Values for each species are obtained through composition estimates of the 

percentage of the total density attributable to each. These two estimates are made 

concurrently as the examiner traverses the type. Brief notes are advisable for 

87 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

different parts of the type to aid the examiner in properly weighing the variations 

encountered in his final write-up. It would be well to complete Form 4412-1 

(Illustration 12) when within an apparently average part of the type, and make 

needed adjustments as the type examination ensues. (Average density is recorded at 

the bottom of the form, and percent composition is listed for each species.) 

(1) Height of Grazing. Density estimates will include all current year's growth of 

each plant species that is available for use up to the grazing height of animals 

concerned. The standard heights of grazing for the different kinds of animals 

are: cattle - 5 feet; sheep - Vli feet; deer - 4'/2 feet; elk and moose - 7 feet, and 

antelope and mountain sheep - 3'/2 feet. The value used for a particular species 

will be the height for the animal making substantial use. If two or more animals 

make use, a proportionate height will be used. 

(2) Vegetative Layers. In making density estimates where distinct and overlapping 

layers of vegetation are involved, each layer will be given separate consideration. 

(3) Allowance for Utilization and Growth Stages. It will be necessary to make 

appropriate allowances in estimates for any grazing utilization that may have 

already occurred on current growth prior to the time of examination, and for the 

growth stage of each species at that time. The estimates should reflect as nearly 

as feasible the full current year's development of each species. 

(4) Training for Density Estimation. As an aid in gaining a concept of density and 

in training for density estimation, a square-foot wire frame divided by cross 

wires into fourths may be used. This frame is helpful to the examiner in determining the area from which the current growth of each species must be taken to 

make a square-foot of cover. The vegetation may be sufficiently bunched, either 

from its natural position or after clipping, to present a full cover within the 

frame. Undue compression and overlapping of herbage should be avoided in 

developing a concept of the amount of naturally distributed herbage of different 

species required to form a square-foot of density. Other aids that may be used in 

estimation training or in checking overhead density estimates include line 

intercept transects, line point transects, or pace point transects. Perhaps the most 

readily used of these is the latter wherein hits at the point of the toe on each pace 

along a predetermined transect line are taken as the basis for density determination by species. Line intercepts and point readings have been used to some 

extent, but are more time consuming. 

(5) Vegetation Composition. Composition ratings are based on the proportion of the 

total vegetative density provided by each species. The sum of the ratings is 100 

percent. This sum is first proportioned, in the estimation process, between the 

three main categories (life forms) of plants, and then these respective group 

values are divided among the component species in accord with their relative 

amounts. 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

3. Animal Unit Ratios 

In computing the approximate AUM's of use for the various kinds of grazing animals, 

their respective animal unit equivalents must be specified. These ratios as used in the 

past have varied to some extent for specific animals. The average head of cattle run on a 

particular range will be considered an animal unit by the Bureau. Animal unit equivalents for other kinds of animals have often been set somewhere within the following 

limits: 5 to 6 sheep, 5 to 7 goats, 5 to 7 antelope, 4 to 5.5 mule deer, 4.5 to 7 whitetailed deer, 5 to 6 black-tailed deer, and 1.25 to 1.75 elk. All of these ratios refer to only 

those animals over 6 months old. Younger animals, constituting the natural increase of 

the herd, are not considered in setting numbers of animal units or computing AUM's of 

• use . - '.';••' V . '••";.'..'.. . * " .'""'..•.. 

4. Plant Symbol Lists 

As complete a list as possible of the plants of the survey area will be prepared for use of 

the party members. Plants will be listed alphabetically in the three groups—grasses 

(including grass-like plants), forbs; and shrubs (including trees)—using their scientific 

binomials. Common names may be added in another column after the binomials, if it is 

thought any useful purpose may be served thereby. Ordinarily, this plant and plant 

symbol list is prepared in conjunction with a listing of proper use factors for each 

species. " 

A four-letter symbol will be listed for each plant in a column preceding the binomials. 

These symbols will-be used on type writeup sheets. They consist of the first two letters 

of each of the generic arid specific names. Only the first letter of a species symbol is 

capitalized. In the case of unidentified or grouped species of a genus, the first four 

• letters of the generic name are used, and all are capitalized. The use of four-letter rather 

than three-letter symbols minimizes their duplication among plants of an area. Where 

the few duplications do occur, the conventional symbol is modified by adding a number 

beginning with "1 " at the end., Numbers are assigned in order of importance of the. 

plants involved. Thus, "2" is added to the symbol of the second most important plant. 

5. Proper Use Factors 

a. WEIGHT ESTIMATE: Lists of proper use factors will be prepared by plant 

species for the animal use complex on each significant use area of the survey. These 

factors will be based upon percent of weight taken upon proper use of the range. 

Factors for Each Use. Complex. Whenever any of the range use segments of a 

survey area support a substantial amount of use by a particular game animal in 

addition to livestock use, proper use factors will be derived for the use complex. 

(1) Kinds of Animals and Seasons of Use. These factors will be established by 

n

 plant species for all kinds of grazing animals for all pertinent seasons of use 

combined, and will be listed in a table which includes the plant and plant 

symbol list. 

/ 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

(2) Proper Use Determination. "Proper use" for a particular plant is the degree to 

which its current growth will be utilized by grazing animals when the range is 

properly used. Such percentage use factors are derived by determining the 

differences between total current production in a normal growth year and the 

amount left after proper use. They indicate all removal in the process of grazing 

including wastage by trampling. Any foliage removal or damage by rodents, 

insects, or disease is provided for under utilization deductions, and is therefore 

not considered in establishing proper use factors. 

(a) Local Derivation of Factors. Any existing proper use factor tables which 

have been standardized for ranges similar to the survey area may be used as 

a guide in formulating factors for use on a survey. However, specific 

factors will be established on the basis of local use conditions. Grazing use 

of particular plants by each kind of animal varies considerably from one 

locality to another. Proper use varies with a number of criteria such as 

preference of different kinds of animals, season of use, vegetation composition, weather conditions as expressed in volume of growth and texture of 

forage and topography. 

(b) Bases for Determinations. Proper use factors should be based on all pertinent information available, paying special attention to utilization studies and 

observations within or near the survey area. The results of any applicable 

research studies should receive careful attention. Such studies have recently 

modified the concepts of physiological requirements of forage plants in 

regard to grazing use. Results indicate that the maximum allowable use for 

most key forage plants is normally somewhere near 50% of the current 

growth. About that proportion of most important perennials must be left 

after grazing to assure their perpetuation and that optimum quantities of 

forage are produced. Studies of some browse plants have indicated that use 

up to 60% of current growth may be allowed, and still permit the plants to 

thrive; but this seems to be the upper limit. These percentages refer to total 

removal including that by rodents and insects. Therefore, it will be found 

that most key plant use factors will be below these values. 

(c) Average Values Used. As a practical matter, all of the small variations in 

use of given plant species within the different range types of a survey area 

cannot be given separate consideration. Average values for these local 

range complexes must be used. The use differences for specific plants will 

normally be much greater between widely separated ranges than within 

more restricted localities. 

b. OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE: Lists of proper use factors will be prepared by 

plant species for each kind of grazing animal alone and for the animal use complex 

on each significant use area of the survey. These factors will be based upon percent 

of weight taken upon proper use of the range. 

90 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

Factors for. Each Kind of Animal. Whenever any of the range use segments of a 

survey area supports a substantial amount of use by a particular game animal in 

addition to livestock use, proper use factors will be derived for the game species as 

well as for each kind of livestock. Ratings for these animals will be needed in 

arriving at total allowable proper use factors. 

(1) Kinds of Animals and Seasons of Use. These factors will be established by plant 

species for each kind of grazing animal for each pertinent season of use, and will 

. be listed in a table which includes the plant and plant symbol list. After the 

plaint listings, columns of the table will be provided for grazing animals in the 

following order as needed: cattle, sheep, deer, antelope, and elk. Under each of 

these kinds of animals, seasonal use columns will be established in the following 

sequence as required: spring, summer, fall, winter, spring-fall, and yearlong. 

Occasionally, values for other seasonal combination periods are needed. 

(2) Proper Use Determination. "Proper use" for a particular plant is the degree to 

which its current growth will be utilized by a kind of grazing animal when the 

. range is properly used. Such percentage use factors are derived by determining 

the differences between total current production in a normal growth year and the 

amount left after proper use. They indicate all removal in the process of grazing 

including wastage by trampling. Any foliage removal or damage by rodents, 

insects, or disease is provided for under utilization deductions, and is therefore 

not considered in establishing proper use factors; If a plant provides no forage 

for a kind of grazing animal during a particular season it is rated zero for that 

combination although it may be present on the range and supply forage at other 

seasons. This may especially be the case for winter ranges where some plants 

are evident during the growing season but are unable to provide forage during 

the dormant period. 

(a) Local Derivation of Factors. Any existing proper use factor tables which 

have been standardized for ranges similar to the survey area may be used as 

a guide in formulating factors for use on a survey. However, specific 

factors will be established on the basis of local use conditions. Grazing use 

of particular plants by each kind of animal varies considerably from one 

locality to another. Proper use varies with a number of criteria such as 

preference of different kinds of animals, season of use, vegetation composition,_weather conditions as expressed in volume of growth and texture of 

forage, and topography. 

(b) Bases for Determinations. Proper use factors should be based on all pertinent information available, paying special attention to utilization studies and 

observations within or near the survey area. The results of any applicable 

research studies should receive careful attention. Such studies have recendy 

modified the concepts of physiological requirements of forage plants in 

regard to grazing use. Results indicate that the maximum allowable use for 

most key forage plants is normally somewhere near 50% of the current 

growth. About that proportion of most important perennials must be left 

91 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

after grazing to assure their perpetuation and that optimum quantities of 

forage are produced. Studies of some browse plants have indicated that use 

up to 60% of current growth may be allowed, and still permit the plants to 

thrive; but this seems to be the upper limit. These percentages refer to total 

removal including that by rodents and insects. Therefore, it will be found 

that most key plant use factors will be below these values. 

(c) Average Values Used. As a practical matter, all of the small variations in 

use of given plant species within the different range types of a survey area 

cannot be given separate consideration. Average values for these local 

range complexes must be used. The use differences for specific plants will 

normally be much greater between widely separated ranges than within 

more restricted localities. 

6. Proper Use Objective 

For most range areas, it is the management objective of the Bureau to maintain or 

recover the valuable perennial forage plants as the chief constituents of the vegetation. 

If this is to be realized, the less valuable perennials and annuals must be assigned use 

ratings sufficiently low to assure that no more than the allowable use is made of the 

desired species regardless of their current abundance. 

The annual plant ranges to the west of the Sierras in California and on a few adjoining 

areas constitute an exception to the general Bureau management objective with respect 

to type of forage cover. Management of these annual ranges will perhaps be based 

indefinitely on the annual cover, and proper use factors will be assigned to adequately 

safeguard and perpetuate this type of forage in a desirable condition. 

7. Game Factor Considerations 

In the derivation of use complex factors, the advice and help of State Game Department 

and other agency technicians should be obtained. Such ratings should be considered 

with these persons at the same time that game population, game population trends, and 

other game values are being estimated. The Ocular Reconnaissance methods takes into 

consideration specific game proper use values. 

8. Derivation of Proper Use Factors 

The weight estimate method refers to a "use complex proper use factor" where as the 

ocular reconnaissance method refers to a "total allowable proper use factor". The 

following proper use factors will be derived and used in grazing capacity computations. 

a. WEIGHT ESTIMATE: 

(1) Use Complex Proper Use Factor. Wherever more than one kind of grazing 

animal makes substantial use of a range use area, use complex proper use factors 

will be derived. These factors will consider the one or more kinds of livestock 

using the area plus the competitive use of the plant species by game, and further 

consider the judgment determination criteria explained below. When only one 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

kind of livestock is using the range and no appreciable use is made by game 

animals, it will not be necessary to derive a use complex proper use factor. In 

such a situation, a proper use factor will bederived for the one kind of livestock. 

If two kinds make use with no appreciable game use, use complex factors will 

be derived for the livestock complex. 

(2) Noncompetitive Game Proper Use Factor. Wherever game makes proper use of 

* & plant in addition to the competitive use, a non-competitive game proper use 

-factor will be assigned that particular plant species. This assignment will 

consider the judgment determination criteria explained below (Section 

VIII.D.8.C)/ 

. OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE: Total Allowable Proper Use Factors. Wherever 

more than one kind of animal makes substantial use of a range use area, total 

allowable proper use factors will be derived and used in grazing capacity computations for that area. These factors will represent the maximum limit of the combined 

use to be made of any species for a particular range and season, and will be the 

' result of judgment weightings of the factors for each kind of animal, considering a 

number of critical influences concerning the use complex and the nature of the 

range. Usually the total .allowable proper use factor will not be greater than that 

• . normally allowed the kind of animal having a preference for the species. 

Judgment Determination Criteria. Judgment decisions for the use complex and 

total proper use factors assigned each plant species will be developed. Obvious 

items that need definite consideration are: '•.'••"'•. • 

. The indicatedratio of use in AUM' s between the various kinds of animals. 

sThe season or sequence of use for each kind of animal and the relationship of 

this use with respect to ecological conditions. * ., 

. The abundance of key forage plants for each kind of animal. 

. The relative accessibility and utilizability of the range for each animal. 

The relative preference for the various plants of each kind of animal. 

There appears to be no possibility of using a precise mathematical formula for this 

weighting; therefore, assignments are largely a judgment determination. Key forage 

plants for domestic livestock and game animals will need critical attention. Great 

care must be taken not to assign too high a use complex or total allowable proper use 

factor to any one forage plant even though such assignment might be within the 

physiological limits of that plant for grazing utilization. Keep in mind that the 

assignment of the total physiological utilization level for a forage plant in relatively 

large abundance may inflate the ultimate grazing capacity computation to the point 

that another forage plant in less abundance might be overutilized. This development 

might occur due to the grazing habits of the same kinds of animals or from the 

93 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

competitive grazing use of forage plants by different kinds of animals. To the fullest 

extent possible, the highly palatable but less abundant plants should not be sacrificed 

in order to obtain the indicated optimum degree of use within the survey area; 

however, occasionally this will occur when the choicer plants undergoing competitive or single animal usage are comparatively scarce in relation to other more 

abundant forage plant supporting a substantial amount of the grazing use. 

(1) Relative Ratings. WEIGHT ESTIMATE: Use complex and noncompetitive 

game factors should be set so as to reflect the approximate extent of use that will 

prevail with the particular ratio and seasons of use by the kinds of animals that 

will graze each use complex area. No instruction can specifically detail precise 

guides to judgments of this kind. Therefore, the most experienced technicians in 

the district office, working in conjunction with the technical staff personnel in 

the State Offices, will need to be involved in the preparation of proper use 

tables. 

Superabundant Species. Big sagebrush and possibly other species are an 

exception to assigning noncompetitive game factors. These species, when 

superabundant and having some forage value for game but none for livestock, 

are not given a game factor. The tremendous volume of big sagebrush frequently available would yield highly erroneous data if it was considered along 

with other forage species. In this case, the procedure is to determine what part 

of the animal's diet consists of sagebrush. This percentage is then applied to the 

game demand in animal unit months and then added to the additional forage 

available for game use only. 

(2) Relative Ratings. OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE: Where a species is a key 

plant for each kind of animal involved, or at least has a high proper use factor 

for each, the total allowable proper use factor may be the same as the highest of 

those assigned for the different animals. But this is not always necessarily so ­

subject to the discussion and qualifications cited above. Also, where the use 

factor happens to be the same for the different animals, this value may be used 

as the total allowable proper use factor. On the other hand, the value may lie 

somewhere between differential factors for the animals. It should be set so as to 

reflect the approximate extent of use that will prevail with the particular ratio 

and seasons of use by the kinds of animals that will graze each use complex 

area. No instruction can specifically detail precise guides to judgments of this 

kind. Therefore, the most experienced technicians in the district office, working 

in conjunction with the technical staff personnel in the State Offices, will need 

to be involved in the preparation of total allowable proper use tables. 

Use on Type Writeups. Illustration 11, Form 4-1276, and Illustration 12, Form 

4412-1, are examples of writeups utilizing use complex, noncompetitive game and 

total allowable proper use factors for plant species on a hypothetical range type. 

Pounds of Usable Forage. WEIGHT ESTIMATE METHOD ONLY: The pounds 

of dry weight of forage per acre is multiplied by the use complex proper use factor 

to obtain the pounds of usable forage per acre for the use complex for each species 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

of plant. The pounds of dry weight of forage per acre is multiplied by the noncompetitive game factor to obtain the pounds of usable forage per acre for noncompetitive game for each species exclusive of superabundant species. Any necessary 

utilization.deductions will be applied to the total pounds of usable forage per acre to 

obtain the net pounds per acre for both the use complex and noncompetitive game 

categories.. • •, i 

f. Relation to Physiological Limits of Use. OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE 

METHOD ONLY: There is one specific problem within the total allowable proper 

use factor relationship that needs special attention. As previously stated, if only one 

kind of grazing animal is utilizing a range area, it would be permissible to assign a 

proper use factor at the physiological limit for some key plant species unless management considerations dictate otherwise. A specific example of the exception 

probably would come about on critical big sagebrush deer winter ranges. Assignment of sagebrush total allowable proper use factor values for deer in this situation 

might be 15-25% under a moderate to heavy deer winter concentration; probably a 

maximum of 30-40% sagebrush total allowable proper use for deer would be the 

limit in the most intensively used sagebrush winter deer ranges. 

g. Assignment of Proper Use Factor Ratings to Different Kinds of Animals on the 

Type Writeup Forms. OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE METHOD ONLY: The 

type writeup form provides for a proration of the total allowable proper use factor 

among the various kinds of animals. Again, much the same judgment criteria must 

be utilized in assigning these values to the kinds of animals per plant species. In 

reiteration, the indicated ratio of use in AUMs, seasonal or sequential use of the total 

forage complex range areas, range ecological relationships, ayailability,.and relative 

preferences by kinds of animals for certain plants, must be taken into consideration. 

Also of prime importance will be the extent of knowledge of the particular range 

area concerning the amount of utilization and when it occurs on plants under com­

' petitive use by different kinds of animals. Many range areas in the West furnishing 

forage for different kinds of animals under different intensities of use are being 

studied by the State Game Departments, the Bureau, or other agencies. Results from 

such studies will be utilized. To illustrate a situation, the overall animal use ratio 

between cattle and deer might be 3 to 1 for a given area. Yet it might be best judgment to indicate by the individual animal proper use factor assignments a 30%-30% 

- (half and half) proration of the forage production. Such judgments would need 

justifications including the known utilization of particular plant species by kind of 

animal and the seasonal utilization of forage species. Examples of such plants 

where such close study would be needed are bitterbrush, birch leaf mahogany, 

chokecherry, and serviceberry. The primary objective is to have the type writeup 

show the source of the forage for the different kinds of animals in relation to any 

competing or compatible uses within the total range type being surveyed. 

h? Animal Use Ratio Comparison. OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE METHOD 

ONLY: The ultimate compilation of grazing capacity information by kind of animal 

will compare with the initial ratio of animal use. This comparison will provide a 

check of use factor prorations among the kinds of animals, and will be a source of 

feed-back information for analytical study of inherent range use problems. Such 

95 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

study will provide not only grazing privilege and adjudication information with 

respect to domestic livestock use, but will provide basic information for discussions 

of any needed game animal adjustments with the proper agencies. 

i. Forage Acre Factors. OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE METHOD ONLY: The 

net forage acre factor is a figure representing the portion of a surface area which is 

completely covered with completely usable forage. This factor is expressed as a 

decimal figure; e.g., .05, .10, etc. Surface acres multiplied by the net forage acre 

factor gives forage acres. 

9. Utilization Dedectioinis 

Type estimates of amount of vegetation are made for the average of that part of the type 

that is accessible to grazing animals. Utilization deductions are for any portion of the 

type that may not be available for some reason to any of the animals making use. Also, 

deductions are established for other type conditions that either require use compensation 

or reduced use for correction of the condition. 

a. Use Adjustment Criteria. These essential usability estimates are made separately 

for each grazing animal in proportion to the ability of each to cover the range 

involved. They are assigned to the nearest multiple of 5 percent for each range 

feature requiring an adjustment. The main use criteria for which reductions may be 

needed are slope, rocks or stones, timber, lack of water, unstable soils, erosion, 

rodents, insects, and plant disease. Ratings for these are recorded on the back of the 

type writeup forms. 

Interaction of Criteria. Definite emphasis must be given to making appropriate 

utilization adjustments. Every feature of the range which limits animal access or 

requires special protection should be given due consideration and the best possible 

judgment adjustments should be made. It should be recognized, however, that an 

adjustment for one criterion may at least partially care for the needs of other features. All deduction elements should be considered together, and the total needed 

adjustment proportioned equitably among them. Where waste (7) types are used by 

game, the various range survey evaluations, including utilization deductions, will be 

made for these animals. 

b. Assuring Accurate Determinations. The chief of party will pay special attention to 

utilization deduction estimates made by the examiners to assure reliable and uniform 

determinations. 

10. Forage Requiremeinits 

Generally, it will be desirable to assemble a part or all of the basic use data needed to 

complete adequate forage requirement studies before the survey field work begins. This 

could be done by the chief of party during the course of the survey, but it will be well to 

have at least selected the study areas before the field season to insure their coverage as 

an integral part of the survey. Grazing use data could perhaps be advantageously 

entered on standard forms used to record estimates of actual use. If it is not feasible to 

obtain forage requirements from actual use studies, standard requirements may be used. 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

a. Local Derivation and Forage Consumption Criteria. Local derivation of specific 

forage requirements is desirable. Forage requirements are available which may 

change with any of the criteria that cause different daily rates of forage ingestion by 

grazing animals. Variations may occur in daily forage consumption with differences 

in type of forage, abundance and availability of forage, season of use, topography, 

and type of livestock management. The small amount of available data on actual 

daily forage intake on ranges with different characteristics shows considerable 

variation. 

b. Forage Requirement Studies. Forage requirement studies are best made on representative allotments or pastures which are considered to have been grazed at or near 

a proper rate, and for which a reliable use history may be assembled. Such typical 

areas should be within or near the survey area and must be covered by the survey. 

Ownership of these tracts is unimportant. However, they must adequately represent 

the survey area; the required use information must be available; and there must be 

opportunity for field inspection. 

(1) Study Area Variations. Preferably the study areas would be fenced or otherwise 

well controlled, with accurate use records extending back 4, 5, or more years. 

' • - - However, such favorable situations may be relatively few, and dependence may 

have to be placed on other use areas with somewhat less ideal attributes for part 

of the study data. A grazing use study preferably involves more than one 

controlled use area for each general seasonal range covered by the survey. 

(2) Actual Use Pastures. In some places, actual use pastures have been established 

and data collected which are ideal for requirement derivation. Grazing use data 

will usually be obtained from records maintained by the livestock operator, 

although other sources of information may be available. These use data will be 

modified by estimates of the operator and district personnel for any trespass use 

that may have taken place: Allowance should also be made for any supplemental feeding that was done during the period of the study. Seldom will an allotment or pasture be available for deriving.a forage requirement which may be 

considered to have been used to exacdy the proper degree. Therefore, some 

adjustment of the indicated actual grazing use may be appropriate. The basis for 

such modification would be a range condition determination and perhaps a 

utilization check which should be documented as part of the record. 

(3) Abnormal Growing Conditions. Completing forage requirement studies for each 

specific survey area covered in a particular year makes the established requirements directly applicable to the survey area without the need of adjustments for 

any abnormal growing conditions that may have prevailed. Of course, any study 

area used in a given year may be subsequently used again for other surveys on 

similar range in the same general vicinity by bringing the use record up to date 

and again covering the area with the new surveys. 

c. Standard Requirements. Occasionally, a condition may exist where adequate 

controlled use areas cannot be located upon which to base a forage requirement 

study for a survey, and the decision is made to use a standard requirement estab97 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

lished for some comparable range or ranges considered to have had normal current 

forage production. With any such use of standard requirements, it will be necessary 

to adjust forage estimates for any deviation from normal production. 

(1) Precipitation Correlation Factors. WEIGHT ESTIMATE ONLY: For the 

weight estimate method of survey, the normalizing of current actual production 

estimated during the survey has often been effected by the preparation and 

application of weather conversion factors. This process entails the establishment of regression correlations between forage production and the important 

climatic factors—especially precipitation. Sometimes, values for the weather 

factors covering just a part of the year are more closely correlated with production than those for the full year. Careful consideration should be given to 

determining and using the most significant combination of monthly values. 

(2) Normality of Production. OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE ONLY: Adjustments 

to compensate for normality of current production in connection with the use of 

standard forage requirements are customarily made as a part of the process of 

density estimation. These conversions could perhaps be advantageously made, 

where weather-production correlations are available, by estimating actual 

current density and applying the indicated conversion factors to such results, 

rather than by making a straight judgment conversion to normal conditions. 

(3) Use Studies Preferable. OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE ONLY: Adjusting 

processes required to normalize survey estimates when standard requirements 

are employed are to some extent indirect and theoretical, and therefore constitute a significant source of error in survey evaluations. Since the principal aim 

of range surveys is to reflect grazing use that will provide maximum forage 

harvest and still maintain good range conditions, the ultimate test of survey 

results is its correlation with actual proper use. Forage requirement studies 

provide this correlation. Actual use data used could apparently contain considerable inaccuracy and still give results as dependable or more so than could be 

realized by using standard requirements and converting estimates to normalized 

values. Therefore, every effort should be made to complete adequate requirement studies before reliance is placed on normalizing weather factor conversions. 

d. Relation to Range Condition. It should be remembered that ideally derived forage 

requirements are based on a properly used range in good condition and may therefore be somewhat too low to adequately cope with a poor range condition. 

Eo Forage Survey Procedures 

Preliminary requirements and actual field survey work are considered in this section. 
Supplemental Studies —- Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

1. Presurvey Considerations -'..• • 

. Proper preparation is extremely important to a successful forage survey. Many factors 

must be considered and many preparatory details must be attended to in order to insure 

the efficient conduct and conclusion of field work. 

a. Preliminary Planning. The chief of party and the range manager in charge of the­

. range administration program for the district should thoroughly inspect the area to 

be surveyed in order to become familiar with problems involved and objectives to be_ 

reached. As a result of such an inspection and subsequent field examinations, the 

chief of party will formulate a plan of operation and determine where to begin the 

field work and how to distribute crew members for the best coverage of the area. 

(1) Time of Year. The chief of party and the range manager will determine the time 

'- of year the survey will be conducted. Within practical limits the survey should 

not begin until the season is sufficiently advanced to insure that there will be a 

representative growth of forage on the ground. Work may continue into the fall 

until grazing or weather conditions prevent accurate classification. 

(2) Assembling. Materials. The chief of party with the assistance of and under the 

direction of the range manager will assemble all of the formsj equipment, base 

maps, status maps, aerial pictures, proper use tables, and other data necessary 

for the conduct of the survey. 

, - (3) Grazing Use Areas. Surveys shall be conducted within grazing use areas 

designated by the district manager. . ,;

 ,; .. 

b. Base Maps 

(1) Cadastral Survey Plats. The survey crew should have a copy of all cadastral 

survey plats covering each township in the survey area; These plats are necessary in locating cadastral survey corners for control purposes. 

(2) Aerial Photographs. Aerial photographs should be used for field .mapping. 

Ordinarily, only alternate prints will be used for field work. There is enough 

overlap from one photograph to the next on alternate prints to provide two 

, complete sets of pictures for the area. One set can be used for forage survey 

mapping, and me other set will remain in me district office for other purposes. 

In particularly rough and mountainous areas it may be advisable to use every 

: print, since photographic distortion is much greater in this type of, country, and 

base maps are difficult to draft using only alternate prints. It may also be 

desirable to use every print to provide stereoscopic coverage in areas where 

, topographic detail is not sharp enough to permit accurate location of ground 

control on the print without the use of stereoscope. 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

(a) Match Lines. Match lines will be placed on the aerial photographs prior to 

use in the field. This is done by delineating the center of each photograph, 

which has the least distortion, and matching it with adjoining photographs 

on all four sides. 

(b) Distortion. Each examiner will work only within the match lines on the 

pictures assigned to him. This prevents duplication of work among examiners and enables the use of the most distortion-free portion of each photograph. Match lines may be placed on photographs with a soft lead or wax 

pencil. 

(c) Index Map. An index map of 'A " or V2" scale may be helpful in showing 

the areas covered by the numbered photographs. 

(3) Topographic and Planimetric Maps. Any high quality maps showing with 

accuracy the relative position and nature of survey area features should be made 

available. Among the most usable of these would be the Geological Survey 

topographic quadrangles. Other topographic or planimetric maps may also be of 

considerable assistance. If satisfactory aerial pictures are not available and it is 

determined that the survey must be made before aerial photography can be 

obtained, the best of such maps as these could serve quite well as bases for field 

mapping. 

(4) Administrative Maps. Copies of management units, grazing allotment, range 

improvement and status maps should be provided as reference for the party 

members during the survey. Surveys should begin and terminate on or near the 

boundaries of management use areas. The range improvement maps will act as 

prompters for the examiners to map at least all improvements of record. It may 

be desirable to transpose these recorded improvements onto the field pictures or 

maps in their approximate locations before field work begins, or this may be 

done by the crew members as the work progresses. 

Survey Party. The selection and training of members of the survey party is ex­

tremely important to a survey program. 

(1) Chief of Party. A great deal of emphasis must be placed on the selection of the 

chief of party for the survey. A permanent member of the district staff should 

be selected for the position. He should be trained in all phases of forage survey 

work and should be well acquainted .with all of the programs of the Bureau and 

interrelated problems. He should be a man of good judgment for whom the 

crew members will give their best performance willingly. He will be responsible for correlating field data, making work assignments, keeping the equipment in good operating order, checking expenses, providing for the welfare of 

the crew, and reporting the progress of the survey. It is also the responsibility of 

the chief of party to collect the information for and prepare the narrative report 

at the conclusion of the survey. 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

(2) Party Members. Qualified college men from range management, forestry, or 

agricultural schools (either graduates or upper classmen) and permanent personnel from within the Bureau should make up the party. Every field member of 

the district staff who has not had range survey experience should if possible be . 

given the opportunity to participate as a member of a survey party. Each man 

must have a working knowledge of plant taxonomy, plant ecology and animal 

. habits. Very often the Bureau is able to select outstanding temporary personnel 

for permanent appointments after one or two seasons of survey work. 

(3) Size of Party. A four-man crew is generally the optimum size for any one chief 

of party. A survey party of this size will require nearly all of the time of the 

chief of party in assigning and coordinating the work. 

(4) Party Training. The efficiency and accuracy of the work of the members of the 

survey party depend a great deal upon the initial training given them by the chief 

of party. 

(a) Survey Area Acquaintance. Enough time should be spent in general coverage of the survey area to acquaint each man with the main roads and landmarks for general reference. 

(b) Uniformity of Estimates. The entire crew should work together for a 

sufficient period of time to assure uniformity of estimates. • 

. (c) Individual Training. Following thetraining period, the chief of party will 

work individually with each of the men in order to further improve and . 

assure uniformity of work and check his progress. 

(d) Correlation of Estimates. During the course of the survey, the crew should 

work together for a portion of a day each week in order to correlate esti- . 

mates and to resolve problems in field procedure that may arise. 

2. Field Procedures 

The following described procedures provide for minimum standards of accuracy and 

reliability of data collected. 

a. Field Assignments. The chief of party will be responsible for crew member assignments. The size of the area assigned each man will depend on the topography, 

complexity of forage types, culture, mapping, sampling problems, etc. 

b. Type Traverse. WEIGHT ESTIMATE: Each type will be traversed by the examiner in a manner to adequately sample it. This requires that representative portions 

be covered. 

Plot Sampling. The" weight estimate method of range survey requires the establishment of transects of plots through each type. Typically, these will be placed 

longitudinally through the middle of the type, if this will represent about an average 

101 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

condition. Otherwise, the transect line will be irregularly placed so as to give a 

representative sampling. In larger types, the transect may cross the sampling area 

two or more times in order to give a satisfactory distribution of plots. 

(1) Plot Location. Plots will be spaced at more or less equal intervals along the 

predetermined transect lines. This will usually be accomplished by pacing. 

Tally registers are helpful in pace counting. Plot centers could well be determined by placing them at the point of the toe on the appropriate pace. Care 

must be exercised to let the paces near the end of the plot interval fall in natural 

lengths while traveling exactly in the established direction of the transect. 

Obstacles must not be permitted to interfere with the placement of the foot on 

the final pace which determines the plot center. Plots will usually be spaced a 

specific number of paces apart so as to spread them through a representative 

portion of the type. This will inject an element of randomness into this systematic sampling system. 

(2) Transect Line Offsets. Where obstructions prevent the examiner from pacing 

directly along the established transect line, it will be necessary to offset his line 

of travel; but the plots will be located back on the transect line in their predetermined positions as well as this can be judged. Every effort must be made to 

remove a maximum of bias from the process of plot location. 

(3) Use of Vehicles. When it is possible to run transect lines with a jeep or other 

vehicle and this means is adopted, the distance meter will be used in spacing the 

plots. Each plot center will be established by pacing a given number of paces in 

a specific direction from the vehicle at each stop. Offsetting may likewise be 

necessary here in both the line of travel of the vehicle and the pacing. 

(4) Randomizing Location. The throwing of an object at the end of each transect 

interval as a means of randomly locating plot centers is good practice, provided 

the trajectory of the object is not interfered with until it contacts the ground. If a 

throwing procedure is used, care should be exercised to use techniques that 

assure against biased locations with respect to openings in the vegetation or 

otherwise. 

(5) Size of Plots. The circular plot used will be 9.6 square feet in size. The radius 

for the 9.6 square-foot plot is 1.75 feet. 

(6) Converting Grams to Pounds. The 9.6 square-foot size is appropriate for the 

weight procedures, since plot estimates are made in grams of vegetation. The 

number of grams on a 9.6 square-foot plot times 10 is equivalent to the number 

of pounds per acre. 

(7) Recording Green Gram Weight. The green gram weight of each plant species 

on each transect plot is recorded on the type writeup form (Illustration 11, 

Form 4-1276). Each writeup sheet provides for 10 plots. If more than this are

included in a type transect, two or more sheets will be used as required to record

the plot data and a summary sheet will be completed on the same writeup form 

^ ^ 

 |^ B 

102 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

as the plot record sheets. The sheet summary will show green weight totals 

transferred from the plot record sheets which are numbered in order for each 

transect beginning with "1. " This sheet number is placed in the space provided , 

at the head of the form. For sheet summaries, this number space will be used to ­

indicate that it is a "Surnmary." 

(8) Summary Computations." When a summary sheetisxequired, it will be the only 

transect form completed for data beyond the plot weight figures, including the 

computations of grazing capacity. The pounds of green weight per acre for each 

species is derived from averages of.the plot weight data. A transect often 9.6 

square-foot plots will have a pound per acre rating equal to the sum of the gram 

weights for the 10 plots. If more or less than 10 plots are included in a transect, 

an average gram weight per plot would be computed and multiplied by 10 in 

.* r

 •"arriving at pounds per acre. .* 

(9) Establishment of Plots. Plots are usually circumscribed on the ground by use of 

wire hoop or two metal stakes connected by a light radius chain. A hoop is 

perhaps most readily used with 9.6 square-foot plots. In using the stakes and 

chain, one stake is implanted at the plot center and the other used in compass 

•; fashion to circumscribe the plot. 

(10) Plot Mapping. The first plot Of a type transect will be positioned well within the 

type and located along the transect line at the determined plot interval from a 

selected initial point. The last plot will also be well within the type. The 

- ' approximate location of each plot will be shown oh the aerial picture or other . 

>, : - field map, and the first and last will be numbered. If the sequence of plots 

throughout me transect is not obvious from mis amount of location and identification data, additional plots along the transect will be appropriately numbered 

on the photo or map as needed. ' 

(11) Numberof Plots. The number of plots needed in a range type transect for an 

adequate forage sampling will depend upon the complexity of.the type vegeta­

-' tion, and to some extent upon the size of the type. It has been estimated from 

research and other studies that for most range types mapped to an average size 

of about a section, from 20 to 30 plots will be required to keep the sampling 

error within acceptable limits. Needed sampling intensity will vary primarily 

with the heterogeneity of the forage stand. Size of type has some influence on 

the number of plots, but mainly, because of increased variation introduced with 

larger areas. The productivity of the range may have little to do with the intensity of sampling needed, since a low producing type with a sparse cover may 

• display as much variability as a more productive type. '• '<• 

c. Type Traverse. OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE: Mosttypes will be traversed in 

an irregular fashion in order to more adequately accommodate the need for feature 

mapping, including that of type boundaries. The equivalent of once through a type 

will usually be sufficient except for the larger and more complex types. With this 

' procedure, direct attention can be given to the mapping needs and still obtain an 

entirely satisfactory sampling of the vegetation stand. However, care should be 

103 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

exercised to observe a fully representative part of each type. For some types, brief 

notes should be maintained as an aid to the examiner in making the final average 

estimates for the types. It may prove advantageous to complete the writeup forms 

when located in what appears to be an average or typical part of the type, and to 

adjust the estimates for any average differences detected thereafter. 

Field Mapping. Field mapping will be accomplished in accordance with procedures 

described hereafter. 

(1) Aerial Photographs. If planametric control has not been established, it will be 

necessary for the examiner to accurately locate enough section corners on the 

photographs to make possible removal of some of the distortion found in all 

aerial pictures. Photo identified U.S.G.S. primary control (triangulation) 

stations are very helpful and should be located wherever possible. In order to 

prepare accurate maps from aerial pictures, at least two corners per township 

should be located. These should be well spaced. When identified corners are 

located they should be accurately placed on the photographs and pricked 

through with a fine needle. A cross will be placed over the hole on the reverse 

side of the picture with the sections to which the corner is common, written into 

the angles of the cross. The township, range, date, and examiner's initials 

should also appear on the back of the photograph. Assumed corners not positively identified should be similarly marked and the words "probable corner" 

written on the back of the photograph near the description. 

(a) Recordation on Photographs. Field mapping on aerial pictures should be 

done with sharp, soft pencils, not harder than 2H, to prevent injury to the 

prints. Since soft pencil marks are easily rubbed off, it will be necessary to 

ink all the data at least weekly after it has been matched with adjacent 

photographs. Inking should be done with a fine pen in order that culture 

shown on the print will not be unnecessarily obscured. 

(b) Feature Mapping. All permanent cultural or topographic features and 

existing range improvements such as fences, roads, water developments, 

etc., will be indicated on the aerial pictures. 

(2) Other Maps. If aerial pictures are not available, topographic or other maps will 

be used. The same general mapping procedures as outlined for aerial photographs will be used. 

(3) Mapping Symbols. The standard map symbol list of the Bureau (9161-BLM 

Map Symbol Handbook) covers all of the more important natural, cultural, and 

control feature symbols used in forage survey field mapping. This list will be 

used by survey parties in conjunction with the instructions in forage survey 

handbooks. 

(4) Range Type Mapping. A range type is a relatively homogeneous classification 

and mapping unit of appropriate minimum size which usually consists of a part, 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

but may be all, of a vegetative type as determined by current aspect. Typically, 

these units will not be mapped to smaller than about 160 acres in size, although 

some very high production areas such as meadows and seedings may be delineated down to smaller sizes. Other relatively high producing areas will be 

mapped proportionately down to intermediate sizes. The maximum size of 

range types is indefinite except as each particular situation may be limited by the 

prescribed criteria for establishing types. 

(a) Type Mapping Criteria. Range types will be derived by first mapping 

according to current vegetation aspect into the 18 standard vegetative types 

(Section I, Illustration 3). These general types will be subdivided or stratified to the extent feasible on the basis of differentials in several vegetative, 

topographic, and edaphic criteria, considered approximately in the following 

order: abundance of vegetation, species composition, slope, exposure, kind 

of soil, and erosion. Only the most significant and general changes for each 

of these criteria within an aspect type can be considered, otherwise the range 

types mapped would become unreasonably small. It is to be remembered 

that the 160 acres is minimum for ordinary range types, and the average of 

such types would be somewhat in excess of a section in size. However, the 

mapping detail will vary with range productivity and complexity. 

(b) Order of Consideration. If any of the above listed mapping criteria is more 

important in distinguishing kinds of range in one area thananother, it may 

be given preference for consideration; but usually the order of consideration 

will be as listed. 

(c) Grazing Animal Barriers. In many instances, fence lines and natural features that form effective livestock or game barriers will be considered 

divisions between range types. Under these conditions, a use differential 

will almost always exist which may have created significant variations in 

some of the type mapping criteria. 

(d) Area Mapped. The entire range survey area will be type mapped. Some of 

the lands in grazing allotments or use areas may be in alienated ownerships, 

but these will be mapped coincidentally with the Federal lands. 

(e) Type Writeup Numbers. Type writeup numbers and type designations are 

given to each range type, and these are recorded on the writeup forms. Only 

the type writeup numbers are shown on the aerial pictures or maps. Type 

writeup numbers consist of the initial of the examiner's surname and a 

number beginning with "1 " for the first type examined, "2" for the second, 

etc. In case surname initials are duplicated among party members, the initial 

of the first name may be added to the front of the type number. Examples of 

type numbers would be S1 and S2, or AS 1 and AS2. 

(f) Type Designations. The type designation is composed of the number for the 

aspect vegetative type to which is added the symbols of the most dominant 

and important plant species in the type. The first plant symbol given is 

) 

105 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

usually that of the species responsible for the aspect or general appearance 

of the type. The second symbol is frequently that of the most important 

forage species. However, if the forage species is the same as the aspect 

species, a second most important plant is next indicated. Usually, three 

plant symbols are used in designation. This number may sometimes be two, 

and rarely four. Examples of type designation are 4 Artr Brte Pose and 1 

Boer Hibe Gusa. 

i. Mixed Types. Frequently, types of mixed aspect occur; in this case two 

aspect type numbers are used. The number for the more dominant type 

is indicated first with the other following in parentheses. Usually, 

symbols for both aspect species will appear somewhere in the designation. Examples for mixed types are 4(9) Artr Juut Agsp and 13(4) Atco 

Arno. 

ii. Waste Type. The waste (7) type is so designated because of its 

unusability by livestock. Whenever this type is used by game animals, 

it will be rated for such use. The designation will be similar to those for 

mixed types with the aspect vegetation type number in parentheses 

following the number "7" or the symbol for one of waste subtypes. 

Symbols for prominent plant species will follow the numbers as for 

other types. An example is 71(5) Cele Agtr Purr. 

(g) Pretyping. Most of the vegetative aspect divisions are discernible on aerial 

pictures without field inspection. Also, a large portion of range type lines 

based on the other mapping criteria are almost equally distinct. These more 

obvious breaks between types can be penciled on the photographs before 

going into the field. This will help considerably in laying plans for traversing the range in order to efficiently complete an adequate mapping and 

examination job. Verification of type lines already drawn will be accomplished under field inspection, and any needed additional segmentation will 

be completed according to the typing criteria. 

(h) Matching Type Lines. Even though the use of aerial pictures makes type 

mapping a much less variable undertaking than when done on other maps, 

there will still be some difference between examiners which will have to be 

reconciled between the contact prints. This matching of type lines will be 

accomplished before the type data are linked. A considerable adjustment is 

usually necessary when the mapping base is other than aerial pictures. 

(i) Vegetative Types. The aspect vegetative types which are first used in 

mapping an area into range types are the same as the 18 standard types 

established some years ago. There appears little reason to change these 

materially for future use in forage surveys; therefore, only minor modifications have been made. Descriptions are given hereafter along with type 

number, type name, and standard mapping color on Illustration 3. 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

e. Type Writeup Recordation. For each range type mapped, a type writeup will be 

made on a standard Form 4-1276 and 4412-1 (Illustrations 11 and 12) which will 

describe the forage resource and record certain evaluations for the vegetation and 

forage stand. , . 

(1) Writeup Content. Of the items in the heading of each writeup form, the writeup 

number and the type designation were before described under range type 

mapping. Name of examiner, date of writeup, kind of grazing animals currently 

making substantial use of the area and the usual season of use, aerial photograph -.. 

number, and cadastral location need no further explanation. If an area is 

unsurveyed, note this fact and describe the location in the space for cadastral 

location. The other items entered on the form include plant symbols, plant 

••'..: composition, proper use factors, utilization deductions, arid forage requirements. • 

'••" The grazing capacities are computation products derived from the other data on 

-) , the form. In the footnote at the bottom of the form are listed game species 

making insufficient use of the forage resource to be considered in the capacity 

•-' determinations. 

X2) Writeup Computations 

:.:-.,. (a) WEIGHT ESTIMATE: Pounds of dry weight per acre (lbs DW/Ac) is 

multiplied by appropriate proper use factors (PUF's) for each species to 

obtain pounds of usable forage per acre (Lbs UF/Ac)... The PUF's used are 

. for the use complex and for noncompetitive game forage. The total 

,fc Lbs UF/Acm each case is rnultiplied by the average percent utilizable in the 

formulae at the bottom of the writeup form (Illustration 11) to obtain net 

Lbs UF/Ac. In the other formulae on ithe-writeups, the forage requirement 

(Lbs/AUM) is divided by the net Lbs UF/Ac in arriving at the estimatedgrazing capacity (Ac/AUM) for the use complex and for noncompetitive 

game forage. 

(b) OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE: For the ocular reconnaissance method, 

the percent composition is multiplied by the appropriate proper use factor 

(PUF) for each plant species by kind of animal to obtain a product which 

when summed for all species gives the average PUF for all vegetation 

(Illustration 12). This average PUF is entered in the formula at the bottom 

of the writeup form for each kind of animal as a decimal and multiplied by 

the average density for the type to obtain a forage acre factor (FAF). The 

FAF is multiplied in the formula by the average percent utilizable to obtain 

a net FAF which is then used to divide an appropriately derived forage acre 

requirement (FAR) to give the grazing capacity (Ac/AUM). The net FAF is 

v • the percentage of the ground covered by completely usable forage. 

(3) Computation Accuracy. Before these grazing capacity computations can be 

made, all pertinent additions must be completed on the writeup forms. These 

and all other computations must be made accurately. 

107 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

(4) Completion of Computations 

(a) WEIGHT ESTIMATE: The writeup computations for the weight estimate 

method must await dry weight computations. In any event writeup computations will be completed as soon as possible so that resultant capacities can 

be given review. 

(b) OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE: It would be highly desirable for each 

examiner to complete all computations needed to derive the type grazing 

capacity estimate while still on the type, or as near thereafter as possible. 

Such procedure would enable the examiner to gain a more definite conceptual correlation between observed conditions and grazing capacities of range 

types. In any event, writeup computations will be completed as currently as 

possible so that resultant grazing capacities can be given adequate review 

during the progress of the survey. 

(5) Review of Computations. Derived grazing capacities must appear entirely 

reasonable in view of the character of the range type in relation to the use 

complex, other rated types, and the descriptive data assembled for it. Type 

writeup should be reviewed for apparent discrepancies, and any found should be 

carefully checked to determine if actual errors have occurred. All computations 

must be accurately completed. 

(6) Writeup Filing. The type writeups are maintained numerically in series for each 

examiner, along with the aerial photographs used in field mapping. 

E Final Maps 

Several maps will be prepared for each survey area as soon as field work is accomplished. 

These are base and data maps, described hereafter, for use in the management program. 

1. Ueit Base Maps 

At the completion of the survey, or of appropriate sizable segments thereof, administrative unit base maps will be prepared on a one-inch per mile scale (1:63,360) using the 

field survey maps (aerial photographs) and other basic maps and plats. These base maps 

will show the main natural features, all existing cultural features having any management significance in addition to the cadastral grid and other basic control, and the 

boundaries of all grazing allotments. 

2. Resource Township Plats 

Besides the unit base maps, the Bureau mapping procedures prescribe the use of a set of 

two-inch per mile scale (1:31,680) township plats for recording and compiling forage 

survey data. These plats will show range type boundaries and evaluation data, land 

status, and allotment boundaries. Surface acres and grazing capacities will be shown for 

each section by type and by ownership. 
Supplemental Studies— Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

3. Special Status and Survey Maps 

Special land status and survey data maps may be prepared where desired on 

'^ autopositives or on overlays of the unit base maps. These maps would show land 

ownership, range types, and grazing capacity data in addition to the basic map features. 

G. Compilations 

During the course of the survey, all type writeups and other survey records and maps are fully 

completed and carefully checked for legibility and accuracy. The grazing capacity computations are completed while the examiner is on the type or as soon thereafter as possible; and 

later checked for accuracy. Writeup forms are kept in numerical series for each examiner. 

Held maps (aerial pictures) will also be assembled in appropriate series and filed for the 

Various areas covered in the survey. Such procedures are necessary for efficiency in subsequent compilation of the survey data. 

Allotment Tabulation: Forage survey data will be compiled and summarized on an allotment 

-basis. ' ' - - ' • ' "•'•'''•• ••''':•-. 

1. Work Map (Resource Township Plat) Data 

The two-inch per mile scale township plats showing land status and range types are used 

as work maps for this compilation and summarization of acreage and current grazing 

capacity in AUMs for each allotment. In this process, the section acreage, as obtained 

from cadastral survey plats to the nearest whole acre is placed near the center of the 

section on the work map. For sections bisected by allotment boundaries, only the part of 

the section acreage within the allotment will be shown, and also near the center of the 

part in the allotment. The acreage in each type within each section for each ownership is 

placed on the work map near the center of that segment. These segment: acreages are 

determined by use of some counting device. Perhaps that which is most easily used and 

which gives entirely reliable results for careful compilers is a gridded, transparent ruler 

of appropriate scale. The sum of the partial acreages must equal that for the section. 

Where all of a section is within a type and of one ownership, the AUM values will be 

placed under the total acreage figure near the center of the section. When this total 

section acreage figure has no AUM values under it, a division of the section between 

two or more types or ownerships is indicated. 

a. WEIGHT ESTIMATE: Under each segment acreage figure, the computed AUMs 

for each .kind of grazing animal making appreciable use for the use complex and 

• noncompetitive game forage for that type area within the section by ownership will 

be shown with a horizontal line between the figures as follow: 

273 

UC46-NG15 

OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE: Under each segment acreage figure, the computed AUMs for each kind of grazing animal making appreciable use for that type 

109 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

area within the section by ownership will be shown with a horizontal line between 

the figures as follow: 

273 

C46-D15 

2. Acreage aedl Grazing Capacity Compilations 

The acreage and current grazing capacity (AUM) values recorded on the work map as 

provided above are compiled on "Allotment Grazing Capacity Tabulation and Summary" Forms (Illustrations 13, 14, 15 and 16, Forms 4412-5 4412-2,4412-6 and 

4412-3 ). Copies of these forms are attached on which illustrative data have been placed 

for a small hypothetical allotment. 

a. Allotment Tabulation Form. Illustrations 13 and 14 are used to list surface acres 

and AUMs by section and land ownership and control for each kind of grazing 

animal. At the top of the form, district and allotment names or designations, the 

kind of grazing animals and season of use for each, ratios of animal use, and the date 

are provided. Township, range, and section are indicated. Acres and AUMs are 

listed for each section involved for each kind of ownership and control and these 

values are totaled for the allotment. This listing will usually take a number of pages 

of the form for most allotments. 

b. Allotment Summary Form 

(1) WEIGHT ESTIMATE: Illustration 15 is used to record summary acreage and 

grazing capacity values for each kind of ownership or control in the allotment. 

The data in the heading is the same as for Illustration 13. The surface acres, 

AUMs, and Ac/AUM are listed by kind of ownership or control, and the grazing 

capacity data are shown for the use complex and for noncompetitive game 

forage. 

(2) OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE: Illustration 16 is used to record summary 

acreage and grazing capacity values for each kind of ownership or control in the 

allotment. The data in the heading is the same as for Illustration 14. The 

surface acres, AUMs, and Ac/AUM are listed by kind of ownership or control, 

and the grazing capacity data is for each kind of animal in the total. 

c. Correlation of Form Totals. Totals for Illustrations 13 and 14 must equal the 

subtotals on Illustrations 15 and 16 for each category of ownership and control. 

d. Accuracy of Form Data. As with all other survey records, these summary forms 

must be completed accurately, neatly, and legibly. Sufficient checking will be done 

to assure the accuracy of all compilations and calculations. 

110 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

3. Allowance for Superabundant Species 

WEIGHT ESTIMATE ONLY: An allowance will be made for superabundant plants as 

described under derivation of proper use factors (Section VUI.D.S.a). This allowance is 

added to the additional forage available for game only. 

H. Narrative Report 

This will be a concise, clearly written report covering a number of essential items concerning 

the survey area. It must supply all information, in addition to that on type writeups and 

survey maps, needed by the district manager from the survey in making range management 

decisions. The Chief of Party, having the obligation of preparing this report, will make 

adequate field inspections and analyze weather, use, and other records as needed for this 

undertaking. During the field season he will have to obtain general data for the survey area 

on range condition, degree and distribution of grazing use, rodent and insect damage, infestations of undesirable weeds and brush, timber and woodland stands, soil and topographic 

descriptions including accelerated erosion, forage production potentials, and possibilities for 

range development. Photographs depicting characteristics of the survey area are usually 

desirable. 

Outline for Report The survey report may be completed using the following outline: 

1. Description of Survey Area 

a. Location 

b. Area and Land Status 

c. Vegetation, Soils, Topography, and Climate 

d. Natural and Cultural Features 

2. Forage Survey 

a. Field Season 

b. Survey Party 

c. Procedures 

3. Past Grazing Use 

a. Kinds of Animals (Livestock and Game) 

b. Seasons 

c. Intensity ••'.*• • 

d. Management Practices 

e. Distribution 

4. Rodents and Insects . 

a. Kinds and Abundance 

b. Damage 

5. Predators 

a. Kinds 

b. Problems 

6. Current Range Condition 

a Trend 

111 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

7. Potential Range Condition 

a. Comparison (Relict) Areas 

8. Accelerated Erosion 

a. Kind and Degree 

b. Trend 

9. Poisonous and Noxious Weeds and Brash 

a. Need for Control 

1©. Ctmrrent Grazing Capacity 

11. Recommended Grazing Use 

a. Kinds of Animals (Livestock and Game) 

b. Seasons 

c. Intensity 

d. Systems of Grazing 

12. Garame Management 

a. Herd-units 

b. Migration Routes 

c. Hunts and Other Controls 

• 13. Needed Mange Improvements 

a. Water Distribution 

b. Land Treatments 

c. Structures 

14. Other Resource Uses 

a. Coordination with Grazing 

15. Photographs 

I. Survey Cost Report 

To provide information for future planning of programs, a record of approximate survey costs 

will be made and incorporated into a cost report for the survey. The cost items will be 

separated into three survey phases — preliminary preparations, field survey, and data summarization. 

1. Preliminary Work 

The preliminary work will be mainly that completed by the Chief of Party, but will 

include any efforts of other personnel. All prominent and separable cost items will be 

considered, including personnel salaries, travel expenses, and costs of maps, aerial 

pictures, other supplies and equipment. 

2. Field Survey 

All costs incurred during the actual field survey work will be segregated similarly. 

These will include salaries of the Party Chief and members and any other personnel, 

travel expenses for whatever means is used, and survey supplies and equipment costs. 

112 
Supplemental Studies — Weight Estimate and Ocular Reconnaissance 

3. Survey Summarization 

The survey summarization costs will include expenses of drafting maps, as well as 

personnel time involved in compilation and preparation of reports, and costs of materials 

and supplies. 

4. Relative Difficultness and Cost of Survey 

The cost report will present a very brief description of survey area features reflecting the 

relative difficulty encountered in completing the survey. Acreages covered will be 

shown with acreage-cost ratios for the three phases and for the total. 

113 

Illustration 11 Page 1 

• Form 4-1276, Forage Survey Type Wrlteup (Weight Estimate Method) 


^ <* *v.5s «* II II 

5? ^ w sea 

^ m<4> ^ <a ^ ^ 

ft *L* * 

si > * 3 

<U^| 

S ^ 

iS , 

K 

-'V* 

^ ^ 

& s! S S 

<%* 

* 

i**s 

$ * 

S» <» <S <5 tj 

^\»fc «H Q ­

<&*<s S <S* 

u*i *s^> 

^§Ts «-**! 

Hw* 

fc"^tw 

P.^4 

*> M 

^ 

^ S 

SSS 

*V 

S -S 

*>--v> s 

i «t«t 

»^ <^^ 

K : 

i ^ il -_ 

1 ^ 

&M «\K' 

w * * ift 

^ *

^ 

^ 

S 

1 ^ 

1 t 

as 

b-.5s < 3 ^'••^ 

*• * s 

1 

^ 5 

^ ^ H 

iii 
Illustration 11 Page 2 

116 
• • 

Illustration 12 Page 1 

FORAGE SURVEY TYPE WRITE UP 


(OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE METHOD) 


Form 44.2- 1 U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR Write up No. 

(June 1964) 

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT 

b'SS-6£ FORAGE SURVEY TYPE WRITE UP Aerial Photo No. ' — ,. — _ (OCULA R RECONNAISSANC E METHOD ! 

KIND OF SEASON ' SECTIONS TWP. *GE. M ER ^^-.4.8 ji^tt: GRAZING ANIMAL* OF USE 

T,p V^-^-^ . &J/JM -.?/>-* ?.?. v / / S7S. J/J t#£ Ac/AUM „ _ y 

•fOee*! W TOTAL CATTL COMP. COMP. COMP. COMP. E SHEEP DEER PUF PUF PUF P U F X SPECIES ALLOWABLE COMPOSI­ X X 

PUF TION C PUF S PUF D PUF — PUF 

jSAXi ^io J . I Jo </.Z o o 

p**s- J S - /c j.s- o o 

+/S~ <•-• JIO J>.V . r . 3 

ttPeCs / c"- JL, /€.• .2. I o c " 

a ' • ¥ JJL/LJ J J * 3S~ .: o o , 

< y

' X. 

- . SUBTOTAL »/J liiiiijliiliiii !!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !:;:;;;:;!:= 

'Ttta-t J/o f /r ,S . T .3 

/iLuu *SL> y ;w i i .•}' .sz 

f^t~C±4, o JL ^ £ C 

Sa-^i-l. JJ- •</ JtO .x°

 'i T .Z 

5<?A7 / 3 A 3 .1 o O * 

/)A,T£ & .3 ,•>- C a 

-

SUBTOTAL Jc i!!;!;:l!!::!: i!i!!!i!!i! 

/Mi Jo JLie '. j - ' mmAS 

/LSl^ fo S •siS AS 

P^jr, tec .5 V5- 1.4 

tit^LC .?c J2. Jlo .5 i 

fi*S <Jsr 1 3u .3- \ . 

5 . . i 

OS I 

en 

. 

| 

SUBTOTAL |

31 

TOTAL S 100 A9.1 <?,<? " I Av C Plir/E' 7 » Av n»n <*i? - c»,W ? « !?•? 9. util = Net FAFliL^ ; FAR -ijL . t Net ri r .OVt/ = _Z_i2_Ac/AUM 

Av S PU F « Av Den = FAF » % Util = Net FAF ; FAR • Net FAF = Ac/AUM 

Av D PUFiflfcf x Av Den irlS = FAF 'ClI « tO y. Util = Net FAF«J2^ai; FAR < 3 * Net FAFi^'/t ' = /Ji J Ac/AUM 

Av PU F « Av Den 1 = FA F » 7. Util = Net FAF ; FAR • Net FAF = Ac/AUM 

Total Net FAF.i£iL ; FAR_iJL. + Net FAF.a£5r- = jSjL. Ac/AUM 

*Llveatoclc and major game apeciea. (Other game species making inappreciable use are: fJ+'/er/oSt!- KOHllS 

117 
Illustration 12 Page 2 

UTILIZATION DEDUCTIONS IN PERCEN T 

USE CRITERIA CATTL E SHEEP DEER 

Slope 

Rocks or Stones 

Timber 

Lack of Water IO 

Unstable Soils • 

Erosion 

Rodents S r 

Insects 

Other (specify): 

TOTAL DEDUCTION /o" 3~ PERCENT 

UTILIZABLE Z<2? ioGPO B42-71B 

118 
illustration 13 

ALLOTMENT GRAZING CAPACITY TABULATION 


(WEIGHT ESTIMATE METHOD) 


Form 4412 - 5 U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

(March 1966 

Page / of / pages BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT • 

Comp "°"°"""~"0 7 )

 ALLOTMENT GRAZING CAPACITY TABULATION 

,». JL.& (WEIGHT ESTIMAT E METHOD ) 

// - /O -<£•&? 

District Allotment KIND OF ANIMAL SEASON OF USE 

Ratio s of Livestoc k and 

Major Game AUM Us e :' 

C^ctif •*>-/* " 

/JttC<S \0 

RANGE RANGE LOCATION PUBLI C DOMAIN CONTROLLED NOT CONTROLLED OTHER 

FEDERA L LAND ' BY USER " BY USER' " 

AUM' S AUM-. AUM's AU M's TWP. RGE. SEC. SURFACE SURFACE SURFACE SURFACE ACRES USE NON- ACRES NON- ACRES . USE NON- ACRES USE NON­ COM­ COMP COUP COM­ COMP COM- COMP PLEX GAME B GAME PLEX GAME GAME 

*W Si /&•£> *Y / /17 

32, 

s-e.o.z X<4» • ; 

yso V 

' P-C.D.J r; tu­ i/u) s- S ? 4 *f 3 Psu!

: 

/ / / S* /' . so 

t> •3V7 y j JL P<>C<J; P- C.J?... UK'. 

</& 3 ? " J? J2. 

. 

*/e 7 C

1 /{,-C 23 / I?to- c bin. i; P-A >. f-. P: ;

Y" 

/JtO -21 t 

/£L> iZl / 

? J</v Si JL oS - £. \ 

0 /*,* J¥ 

/ -

'1 2o s -1 

/tot? 

tu &v / 3&,e 

JU 

: */ov /i JSL 

/tfO 24 i $o /y / 

/J JVo S i 3, 

\ 

r 

PAG E TOTAL S JV/rjt m. 36 Mc fit S //Jo • rtc/c */4tO -ov *z • Indicate type of Federal lend and legal uier (allottee) in listing. 

••Indicate ownership (Stale or private) and legal user (allottee) in listing. OPO 987-301 

•••Indicat e ownership (State or private) in listing. 

119 
Illustration 14 

ALLOTMENT GRAZING CAPACITY TABULATION 

(OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE METHOD) 

Form 4412- 2 

(Jul* 1965) U.S. DEPARTMEN T OF THE INTERIOR Pag* / of J P*E*° 

co.pu.db, ^ J^U<£( ALLOTMENT GRAZING CAPACITY TABULATION 

(OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE METHOD) "•'• ////o/fr(. 

Di strict Allotment KIND OF ANIMAL SEASON OP USE Ratio* of Livamtock and Major Game 

AUM U-e : 

/UO& So­ S* 

4Eee4S 14/ Cj££ : S : D/ g : i 

LOCATION PUBLIC DOMAIN OTHER FEDERAL LAND • RANGE CONTROLLED 

BY USER • • 

RANGE NOT CONTROLLED 

BY USER *• * 

TWP. RQI, SEC. SURFACE 

ACRES C 

AUM'i 

• D 

SURFACE 

ACRES C 

AUU'i 

8 D 

SURFACE 

ACRES C 

AUU*> 

a a 

SURFACE 

ACHES C 

AUU'a 

t D 

/bi JI1 cf/ /to Xo j - J ­ <£,/>. <T<. JO , 

9 * '/fo tvO /.Z 

tf&_•ft*/ •? JSV ,v^ g /tart fi­ £• A Tr 

y o IO 2 . Ho n X. 

<e 348 .3f y /»$«/.­ p ­ a, j}. /tf-> 

Vo s­ / f?o0 3c <r 

A^UJ ­ &.i f If­ &e-« 

Vo 0 / 

1 

? 

/be 

J</o 

J<P 

M 

/ 

7 

^

yao 

-Jul 

/f 

I IP* 5^.: 

4 

p -

Jloc 

S­ . 

e.f. 

JU 

? fi. 

-2as 

yiu 

M*r 

i 

<¥.' 

. P: 

/too J ? •r 

/ ? SO 3. 

/bo ai V 

(ft /6,o J3 i< ­

/iJ J!Je> I ^(t" Al. jp. 

Srt *Joo JT> „ PiO­

//*o 

JLi 

JLo 

/ fr 

•r 

, ?: 

to Z2. ,f 

/,f f</(, JV f 

PAGE TOTALS .MbZ 2ai. »V 44c 37 /,? //JO /SX> fo J4c 3z­ If 

ALLOTMENT 

TOTALS ,M(,a 3o3 i J Wo H. X? //S.0 /Sb J o J4o 3S­ ¥ •Indict, tyft, or Fad#ral land and lag*! uiar (allotlM) tn 11*tln« 

••Indict, own.rthlp (fcata 01 print.) and )*••! uwr (allottaa) In 11* tine 

•• • Indlcat. ewaarabls (Stat, ar prlvata} In Hating 

«PO (EI-114 

120 
Illustration 15 

ALLOTMENT GRAZING CAPACITY SUMMARY 


(WEIGHT ESTIMATE METHOD) 


Form 4412-6 UNITED STATES • (March 1966) DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR (formerly 4-1708) BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT 

ALLOTMENT GRAZING CAPACITY SUMMARY 

(WEIGHT ESTIMATE METHOD) 

District Allotment • KIND OF ANIMAL 

daet6 

4&£V.~ TYPE OF RANGE FED. LAND "LEGAL USER SURFACE CONTROL OR , (Allottee) OWNER­ ACRES 

SHIP 

Public Domain J?41Z 

••'Psv 

J/. £/. &£i<TM •3-Zc Other 

Federal 

Land 

SUBTOTALS 4</o 

IS C. P. 4*^0/ 480 

£.£. f^«-~fP 6. O. Q*~*<s J? SO 

Job 

* Controlled 

by User 

SUBTOTALS //JZo 

P A"/o Not 

Controlled 

by User ­

SUBTOTALS »?Ve 

ALLOT 

TOTALS 4JC* 

Compiled by 

Date 

//-/o - 66 

Ratios of Livestock and 

Major Game AUM Use: 

C4^T:S___ : D/ £ 

SEASON OF USE 

Sff-S 

V GRAZING CAPACITY . 

AUM*B' -. ,-' Ac/AUM 

USE NONCOMP. USE*1 NONCOMP. COMPLEX CAME COMPLEX GAME 

347 J ^ ?./ /•zr.6 

/7 / 

• ^ 

M 3 6.11 S4/6.7 

<>8 

4b 

/to / c C.C //J.o 

V/ JL 

V/ . J& ^r</ y^c c 

U7 jr/ . C:S SJ.S.jt 

GPO 887-30?. 

-. 

121 
Illustration 16 

ALLOTMENT GRAZING CAPACITY SUMMARY 


(OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE METHOD) 


Form 4412-3 UNITED STATES Date (Ma ch 1966) DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

(fo „.riy 4-1,02) BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT 

//- /e (C 

ALLOTMENT GRAZING CAPACITY SUMMARY Compiled by 

(OCULAR RECONNAISSANCE METHOD) 

District Allotment KIND OF ANIMAL SEASON OF USE Ratios of Livestock and Major 

Game AUM Use: 

C'a-ttO ,$»-/*" r Js i* s • n / o . <^/tt«/w / ft**: SilLu'c' M/ TYPE OF GRAZING CAPACITY FED. RANGE LEGAL USER SURFACE LAND OR AUM'B Ae/AUM OWNER­ (Allottee) ACRES 

SHIP C s D TOTAL C s D TOTAL 

Publi c 

Domain 14C2. y t ? 63 •j&c 3,1 Sf,i 6J, 

PStc> /3.0 /& 3 

.^//.fi&H, 44 o"4 

Other 

Federa l 

Land 

SUBTOTALS 440 o

~i /,? 7£ ?.f £L&, 

4 So Co 7-z> s. 

/iff A/ 4 iillllili: 

A C • D, •in***)/ stw r 49 

•2.oo AS 6 J if ;;;;:i!j:: 

Controlled 

by UBer 

SUBTOTALS //Jo /•To 3c /fo 1.S M 6.JL 

t> X4o j r V 43 

Not 

Controlled 

by Use r 

SUBTOTALS 14o as- ? 43 "1 .feci 4~.<i> 

TOTALS 4lt>& •3V7 /"/ UJ U n<t b.¥ GPO 857-300 

122 
Supplemental Studies — Ocular Estimate Method 

IX. OCULAR ESTIMATE METHOD 

Editor's Note: This procedure was transcribed from a Bureau document entitled "4440 ­

SUPPLEMENTAL STUDIES." ' 

Under the Ocular Estimate Method the present percent composition by species by weight on 

range sites is acquired either by estimating, and/or clipping and weighing, production and 

then calculating present percent composition by weight. The present percent composition is 

compared against the climax percent composition by species by weight as described in the 

range site descriptions. The estimated percentage of the present plant community that is 

climax (natural vegetation) for the range site is calculated to determine the present condition 

class (serai stage). (Also see Section IX.D.) 

A. Equipment and Supplies 

1. Condition (Serai Stage) Worksheet, Form C-l (Illustration 17). 

2. 9.6 Square foot circular plot frame (hoop). 

3. No. 12 paper bags for clipping samples. 

4. Dial Scale (2 gram increments). 

3. Clip board. 

.4. Range site descriptions. >' 

B. Training 

Under this method, the examiners must be able to identify the plant species, estimate weight 

by species, and recognize and map areas by condition class (serai stage). Adequate training 

and checks for efficiency and accuracy during data collection are extremely important. 

1. Weight Units 

Because the relationship of weight to volume is not consistent, production and composition determinations are based on weight estimates, not on comparison of relative volumes. The weight unit method is an efficient means of estimating production and 

composition and lends itself readily to self-training. This method is based on the 

following: 

a. A weight units is established for each plant species occurring on the area being 

examined, and can consist of part of a plant, an entire plant, or a group of plants. 

b. The size and weight of a unit varies according to the kind of plant. For example, a 

unit of 5 to 10 grams is suitable for small grass of forb species. Weight units for 

large plants may be several kilograms. 

123 
Supplemental Studies — Ocular Estimate Method 

c. Other considerations include: length, width, thickness, and number of stems and 

leaves; ratio of leaves to stems; and growth or relative compactness of species. 

2. Establishing Weight Unit for Species 

a. Decide on a weight unit (in grams or kilograms) that is appropriate for the species. 

b. Select part of a plant, an entire plant, or a group of plants likely to equal this weight. 

c. Clip and weigh the plant material to determine actual weight. 

d. Repeat this process until the desired weight unit can be consistently estimated within 

10 percent of the actual weight. 

e. Maintain proficiency in estimating by periodically clipping and weighing to check 

estimates or production. 

3. Estimating Present Percent Composition by Weight 

After examiners become proficient in estimating weight by species and are thoroughly 

familiar with the plant species, plant communities, and range sites, they may be able to 

estimate the present percent composition by weight by species without having to estimate, and/or clip and weigh, production by species. This takes considerable experience. 

The examiners must check their composition estimates by periodically clipping and 

weighing to maintain reasonable accuracy. 

C. Sampling Process 

Each delineated range site is placed in a condition class (serai stage) or further divided if 

more than one class (stage) exists within a given range site. The plant composition data upon 

which the class (stage) designation is based is collected and documented on the Condition 

(Serai Stage) Worksheet, Form C-l (Illustration 17). 

1. Location Plots 

Select the plot, or plots, within a range site, or portion of a range site, by throwing the 

9.6 square foot hoop within a representative portion of the area being sampled. The 

plots are not permanent, however, they may be plotted on a detailed allotment map or on 

an aerial photo, or both, for future reference. If an aerial photo is used, record the photo 

number on the Condition (Serai Stage) Worksheet, Form C-l (Illustration 17). Depending on vegetation changes between studies, followup studies may be conducted within 

the same general area of the initial plot locations. The examiners determine and delineate on a map or photo the area which is represented by the plot, or plots. 

2. Listing Plant Species 

The plant species presently growing on the plot, or plots, are listed by plant group on the 

worksheet. 

124 
Supplemental Studies — Ocular Estimate Method 

3. Estimating Weight - Calculating Composition 

The present percent composition by species by weight may be determined by first 

estimating, and/or clipping and weighing, production (grams) by species. One to three 

plots may be used at the discretion of the authorized officer. If only one plot is used 

" enter the grams in the x column under weight on the worksheet. If more than one plot is' 

used, enter the weights in columns 1 through 3, average the weights from these plots, 

and place the mean in the x column. The present percent composition is then calculated 

by dividing the weight for species by the total weight for all species. This percentage is 

entered in the present composition column. 

4. Estimating Composition 

The present percent composition by species by weight may be estimated from a plot and 

entered directly on the worksheet in the present composition column. 

5. Entering Climax Composition 

Enter the climax percent composition by species from the appropriate range site description in.the climax composition column on the worksheet. If a percentage range is shown 

for a species in the climax plant community, enter the average percentage on the worksheet. If a species listed does not occur in the climax plant community, enter 0. 

D. Determining Condition (Serai Stage) Class 

The lowest of either the present or climax percent composition values by species is entered in 

the allowable column on the worksheet. The values in the allowable column are totaled to 

determine the percentage of the present plant community that is climax (natural vegetation) 

for that range site, or portion of a range site. Based on this percentage the site is placed in a . 

condition class. 

Condition Classes 

Estimate Percentages 

of Present Plant Community - that is climax (natural vegetation) 

Serai Stage Condition Class for the Range Sites 

Climax Excellent 76 - 100 

High Good 51 - 75 

Medium Fair 26-5 0 

Low Poor ,0 - 25 

125 
Illustration 17 

CONDITION (SERAL STAGE) WORKSHEET 


WelRht (grams) ComposIt on (X by yelpht) Plant 
 Plots 
 Present Climax Allow­
 Groups Plant Species 
 Comp. Comp. able 


Grass and 


Grasslike 


Plants 


Subtotal 


Forbs 


Subtotal 


Shrubs and 


Trees 


Subtotal 

TOTAL 

Ccfieck the appropriate box) 

SERAL STAGE - CONDITION CLASS SERAL STAGE - CONDITION CLASS 

Climax Excellent 76-100% Medium Fair 26-50% 

High Good 51- 75% Low Poor 0-25% 

Form#C-l 

126 
v 

Supplemental Studies — Apparent Trend 

X. APPARENT TREND 

Editor's Note: This procedure was transcribed from a Bureau document entitled 

"4440 -SUPPLEMENTAL STUDIES." 

The trend.in rangeland condition can only be determined by measuring changes over time. 

Generally the longer the time the greater the confidence in trend determinations. However, in 

some cases, it may be necessary to establish what the existing trend is before long term trend 

data is available. The apparent trend study is used to determine the direction of change with a 

single observation. Apparent trend is an ESTIMATE of current trend based on indicators of 

current changes occurring in the vegetation and soil condition. The five factors involved are 

vegetation (either seeded or native), vigor, seedlings, surface litter, and soil movement. A 

numerical rating is assigned for each factor and a composite rating is determined.- The 

Observed Apparent Trend Worksheet, Form AT-1 (Illustration 18) is used to record this data. 

127 
Illustration 18 

Form AT-1 

i.A. VTGE­

,2__Q3 


l.D. VECETAI'QN 


£42132 


2 . VICCR 

3. s_ ­

L1XSS 


4. SURFACE 


LITTER 


SOIL 

KEST 

9ZPAETn£.1T Of THE IKESIOB 

Bemud or usa HASACCSOT 

OQSEOTBB APPAISN? ?BS® 

HOSKSREES 

I^B___BIP 

CofloeoeJeo ?VB=3 

E3BO _ . 

Poooi-
 SOSflsra than SO parcooc of 6ho total vogatation lo co—>osod or tho oaodod opocioo. 
 t< ohrubo aro prasane, tho oaodod opocioo occur oaloly lo opao opocoo feacnooQ 


ohrubo. t'ndeolrablo annual vecotatlon lo absont or noatlv oo. 


ii to 30 porcone of tho variation lo cespoood of tho oocdod opocioo. If 


ohrubo oro praoont, oo«a ooodod opocioo occur in opoo uaproeoceod araao. 


Molted aaounts of undesirable annual vofietatlon Qfo present. 


Looo than 25 porca \t of tho vagotatlon lo coaposed of tho ooodod opocioo. 
 Soodod opocioo aro gaoorally protoctod by ohrubo or rocho. Thoro So O O 6TO02T 


abundanco of undeslrablo annuals and/or ohrubo. 


Kara than SO parcaat of the total vagotatlon 10 cosposcd of tho potantiol 
 natural mtgototlon. An ovanly dlotrlbuted olxtura of granoeo, ferbo, emS 

ohrubo oro prooant. Major aotlvo forago graoooo occur la opoa, enpsoeoccod 
 oroao. Uadaolrablo annual vogototioo lo oboont or naorly oe. Drowoo opesiao 
 ohcwlnft no hedging. 


23 to SO percent, of tho vagotatlon lo eoopooad of tha potantial natural vago­ gotioa. Modoraco variationo of graoooo, forbo, aad ohrubo oalos. Soco eajotr 
 sativo forago graaooo occur la opan, unprotected oraao. Limited a^ouato o£ 


uadaolrablo annual vogotatloa aro proscat. Brovoo opocioo ohoalois eodoraa© 


hedging. 


Laoo than 25 porcont of tha vegetation lo coepooad of tho potaatlal aatu;ol 


vegetation. Poor variation oxists aoong grassao, forbo, and ohrubo, uita as 
 evar abusdanca of uedaolrobla annualo or ohrubo. HaJor natlvo forogo opocioo 
 oro ganarally protoctod by ohrubo or rocks. Brovsa spaclao ohcwin(j hoawy 
 hedcir.q. 


Cooiratio granatin, forbo and onrubs aro vigorous snowies good haalth. Thcoa 10 
 plants ghould hova Q?od site , cc-lcr. and produce abundant horbaae. 

Bsoirablo grassao, foroo, and snruba nova -rdor&te vigor . They aro aedlus 

oiso tilth fai r color and producing aodorato axouoto of horbogo, oocxi oaod o&ollu: 

ond oeodheads oro present. 

ftssirablo grasses, forbo aad shrubs havj low vigor. Thoy appear unhaaithy flth 

osall oiso and poor color. Portions of clu—ps or entire planto oro-dood or dvlnp. Sgcd stalhs ar.d seedhgads oi-3«t non-gKisrgnp pt^nr in pr^rected nrcps. 

There is seedling establishment of desirabl e grasses, t'orbo. ond shrubs. Seed­ 10 
 lings ara presgnt In open spaces bocvean plants and along edgeo of ooil pedootalo . fgw seedllnc s of Invader or undesirable planes arc present. 

Soaa seedlings oc c<»iraola grassas, lorbs and shruss =ay or nay not bo praoa.it 


In open spaces between plants. So=a seadllngs o* invadar or undoolroblo plant 


species ray or nav not bQ present. 
 Feu If aay saedllngs of desircala grasses, forbs and shrubs are baing aotab— 


llshad. Seedlings of lavadar or uadaolrablo plants aro proco-nt la opoa opocoo 


bprvegn plants. ________ 

Surface Utter is accu-ulatir; in place. 
 Moderate novgrent o: surface iittgr is jgpargnt and deposited aKalnst obstacles.' 


Vgrv little surface litter is re—lining. I 


Sone or slich t visual evidence of soi l -ove-ent. No exposed roots. 

Moderate rovc-ent ot" soi l nartlclc s visible . Sc;e ola-;s have roots exposed. 

Kovcaent occuro with each event. Soil and debris depositad against Bloor 

obstructions. Terracing oav be present. Manv plants have roots exposed. 

°Dacord vegetation ao olthe r oaedad or notlvo , not for both. Total 

7-16 Botsntrard 

17-24 Static ( n o t apparent) 

27-36 Upuard 

CQaorol Re-arko: 

128 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

XL SOIL-VEGETATION INVENTORY 

METHOD 

Editor's Note: The procedures for collecting data using this method were transcribed from 

old BLM Manual 4412.14, "Soil-Vegetation Inventory Method," Release 4-58, dated 8/10/79. 

The Soil-Vegetation Inventory Method (SVIM) is the Bureau of Land Management's 

(BLM's) method for conducting basic soil and vegetation inventories (consistent with BLM 

Manual Sections 5200,6602,6672,7161, and 7312). The procedures provide a uniform, 

systematic method for inventorying soil and vegetation resources and collecting data for use< 

in Unit Resource Analysis (URA), Management Framework Plans (MFP), Activity Plans, and 

environmental assessments. It is designed to be used in conjunction with BLM Manual 

section 6602, Integrated Habitat Inventory and Classification System (IHICS). The method 

does not preclude site specific studies (for special purposes), other approved inventories 

(various forest inventories, forage surveys, etc.), or more detailed inventories based upon it. 

Although SVIM does not inventory all renewable resources, it provides a sampling frame for 

wildlife species occurrence inventories and gathers basic data used by other resources (recreation, watershed, etc.). It is an integrated inventory system in that other renewable resource 

inventories are based upon, or directly related to, its procedures. To gather more detailed 

data, it may be necessary to conduct intensive studies on specific areas of concern. Continuous studies are also essential to monitor changes in base inventory data for necessary adjustments in management as resource conditions change. Such studies must include, but are not 

limited to: actual grazing use, wild animal occurrence, rangeland condition and trend studies, 

vegetation production and utilization, climatic variation, shrub transects or vegetation plots, 

ground cover determinations, and watershed transects. 

A. Pre-Planning Analysis 

All inventory and planning efforts must be preceded by a pre-planning analysis in accordance 

with BLM Manual section 1601. The pre-planning analysis identifies the issues and problems that impact the planning area and determines planning requirements, including the level 

of soil and vegetation inventory necessary for the area. The results of the preplanning 

analysis are documented in written guidance to the inventory planning team (Section XI.A.l). 

This guidance clearly defines the level of detail that must be met during data collection 

efforts to adequately address the issues and problems identified. 

•1. Inventory Plan 

An inventory plan, based on guidance from the pre-planning analysis, must be developed prior to conducting the inventory. An interdisciplinary team must be appointed by 

the District in the pre-planning analysis, the team must set forth in writing the extent and 

intensity of the inventory. The inventory plan should be attached to and become a part 

of the pre-planning analysis. The inventory plan is approved by the District Manager 

and reviewed by the State Director prior to initiation of the inventory. A suggested 

outline for the inventory plan is as follows: 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

a. Purpose. 

b. Objectives. 

c. Description of inventory area. 

d. Information required based on issues. 

e. Inventory design. 

f. Personnel and funding requirements and/or constraints. 

g. Logistics. 

h. Field measurements and procedures. 

i. Compilation procedures. 

j . Reporting (progress and results) requirements. 

k. Approval process. 

1. Files maintenance. 

The inventory plan must set forth when and how progress reviews will be conducted. 

The District Manager must appoint a progress review team consisting of resource 

specialists from the District staff, with assistance from State or other BLM office 

specialists if desired. Reviews consist of assuring adequate quality and quantity of 

inventory progress and resolving any problems incurred. 

3. Pre-Inivemtory Preparation) 

Pre-inventory preparation is extremely important if the inventory is to be successful. 

Many factors must be considered and many preparatory details organized efficiently and 

sequentially in order to insure systematic conduct and completion of field work. 

4. Inventory Parity 

The inventory party normally consists of a party chief, a soil survey team, and a vegetation inventory (transecting) team. If specified in the inventory plan, the soil survey and 

mapping team may be combined into a single team to complete the mapping of the 

inventory area. The soil survey team may be Soil Conservation Service (SCS), BLM, 

combined SCS-BLM, or contract personnel. The inventory party must be carefully 

selected. Members' knowledge, experience, education, and training is extremely 

important. 

a. Chief of Party. The chief of party, who should be a permanent BLM employee, 

must be selected with a great deal of emphasis placed on experience, integrity, 

character, attitude, ethics, knowledge, and competence. He/she should be 

knowledgeable and experienced in objectives and procedures of soil-vegetation 

inventories and acquainted with Bureau interrelated programs. He/she should be a 

130 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

person of good judgment and have had supervisory experience. He/she is responsible for organizing and directing the inventory, coordinating field data collection, 

making work assignments, keeping equipment in good operating order, providing 

for the welfare of the party members, and reporting progress of the inventory. 

: Whether the soil survey is being conducted by the SCS, joindy by SCS and BLM, or 

by contract, the party chief is responsible for coordinating the vegetation and 

wildlife inventories with the soil survey. ^~. 

b. Party Members. The soil survey mapping, and vegetation inventory teams must 

consist of qualified specialist, including range specialists, foresters, soil scientists; 

and wildlife biologists. All specialists on the inventory party must work closely 

together throughout the inventory. 

• (1) Soil Survey Team. The soil survey is responsible for soil mapping the area and 

must consist of qualified soil scientists organized to conduct the soil survey in 

accordance with standard soil survey procedures. The soil survey team may be 

SCS, BLM, a combination of SCS-BLM employees, or the soil survey may be 

contracted. Soil survey team members must work very closely with range 

specialists in designing mapping units. The SCS has final responsibility for 

correlating all soil surveys. 

(2) Mapping Team. The mapping team is responsible for delineation of ecological 

sites, serai stages (condition classes), and present vegetation communities and ­

must consist of experienced range specialists, foresters, wildlife biologists, and 

soil scientists who are familiar with the plant and animal communities of the 

inventory area. 

(3) Vegetation Inventory (Transecting) Team. The vegetation inventory team 

collects site specific vegetation data and must consist of qualified resources 

specialists who are organized and trained to collect the data described in 

Section XI.D. 

(4) Phenological Data Collection Team. It may be desirable to assign the responsibility of collecting the data for phenological adjustment factors as set forth in 

Section XI.D.6 to one or two individuals. This will assure accurate data collection in a timely manner for this important phase of the inventory. This team also 

may collect samples for air-dry weight conversion data (Section XI.D.7). 

5. Preparing for the Inventory 

The chief of party formulates a plan of operation, assembles material, makes necessary 

arrangements, and coordinates with appropriate District staff members. He/she must 

assemble all forms, maps, photos, and other equipment, and supplies necessary for 

conducting the inventory. See Illustration 19 for an equipment list. 

131 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

Base Maps 

(1) Aerial Photographs. It is essential to have a complete set of aerial photographs 

solely for inventory purposes. These should be acquired well in advance of the 

inventory. To facilitate the inventory, recent aerial photography (less than 10 

years old) is desirable. Aerial photographs at the scale of 1:24,000 are best 

suited to the inventory requirements and ease of data transfer to orthophoto 

quads. Aerial photographs are used for field mapping and the mapped information is then transferred in the office to orthophoto quads or other base maps. 

(2) Orthophoto Quads. Orthophoto quads (1:24,000) are a desirable mapping base 

and, if used, should be acquired well in advance of the field inventory.. If not 

available, each State should try to obtain coverage. A 2- to 3-year lead time is 

needed to obtain adequate coverage. 

(3) Topographic and Planimetric Maps. Use topographic and planimetric maps or 

any high quality maps accurately showing the relative position and nature of the 

inventory area features. Among the most usable would be GS topographic 

quadrangles, although other topographic or planimetric maps also may be of 

considerable assistance. 

(4) Administrative Maps. Provide administrative maps which include management 

unit, grazing allotments, range improvements, timber harvest, fish and wildlife 

habitat, and land status as references for party members during inventory. 

Reference Material. Review existing information for the inventory area and 

assemble pertinent information for use and orientation of inventory party members. 

This includes: 

(1) Inventories. Past inventories (range, watershed, wildlife habitat, visual resources, recreation, timber, etc.) including current URA's. 

(2) Literature. Literature concerning area soils, geology, vegetation, fish and 

wildlife species, archeology, presence of threatened or endangered species, etc. 

(Consult universities, local SCS offices, etc.) 

(3) National List of Scientific Plant Names. Standard symbols from the National 

List of Scientific Plant Names, published by the SCS, and used on all vegetation 

inventory forms. This is the most complete list available on a national basis. It 

may be desirable (for field use) to compile a list of plant species found in the 

inventory area from the National List. 

(a) Plant List Rules. To provide for uniformity and avoid duplication, the 

following rules were followed in developing the National List of Scientific 

Plant Names: 
Supplemental Studies —• SVIM 

i. Alphanumeric Codes. Automatic data processing requires short plant' 

name symbols. Four- to eight-letter alphanumeric plant name symbols 

must be used. 

ii. Genus. A basic five-letter symbol, consisting of first five genus letters, 

is used for the genus name. If the name has less than five letters, "+" 

sighs are added to make a five-letter symbol. For example, the genus 

for fir trees, Abies, has the five-letter symbol ABIES: for wheatgrasses, 

Agropyron, the symbol is AGROP; for bluegrasses, Poa. the symbol is 

POA++; and for maples, Acer, the symbol is ACER+. If needed, tie-, 

breakers are added to the basic five-letter symbol. For example, 

CHRYS is the first five letters of several genera— Chrysopsis. 

Chrysopogon. Chrysothamnus. and Chrysanthemum. Alphabetically, 

the genus symbol for the first one is CHRYS and for the others, 

CHRYS2, CHRYS3, etc. 

iii. Species. The basic plant name (species) symbol consists of the first two 

letters of the genus name and the first two of the species name. For 

example, the symbol for Kentucky bluegrass. POA pratensis. is POPR. 

In alphabetic order, all other plants having the same four-letter symbol 

must have tiebreakers in numeric sequence starting with 2. Examples: 

POPR2, POPR3, etc. 

iv. Variety. The first letter of the variety name, either natural or cultivar, is 

added to the basic four-letter plant name symbol. Examples: Pinus 

ponderosa variety arizonica has the five-letter symbol PIPOA. Symbols 

for cultivars must be developed when the cultivar list is generated. 

(b) Species Not Listed. When species which have not been assigned a code in 

the National List are encountered, use the following procedure: 

i. Form Entry. On all vegetation inventory forms,.enter the first two 

letters of the genus name and the first two of the species name. In 

addition, add an asterisk to denote the absence of an assigned code. 

ii. Notification of Absence from List. Upon identifying a species which is 

not included in the National List, the person noting the absence must 

forward the information to the Service Center Director (D-460). This 

.";' staff must coordinate with the SCS to obtain a code for each such 

species encountered. 

(4) Location of Fish.and Wildlife Species. Review information on probable location 

of fish and wildlife species with particular emphasis on endangered, threatened, 

or sensitive species, big game ranges, concentration areas, and important 

biological areas. Document new information in URA. 

133 
Supplemental Studies — SVEM 

(5) Location of Threatened or Endangered Plants. Review and assemble information for URA on probable location of threatened or endangered plant species, 

including descriptions and pictures. 

c. Comparison Area Information. Identify existing and probable comparison areas 

(Section XI.D.8.a) and document data on Form 4412-41, Documentation of Comparison Areas, (Illustration 20), for determining site potential, serai stage (condition 

class), and apparent trend. Comparison areas are especially useful for evaluating 

riparian vegetation. It may be necessary to construct exclosures along stream 

segments and measure successional changes to determine potential vegetation in the 

riparian zones. 

d. Inventory Schedule. Plan and schedule the inventory well in advance with appropriate priorities and Annual Work Plan procedures. The time of year the inventory 

will be conducted must be determined by the chief of party in consultation with 

appropriate District staff members. Soil inventories and soil and ecological site 

mapping can be conducted any time weather permits. Within practical limits, the 

vegetation data collection should not begin until the growing season is sufficiently 

advanced to insure a representative growth of vegetation. Work may continue into 

the fall until conditions prevent accurate classification and production estimates. It 

may be desirable to strategically place utilization cages in representative portions of 

the inventory area prior to the inventory. This is helpful in reconstructing utilized 

plants as well as adjusting for full plant growth in the summary and interpretative 

phases. 

6. Tramming 

Training inventory party members is the responsibility of the chief of party and other 

qualified resource specialists. This includes scheduling and preparing training in 

procedures, e.g., mapping units, data collection, plant identification, aerial photo interpretation, etc. 

a. Prior to the Inventory. The inventory party must be trained in all facets of the 

SVIM. District and State resource specialists should inform the inventory party 

about items to look for and explain how all information will be gathered and documented consistent with the inventory plan. 

b. During Inventory. The efficiency and accuracy of the inventory crew members 

depend upon their initial training. During this initial period, coordination with the 

District staff is extremely important. Spend enough time to acquaint each party 

member with the inventory area, main roads, landmarks, fish and wildlife crucial 

areas, and important biological areas. 

(1) Uniformity. Uniformity in following the inventory procedures is essential. All 

vegetation inventory team members must work together for a sufficient period 

of time to assure uniformity in following inventory procedures. 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

(2) Individual Training. The chief of party must work individually with each 

member of the vegetation inventory team to further improve and assure uniformity and accuracy of work and to check progress. 

(3) Coordination. Procedures must be continually coordinated throughout the 

inventory. Vegetation inventory team members must work together for at least a 

portion of a day each week to correlate estimates and to resolve problems that 

may arise in field procedures. 

(4) Progress Reviews. Progress reviews, including field checks of inventory crew 

work, should occur as set forth in the inventory plan (Section XI.A.2). 

B. Field Inventory Mapping 

Mapping must be done by trained range specialists, wildlife biologists, foresters, and soil 

scientists, working closely together. Field mapping consists of delineating site writeup areas 

(SWAs) (Section XI.B.3) based on present plant communities within boundaries of potential 

plant communities—range sites, woodland sites (suitability groups), or forest types (Illustration 21). Field mapping must be completed for the inventory area prior to stratification and 

collection of vegetation data. It is desirable to complete mapping a year in advance of 

collecting vegetation data. All mapping must be in accordance with Office of Management 

and Budget National Mapping Standards, Circular A-16. 

1. Sources and Criteria for Mapping 

a. Sources of Potential Plant Community Information. The following sources should 

be reviewed for information concerning the potential plant community: 

(1) Range site descriptions. 

(2) Woodland site descriptions. 

(3) Potential forest type descriptions (habitat types). 

(4) Comparison area data. 

b. Criteria for Mapping Present Vegetation. Significant changes in the following 

factors must be considered in delineating present vegetation communities: 

(1) Vegetation species composition (kinds, proportions, and amounts of present 

vegetation). 

(2) Vegetation ground cover. 

(3) Vegetation height. 

. (4) Vegetation age class (especially in forested areas). 

;

 (5) Topography. 

(6) Other factors identified in the inventory plan. 

135 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

2. Potential Plant Community Mapping 

a. Guidance on Potential Plant Communities. The SCS National Range Handbook 

(NRH-1, July 13, 1976) should be consulted for information on range and woodland 

sites (suitability groups). The SCS has described range sites covering much of the 

public land. In some cases woodland sites descriptions may also be available. Early 

contact and coordination with local SCS offices is essential. Information which 

should be obtained from the SCS includes: soil surveys, copies of soil survey field 

sheets, technical range and woodland site descriptions and guides, and information 

from the SCS Range Data System. Information on forest types may be obtained 

from applicable published reports by Forest Service Experimental Stations, universities, etc. 

b. Mapping Process with a Completed Soil Survey. In areas where soil survey and 

range site descriptions are complete, a range site-soil series correlation should be 

available in the final soil survey report. The survey report may also identify soil 

series that support woodland sites or forest types (habitat types) where the potential 

plant communities have been defined. From these data a legend can be developed to 

correlate the soil maps with the appropriate range site, woodland site, or forest type. 

This legend should be provided to the mapping team for field use. 

Preliminary Interpretations: Prior to going to the field, the mapping team can make 

some preliminary interpretations based on the soil maps and site legend and aerial 

photographs. Each preliminary delineation must be checked on the ground to 

accurately determine the range site, woodland site, or forest type. On most soil 

surveys, a number of the soil mapping units may be either associations or complexes. The mapping team has to determine the percentage of each of the components when they determine the range site, woodland site, or forest type. 

c. Mapping Without a Completed Soil Survey. In areas where soil surveys are not 

completed, the SCS must be contacted to obtain any available soil or ecological site 

data. The SCS may be able to assist in training and in establishing the mapping 

legend. The mapping team must work together in the field to achieve consistency in 

SWA delineation based upon range sites, woodland sites, or forest types. The soil 

scientist must insure that soils are considered in delineations. If at all possible, a soil 

survey should be completed prior to or concurrently with delineation of ecological 

sites. When it is necessary to delineate range sites, woodland sites, or forest types 

without a soil survey, Form 4412-38, Soil Description Field Data, (Illustration 22), 

is used to record soil data. The soil scientist completes one for each established 

phase of series and three for unnamed phases of series. 

3. Present Plant Commonlty Mapping 

Potential plant communities (range and woodland sites and forest types) are further 

subdivided into the present vegetation communities, using criteria listed in Section 

XI.B.l.b. Each identified range site is divided into serai stage (condition classes) and/or 

present vegetation communities by the mapping team. Woodland sites and forest types 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

are divided only into present vegetation communities, unless site guides for serai stage • 

(condition class) determinations are available. 

Site Writeup Area (SWA) Delineation: The smallest delineation geographical unit to be 

used as a base for collecting vegetation data is the SWA. It may consist of an entire 

ecological unit (range site, woodland site, or forest (habitat) type), or a portion of a unit 

if more than one serai stage (condition class) or present vegetation community exists. It 

may contain more than one present and/or potential plant community where soil-vegetation complexes occur and are intermingled to the extent they cannot be individually 

delineated. It must not cross allotment boundaries. This is essential in order to compile 

data by grazing allotment. SWAs may be mapped down to a minimum of 6 acres. 

SWAs may also be delineated on soil mapping units or pastures boundaries if specified 

in the inventory plan. 

a. Range Sites. The mapping team must divide each mapped range site into serai ­

stage(s) (condition classfes]) and present vegetation communities (Illustration 20). 

Detailed procedures for mapping range sites and condition c'asses are found in the 

SCS National Range Handbook (See Section XI.B.2), 

(1) Serai Stage (Condition Class) Classification. Each delineated range site must 

be placed in a serai stage (condition class), or further divided into serai stages if 

. more than one stage (class) exists within a given range site. Classifying range 

sites into serai stages is done initially by making visual estimates of plant 

composition. Determine the initial stage (class) of areas within a range site by 

comparing the present plant community with that of the climax community, as 

indicated by the range condition guide. For the existing plant community, count 

as climax no more than the maximum weight (or percentage of total production) 

shown on the guide for any species in the climax community. Total the amount 

of all climax species, not in excess of that shown on the guide, to indicate the 

relative ecological rating. The rating must be between 0 and 100, depending on 

how closely the existing plant community resembles the potential plant community for the range site. (See the SCS National Range Handbook for discussion 

of range condition determinations.) The mapping team may want to develop a 

field worksheet to record these initial condition determinations. 

(2) Serai Stages (Condition Classes). Use the following serai stages (condition 

classes) to express the degree to which the composition of the present plant 

community reflects that of the potential. It is not necessary to use both serai 

stage and condition class terminology in referring to the specific ecological plant 

communities. Both terms are shown here merely to illustrate the relationship of 

the serai stages (new terminology) to the established condition class 

terminology. 

137 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

Estimated Percentage of 

Present Plant Community that is 

Serai Stage Condition Class Potential for the Range Site 

Climax Excellent 

76 - 100 

High Good 51 - 75 

Medium Fair 

26 - 50 

Low Poor 

0 - 25 

(3) Present Vegetation. After range sites have been initially classified into serai 

stages (condition classes), it may be necessary to further divide these stages 

based on the present vegetation communities. For example, a range site may be 

in a low stage (poor condition) with heavy sagebrush on part of the site and 

cheatgrass on the remainder. These two diverse vegetation communities must 

be delineated. Significant changes in vegetation composition and ground cover 

should be consistent in mapping the present vegetation community. The smallest unit delineated within a range site is the Site Writeup Area (SWA). The 

mapping team must assign a SWA number to each SWA delineated and also 

complete certain sections of Form 4412-26, Transect Data Sheet, 

(Illustration 23), and Form 4412-30, Stratification Data and General Characteristics, (Illustration 24). Automatic Data Processing Codes for Vegetation Types 

and Subtypes, Form 4412-30a, (Illustration 25), and Standard Land-Form 

Coding and Descriptions, Form 4412-30B, (Illustration 26), are used in completing Form 4412-30 and 4412-38. 

b. Woodland Sites. Each delineated woodland site must be divided by stage (condition) if guides are available, or by present vegetation communities. The smallest 

unit delineated within a woodland site is the SWA. The mapping team must assign a 

SWA number to each SWA delineated, and also complete certain sections of 

Form 4412-26 (Illustration 23) and Form 4412-30 (Illustration 24). 

c. Forest Types. Forest types are divided into stands—uniform plant communities of 

trees as to timber type, age class, vigor, height, ground cover, and stocking. The 

smallest delineated unit within a forest type is the site writeup area (SWA), or stand. 

The mapping team must assign a SWA number to each delineated SWA, and also 

complete certain sections of Form 4412-26 (Illustration 23) and Form 4412-30 

(Illustration 24). 

4. Featare Mapping 

Feature mapping must be accomplished primarily by the mapping team. If the vegetation inventory team observes any features missed by the mapping team, they should 

record them. Any permanent cultural or topographic features and/or biological features 

(Section XI.F.2 for special feature areas, and BLM Manual Section 6602) and existing 

improvements, such as fences, roads, water developments, etc., not shown on existing 

maps must be indicated on aerial photographs and transferred to topographic maps or 

orthophoto quads, using standard mapping symbol. The Bureau's standard map symbol 

list (Manual Section 9161, BLM Map Symbol Handbook) covers the more important 
Supplemental Studies — S VIM 

natural, cultural, and control feature symbols used in inventory field mapping. Barriers 

to livestock and/or wildlife and wild horse and burros must be noted. 

. 5. Water Resources 

Show all water resources, such as marshes, reservoirs, springs, seeps, streams, etc., on 

the map. To the maximum extent possible, aquatic and riparian vegetation information 

must be integrated into the S VIM procedures. 

6. Planimetric Control 

If planimetric control is not adequate, it is necessary to locate all known section corners. 

Photo identified USGS primary control (triangulation) stations are very helpful and 

should be located wherever possible. In order to prepare accurate maps from aerial 

photographs, locate at least two corners per township. These should be well spaced. 

••- When corners are found, indicate the precise location on the photographs with a needle 

prick. Mark a cross over the hole on the reverse side of the. picture with the sections to 

which the corner is common written into the angles of the cross. Record the township, 

range, date, and the identifying individual's initials on the back of thephotograph. Mark 

assumed corners not positively identified similarly and write the words "probable 

corner" on the back near the description. 

C. Soil Considerations 

The basic soil taxon is the soil series. Taxa other than the soil series may constitute only a 

very minor portion of any legend. Thus, almost all soil mapping units are composed of 

phases of soil series, either mono- or multi-taxa with some families or subgroups and miscellaneous areas as indicated by soil characteristics and geomorphic conditions. Size of delineations are dominately controlled by the scale of map and mapping unit composition. 

Soil Inventory Standard. It is Bureau policy to make soil inventories that meet the standards 

of the National Cooperative Soil Survey as stated in the SCS National Soils Handbook, Soil 

Survey Manual, Soil Taxonomy, and BLM Section 7312 - Soils. The soil survey is published as an interim or special soil survey report of areas for in-service use. 

1. Mapping Intensity 

As a minimum, the intensity of soil inventories within the Bureau is a third-order survey 

at a scale of 1:24,000 and phases of series. At this intensity, soil mapping units consist 

primarily of associations with some consociations, complexes, undifferentiated groups 

that are defined primarily in terms of phases of soil series. There is a need to consider 

phases of families/familia, subgroups, and miscellaneous areas as indicated by soil and 

geomorphic conditions. This does not mean families and phases of families are the 

primary taxa for the inventory area, but are legitimate components when used to define 

the potentials or limitation of unique areas. This major goal is to identify soil mapping 

units that can be correlated into range sites, woodland sites, forest land types, and, in 

some instances, important resource values identified in the pre-planning analysis. The 

constraints that control the intensity of mapping unit must be defined in the inventory 

plan. 

139 
Supplemental Studies — SVEM 

2. Map Scales 

The Bureau's standard map scale is 1:24,00 (Section XI.A.5.a). The minimum size 

delineation for soil and vegetation inventories is about 6 acres for distinctly suitable 

areas for wildlife habitat such as riparian areas for food and cover, and cliffs or promontories for raptors (Section XI.F.2 for instructions on handling special habitat features). 

Districts now having 1:20,000 or 1:31,680 scale photography may use these scales for 

the inventories. It is suggested that smaller scale photography up to 1:63,360 be enlarged to a scale of 1:31,680 or 1:24,000. Minimum size delineations are as follows: 

Scale Acres Inches/Miles 

1:20,000 4.0 3.16 

1:24,000 6.0 

2.64 

1:31,680 10.0 

2.0 

3. Soil Symbols audi MeconMimg 

Symbols to be used to identify soil series are defined in BLM manual section 7312 ­

Soils. Each phase of a soil series, miscellaneous land type, etc., is given a symbol and 

defined locally. All mapping units and symbols must be identified in the soil identification legend. All mapping units within an inventory area must be assigned a symbol and 

recorded in the legend for the soil survey area. 

D. Vegetation Field Inventory 

The following vegetation sampling procedures are recommended for use in delineated site 

writeup areas (SWA's). Alternative procedures, such as those outlined in Section 600 of the 

SCS National Range Handbook may be used, provided the alternative procedures supply 

comparable data for computer processing by the Service Center and all the standard forms are 

used in recording field data. Procedures are set forth in the sequence in which they are 

conducted. These are minimum standards. Additional transects or more intense sampling 

may occur, if so indicated in the inventory plan. 

1. Stratification 

Similar SWA's are grouped together for sampling purposes. If a SWA contains a 

complex of soil-vegetation units, individual components are placed in stratum composed 

of similar soil-vegetation units. The size of the geographical area to be stratified is 

determined and documented in the inventory plan. The complexity of the ecological 

situation, as well as local needs, determines whether stratification is made by allotment, 

group of allotments, environmental impact statement (EIS) area, planning unit, resource 

area, or District. The inventory plan sets forth the criteria for stratification. 

a. Stratum. A stratum consists of a grouping of SWA's or similar soil-vegetation 

components (percent of SWA) having the same range site, woodland site, or forest 

type in the same serai stage (condition class) and/or present vegetation community. 

If an area is critical wildlife habitat, this may serve as additional criteria for 

stratification. 

140 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

b. Documentation. All strata are assigned a number and listed on Form 4412-30, 

Stratification Data and General Characteristics (Illustration 24). The SWA's within 

a stratum are also listed on Form 4412-30. 

c. Sampling. Mapping should be completed prior to sampling for the entire geographical area to be sampled. SWA's to be sampled must be randomly selected from each 

stratum. For example, if it is determined there are 40.SWA's within a stratum, each 

of the 40 SWA's must have an equal chance of being selected for sampling. 

Number of Transects. The goal is to select the minimum number of transects needed 

to adequately (as defined in the inventory plan) characterize existing vegetation. 

The precise number of transects allocated per stratum, or the number of SWA's to 

be sampled, will depend upon inventory objectives, budget constraints, and vegetation variability. Exactly how the number of transects selected is determined must be 

documented in the inventory plan. 

2. Step-Point Transect 

Record a minimum of one 200-point transect in*each site writeup area (SWA) to be 

sampled. Transects must traverse the SWA in a manner which obtains a representative 

sample. Terrestrial transects generally run across the long axis of a SWA, although 

other layouts may be used. Transects in riparian SWA's are situated at a 90-degree 

angle from the stream or river axis. Additional transects are placed along the stream 

axis whenever changes in vegetation composition are apparent. If more than one range 

-site and associated vegetation occurs within a SWA, determine the percentage of each 

site and/or vegetation community within the SWA and establish a transect to sample 

each separately. If a distinctive strip pattern exists, establish a transect in each community. If an indistinct mottled pattern exists, establish one transect and record each 

community on separate forms. Data collected from this transect include ground cover, 

both basal and canopy. 

a. Transect layout. The mapping team must determine how the transect is to be laid 

out on the SWA's to be sampled and depict the transect location on the aerial 

photograph or overlay. (See Illustration 27, Transect layout, for procedure in 

determining points to be read and options in laying out transects.) At the beginning 

point of the transect take a photograph in the direction of the transect line to show a 

general view of the SWA. File the photographs with the inventory records in the 

District Office. 

b. Obstructions. When obstructions such as juniper trees, cholla cactus, or ledge 

rocks, etc., are encountered, the transect can be projected by a rod or stick with the 

length of the pace (e.g., 6') marked (Illustration 28, Projected Hits with Obstructions). Record the ground cover by observing the hit along the original transect line. 

Return to pace transect line as soon as possible and resume pacing. Normally "hits" 

along that portion of transects that intersect unnaturally disturbed areas, such as 

roads and trails, are not recorded. However, if unnatural e.g. disturbed areas, make 

up a significant portion of the SWA (e.g. heavily roaded by past mining activity or 

off-road-vehicle use) record the hits or use other techniques such as recent aerial 

141 
Supplemental Studies — SVEM 

photographs to estimate the percentage of disturbed area within the SWA. When 

disturbed areas are encountered, proceed three paces past disturbance and continue 

recording along the same transect line. 

c. Recording. At each point to be read, record the following (Diagrammatic Sketch 

of Step-Point Data and Recording Procedures, Illustration 29, and Form 4412-26, 

Transect Data Sheet, Illustration 23): 

(1) Basal Hits. Identify ground cover and record as either basal hits or live vegetation (including mosses and lichens), litter (persistent or nonpersistent), gravel, 

cobbles or stones, bare ground, or bedrock. Live vegetation must always be 

identified by plant symbols (see SCS National List of Scientific Plant Names). 

(a) Identify "hits" by a 1/8 inch mark, preferably a 1/8 inch wide and 1/16 inch 

deep, on the toe of the sole of boot. Wider notches affect the decision as 

what to record. 

(b) If two or more items such as bare ground and litter appear in the notch, 

record the item which occupies the majority of the notch. 

(c) Identity of the cover must be expressed as a single category; therefore, 

where two or more apparently equal categories are identified, the preferred 

identity is: first, vegetation; second, litter; third, gravel; forth, cobble, fifth, 

stone; sixth, bare ground. 

(d) Identify the cover category or "hit" directly beneath the notch, unless the 

vegetation and/or litter is pushed out of its natural canopy. Record the cover 

category that appears under the disturbed material at the ground surface. 

(2) Canopy. Identify and record the overstory (canopy) above the mark or notch 

within the line of sight. (See Illustration 29 for examples of various situations.) 

3. Vegetation Production and Characterization Plots 

These plots are used to record production and certain plant characteristics. 

a. Types of Plots. 

(1) Weight-Estimate Plots. The weight estimate may be any multiple of .96 square 

feet (.96, 1.92,4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 48.0, etc.). The 9.6 square-foot plot is usually best 

suited for use in areas of sparse vegetation. Given the greater productivity of 

riparian versus upland vegetation, weight-estimate plots in riparian SWAs may 

have to be reduced in size (i.e., .96 sq.ft.). The weight-estimate plot may be 

delineated by a circular hoop or a palo for linear rectangular plots (See Illustration 30, Vegetation Characterization Plot Layout—Circular Plots). The same 

size and type of plot should be used for the entire transect. 

(2) Shrub and Tree Characterization Plots. The shrub and tree characterization plot 

may be a 1/100-acre or 1/200-acre plot. The 1/100-acre plot is used in sparse 

stands of shrubs while the 1/200-acre plot may be used in dense stands of 

142 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

shrubs. The same size of plot should be used for the entire transect. The center 

point of this plot is the center of the weight-estimate plot. The 1/100-acre plot is 

delineated by an 11.7-foot fine cable or chain as a radius, and the 1/200-acre 

plot is delineated by an 8.3-foot fine cable or chain as a radius (Illustration 30). 

(3) Forest Land Plots. If it is determined in the inventory plan that more intense 

data is required on forest lands, establish a forest plot using the center of the 

weight estimate plot. The forest plot consists of two concentric circular plots 

having a radius of 11.7-feet (1/100 acre plot) and 37.2-feet (1/10 acre). 

b. Plot Layout. Establish plots at every 20th point of the step point transect. Place the 

rear edge of the, weight estimate plot at the toe of the boot where the hit was recorded (Illustration 30). Each transect will have a minimum of 10 weight-estimate 

plots. Plots may be established in clusters if so determined in the inventory plan: 

The shrub and tree characterization plot and the forest lands plot must be estab- . 

lished, using the center of the weigln>estimate plot as the center for these plots. 

c. Recordings . 

r

(1) Weight-Estimate Plot. The following vegetation records are made from this plot 

 in the order listed. . 

(a) Vegetation Characterization 

i. Average availability, phenology, and utilization for each plant species 

for each weight estimate plot is recorded on Form 4412-27, Weight 

Estimate and Vegetation Characterization (Illustration 31). ­

v ii. Formand age class for each plant of grasses and fprbs and average 

height by grass and forb species with totals for each category is recorded on Form 4412-27 (Illustration 31). Record this data on a mini­

•'••••.' mum of 3 of the 10 weight-estimate plots. More plots may be recorded 

if more intensive sampling is required. 

(b) Weight Estimate of Vegetation Production. Record weight-estimate data on 

Form 4412-27. (See Illustration 31, page 2, for form entry instructions and 

Illustration 32 for a schematic.sketch of the weight-estimate plot layout.) 

Make records for each of the 10 plots. At least 2 of the 10 plots are clipped 

and weighed. Make estimates before the plants are clipped and weighed, as 

follows: Pre-select 2 of the 10 plots which are to be clipped; make weightestimates prior to clipping; clip and weigh; record both the estimated and the 

actual weights on Form 4412-27. Circle the actual weight entries on the 

form. 

i. Recording Actual Weights. Record actual green weights for each 

species as weighed and/or estimated on each plot. 

Height Classes. Include height estimates of all current year's growth of 

each plant species by the following height classes: 0' to 3', 3' to 4'/2', 

4'/2 to 7', and T up (Illustration 32). 

143 
Supplemental Studies — SVEM 

Accuracy. During training periods and before individuals can proceed, 

the chief of the party assures that each member is consistently estimating weights within 10 percent of actual weights. 

ii. Weight Units. Because the relationship of weight to volume is not 

consistent, base production and composition determinations on weight 

estimates, not on comparison of relative volumes. The weight unit 

method is an efficient means of estimating production and lends itself 

readily to self-training. This method is based on the following: 

A weight unit is established for each plant species occurring on the area 

being examined, and can consist of part of a plant, an entire plant, or a 

group of plants. 

The size and weight of a unit varies according to the kind of plant. For 

example, a unit of 5 to 10 grams is suitable for small grass or forb 

species. Weight units for large plants may be several kilograms. 

Other considerations include: length, width, thickness, and number of 

stems and leaves; ratio of leaves to stems; and growth or relative 

compactness of species. 

iii. Establishing Weight Unit for Species. 

Decide on a weight unit (in grams or kilograms) that is appropriate for 

the species. 

Select part of a plant, an entire plant, or a group of plants likely to equal 

this weight. 

Harvest and weigh the plant material to determine actual weight. 

Repeat this process until the desired weight unit can be estimated with 

reasonable accuracy. 

Maintain proficiency in estimating by periodically harvesting and 

weighing to check estimates or production. 

iv. Number of Plots. A minimum of 10 weight estimate plots must be 

established per transect. If it is decided that more precise sampling with 

statistical reliability is needed, make an analysis in accordance with 

Illustration 33, Sampling Precision and Probability, to determine the 

number of additional plots necessary to achieve the reliability desired. 

Statistically reliable sampling is especially important if serious resource 

problems exist or major land-use adjustments are anticipated within a 

given allotment or inventory area. 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

(2) Shrub and Tree Characterization Plot. A minimum of 3 shrub and tree characterization plots must be established along each transect. The following data is 

recorded for shrubs and treesfrom the 1/100 acre or 1/200 acre plot 

(Illustration 30): 

(a) Form and age class for 5 shrubs and trees of each species; 

(b) Average height, and crown diameter by species; and 

(c) Total number of plants by species. 

(3) Forest Land Plots. Forest land plots are established if it is determined in the 

inventory plan that tree data in addition to that collected off the shrub and tree 

characterization plot is required. 

4. Vegetation Species Occurrence 

Record on Form 4412-26, Transect Data Sheet, (Illustration 23) any plant species 

observed in the site writeup area which is not recorded on step-point transect or plot 

record.. - • 

5. . Endangered, Threatened, or Locally Endemic Plants 

Each inventory party member must be provided with pertinent information on endangered, threatened, or locally endemic plant species likely to occur within the inventory 

area. Such.information must include descriptions of plants, pictures, and unique plant 

habitats. Areas of high potential for supporting threatened, endangered,or locally 

endemic species must be described and identified in field maps to assist inventory 

members. Record observed plants on the species list, Form 4412-26 (Illustration 23). 

Take color photographs of observed plants. 

6. Data Collection for Phenology Adjustment Factor 

Data are required to develop factors to adjust vegetation production recorded at the time 

of inventory to maximum production for the season. To generate this data, it is necessary to clip and weigh all major species in the inventory area and also record the dimensioris'of study plants on Form 4412-28, Dry/Green Weight Conversion Factor Data, 

(Illustration 34). Specific study sites are selected for collection of.phenology adjustment 

factor data. Data should be collected for all phenology stages by plant species. It may 

be desirable to collect data every 2 weeks. A minimum of 10 plants of each species 

should be recorded. A special team may be assigned the responsibility of collecting this 

data (Section XI.A.4.b.(4)). 

7. Obtaining Air-Dry Weight Conversion Data 

Converting green weight to air-dry weight is necessary in the compilation and interpretation phase. In order to make this conversion, vegetation samples must be collected at the 

same time the phenology adjustment factor data is collected (described in Section 

XI.D.6 above). Store samples in paper bags in a dry place and weigh them periodically 

145 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

until a consistently low weight is obtained. Collect these samples by species at each 

phenology stage for all major plant species in the inventory area. Recordation can be 

expedited by marking the following items on the paper bag with a rubber stamp prior to 

going to the field: plant species, date collected, elevation, phenology stage, green 

weight, and dry weight. Record this date on Form 4412-28 (Illustration 34). 

8. Comparison Area Data 

To determine potential vegetation communities and production, it is necessary to identify and study comparison areas. This is also important for several other interpretations. 

a. Site Potential Comparison Area. For many range sites the SCS has identified 

natural plant communities (relic areas) which can be used to determine potential. To 

substantiate existing data and to provide potential natural plant community data for 

sites not already covered, additional comparison areas need to be identified. Locate 

relatively natural, undisturbed comparison areas in order to develop potential plant 

communities for the various sites in the inventory area. The natural plant community of a site, in the absence of abnormal disturbances and physical site deterioration, will be approaching the climax community for that site. It is the total plant 

community that is best adapted to the unique combination of environmental factors. 

It should be the plant community that is in dynamic equilibrium with the environment. Such natural disturbances as drought, wild fires, native fauna grazing, and 

insects are inherent in the development of any native plant community. Plant 

communities protected from these natural influences for long periods do not always 

typify the goal for a desirable plant community. (See Rangeland Reference Areas, 

Society for Range Management, Range Science Series Number 3, March 1975). 

(1) Selection. A site is recognized and described on the basis of soils and the 

climax plant community which it is capable of supporting. However, 

management's goal is not necessarily to restore or maintain such a plant community. The goal may be to establish a somewhat altered plant community 

which provides adequate soil and moisture conservation yet produces benefits 

more useful to the objectives of the decisionmaker than the climax vegetation. 

(2) Locating Comparison Areas. District personnel should be on a constant lookout 

for riparian and terrestrial comparison areas. These areas should be identified, 

their locations recorded on Form 4412-41, Documentation of Comparison 

Areas, (Illustration 20), and studies as outlined below initiated or continued even 

though inventories are scheduled some time in the future. Repeat studies to 

substantiate data. 

(3) Determining Comparison Areas. Use the following methods in determining the 

natural plant community of a site: 

(a) Evaluate vegetation and associated soils on areas that have been subjected to 

minimal abnormal disturbances. 

(b) Evaluate and interpret research data dealing with ecology, management, and 

soils of plant communities. 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

(c) Review early historical accounts and botanical literature of the area. 

(d) Check the SCS Range Data Systems (RDS), which provides much data 

useful in identifying potential communities in many areas. 

(e) Check potential sites for use as comparison areas which includes: 

i.

 . Fenced exclosures. 

ii. Fenced rights-of-way which have not been recently disturbed. Do not 

use areas which receive additional moisture through runoff from highway, or other unnatural areas. 

iii. Portions of grazing allotments currently not used by livestock due to 

lack of water, natural barriers, etc. 

iv. Protected reserves, e.g., military reservations. 

v. Old cemeteries. 

(4) Studying Comparison Areas. Characteristics of a plant community obtained 

from a single source are not likely to be conclusive. In evaluating plant information, consideration must be given of such factors as drought versus unusually, 

favorable years, effects of recent fire, excessive rodent concentrations, insect 

damage, plant disease, and excessive soil removal or deposition by wind or 

water. Every effort must be made to examine plant communities throughout the 

area of occurrence on the site and at different seasons and during different years. 

The initial description of a natural plant community should be considered as an 

approximation subject to modification as additional knowledge is gained. 

(a) Conduct all the inventory studies described above on the comparison area, 

using the prescribed procedures. 

(b) Take pictures of soil profiles and vegetation at each comparison area. 

(c) Repeat studies, using the SVIM procedures, from year-to-year to refine and 

substantiate data. Collect primarily ground cover'and production data in 

these repeat studies. 

(5) Protecting Comparison Areas. Make every effort to protect identified comparison areas from future disturbances such as livestock grazing, mining, or other 

surface disturbing activities. The protection of these areas is necessary for 

continuing studies. It may be appropriate to place a BLM protective withdrawal 

on identified comparison areas. This can be accomplished under regulation 43 

CFR Subpart 6225, Withdrawal of Natural Areas. Document comparison areas 

by completing Form 4412-41, Documentation of Comparison Areas, (Illustration 20). Assign a number to each comparison area. The number must consist 

of the following: State, District, township, range, consecutive number within 

the township and range. 

147 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

b. Watershed Comparison Areas. Data gathered during the course of the inventory 

can be used to provided guidance in determining changes in erosion condition rating 

(Soil Surface Factor [SSF] Rating) and ground cover. (See BLM Manual Section 

7322.11B7 for additional guidance on selecting watershed comparison areas.) 

Type of Areas. Data obtained in the following types of areas can be used for watershed comparison area purposes: degraded areas adjacent to water, trails, etc.; 

mechanically treated areas, e.g., chaining, plowing, railing, etc, and chemically 

treated areas. 

9. Oettennrinmiiog Erosiomi Comidiltioini Class 

Soil Surface Factor (SSF) information must be completed for each site writeup area 

sampled and recorded on the space provided on Form 4412-26, Transect Data Sheet, 

(Illustration 23). Complete an SSF writeup for each SWA sampled, assessing the 

erosion ratings of the surrounding area. (See Section XVI, Soil Surface Factor.) The 

determination of SSF is made after the transect has been completed. In determining 

SSF, it is necessary to evaluate the entire SWA and not localize the evaluation. 

E. Forest Lands Inventory 

Determine in the inventory plan if forestry data will be collected. Forest land mapping and 

the completion of Form 4412-37, Photo Sample Record, (Illustration 35), should occur during 

the mapping phase (Section XI.B). This form may be completed for all the inventory area, if 

so desired. 

1. Comdectiinig Iiraveimtory 

The minimum mapping size of forest types is usually 40 acres or larger. For purposes of 

this inventory, a tree is defined as a woody plant having at least one well defined stem 

and a more or less well-formed crown, capable of attaining a height of at least 8 feet. 

2. Recording 

The initial forestry data is recorded on Form 4412-37, Photo Sample Record, (Illustration 35). This allows entry of stand or SWA information on trees, shrubs, grasses, and 

forbs. The use of this form for initial forestry input does not mean that other, more 

detailed forms may not be used along with intensive forest and rangeland surveys. The 

identified vegetation types may be used for preliminary typing, stratification, and 

mapping. 

F. Wildlife Resources Field Inventory 

Illustration 36 depicts the interrelationships between SVIM and wildlife resources inventories 

(Integrated Habitat Inventory and Classification System, BLM Manual Section 6602; Big 

Game Studies, and BLM Manual Section 6630; and Aquatic studies BLM Manual 

Section 6670). 

148 
Supplemental Studies -r- SVIM 

1. Opportunistic Animal Sightings 

Any wildlife observed during the inventory must be recorded on Form 4412-39, Wildlife-Recreation Observation Report, (Illustration 37), for each SWA sampled. The 

Wildlife-Recreation Observation Report is given to the District wildlife biologist for any 

followup action deemed appropriate. (More intensive sampling may be conducted later, 

using Form 6602-1, Animal Species Occurrence by Habitat Type, illustration 38 [BLM 

Manual Section 6602].) 

2. Special Habitat Features 

During the inventory of a SWA, note special wildlife habitat features on aerial photo­

. graphs and quads and record them on Form 6602-2, Special Habitat Feature, (Illustration 

39, and refer to BLM Manual Section 6602). Features to be mapped will have been 

determined during the pre-planning analysis and stated in the inventory plan. This will 

identify areas which the wildlife biologist may want to investigate in detail at a later 

date. Special habitat features may include soil or vegetation units smaller than 6 acres 

(Section XI.B.4). 

3. Riparian Areas 

Riparian areas are extremely important and, therefore, require special attention in the. 

SVIM procedures. Map and sample all riparian areas (existing and potential). 

Recordings 

a. Vegetation Condition (shrub and tree characterization plot) of the riparian habitat 

must be obtained by using the SVIM. 

b. Tree Species within the riparian site must be recorded on Form 4412-27, Weight 

, Estimate and Vegetation Characterization (Section XI.D.3.c.(2) and Illustration 31). 

4. Optional Data - Identifying Sagebrush Species 

Various sagebrush species have different palatability. Because of problems in identifying different species, a key has been developed for sagebrush species. (This key is 

available from the Service Center D-460.) Use portable black light (flashlight type) to 

assist in sagebrush species identification. 

G. Recreation Field Inventory 

For each SWA sampled, use Form 4412-39, Wildlife-Recreation Observation Report, (Illustration 37). Note the occurrence of recreation visitor use, incident, cultural features, or 

significant natural history feature observed. Give this observation report to the District 

recreation specialist for any followup action deemed appropriate. 

149 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

Ho Imveimtoiry Narrative Report 

Upon completion of the field portion of the inventory, the party chief prepares a narrative 

report. This must be a concise report covering the important items concerning the inventory. 

One copy of the report is submitted to the State Director, and another retained in the permanent District files for future reference purposes. The following items should be included: 

1. Description of inventory: 

a. Field season, 

b. Inventory party; and 

c. Procedures. 

2. Inventory activities: 

a. Problems encountered and solutions, 

b. Variations and modifications to inventory plan; and 

c. Data gaps or problems 

3. Recommendations: 

a. Additional data needed; and 

b. Changes for future inventories. 

4. Approval of inventory: 

a? Party Chief; 

b. Area Manager; and 

c. District Manager. 

L Additional Required Data 

In order to compile the soil-vegetation data, certain other data must be compiled and submitted with the inventory to the Service Center Director (D212) for computer compilation. 

These include: 

1. Site Writeup Area Acres (by legal description), Form 4412-29 (Illustration 40). 

2. Forage Requirement Data, Form 4412-31 (Illustration 41). 

3. Livestock Use Data, Form 4412-32 (Illustration 42). 

4. Phenology Adjustment Data, Form 4412-33 (Illustration 43). This is completed if 

the District computes its own phenology adjustment factors. 

5. Ecological Site Description, Form 4412-34 (Illustration 44). 

150 
Supplemental Studies — SVIM 

6. Diet/Use Factor by Animal and Season, Form 4412-35 (Illustration 45). 

7. Wildlife Use Data, Form 4412-36 (Illustration 46). 

8. Suitability for Livestock Grazing, Form 4412-40 (Illustration 47). This is com- ­

pleted after inventory data is compiled, and submitted to the Service Center (D212) 

prior to vegetation allocation. ' " 

151 
Illustration 19 Page 1 

Equipment For Soil-Vegetation Inventory Method 

Vegetation 

1. Hoops for use in defining circular plots of desired size: 

.96 sq. ft. =41.7 inches circumference 

l/10th guide or .096 sq. ft. = 13.2 inches circumference 

1.92 sq. ft. = 59.0 inches circumference 

1/10th guide or .192 sq. ft. = 18.64 inches circumference 

4.8 sq. ft. = 93.2 inches circumference 

l/10th guide or .48 sq. ft. = 29.5 inches circumference 

9.6 sq. ft. = 131.8 inches circumference 

Palo which extends to a length of 9.6 ft. with calibrations for .96, 1.92,4.8 ft. 

2. Accurate spring balances with 1 or 2 gram calibrations. 

3. A 6 by 10-inch cloth sack or plastic bag. 

4. Letter-size tatum holder, clipboard, or aluminum holder. 

5. Supply of field forms. 

6. An 11.7-foot fine cable or chain with a spike tied on one end for measuring 

1/100-acre plots. 

7. Clippers for clipping vegetation. 

8. An 8-foot tape measure delineated in tenth's. 

9. Pocket stereoscope. 

10. Orthophoto quads, aerial photos, USGS quads, and maps. 

11. Abney level or Clinometer. 

12. Rapidograph pen. 

13. India ink. 

14. Photo pricker. 

15. Tally register. 

16. Hand stapler. 

17. Tentative plant species list and appropriate vegetation keys. 

18. Plastic bags for plant collection. 

19. Compass. 

20. Cruiser vest for carrying equipment. 
Illustration 19 Page 2 

Soil Inventory 

1. Aerial photo 1:24,000 to 1:12,000 topographic may (7-1/2 or 15') —if aerial photos 

not available. 

2. Tiling spade (sharpshooter). 

3. Soil auger - 2 3/4" diameter with extension handle and two auger heads (sand and 

standard). 

4. Geologist's rock hammer. 

5. Chisel-painted bar. 

6. Pick 

7. Acidity - Alkalinity (ph) kit - P.H. kit 

8. Hydrochloric acid solution - 10 percent solution. 

9. 10X hand lens. 

10. Clinometer or Abney level. 

11. Measuring tape - both metric and English units. 

12. Knife - 4-to 5-inch blade. 

13. Muhsel soil color charts. 

14. Plastic bottle -1/2 pint to 1 quart size. ­

15. Marking pencils - for photo. Photography equipment for field photography. 

16. Office equipment - drafting tools (pens, lettering set, drafting and overlay paper, 

rulers and french curves, and scales for measuring distance). 

17. Vehicles - 4-wheel drive for field inventory mounted with power probe; helicopter 

for pre-inventory, tractor w/back-hoe. 

153 

Illustration 20 Page 1 

J 

Documentation mt Comparison Areas 

Form 4412-41 


(J»*y 1979) 


Bureau of Land Management Record Type V 4 

Standard Unit Record State 1/ T 

For District o ?• 

Site Control Data Township f?•1 tt Documentation of Comparison. Areas Range a n W Comparison Area Ho. O o 1 

DOCUMENTATION Of COMPARISON AREAS 

1. Name of area B^pfiCT T C'gtTE*. 

i l l Location (Legal Description ription) )


Ownership of land 


Size'and dimensions of comparison area Al O .atff l 

Vegetation community ARTR 3 ri^.^P 

.6. SCS Range Site Name (If named), and number S.4VPY tVLflMO fl^loA m 

7. Soils Tazanomlc Unit ^f 00 I . t 

a. Soil profile 

8. Major plant species #l7T? 2 ; /r(^SP} H^lP ; 5 /H'/ 

9. Management or use past 50 years (if known1 Pr/MCen fag Eft UVmCH 

A'/is fe/P.^-O A/L,'. Z..I^J«,T OeK 6*L^Z//vft 

10. Type of area (enclosure, right of M'.»f-^ £-*.r/u*. u& if 

11. Evidence of possible influences (e.g., rodents, insects, disease, etc.) 

- MONt= - _ _ 

12. Altitude SSpq Exposure Nit/ Slope /0 'T* 

13. General description of area LcCM rtri> UP BLS0 O 6gTT~ 

155 
Illustration 20 Page 2 

jfcaeeueaeatlflca o2 esapmetesa Asooo 

14. Daeo oofcablichcd (12 piraviLouoly oottabliohcd) 

b . Hhoa and by t*o£ oaefeodo? 5" j/y^ | ,, ,\v ?je J / <% 7<? 

c . Bhosro ar e recoirda eotalaed? , ffi^iQ fif TT UiiTttic- OP^ice 

16. Photographs: 

a. Hbon? ___^_^____^________^_^___^____^_ . 

b . tfypo off ahogo'oT 3 S xw/wi Colo A 

17. Geologic tforaaeioa __^_________ _ 

18. lo osrea protected fircsa fuOssro dioeuritofflco? \fe5 

a. X£ not, sSsalt massSa £O bo doao to protec t tffio area , both, legall y 

aa& Bhvo&cnMvf 

Bopoirt by ^l\'«/ ^ ILole y Basa (o/i r/y f 

(Please ££11 i a as assay blostto oo possibl e osaS include o sgp efcffE7ias 

lecatiosa off area.J 

156 
Illustration 21 

Ecological Site,' Serai Stage (Condition Class), 


. and Site Writeup Area Mapping 


1. Delineate ecological sites (range sites, 


woodland sites, or forest types). 


2. Divide range sites into serai stages, 


(condition classes) If more than one serai 


stage (condition class) exists within a 


range site. 


3. Further divide serai stages (condition 


classes) into present' vegetation 


communities If more than'one vegetatlor 


community exists within the stage (class). 


4. The smallest delineation become;, a site 


writeup area (SWA). Place a SUA number 


within the SWA. 
 J All SUA's that are in the same range site, 


woodland site, or forest-type and present 


vegetation community are placed In the 


same stratum,for sampling. 


5. The mapping team must determine how the 


vegetation transect is to be laid out on 


the representative SWA's which are to be 


sampled. On the areal photograph 


depict the location of the transect. 


The mapping team must complete the perti­


nent site control data items on Form 


4412<-26, Transect Data Sheet, (See Illustration 
 34.) 


157 
Illustration 22 

Soi l Descriptio n Fiel d Data 

RECORD TYPE 

DEPART HENT OF THE INTERIOR 

UNITED STATES STATE 

BUREAU OF LAND HANAGEMENT 

DISTRICT 

PLANNING UNIT 

SOIL DESCRIPTION SOIL NUMBER 

FIELD DATA SOIL STATUS 

ACTION (A-ADD, D-DELETE) 

Soi 3!£k 

TpaS4 7-1-1.5 IteTT ectorCWi££p l Typ^l^/.£J( A F//V f •fA/VP/ ItfiAf* 

Cla38lficatlonWACJ A » < -SKELETAL t M TA 

Location C O (££_£/ , _iv£S7 T J£e.j?L iJpttH nf Su- Cpg. SiC7 Tl/t XluJ 

N. v.„. @AZTR,QZHy I Icii.jgjjl3" srt t,\'f 

Parent HatgrlAllf r liqi/ r U M f£l» M gAsTt l JS^gOjU S AM? SaU»£rtMgf lac 

Land Form M ^/.UgjAi . 

S«*t or Alkali irftaw^y ElevatioiCnJA*^ OO _ 5l^.JiiL l

.ei^P.££ £ nlnesjCj£iV 

Moistur42 l oj^' r<? To <i JAfe H E s 

Root Dlstrlh.ftjH/ / XrtLtIB 2 Clay 

%_Coarse Fragments % Coarser than V.F.S. >&¥ Permeablliiy I 
 A" «>!>£ * A ££_ . 

ns Control section average 

Consistence 

Horizon Depth Reac­ Boun-

Moist tio n lary 

0) (ft . & © 

22, 

&s* 

A> »• * j°X*i/i . j£X<Ji3. foam. i t . sw 

i>-f.­

_B_L. 1-1 pji&iliL <cftl.«- "v . r.^ isxcm 

<iio i°y< V2. lo_lA£b^ f.- s.sr 

C'J. e« J'-3 H ^V/<6/3 J'XlLStl 

Uk. is 

J o 24A* taAsh. igt&yij. ip.i<e- -£. SdL 

Additiona l note s 

INSTRUCTIONS 

0 	 (0 ) Classificatio n a t the faoll y Standard two-digit code froa BUf Manual 
 level . Section 1265. 


\®J M*saoured distanc e fro a a known or © 

Soil number assigned to the serfs 
 assumed sectio n corner , range , and 

township. (? ) Status of the soi l serie s name ­

proposed (PV tentativ e (T) or rstablishe d 

(E) . * ® Major overstory and understory 

\^J "A" wtien new data Is entered ; "D" when plant*. 

aerie s data is changed. Hsan annnol precipitation, (toll 

tenperature at 20 meters and mean cum­

\*J Soi l oerie s name, type , and phase . car ooll tenperature. 

(12/ Ganeral' charactarlotico in teres 
 \Q) Year, month, and day. of diluvium, residuum, colluvlum, ate*. 


and tha klado of rocho tha ooll lo 
 \Jj Colloctor o loo t none . forming trlthln. 


M l ) See glossary of teres for land forn 


descriptions. 


()V Concave, convex, single or complex. 


M ? ) Describe in terns of very poorly 


drained, poorly drained, somewhat 


poorly drained, moderately well 


drained, well drained, etc., as 


described in Soil Servey Manual — 


Agriculture Handbook 18, Pages 170-172. 


Q 6j Class of salinity or alkalinity in 


terms of slight, moderate or otrong, If 


applicable. 


(17) Best estimate if topographic capo 


are not available* 


\J0/ Depth at which a eater table lo 


observed. 


Q9J Defined in terms of classes. See 


Soil Taxonomy — Agriculture Handbook 


436, Pages 472-475. 


(JB) Percent slope at site of 


description. 


© Indicate whether soil lo dry, 


slightly ooist, DOlot or net when 


examined, and approximate depth. 


( 23 Direction the olope focco and Ito 


bearing* 


Q3> Depth of th e majorit y of roo t 

penetration , (a few fin e root o a t depth 

doe s not qualify) . 

® To be uoed only in the 


classification of ooll. VFS°Vory Pino 


Soil. 


\J*) Claoo of eroded oolls in tores of 

none, slightly, moderately, oevaroly or 

very severely eroded. 

\J3/ ciaso in teres of very olou, oloo, 


moderately slow, moderate, moderately 


rapid, rapid, or very ropld. 


\Tl/ Enter terms as defined in Soil 

Taxonomy — Agriculture Handbook 636, 

Pages 459-481; and other definitions and 

abbreviations for soil deocrlptiono that 

are appropriate for your State. 

®^J Additional data applicable for tha . ooll profile, ouch ao pores, calclto 


carbonate, clay flloo, roots, ate. 


158 
Illustration 23 Page 1 

Transect Data Sheet 


Fori 4412-26 

(June 1979) RECORD TYPE I I V I ,, U.S.

 DEPARTHEN1 OF THE INTERIOR 

FORMA1 CODE .... . ^ .. . (2 D 

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT 

BLM AWilN UNIT (ST/OI/RA/PU). (3 

SMI-VEGETATION INVENTORY METHOD 

ALLOTMENT I . (4 

TRANSEC T DAT A SHEE T 

PASTURE (5 

SITE WRITEUP AREA (SUA) .. . (4 

TRANSECT NUMBER ...... . <7 \0\L\ 

(II I 

AERIAL PHOTO (12) 

RECORDER 

COMPARISON AREA . . . . . . . (8 

DATE (YYHMDD) . (9! 

: SAfQ ACTION CODE (A.D) (10: •A; 

!

S GROUN D

 (13) 

 COVE R DAT A 

(14) 

HITS 

(15) PLAN T LIST . 

IS

; (16) 

 '.RATING 

: BASA L .! DO T COUN T SYMBOL SYMBOL SYMBOL 

! BARE GROUND .... . u sjrm- SOIL MOVEMENT . .1-5" 

I PERISTENT LITTER '. . 1 p? ; r sjc&l SURFACE LITTER . .; 3 

! NON-PERSISTENT LITTER ! Wft a • SURFACE ROCK . . .LflL. 

j GRAVEL (2 » ­ 3") . . ! SI:' • ME. L — — PEBESTALLING . ..JJL. ' COBBLE (3* - 10*) . . 

•STONE ( > I')") . . . 

i ' " • * 1 

SAKfi FLOW PATTERNS . 

RILLS 

1 BEDROCK ...... . GULLIES ... . . .\-3— 

(17) SOI . SURFACE FACTOR TO 

i (18) (19) (18) : (19) 

i LEVEL OF TRANSECT HIT LEVEL OF TRANSE :T HIT 

HITS : BASAL : CANOPY i : CANOPY 2 ! CANOPY 3 . DOT COUNT BASAL CANOPY 1 CANOPY 2 CANOPY 3 . DOT CO JNT, : 

\SPc0 T 

\AJ&K.Z. a JL •; • H i ,_ . 3 _ ---; 

L_£L_ S?C<fi\ 0 J3L 

ARTZX:£LE£. * • ; N 

P ! i :] ! J3_ . rf \ a !:­

i. a. AC--iP\ 

-_. 

—

 • & •' ... IE. 

J L 

AdARg\ a- JJL 

! P 

5 A&J& \ M: 

• 

—: : 

(Continued on reverse) 

ABCbFFGHIJKLKN^PORSTUVIIIYf ' 123 4 5 6789 0 

159 
Illustration 23 Page 2 

Transect Data Sheet 

1 118) 1 TO i INSTRUCTIONS FOR RECORD TYPE VI 

LEVEL 0? TTM5SSECT HIT ! 

HITS : DAlfi 

1TEH ELEHENT IHSTRUCTIOIS : ssa : COPY 1 .; CfKOPY 2 : CANOPY 3 ! DOT COUNT I 

I ! (1) DE 3529 

RECORD TYPE: Preprinted on foro. t i 1 (2) DE 357? FORRAT CODE: Preprinted on foro. 1 ! 

!

i 1 

! (3) DE 0003 

BLH ADHINISTRATIVE UNIT: Enter Adoinistrative 

j • Stat* Code (alcta) and the District. Resource 

Area, and Planning Unit nuobers. 

(1) I t 0<>48 ALLOTHENT: Enter desisnated RHAS fourcharacter nuaber. 

(5) DE 3905 PASTURE: Enter pasture nuaber; blank il none­

(Oist be unisue aithin AllotoenU 

(6) DE 3507 

SITE KRITUP AREA: Enter SKA nuober. 

(7) DE 3508 TRANSECT: Enter Transect nuaber. 

COMPARISON AREA: If data is froo Comparison 

(8) DE 3572 Area,enter "C"; otherwise leave blank. 

DATE: Enter Date of data collection 

191 BE U1 8 (Yr.Ho.Oav). 

ACTION CODE: Enter "A" to add neo data: "D" to 

(10) BE 7350 

delete existira data. 

(11) BE J-525 

RECORDER: Enter Recorder's initials. 

(121 DE 5713 

AERIAL PHOTO: Enter Photo-ID or Hap 

Identifier. 

(13) DE 352t GROUND COVER DATA: Record Dot Counts by Basal 

Categories. 

(14) DE 3527 HITS: Record total nusber of hits for each 

basal cate9orv (use section to left foi dot 

count tally).(See BLH Ranual Section 4412.14. 

Illustration 38. for diasrsDitic sketches of 

step point data and recording proceduresJ tthen 

a hit is duplicated on a transect it can be 

; 1 dot-counted rather than oak in? a net) entry. 

(151 BE 2&46 PLANT LIST: Record other plant species 

observed but not encountered on pace transect. 

: « _. (it) Of 4817 SOIL FACTOR ITERS: Enter a value for each iteo 

as determined for Site Hriteup Area. This is ! the recorded ratin? froo the reiuired soil 

i 1 surface factor form.(See BLH Ranual Section 

7322.1 IB.) 

(17) DE 4818 SOIL SURFACE FACTOR TOTAL: Record SSF total. 

This is an optional entry iteo. 

(18) DE 352i IEVEL OF TRANSECT HITS: Enter appropriate 

ground cover and/or plant scsibo 1 encountered 

at each level.(See BLH Hanual Section 4412.14. 

Illustration 33. for diaoraoatic inforrationj 1 L : <;••• K " r

. : : HITS: Record total nutter of Hits. Use col-ji.r. 

to left for tM-Co«nt tall.. 

;

KORK (Sffft/FCKiWKS 

1 1 i l l 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 

i i ! 1 i i 1 1 

A B C D E F G H T3/tllA«f l P 0 R S T U V W « Y f 1 2 3 4 5fe 7jT? 0 


160 

Illustration 24 Page 1 

Stratification Data And General Characteristics 


P«e 

IJui* 1979) 

For* 4412-30 

RECORD TYPE . (1) VB 

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR FORMAT CODE (2> D 

BUJ1EAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT BUI AM11N UNIT IST/OI/RA/PU). (3) 

SOIL-VEGETATION INVENTORY METHOD 

CLIMATIC ADJUSTMENT FACTOR . (4) 

DATE (YYHttft) (51 

STRATIFICATIO N DAT A A N b 

ACTION CODE (A.DI ..... . «>> A: 

6EHERA L CHARACTERISTIC S 


(14) IIS) (It) (17) (IS) (19) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) 

SUA TRAM 10 F 

VtGElAL COND. I SLOPE LAND PHASES OF 

NUNBER SECT' SNA RANGE SITE STRATUM ALLOT PASTURE SUB-TYPE CLASS &0PE ASPECT FORM SOIL SERIES 

Bool QL Al'. PWX/vr/ H J>cpL Hoo\ 0\ 1&&JL £ 

d-ixooi-Li Coo 2 jo. A.

6£ m 

OUXfioi iA ooaJ_ EJ&2­ locik. £ l i . Ha> . :Jlii€.L <± 10? 

fie*3 _ -Z£> JteAL _ JJ? 

DWioeSU Oci'i 

UM1. Ht>iS k.' log 

Di^o<m cool in A. /*$!* MLtL 

Roil* P3-4*te.M4-' ,e.c*£ •JL6i£. 

£L 72? plJA&CLi «•/ ct*W iy w _/] 

BM&ficatf £lOC ^ ft*7 

leO 

. 

—- : 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMN0P9RSTUVWXY i 123454789 0 

161 
Illustration 24 Page 2 

Stratification Data And General Characteristics 


INSTRUCTION S FO R RECOR O TYP E V B 


DATA 


ITER ELEHEMT 


(11 BE 3529 


(2) DE 3579 


(3) DE 0003 


(4) DE 3547 


(5) DE 4618 


(6) DE 7350 


(71 DE 3507 


(8) DE 3503 


(9) DE 3516 


I!0) DE 3528 


C D DE 3906 


INSTRUCTIONS 


RECORD TYPE: Preprinted on foro. 


FORftAT CODE: Preprinted on foro. 


BU) ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT: Enter Adoinistrative 


State Code (alpha) and the District. Resource 


Area, and Planning Unit nuabers. 


CURATIC ADJUSTKENT FACTOR: Enter diMti c 


adiustoent (actor to tie used to adjust 


production data to an average tear. If no 


factor is enteredi it mill be assuoed that no 


dioatic adiustoent is needed. 


DATE: Enter Date of data collection 


(Yr.Ro.Dav). 


ACTIO!) CODE: Enter 'A" to add net) data; "0" to 


delete existin9 data. 


Sit e Writeu p Area : Ente r SU A number . 


TRANSECT: Enter transect nunber. 


1 OF SKA: Enter percent of SUA allien is aithin 

the stratum. If the entire SUA is in the 


stratun enter "100" (Fractions of a percent 


are not allotted} 


ECOLOGICAL SITE: Enter range or yoodland site 


nunber according to the folloains- example: 


D 3 4A001ANU C 


uhere D = RaJor Land Resource Region 


34 - HaJor Land Resource Area 


A = Subarea (If no subarea enter "X"i 


001 = Consecutive Site Nuaber 


and ANUC = States in ohich ran?e site is 


correlated, e.9. Arizona. Neu Flexico. Utah. 


and Colorado. 


STRATUM: Record a stratum nunber for each 


entry. 


DATA 


ITER ELEMENT 


(12) PE (*68 


(13) CE 3905 


(14) DE 2706 


(15) DE 2625 


(16) DE 3874 


(17) DE 6523 


(18) DE 5132 


(19) PE 4649 


INSTRUCTIONS 


ALLOTRENT: Enter designated RMAS f'.urct.aracter nunber. 


PASTURE: Enter pasture nunber; blank if none 


(Bust be unique oithin allotment! 


VEGETATION SUP-TYPE: Enter standard vegetation 


sub-type code.(See Foro 4412-30a for proper 


code;.) 


CONDITION CLASS (Serai Stage): Enter initial 


condition class assigned by oappin9 tean. Code 


as folloos: 


E - Excellent (Clioax) 76 to 100 X of 


potential 


0 - Good (High) 51 to 75 % of potential 


F - Fair (Rediun) 26 to 50 I of potential 

P - Poor (LOB) 0 to 25 I of potential 


7. SLOPE: Enter average slope for the SUA in 


nearest atiole percent. 


SLOPE ASPECT: Enter average slope aspect for 


SUA as follows: 


N - North 


m - Northwest 

U - Uest 


SH - Southwest 


S - South 


SE - Southeast 


E - East 


NE - Northeast 


F - Flat 


LANDFOfffl: Enter landlord code for SUA. i$ee 


Fora 4412-30a for proper codes.) 


PHASES OF SOIL SERIES: Enter the phases of 


soil series froni the State Soil Inventory 


legend. 


162 

Illustration 25 Page 1 

Automatic Data Processing (ADP) Codes for 

Vegetation Types and Sub-Types 

Form4412-30a 

(July 1979 

UNITED STATES 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT 

Automatic Data Processing (ADP) Codes for 

Vegetation Types and Sub-Types 

TYPE CODE NUMBERS 

1.GRASS 


2. GRASSLIKE 


• t 


3.PERENNIAL FORBS 


4. SHRUBS 


- - • • • . • - • • 


> :,'. 


, 


1001 


1002 


1003 


2001 


2002 


3001 


4001 


4002 


4011 


4012 


4013 


4015 


4021 


4031 


4032 


4033 


4034 


4035 


4036 


4037 


4041 


4042 


4043 


4044 


4045 


4046 


4051 


4052 


4053 


4054 


4055 


4056 


4057 


4058 


4059 


SUB-TYPE 

SHORT GRASS 

MID GRASS 

TALL GRASS. 

SEDGE 

RUSH 

PERENNIAL FORB 


BLACK GREASEWOOD 


BAILEY'S GREASEWOOD 


CREOSOTOBUSH 


TARBUSH 


BROOM DALEA 


WINTERFAT 


MESQUITE 


SHADSCALE 


NUTTAL SALTBRUSH 


MAT SALTBUSH 


FOURWING SALTBUSH 


OTHER SALTBUSHES 


DESERT SALTBUSH ATPO 


MIXED DESERT SHRUB 


BIG SAGEBRUSH 


LOW SAGEBRUSH 


BLACK SAGEBRUSH 


OTHER SAGEBRUSHES 


RABBITBRUSH 


SAND SAGE 


CHAMISE 


MANZANITA 


CEANOTHUS 


SHINNERYOAK . 


CHAPARRAL 


MOUNTAIN MAHOGANY 

BITTERBRUSH 

OAKBRUSH 

SERVICEBERRY 

163 
Illustration 25 Page 2 

Automatic Data Processing (ADP) Codes for 

Vegetation Types 

TYPE CODE NUMBERS 

4. SHRUBS (CON.) 4060 

4061 

4062 

4063 

4064 

4065 

4066 

4067 

4068 

4069 

4070 

4071 

4072 

4073 

4074 

4075 

4076 

4077 

4078 

4079 

4080 

4081 

4999 

5. BROADLEAF TREES 5074 

5075 

5077 

5079 

5081 


5082 


5083 


5084 


5085 


5086 


5087 


5088 


5089 


5999 


6. CONIFER 6001 


6002 


6003 


6004 


6011 


SUB-TYPE 

MIXED MOUNTAIN SHRUB 

BLACKBRUSH 

CACTUS 

JOSHUA TREE 

YUCCA 

WHITE THORN 

PALOVERDE CERCI 

BURSAGE FRDE-FRDU 

CATCLAW 

SOTOL 

MARIOLA 

SNAKEWEED 

FRINGED SAGEBRUSH 

CLUBMOSS 

WILLOW 

TURPENTINE BRUSH HALA 

BURROWEED HATE 

MORMAN TEA 

SKUNK BUSH 

OCOTILLA 

SACAHUISTE 

ALDER 

OTHER SHRUBS 

WILLOW 

DESERT WILLOW 

BIRCH-ALASKA 

BALSAM POPLARCOTTONSEED 

RED ALDER 

POPLAR-BIRCH 

ASPEN 

CALIFORNIA BLACK OAK 

COTTONWOOD 

MAPLE 

ORGON WHITE OAK 

MADRONE 

TAN OAK 

OTHER BROADLEAF TREES 

DOUGLAS FIR 

DOUGLAS FIR-WESTERN 

HEMLOCK 

PORT ORFORD CEDAR 

DOUGLAS FIR-WHITE FIR 

PONDEROSA PINE 

164 
Illustration 25 Page 3 

Automatic Data Processing (ADP) Codes for 

Vegetation Types and Sub-Types 

TYPE 

6. CONIFER (CON.) 

-.''.'• 


. 


7. CRYTOGAMS 


CODE NUMBERS 

6012 

'• •• 6013 

6014 


6015 


6021 


6031 


6032 


6033 


6034 


6035 


6036 


6037 


6038 


6039 


6041 


6042 


6043 


6047 


6048 


6055 


6056 


6057 

6058 


6061 


6071 


6091 


6092 


6093 


6094 


6095 


6096 


6097 


6088 


6999 


7001 


7002 


7003 


7004 


7999 


SUB-TYPE 

JEFFREY PINE 

PONDEROSA PINE-SUGAR 

PINE-FIR 

SUGAR PINE 

INCENSE CEDAR 

WESTERN WHITE PINE 

WHITE FIR 

RED FIR 

GRAND FIR 

PACIFIC SILVER FIR 

ENGLISHMANN SPRUCE 

ENGLISHMANN SPRUCESUBALPINE FIR 

WHITE SPRUCE 

BLUE SPRUCE 

NOBLE FIR 

WESTERN RED CEDAR 

SITKA SPRUCE 

BLACK SPRUCE 

MOUNTAIN HEMLOCK 

WESTERN HEMLOCK 

WESTERN LARCH 

GRAND FIR-LARCHDOUGLAS FIR 

PONDEROSA PINE-LARCHDOUGLAS FIR 

LARCH TAMARACK-ALSKA 

LODGEPOLE PINE 

REDWOOD 

COULTER PINE 

DIGGER PINE-OAK 

PINYON-JUNIPER 

KNOBCONE PINE 

BRISTLECONE PINE 

WHITEBARK PINELIMBER PINE 

PINYON 

JUNIPER 

OTHER CONIFER 

LICHEN-MOSS 

MOSS 

LICHEN 

FERN 

OTHER 

165 
Illustration 25 Page 4 

Anitoniaftk Data Processing (ADP) Codies for 

Vegetation Types and Stab-Types 

TYPE CODE NUMBERS SUB-TYPE 

8. BARREN 

9. ANNUAL GRASSES 

10. ANNUAL FORBS 

8001 


8002 


8003 


8004 


8005 


8006 


8007 


8008 


8009 


8010 


8011 


8012 


8013 


8014 


8015 


8016 


8017 


8018 


8019 


8020 


8021 


8999 


9001 


9002 


9003 


9005 


9006 


9999 


0001 


0002 


0999 


BADLAND 

BEACHES 

BLOWN-OUT LAND 

CINDER LAND 

DRY LAKE BED 

DUMPS 

DUNE LAND 

GULLIED LAND 

GYPSUM LAND 

LAVA FLOWS 

OIL-WASTE LAND 

PITS 

PLAYAS 

QUARRIES 

RIVERWASH 

ROCK OUTCROP 

RUBBLE LAND 

SALT FLATS 

SCORIA LAND 

SLICKENS 

SLICK SPOTS 

OTHER 

CHEATGRASS 

MEDUSAHEAD RYE 

RED BROME 

THREE-AWN 

SIX-WEEKS GRAMA 

OTHER 

FILAGREE 

HALOGETON 

OTHER 

166 
Illustration 26 Page 1 

Standard Land-Form Coding and Descriptions 

FORM 4412-30B 

(JULY 1979) 

UNITED STATES 

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT 

STANDARD LAND-FORM CODING AND DESCRIPTIONS 

(FOR USE IN COMPLETING FORMS 4412-30 AND 4412-38) 

ALF Alluvial Fan: the fanlike deposit of a stream where it issues from a gorge upon a plain 

or of a tributary stream near or at its junction with its main stream. (Webster) 

ALP Alluvial Plain: . . . 

1. A level or gently sloping flat or a slightly undulating land surface resulting from 

extensive deposition of alluvial materials by running water. (Webster) 

2. A plain formed by lateral coalescence of alluvial fans 

(a piedmont alluvial plain). (Webster) 

BAL Badland(s): a region characterized by the intricate and sharp erosional sculpture of 

generally weak rocks usually forming nearly horizontal beds, generally developing 

in decomposed granite, loess, or other soft material, lacking or having only scanty 

vegetation, and consisting of steep, burrowed, or fantastically formed hills, labryinthine drainage, and normally dry watercourses or arroyos. (Webster) 

BFE Basin Floor External: a basin floor which drains into another area. 

BFI Basin Floor Internal: a basin from which there is no outward drainage. 

BMR Bog Marsh Riparian 

BTT Butte: an isolated hill or a small mountain with steep or precipitous sides and a top 

variously flat, rounded, or.pointed that may be residual mass isolated by erosjon, a 

volcanic cone, or an exposed volcanic neck,' and that usually has a smaller summit 

area than a mesa. (Webster) 

CAL Caldera(s): a crater whose diameter is many times that of the volcanic vent because 

of the collapse or subsidence of the central part of a volcano or because of explosions 

of extraordinary violence. (Webster) 

CAN Canyon: a deep narrow valley with precipitous sides characteristic of regions where 

downward cutting of the streams greatly exceeds weathering; Gorge. (Webster) 

CES Cuesta: southwest; a sloping plain especially withtheupperendatthecrestofacliff; 

a hill or ridge with a steep face on one side and gentle slope on the other. (Webster) 

DOM Dome: a rounded mountaintop or vast mound of ice. (Webster) 

167 
Illustration 26 Page 2 

Standard Land-Form Coding and Descriptions (continued) 

FPL Flood Plain: 

1. A flat or nearly flat surface that may be submerged by floodwaters. (Webster) 

2. A plain built up or in the process of being built up by stream deposition. 

(Webster) 

GCR Glacial Cirque 

GMR Glacial Morraine: the ridge-like accumulation of sediments deposited by a glacier. 

GOW Glacial Outwash: the stratified material deposited by streams of melt-water as it 

flows away from a glacier. 

GTQ> Glacial Trough 

GUL Gully: a miniature valley or gorge worn in the earth originally by running water 

through which water usually runs only after rains. (Webster) 

HBK Hogback: a ridge of land formed by the outcropping edges of tilted strata; broadly, 

a ridge with a sharp summit and steeply sloping sides. (Webster) 

HIL Hill: a natural elevation of land of local area and well-defined outline; a more or less 

rounded elevation as contrasted with a peaked or precipitous one. (Webster) 

IPM Intermittent Playa Riparian: 

KRS Karst 

LCP Lacustrine Plain: a flat or nearly flat surface. 

MSA Mesa: a usually isolated hill or mountain having abrupt or steeply sloping sides and 

a level top that is composed of a resistant, nearly horizontal stratum of rock and is 

usually greater in area than that of a butte; a small isolated plateau. (Webster) 

MTN Mountain and Deeply Dissected Plateaus: a steep elevation with a restricted summit 

area projecting 1000 feet or more above the surrounding land surface. (Webster) 

OLR Lake Riparian 

QRR Reservoir Riparian 

OSR Stream Riparian 
Illustration 26 Page 3 

Standard Land-Form Coding arid Descriptions (concluded) 

PED Pediment: a broad, gently sloping bedrock surface with low relief that is situated at 

the foot of a much steeper mountain slope in an arid or semi-arid region; is usually 

covered with a thin veneer of alluvial gravel and sand and is an erosional surface in 

contrast to a depositional piedmont plain. (Webster) 

PEP Peneplain or Plateau: an erosion surface of considerable area and slight relief - also 

called endrumpt. (Webster) 

PMT Piedmont: lying or formed at the base of mountain. (Webster) 

PYA Playa: an imdrained desert basin that becomes at times a shallow lake on which 

evaporation may leave a deposit of slat or gypsum. (Webster) 

RDG Ridge: a range of hills or mountains or the upper part of such a range; an extended 

elevation between valleys. (Webster) 

SBS Subsidence: an area with subsidence from subsurface mining. 

SDL Saddle: a ridge connecting two higher elevation, a low point in the crest line of a 

ridge. (Webster) 

SDN Sand Dune: a hill or ridge of sand piled up by the wind commonly found along 

shores, along some river valleys, and generally where there is dry surface sand during 

some part of the year. (Webster) /•,•- . 

SNK Sinkhole 

SRP Scarp: a line of cliffs produced by faulting or erosions. Fault Scarp - cliff or 

escarpment directly resulting from an uplift along one side of a fault. (Webster) 

SUR Sub-Riparian 

TRC Terrace; a level and ordinarily rather narrow plain, usually with a steep front 

bordering a river, a lake, or the sea; a topographic bench. (Webster) 

VAL Valley: 

1. An elongate depression of the earth's surface commonly situated between 

ranges of hills or mountains and often comprising a drainage area. 

2. An area of generally flat land extending many miles inland and drained or 

watered by a large river and its tributary streams. (Webster) 

WMR Web Meadow Riparian 

169 

Illustration 27 Page 1 

Transect Layout 


TUE. MAPPBE& A!USTt>B6lt>e HOW TUB TRANSECT" CAM BEAT BE 

LAIE> Our TO OBTAlU A fcBUA&LE 6AAAPU5. £EVERAl- OP71OM* ABE 

AVAILA&UE AWb THE TEAM&BCr TJB6I6M AM4ST fi£ "Pf T£R'>iXA'£-.J> 

OM A CA&B-BY-CA&e BA&Kr. I f I* E££OAW^EMt*D THAT; WUBfiS 

pEA&lBLEi TUB TEAN*E6T BE* LAIt> OUT ACJ20M» THE L0M6e*T AXJ* 

A4* "DB*C«BEP IN OPPOM I &ELOW. 

I . LAVtMfa OUT TCAMfrfcCT AcgQfrfr TUE JQM6E6T AnJfy OF €>WA­

&JBP I. MEA6URE TUE I>l&TAMCe £*«i»pte 

AOU)t>& TUB LOMeefcT* A£*> OF 

&ITB WeiTBUP AfceA- lU FEET WITH 

A U££J«» I­ 2AOOOfcCALE COETMOPHOT«> 

QUAt>4>) C^BB APPBMDIIC 10, GOIDP 

T6 JWAP 6CAL&&) 

4reP 2-. DIVIDE TUB "Dl^TAWCfc MEA6UBCP 

BY 20 0 CTUB NUAA&BB. O F POINTS IM 

TU B &rEP-Pbiut TEAU*ECT7 . 

GjBP & DIVIDE TUE t>t6TAMC£ BeTWBBU 

PDIMT> BY TUE LEW6TM OF YOUE. PACE 

CA PACE 1^ TWO 6TEP*> TO bBX THE 

NUAABBg. OF PA£E«> BBTWBEM POIMT*. 

&TEP A. MBAfcUPE TUB COMPAQ 

BBAEMM& OF TUE 1JM6 BY 

Pft)TEACT10M OFF TUE 0Z]W>fVO\0 

QUAD oe. AEQJAU PHOTO 

67BP6. PBOCEED TO ETABnMfa BDIMTT 

$TEP fc» TAKE PHOTOGRAPH OF 

TUB &ITB WeiTBUP ABBAALOM6 TUETeAM^Eitr qooofv 4SA . 

b«+wten 

6TET "J, TU6 Rfc&T POlMT K> UALF 

TUE WUM&EE. OF PACE* 

4*ft. fcftpaoe 

-J.6 pom* 

Croundtd down to -»> 

CALCULATED W &TEP 3. PACE 

TO TUl£ POIMT TO *E6l»a Bearmq measured •v 7 7*" f 

T2ECoRI>lU6­ €»tep 7 ».6pax«fc Craundcd dawn 

*fr*t point171 
Illustration 27 Page 2 

Transect Layout 

&T&? &> e®MPt-STS 2 0 FooMfS. Stef> 9 - BUM T®m&&c% 

OP TUB STSP - POIWT TEAM&SCf OM C6S»»&> 0>e&&!N& 

®BP % PU&6S TW£ Wei&MT-SS>Wft&|S/ 

CM^S^£.]TgRiZA71ieM MOO?" OE. K6.l^> 

AT W E 20* 1

 POIMT- COM&UCT 

CUA£ACp5RS2<£TI

Of4£ OP GsRA^Bfr 

(DP ALA. S-PBCSSS-. 

£TBP IO> DSfB(2MlM& TM& eejafBR. POlMy 

OF TUB /lOO* ACMB OR. Vioo*AcEg 

PLOT AW& coM&uar &UBU& 

&TTS1P Ho BBPSAT &"JSP£ 0,3«_find K> 

T& COMPETE 2©© F&IN15> SfoR. TUfe 

^fSP-POI^T" ra&W&BCTAM& IO WBt&iMTg'&pM^ie. ewAaACfsaxApoM AWE* 

'/ictf*5 o& Vaee^ Acsg pjJejs.. 

^JlP-J2so <30MPL6fg &pgCIB£> u&r* 

MBA&UBE UP TUB CSNT&B OF 

TMB &TSIW6BR F0& 1MB TOIWT>l&fAMC&. TUB OWL.Y DlPPBCfeUCE 

WlU- && TUB AAEA&UESAAEWT OP 

1&BASIM6$ 

172 
Illustration 27 Page 3 , 

Transect Layout 


H AAQgg TUAM OMfc V£6brATlOM-601L UNIT P6e.frlTB WfclTBUP AgEAWHERE MAPPEEfr UAVB DETERMINED TUECB KF AAOBB THAU 

OWfc VE6B-7ATIOM -40IU UMir WlTMlM A fclTB VUBiTEUP AREA 

THB VE6ETAT10M IMVeNT«2.Y PftOC£6P5 flS POLL-Outs; 

£mwplfc 

A. •Dl^pMcnVB 6TCIP PATTBg»J 

wueee- &TKIF& APE S^U Y 

rPAN^&t r &UOULD B£ PLACET? 

WIIUI M EAOJOPTU E 

V/EdaeTATlOM-SolL. UMITS5oc44 TRAN&ecrfr MU^ T ee 

MECHANICALLY 1X>CATEDAMD 

A/o r RAVJOAIA / 

LOCATED A & D&&6ejB6t> 

IN I ABOVE. TVS MAPPING 

TEAM 6U0ULO LAY OUT 

MOW/ TU B TEAM6ecr& 

6U0ULD fcE RUM. 6iTB 

WR-IT6UP 

TRANfrBCT I. SAmfltfiS <?** 

VEOBJA'POM-SOIU UNIT AMD 

TRANSECT 2.. snn>Pi.&S TUB 

OTUB8. VB&EfATlOU -Soil- UMlH 

BOTH ABB. WipllM &IT6 WeiTEUP 

A&EA A-OIO 

TUB P&KCBWTA&B OF TUE €»IJ6 

WEIJBUP AREA MU&T &E 

DBTBBMIMBD Foe. EACI4 TCAN6BCT 

173 
Illustration 2 7 Page 4 

Transect Layout 


&. IflDifrpMCr AflffTTLEt> PATTESM 

WMees MB&Bf^\oa - •sou. uwir* ABE. NO T EA&II-Y *>i*c£ENi&i-£ 

OH AS&IAU PKOTC>£»eApM« TEAM46CT A^»Y<90TMUSf 5 6 AS 

t>£<S>£&| &£X? IM X &SOVE. &EC0BD& ftJIJST &S MAT>£ CF 

^ N & ,ZA'P0

'

J SfefM'oiof WBitouf - fi*T</v>ATE

/

c,JABAC-TBEDAfA ^EPAKATEl-Y *Y VE6&7A110M-«OIU UMlp& A * |W£Y AfiB 

SweouMf&aso. ~!Ui^> Pgocsoua s 1* £WOW&l IM "JUS 

geeoCps &Y VEaETa-po»a-Sou, uMrp& 

A OrRAMfrECT 2.) & C.TRAM6ECT O 

l-dt I 

32-4.2. 2. 

lib - i24< 5,6. 

116 - qo 

rti - £©o ^jlO 

JU& PBaCBWpiCafi OF fWE SrjB WPlTSUP ABEA MUST BB 

T>Ey££MIMST> poS BA6H OP THE VEfisSTApOM - SOIU UKip&. 

174 
Illustration 27 Page 5 

HE OTMfeE- OPTTOMfr FOE, TBAMfeB&T J-AVOUr 

U ^e THe. &AM£ P(ZOC£Due£& A^ «* f R7B-1U IM 

OPTION I EX^ErPT 1MB "M^TANCE AWt> QQtt&fibb 

&EAEIM6! OF EA6U TRANSECT L.EO WILL- UAVE. 

TO Be CM£iiULj&l>. 

175 
Illustration 28 

Projected Hits With Obstructions 

pgojec-fEfc wrf 

i£wr u OF- PAC£ 

176 
Illustration 29 

Diagrammatic Sketches of Step-Point 


' Data and Recording Procedures 


••• B. i i 

1 

•0 5 

3 3 

ct § 

< 

1 

a. - 0 1• « •a ! M < 1 « A f* 

_ 

\ Z

O

I ir * 1, 0 V 3 

v^ ^ <y/AM Wr" s il 

A i * 2 2 

a < 

s < S«- l 

z

3 

! Li 

M * 

| if 

- I 

i 

I X II 

5 

S 

a £2* 

5 •»; 

« 3 fc*S 

ft. St * o o<s E 

3 

177 

Illustration 30 Page 1 

Vegetation Circular Plots Characterization Plot Layout 

Shrub «tem» mu«f W n far plant** 

bt oounftd 

weieu< -fcfrTiMAfe- pu>r 

.<?4>, I.4J. *.», 4 fe, H I or 46.0 

6^. ft hoop or pftJo 

Majority of 

HM bate mu»r 

be in jAfe ^ !«*• 

Data on average availability, 


phenology and utilization are 


obtained for each plant species 


occurring within the weight-


estimate plot. 


(H&OJtAE PLOTJ& 

'/lOO acre, plot- ~ofc >/2QQ urt plot­

(il.Tfr. radium) (B.» ft. rodiu*) 

2.	 Data on age and form class 


are'obtained for each grass 


and forb plant of each species 


and average height for each 


plant species. 


3.	 Data on age and form class for 


each plant of each plant species, 


the average height and crown 


diameter by plant species are 


obtained for the first five . 


plants of ench shrub and tree 


species occurring within the 


shrub and tree'characterIzation 


plot. The first five plants of 


each species are determined • 


from a predetermined line 


including those in the weight 


.•stimate plot. Counts are 


made of all remaining shrubs 


and trees by species. 


179 
Illustration 30 Page 2 

Vegetatloo Characterization Plot- Layout - Circular Plots 


PHENPLOtT STAGES: CRASSFS.

CODE OT.

F03H CLASSES 

Craoooo 

Eorcal 6 Vigorous 


Dying Cantor 


Hollow Contar 


Cluap Edge 


Dead 


fcGE CLASSES 

COPE WO. 

S - Seedlino 

P - Polo Snpltna

Y - Touna

H - Haturo

0 '- Old

D - Dacodcnt

R - Oooprout

 FORBS. SHRUBS. AND TREES 

 DE3CRTPTIOB 

BetQln Growth 

Vagatatlve Stage 

Coot Stage* 

took Flowarino 

Seed Ripe 

Haturo 

ReQrovth 

DBSCBIPTIOfl 

Shrubs and Trc«-c 

Eorcal & Vigorous Bornal 6 TIQOTOUO ///////////////// ///////////////// Portion Dead or Dying Portion Deed or Dying 

////////////////

Dead

DESCRIPTION 

Baoo looo than< 1/4" dlo. 

 ////////////•////////// / // / 

 Daoo 1/4" to 1" dlo. X 

 Baoo creator than 1" dia. X 

 ////////////////////// / // / 

 Ovor 25" of plant docd X 

 ////////////////////// / // / 

Forbo Trooo

/ / /

AVAILABILITY CLASSES: CRASSES. FORBS, SHRUBS B.JID TREES 

(Annual Growth Only) 

CODE BO. DESCRIPTION 

A - Available 100 porcent

P - Partially Avallabia 75 percent

H - Half Available SO percent

L - Limited Availability 2S percent

li - Unavailable 0 percent

UTILIZATION CLASSES: CRASSES, FORBS. SHRUBS.\MD TREES 

CODE SO. DESCRIPTION 

0 0 Utilization of Current

to Ktt ! :i- - 4oi. 3 41 - 60t 4 61: - 301. S. M -ioo; 

 ///////////////// 

 Dead 

 Shraba Eatabltohcd now plento aot 

euro than 2 or 3 yoaro old 

////////////////////////// tntorcsdiata ago claooad 

betuaan Doodling and tsattjro 

Sood producing anp but not 

decadent 

////////////////////////// 

 Established plants havlns 

regrowth following crown hil l 

usually caused by fire . Fully 

recovered reoprouto cro classified In approprlata ago claso. 

 avallobla 

 avallabLe 

 available 

 available 

 available 

 Year;* Growth 

1.80 
Illustration 31 Page 1 

Weight Estimate and Vegetation Characterisation 


\<i . 4412-27 

(Jul* 1W9) 

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

BUREAU Of- LAND MANAGEMENT 

SOIL-VEGETATION INVENTORY METHOD 

HEIGH T ESTIMAT E 

A N D 

VEGETATIO N CHARACTERIZATIO N 

PLO T SIZES : 

TREES t SHRUBS (101 

GRASSES t FORBS (11) 

WEIGH T

(14) (15) AVE

PLANT SYMBOL AVAIL

A . 

A . 

P.. 

&A.3A_. A 

ARIA*.- A . 

A . 

A&s.F._. A 

p.. 

ijSA^A.- A 

ARlB.^.. A. 

.EJAX1\.... A. 

A 

A 

A&TJU. /\ . 

A-<>5.£.- A 

A 

FjETP... A 

A 

.J&ASA._ 

A 

:A<?A£.SL. A 

(Continued on r*v«rs») 

1/100 :..: 1/200 

.94 :Z: i.?2 i„ : 4.80 

ESTIMAT E DAT A 

(16) (17) (18) . AVE AVE ESTIMATED WEIGHT IN GRAftS" 

PHEN UTIL 

3. Q

* 1 

3 A. 

3 

O 

o 

1

o 

5 

o 

3 . <?_ 

4. £ 

3 

3 

.L O. 

3_ G. 

3. 1. 

5. 3, 

2 

.0. 

.0. 

c> 

^ 1 . 

RECORD l\?t ....... . .

FORMA! (WE

B U I Aonni wi n if.T/Di/Rfi/Pu).

ALLOTMENT

PASTURE . . .

 ( U V : 

12) ' D . ' , 

i3i !4Mi-<?:^:^:S:(!.';-?i 

(41 \*L\ii\L.l\ . 

(5) \Q:A: 

SITE UR1TEUP AREA (SUA) . . . It) \Q.\C\0.\J.\ 

TRANSECT NUMBER ...... . (7) !«?.!./: 

OATE (YYMHDB) ....... . (8) 7..2:f.,

k.J.:Jf 

ACTION CODE (A,D) ..... . m 'A. • __ 

PLOTS TOJ€ CLIPPED AND CHARfttT CHAB&TERIZE I D 112)

CL1F: 1 2 G> 4 5 k O 1

 3 9 10 

CHAR: 1 ® « © 7 CB 10 

:" : 19.20 " : 43.00 OTHER— 

Swifir 

VEGETATIO N CHARACTERIZATIO N 

HT1 HT2 HT3 HT4 

TO.. :. _­

-Hi- ---- ­

5~_ _1 . 

3A_ ,._.. 

£.9... J.P.. ..... 

Mk>~. ~~Z — 

_s~_ , 

2£_ „_ . 

....J. O M A. .LP-.. J.Q.- _ _ . 

..A. 

I _i..a "i.J. 

isJS*. 

7.3.... .. 

£... .. 

Z 

2_..... 

U..... 

.n...:. 

JS... 

(19) (201 121) (22) (23) (24) 

AVE AVE CROWN AGE FORM NUMBER NOT 

HEIGHT DlfiM. aASS CUttS ttl lOUNT CHAf;,'D CHfilii'D 

... ta j . 

.... la . i .3... 

. i ... da j ... da 

. 3 

AFCDEFGHIJKLNN0PORSTUVM]IY i 1 2 3 45* 7 3 9 0 

181 
Illustration 31 Page 2 

Weight Eotlcate and Vegetation Characterization 

INSTRUCTION S FOR RECOR D TYP E V 2 

DATA 

ITER ELEKBTT 

(1) DE 3529 


(2) DE 3579 


(3) DE 0003 


(4) DE 0968 


(5) DE 3905 


|	 (6) DE 3507 


(71 DE 3508 


19) DE 6418 


(9) DE 7350 


110) DE 3514 


(11) DE 3510 


(12) 


(13) DE 3512 


(14) DE 2646 


(15) DE 3830 


(It) DE 3712 


(17) DE 3832 


IfSTRUCTIOSS 


RECORD TYPE: Preprinted on foro. 


FORfiAT CODE: Preprinted on foro. 


BLR ADaiWISTRATIVE UNIT: Enter Adoinistrative 


State Code (alpha) and the District- Resource 


Area,and Planning Unit nuobers. 


ALLOTMENT: Enter designated RKAS four-


character nuaber. 


PASTURE: Enter pasture nuober; blank if none-


Bust be uniiue oithin allotoent) 


SITE URITUP AREA: Enter SHA nuaber. 


TRANSECT: Enter Transect nusber. 


DATE: Enter Date of data collection 


(Yr.Ro.Oay). 


ACTIOS CODE: Enter "A" to add nea data! "D" to 


delete existing data. 


TREES and SHRUBS: Check plot size for trees 


and shrubs (1/100 acre or 1/200 acre). 


GRASSES and FCRBS: Check Plot site (si. ft.) 


for grasses and forbs. 


PLOTS TO BE CUPPED AMD CHARACTERIZED: Circle 


plots to be dipped and characterized (for 


field use onlt). 


PLOT W. : Enter plot nuober froo ehich oeigbt 


esticate and characterization data is be ins 


collected. 


PLASfT SYRBOL: Enter SCS standard plant srcbol. 


AVAILABILITY: Enter average availability by 


plant species occurin9 in the plot. Code as 


folloas: 


A - Available 100 X 


P - Partially Available 75 X 


H - Half Available 50 I 


L - Lioited Availability 25 X 


U - Unavailable 0 1 


PHEKOLOGY: Enter average phenology by plant 


species occurins) in the plot. Code asfolloas: 


1 - B«9in Grotrth 


2 - Vegetative Sta9e 


3 - Boot Sta9» 


4 - Peak Flowring 


5 - Seed Ripe 


6 - Rature 


7 - Dortant 


8 - Regrouth 


UTILIZATION: Enter average utilization hi 


plant species occoring in the plot. Code as 


follows: 


0 = 0 1 


1 = 01 to 20 I 


2 = 21 to 40 X 


3 = 41 to 60 I 


4 = 61 to 80 X 


5 = 81 to 100 I 


DATA 


ITER ELEREMT IMSTRUCTICWS 


(18) BE 3532 GRASS PER PLOT: Record wight in 9raos per 


plant species for each height category as 


folloos: 


HT1 - 0 to 3' 


HT2 - 3 to 4 1/2' 


HT3 - 4 1/2 to T 

HT4 - OVER 7' 


A oiniouo of ttfo Plots Per transect oust be 


dipped and oeighed. Enter the estioated 


e»i9ht for all plots. Enter and circle actual 


clipped oei9ht on the clipped Plots. 


(19) DE 3504 HEIGHT: Record average height in feet and 


tenths of feet for each species encountered in 


plot. 


(20) BE 3522 CROS4 DIAKETER: Record the average croen 


diaaeter in feet and tenths of feet for each 


species encountered in plot. 


(21) DE 3502 AGE CLASS: For each plant species record each 


age class encountered on plot. Use separate 


lines for each age class. Codes are as 


follows: 


S - Seedlin9 


Y - Youn9 


R - Rature 


D - Decadent 
 • 0 - Old (trees onlr) 


P - Pole Saelin9 (trees only) 


R - Resprout (shrubs only) 


( See BLR Manual Section 4412, Illustration 


39. Pa9e 2,for detailed explanation.) 


(22) DE 3503 FOSR CLASS: Record foro class encountered on 


plot fot each species. Use separate lines for 


each foro class. Codes are as folloos: 


1 - Not oil and Vigorous 


2 - Dying Center (grasses only) 


3 - Hollos Center (grasses) 


.' Dead or dvin9 (forbs, shrubs, trees) 


4 - Clump Ed9e (grasses only) 


5 - Pe.d 


(22) If 3918 MJRBER CHARACTERIZED: Enter total nuober of 

plants ctanctewzed. Character!!* all grasses 

ir.d forts, and a amikua ?f five shrubs and 

trees ?er seenes. The balance cf the shrub' 

and trees oithin the plot are counted and 

recorded under lten (24). Dot count coluor. to 

left M Y he used to tatty plant species 

characterized. 

(24) DE 35;! NUHBER NOT CHARACTERIZED: Enter the nieber of 

shrubs and trees not characterized in excess 

of the nve characterized. 

182 
Illustration 32 

Height-Estimate Plot Layout 


gfccoeo 

WEI6M1S OF 

AU-PUWI* 

WITUIM TUfc 

lAAAOIMABf 

CfUNP**­

EVEW THOOeH 

1HS ft466 

I* NOf 

Wl]HlU 1U£ 

MOW. /*"/ 

TamdUf 

RECOKO HBl6Uf CoDe-* • 4Mb OKAM6 0F f M>CUCJ10»4 

9f SffiUW OM WBlfiur- BfrJlMAJE BBCoei) V-» 

4-V-T 

Recou> weiour cot* » 

AMD OR** * OP PBoDucpoM 

EE6oW> ItElOUT COCfc Z 

AMD CiEM** OP PBObucpoM 

o'-»' 

KBCOPD MEIoUT CnOE / 

AMI> SHAMS- OF PSSOPOCtlOJ 

9Y &PeCUa* ON WSI6UT­ ESTIMATE" (2£03«t> V- » 

t » NOT ViCOVO WE16MT5 OF f>o«TiON4 OP P1ANT& 0Uf6lPe OP UU&lNABf 

CyjJNOEE. EV6M THOUGH TUB &A« Ifr WITVIU -|Uf: PLOT 

183 

Illustration 33 Page 1 

v Sampling Precision and Probability v

The number of. plots required for a sufficient sample depends upon variation among plots, 

confidence or probability level we wish to have in our data, and the precision with which we wish 

to sample. Sampling.with high precision with supreme confidence in the data requires a different 

number of sample plots than when we re satisfied with either a lower precision or less confidence, 

or both. 

The formula for calculating number of plots necessary to sample with a desired precision and level 

of probability (confidence) is as follows: 

N = pxj 

Where: N = number of plots necessary to sample within certain prescribed precision and 

confidence; 

t = value which establishes the level of probability (confidence); 

s = standard deviation, a measure of variability; 

p = sampling precision (this value is expressed as a percentage.and varies 

depending upon the sampling precision desired); 

x = the mean or average of a group of values. 

The value for "t" varies with the probability of confidence level chosen. The value of "t" for 

different confidencelevels or probability is as follows based on a sample of ten and twenty plots: 

Probability: 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 95% 98% 99% 

"t" value: (10 plots) 0.70 0.88 1.10 1.38 1.83 2.26 2.82 3.25 

"t" value (20 plots) 0.69 0.86 1.07 1.33 1.73 2.09 2.54 2.86 

For example, choosing a probability or confidence level of 99 percent means we can be certain 

that 99 times out of a 100 our sample size will provide the precision required; at a confidence level 

of 95 percent, the odds are 19 to 1; at 80 percent, the odds are 8 out of 10; etc. 

The values for "s" and "x" are calculated from the sample of 10 plots which have been clipped 

or estimated. 

The value for "p" may be 5, 10, 20, 25, etc. percent or some other percentage chosen. It is the 

precision with which we wish to sample. 

185 
Illustration 33 Page 2 

In a formula expressed thus: 

N = 2.26s 

LlOx ) 

We will sample with ±10 percent of the population mean or average with 95 percent confidence 

that the number of plots (N) sampled will provide this precision. 

The calculation of "s" (standard deviation) is somewhat complex even with a good calculator and 

seated at your desk in the office. It is even more difficult in the field. An estimate of the value 

"s" can be derived from the following table

 u. 

Source: Snedecor, George W. and William C. Cochran, 1974. 

Statistical Methods. Iowa State University Press, Ames, Iowa 573 p. 

186 
Illustration 33 Page 3 

If N is near Then S is roughly estimated by 

this number dividing the range in values by 

5 "" 2 

10 3 

' 25. 4 

100 5 

Examples of using the above formula for different confidence levels and precision follow. 

Assume 10 individual plots have been randomly selected along the transect line and total yield 

of current years growth is clipped or estimated and recorded as follows: 

Plot(N) Current Yield, gms. 

1 - 57 ­

2 43 

3 

4 

• 

64 

J51 

5 49 

6 60 

7 71 

8 • . 

48 

9 66 

10 

Total 

54 

563 grams 

563 

Mean (X) = 10 = 56.3 grams 

s = 71-43 = 28 = 9.3 

3 3 

(from table above for N=10) 

187 
Illustration 33 Page 4 

Example 1: Sample within +10 percent of the mean with 95 percent confidence. 

2.26 x 9.3 21.0 N = = (3.73)2 = 14 plots 

.10x56.3 5.63 

Four additional plots are needed in addition to the 10 already clipped or estimated to sample with 

the precision and confidence desired. 

Example 2: Sample ± 5 percent of the mean with 99 percent confidence: 

3.25 x 9.3 30.2 2 N = = (10.71)2 =115 plots 

.05 x 56.3 2.82 

Considering money and manpower, it is probably impossible to sample with this precision and 

confidence in most biological communities. 

Example 3: Sample within ± 10 percent of the mean with 90 percent confidence: 

1.83 x 9.3 17.0 N = • = (3.02)2 = 9 plots 

.10x56.3 5.63 

The original 10-plot sample was adequate to sample with this precision and probability. 

After sampling the estimated precision obtained can be calculated by solving for "p" in the 

original formula as follows: 

ts 

P = Vnx 

188 
Illustration. 33 Page 5 

Using a hypothetical example, assume the following yields were recorded from 10 plots: 

Plot(N) Current Yield, gms. 

1 12 

2 89 

3 43 

4 19 

5 70 

6 52 

7 38 

44 

29 

10 61 

Total 457 grams 

Mean (x) = -457 =45.7grams 

10 

,.. ; ­ S = 89-12 = 77 = 25.7 grams 

3 3 

To sample this site withhv± 10 percent of the mean with 95 percent confidence requires the 

following number of plots: 

2.26 x 25.7 I fsju 

N = .10x45.7 = (12.7) x = 161 plots 

= U-57J 

189 
Illustration 33 Page 6 

It is determined that it is impractical to collect data from this many more plots. Ten additional 

plots are sampled. The sampling precision for the total 20 plots is calculated as follows: 

1st Sample 

Plot (N) Yield, gras. Plot Yiefld,gms. 

1
 12 11 59 


2 89 12 32 


3 43 13 27 


4 19 14 66 


5 70 15 41 


6 52 16 54 


7 38 17 77 


8 44 18 20 


9 29 19 55 


10 61 20- 47 


Total 935 grams 

Mean (a) 46.8 grams 

89-12 77 

S = 4 = 4 = 19.2 grams 

"t" value for 20 plots = 2.09 at 95 percent probability level. 

Therefore: 

2m x 19.2 2.09x19.2 40.1 

P = V20 x 46.8 = 4.47x46.8 = 209.2 =0.19 precision 

The 20-plot sample actually provided an estimate within ±19 percent of the true mean with 95 

percent confidence. 

190 
Illustration 33 Page 7 

An example calculation based upon a certain confidence level could be as follows: 

Situation: 

The preplanning analysis for the area has indicated serious resource problems in the area. The 

decision maker has accepted the minimum sampling level as ± 20 percent of the average 

vegetation production with 80 percent confidence level. Therefore, the number of plots necessary 

to meet this minimum level is calculated as follows: 

Calculations: 

1.38s 

N = .20 x 

Ah example follows based on data from 10 plots: 

Plot Yield, gms 

74 


16 


127 


43 


84 


36 


52 


25 


61 


19 

Total 537 

Mean (x) = 53.7 

127-16 111 

s = 3 = 3 = 37.0 

1.38x37.0 51.1 

N = .20 x 53.7 10.74 = (4.76)2

.= 23 plots 

Weight production must be determined from an additional 13 plots to obtain the minimum 

sampling intensity. 

191 
Illustration 33 Page 8 

Table of "T " Values 

Number To Find "S " Probability (Confidence Level) 

off Divide Range off 80 Percent 75 Percent 

Plots Values By: 

2 1.0 3.078 2.521 

3 1.5 1.886 1.636 

4 1.7 1.638 1.444 

5 2.0 1.533 1.362 

6 2.2 1.476 1.316 

7 2.4 1.440 1.287 

8 2 6 1.415 1.267 

9 2.8 1.397 1.252 

10 3.0 1.383 1.241 

11 3.1 1.372 1.233 

12 3.1 1.363 1.226 

13 3.2 1.346 1.219 

14 3.2 1.350 1.214 

15 3.3 1.345 1.210 

16 3.4 1.341 1.207 

17 3.5 1.337 1.204 

18 3.5 1.333 1.201 

19 3.6 1.330 1.198 

20 3.6 1.328 1.197 

21 3.7 1.325 1.194 

22 3.8 1.235 1.193 

23 3.9 1.321 1.191 

24 4.0 1.319 1.190 

25 4.0 1.218 1.189 

26 4.1 1.316 1.187 

27 4.1 1.315 1.186 

28 4.1 1.314 1.185 

29 4.2 1.313 1.184 

30 4.2 1.311 1.183 

31 4.2 1.310 1.182 

5.0 1.282 1.159 

192 
Illustration 34 Page 1 

Dry/Green Weight Conversion Factor Data 


Pvi* For* 4*12-28 

•Jot* 19791 R-tORIUW. . . . Ml 

U.S. DEPARTHENT Of THE INTERIOR FWiHM COP. . . . Li 

BUREAU OF LAND IMNAGEtEtfT BUI AW1IN IN! ' in/ t M..I. :-i; U&C-.k-y••%-&?:•• SOH-VE0ETATI0N INVENTORY IFTHOtl BATr «»»«»> . . . 

ACTION COLC IA.IO . . . (5) A: 

DRY/GREE N HEIGH T CONVERSIO N 


FACTO R 0 A T A 


(6) 

(7) IS) (9) 110) U.I ii?) •: H4I 

1 AIR- . GftA S£ S FCH8S.SHRU8.-.TKES SttCIES : 

BRY BASAL DINE* IONS CROWN DIMENSION.: AVER40E : 

PLANT STWa WEEN WEIGHT HEIGHT DRY HEIGHT nnnrwi niNinun rwiira.ei HEIOMI : 

.....Ifc 

„....f?.i iSL . 

...id 

...ae „_.A7. 

../.7_. ._—-!-> ._....zi 

_..*£ _.,Z.S. .......si 

;4 ...iA. /£ 7 

„ JL3L. _.i£ .?. 

JO 12. 

JSL ...?A .....>.o 

2 —

7 JJLL. hk 

JJ-- .'_f ....._v£ 

S^/y^P^if _.SC.4L 7 0 vx .A? 8. 

/c>c» 

..1..J. i J... 3. .Asm _i_.£».j..-s: ...1..3. 

" 7jT J..7. x -L.2L .._./. J. 

.._:*. .1 j £ £ 

*.£> ._2..i?. 

.i..£ i .n.-i: . ... ifi . 

.L.L x J...1. _..i..3 •._... _ 

J..3. x .J..4 .__L._?. 

_2JL JL_4 x _/..a .a..jL. 

: 

ASI&L. _/.&£ : .. 

: 

: 

» 

:~ " 

:.. 

ABCDEFPHIJKlllN-fPORSTUVHXY . 1 2 3 4 5.7.9 0 

193 
Illustration 34 Page 2 

Dry/Green Height Conversion Factor Data 


INSTRUCTION S FO R RECOR D TYP E V 6 


DATA 


ITEM ELEMENT INSTRUCTIONS 


(1) DE 3529	 RECORD TYPE: Preprinted on form. 


(2) DE 3579	 FORMAT CODE: Preprinted on form. 


(3> DE 0003 BLM ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT: Enter Administrative State Code 


(alpha) and the District. Resource Area. and Planning 


Unit numbers. 


(4) DE 6618	 DATE: Enter date of data collection (Yr.Mo.Day). 


<5> DE 7350	 ACTION CODE: Enter "A" to add neui data! "D" to delete 


existing data. 


(6> DE 2646	 PLANT SYMBOL: Enter SCS standard plant symbol. 


<7> DE 3712	 PHENOLOGY: Enter standard phenology by plant species. 


Code as foil outs: 


1 - Be9in Growth 


2 - Vegetative Sta9e 


3 - Boot Stage 


4 - Peal; Flower ins 


5 - Seed Ripe 


6 - Mature 


7 - Dormant 


8 - Regrowth 


(3) DE 3941	 GREEN WEIGHT: Enter grams weighed at time plant clipped. 


<•»> DE 3546 X AIR-DRY WEIGHT: Enter the percent air-dry weight is of 

green weight. 

(10) DE 3942	 DRY WEIGHT: Enter air dr. weight in grams of clipped 


material. 


(11) DE 3533	 BASAL DIMENSIONS: Enter basal dimensions" in feet and 


hundredths of feet for grasses. 


(12) DE 3534	 CROWN DIMENSIONS: Enter crown dimensions in feet and 


tenths of feet for forbs.. shrubs, and trees. 


(13> DE 3504 SPECIES AVERAGE HEIGHT: Enter height in feet and tenths 


of feet for each species. 


(14) DE 7313	 AVERAGE LEADER LENGTH: Enter average leader length in 


feet and tenths of feet (shrubs and trees). 


194 

• • 

Illustration 35 Page 1 

Photo Sample Record 


1 ' . 3 

* (M l , •

^ 

! ! 

tout"* ^ 

I V s . <a * ^1«• i

s\\ w 9 G 

1 2 ill i

if i 

i 8 ' ' i: 

i « , *• '.• 8s x © l'"\ •i ! i i r *•** a |4'| . T ' 

3 • *•• j i J < : s Hi * :

 ! 1 . > .i 1 

• i i * i _ ** • ^ : 5 1 

P «Ql* 1M . i * : 1 . 

1 

• IM)H1*M1 ' 5 :• 1

 i 

8 | • C- •'1 ! 1 1 ; itMl • 1 1 1 ~1 - o 1

I

3 3 | _i ' J5 i»*t w *****); ... • « • ' ! i 1 1 • .i 3 | * fKMt e | c •' : i ; ?! !

i i • • 

-: j ; i i 1 i 1 i ­

o 

5 i « IIS!* 1 J . 2 •*• j '•• at 5 tJ 1 ; ' * H::« S i : i j . 3 t ' - a r- « t t . ! ! t _ —— - 1 ' 1 .

.'1 3) »*»»• »* ,"l j 1

1n ! ' a n « : . 1 ' 3 WMM) J*» . * i 1 • I f Is , i J

i n 1 ; i •'. ! t .' 

a- ii»i- j 1 • i | 333PI i 1 . ! • ! ! 3«i- | i ' 

1 O ! * * ' i . • 

M ' * i

! l 1 . • 1 

1 : '. i ' i ' l : | • utt - w : i .. | ' 1 ; 3 N«O O i>» • ­ »hs

*! I i 

! i i

K 

: i ' : | i i in s*> ft*1. 

! • S - ( 1 

• !

janHI i•o 

3 # = ' i 

i ! ; | 

li«;* • J, : i 1 O 

M D !»-; • a j | ..: 1 : 

w« 1 «u . 

: 

^ wO M |*« * .

. r>

 »!: >>« 1

1 ' ; ' >0 

P 1 m ' 1 ! . 

j ; • > ••i . l ' 5P 81="= 

; S5 - 3' i : ! ! i -Hi ! ) 

1 I I

I j ; - 1 

i ' £ ; i :> ' -,-, - . MA- T i i •' 1 i 3 3 T—1 t - l • r —r- i . ! . 

' HI - :5 t "... i " l 

•

.. i ' -"a * --T7,—^ .; -f- i -_!—L. "I'l l ! • ; ; ; : if-si t ! a s »*: !. \*\ ^>! •-t- H --+--:

— ...... •-+•

1 ... -JS j is i l .. i . -1 u' 

5= 2 Pr . \» 1 1 li 

— 

i .MM X \i\i I 8s|« • »1 S 7 8 i s ! 1: . ^ i " j ; i u:n, 

1 * 1 i i 1 ; < i

1 II' 1 i 

I i! 

195 

5 

Illustration 35 Page 2 

Photo Socplo Qocoffd 

r 

i 

i 

i 

s

<7

3 

U 

i K03 0DM*C j 

{li 

T t L 

O 

r 

i 

""i 

<3» a K 

8

l i 

° 

5 

I 

* e 

0 

! 

»

s

 OolSi 

m 

0 

9 

a 

1 

0 

J — -j« TcM« fc»i j * 

11*0 ' 1 

g m f W Una 1 ; 

1 

j 

* !§= »j 

| 

1 

•-XI ..; 

0 .H91N * ­ *' 

QN->3O3 lf.» * 

a its ­

3 si ; •Ml i ­

2) *•«•&• P» ; ~ 

3 M^ea? i-» . " 

t 

i 

) 

i 

1© il=;1 

I 

i 

3

fir . s** l ! , i 

s 

IS

BlsU 

 As3 si • 

- M , !«;i»i|« 

8 Ifl = ) 

f 

1 

i 

i 

; !»' = 

|!« 

i 

i 

j 

1

- i r= " pn •f " X

•* ~" F S • " M — ... ?N 

• 

< 

o 

5 i 

i CM 

55 

I 1 

i 

: 

1 

1 

! 

I

,1 

i 

1 

I 

! i 

1 2 

1 1 

J_ 

196 
Illustration 35 Page 3 

AH of the required codes are found in the Forest Data Element Dictionary. 

The large dark number to the left or above the data element name is the item number, the fourdigit number following is the data element number which is the reference number in the data 

element dictionary. The "X" or spaces following or below the data items indicate the number of 

charactersthat must be filled in if data is recorded for that data element. 

Item 1. Transaction Code (6196) - Indicates what action is being taken with the current, 

entry, i.e., new data, change, or correlation of old data, etc. 

Item 2. Type of Photo Record (5714) - For S VIM this is always the stand (or site write-up 

area) record. 

Item 3. Series (5711) - The three-digit number is used to control area data and for editing. 

The numbers run consecutively from 001 to 999. They are assigned by the interpreter 

who maintains a log of the numbers. The series number must change any time there 

is a change in the following items: STATE, DISTRICT, RESOURCE AREA, 

PLANNING UNIT, SURVEY UNIT, COUNTY, and PHOTO MISSION. They 

may change when there is a change in a SUBUNIT or PHOTO BLOCK. These 

numbers are unique within an inventory unit. 

Item 4. Inventory Unit (5708) ­ Record the three-digit number which identifies the 

inventory unit. This may be a whole State, District, or parts of Districts. This number 

is unique within a State. 

Item 5. No. of Lines (5712) ­ Record the total number of points interpreted within each 

series. This number must equal the number of lines filled out in the body of the 

record. 

Item 6. State Administration (0004) - Record the two-character alpha code for the State 

that administers the inventory unit. 

Item 7. District (0543) - Record the two-digit code. See data element number 0543 in the 

Data Dictionary. Record only the numeric portion of the code. ' 

Item 8. Resource Area (0418) - Record the last two digits of the code shown in the Data 

Element Dictionary. 

197 
Illustration 35 Page 4 

Item 9. Planning Unit (1075) - Record the last two digits of the code shown in the Data 

Element Dictionary. 

Item 1®. Sublimit (5707) - If subunits or compartments (or block) record the four-digit 

identification number; otherwise leave blank. 

Item 11. Master Unit (5891) - Record the two-digit code for identification of master units in 

western Oregon. Other States leave blank. 

Item 12. Survey Unit (5892) - Record the two-digit code. This code is used to identify United 

States Forest Service survey units to coordinate the flow inventory information 

between the Bureau and the Forest Service. 

Item 13. State, Geographic (0690) - Record the two-character alpha code. The geographic 

State in which the data is being recorded, as opposed to the administrative State. For 

example, data on a SWA or stand located in eastern Washington State which falls in 

the geographic State of Washington and administrative State of Oregon. 

Item 14. County (0546) - Enter the three-digit code for the county, borough, parish, etc. (See 

the Data Element Dictionary.) 

Item 15. Universal Transverse Merecator (UTM) Zone (7515) - Record the two-digit code 

which is found in the lower left corner of the 7-1/2 min. quad maps. 

Item 16. Sustained Yield Unit (5705) - Record two-digit code (all new codes are assigned by 

the Denver Service Center). This code is used to tie the extensive forest inventories 

to other inventories. Leave blank if the area is not in a sustained yield unit. 

Item 17. Date (6630) - Record a six-digit number of which the first two are the last two digits 

of the year, the next two are the month, and the last two are the day the data was 

recorded. 

Item 18. Interpreter (5709) - Record the first initial and last name and code of the photo 

interpreter who does the photo interpretation. The field uses the codes assigned to 

each interpreter. This number is unique within an inventory unit. 

Item 19. BLM Forest Owner (5903) - Record the one-digit code that indicates the type of 

BLM ownership. An entry required only in Oregon. Other States may leave blank. 

198 
Illustration 35 Page 5 

Item 20. Remarks - Record any pertinent information such as problems, etc. Page of_ 

Enter page number of series and the total number of pages in that series. 

Item 21. Edit - Enter initials of supervisor giving final edit to the Photo Sample Record. 

Item 22. Photo Identification (5713) 

Photo Symbol: xxxxx 

Record the appropriate contract symbol (five-digit code) as designated in the photo 

contract. This symbol may be found in the upper right-hand or left-hand corner of 

the photograph and may be alphanumeric. Right justify coding if necessary. If all 

photos within the same unit contain the same symbol, this item may be written down 

only once per sheet. Draw arrow down column. 

Roll Number: xx 

Record the roll number as defined in the photo contract - this may be alphanumeric. 

Note: Some BLM and other photography do not have roll numbers but have flight 

line numbers instead. 

Example: 1 EMK 73-3-81. The "3" is the roll number. This number will be 

recorded as a two digit code, 03. 

: 2 COL 78-21-08. The "21 "is a flight line number; treat it the same way 

as roll number, i.e., 21. 

Photo Number: xxxx 

Each photo has its own separate photo number or identification. This is the third set 

of numbers or letters in the top right-hand corner. They are coded as a four-digit 

codes. Example: EMK 74-3-81, coded 0081. 

Item 23. Point Number: xx 

The numbering system is based on the photo grid. Number the grid from top to 

bottom or from left to right, as shown in the examples below: 

ID 1:15840 ID 1:20000 

:01. 04. 07. 10.: 01. ' 02. 03. 04. 05.: 

:02. 05. 08.- 11.: 06. 07. 08. 09. 10.: 

:03. 06. 09. 12.: 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.: 

• 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.: 

In using this system, points falling on BLM land must be numbered on the photo and 

then transferred to the master set of maps. They must be numbered identically on the 

map. This item may be left blank on SVIM and stand surveys. 

199 
Illustration 35 Page 6 

Item 24. Stand Noiiimber (5921) or SWA Nmnilbeir (3507) - Each stand or site write-up area 

is assigned a unique four-character number. This number is held unique within a 

planning unit. The area is a plant community possessing sufficient uniformity in 

relation to composition, special arrangement, and/or condition to be distinguishable 

from adjacent communities. Site write-up areas are mapped within a range site or 

areas which are similar in growth potential. A log must be maintained for stand or 

site write-up area numbers. These numbers must not be duplicated within a planning 

unit. 

Item 25. Photo Land Use (6101)- Record a two-digit code. This is the first interpretation step 

to determine the primary land-use class. The major categories are Forest Land and 

Nonforest Land. These classes are subdivided into major type classes as determined 

by administrative and biological needs. 

The categories are: 

Forest Land 

codes 

20-29 Even age stands 

30-39 Two-story stands 

40-49 Nonproductive forest land 

Nonforest Land 

60-69 Nonforest land 

91-92 Water 

Forest Land - Land at least 16.7 percent stocked (or 10 percent crown closure) by 

forest trees of any size, or formerly having such tree cover, and not currently 

developed for nonforest use. Includes chaparral areas in the west and afforested 

areas. The minimum are for classification of forest land or subclasses of forest land 

is 1 acre. Roadside, streamside, and shelterbelt strips of timber must have a crown 

width at least 120 feet wide to qualify as forest land. (Crown width is defined as 

distance from one crown edge to another and differs for stringers and openings.) 

Unimproved roads"and intermittent water (fluctuating stock dams and reservoirs) 

trails, streams, and clearings in forest areas must be classed as forest if less than 120 

feet in width of 1 acre in size. 

" Improved roads are those maintained for continuing use and with at least a 30 foot right-of-way. Also, 

includes entire right-of-way of operating railroads—classed nonforest. 

200 
Illustration 35 Page 7 

Forest land is divided into productive and nonproductive strata. 

Productive Forest Land (PFL) (Code 20 and 30 series) Forest land (1 acre in size * 

or greater) which is producing, or is capable of producing, crops of industrial wood. 

This includes areas suitable for management to grow crops of industrial wood, 

generally of a site quality capable of producing in excess of 20 cubic feet/acre of 

annual growth or in excess of 3000 board feet (scribner-net) volume/acre. This 

includes volume from saw logs and pulpwood (but excludes fuel wood), and also 

includes both accessible and inaccessible areas and both operable and currently 

inoperable stands. Generalization - any stand over 40 feet height is occupying PFL. 

Data obtained from photo measurements of height, crown diameter, crown density, 

and/or volume will be the primary means of subdividing productive forest lands into 

sampling strata. Nonproductive cover type occupying productive forest land takes 

the acre PFL strata and climax forest type. 

Nonproductive Forest Land (NPFL) (Code 40 series) Forest land incapable of 

yielding 20,cubic feet per acre per year or 2000 cubic feet in 100 years because of 

adverse site conditions, or land unsuitable for management because of steepness and 

rockiness, or because of adverse location or critical watershed aspects of the site. 

This includes: sterile or poorly drained forest land which produces stunted and 

deformed trees; subalpine forests at the upper limits of tree growth; steep rocky areas 

with cliffs, ledges, and talus slopes and forest land capable of producing only 

noncommercial tree species. 

201 
Illustration 35 Page 8 

Nonfforest (N.F.) (Code 60 series) This is land that has never supported forests and 

lands formerly forested where forest use is precluded by development for "nonforest" 

uses, such as crops, improved pasture, residential areas, and city peaks. This also 

includes improved roads adjoining right-of-ways, powerline clearings, and certain 

areas of water classified by the Bureau of Census as Land. Unimproved roads, 

streams canals, and nonforest strips in forest areas must be more than 120 feet wide 

(crown width) and clearings in forest areas, beaver dams, and stock ponds must be 

more than 1 acre in size to qualify as nonforest land. Areas of water less than 40 acres 

in size or less than 1/8 mile in width must also be classified as nonforest. Areas of 

water larger than these are excluded from the gross area of the inventory unit (code 

90 series). The area surrounding and including each point must be studied to 

determine which land-use class it best fits. If the point falls into a nonforest or 

nonproductive type i.e., an acre in size or greater, it must be classed as that type. If 

the point falls in an area smaller than 1 acre in size, it must be classed as the type 

immediately surrounding the point. To classify as productive, the type within which 

the plot falls must be at least 1 acre in size. Use the examples below to determine 

which class the point falls in. 

202 
Illustration 35 Page 9 

Items 26,27,28. 

1. If photo land-use (Item 25) is coded as barren, then enter.the type of barren under the 

vegetation type and subtype 26A. Leave 26B-D, 27, and 28 blank. 

2. If photo land-use (Item 25) is coded as forest land, then Item 26 must be completely 

filled out. If the forest crown density is less than 85 percent, then entries may be made 

in Items 27 and/or 28 if these types of vegetation are present.^ 

3 ., If photo land-use (Item 25) is coded as shrubs, record all of Item 25. There may be 

entries under Trees if areas with less than 10 percent crown density are important or 

if grasses and forbs are present in sufficient quantity to be recorded.^ 

4. If photo land-use (Item 25) is coded as grasslands, cryptogams or forks, then Items 

26 (Trees) and 27 (Shrubs) may be left blank if trees or shrubs are hot present in 

sufficient quantity.­

The quanlity of vegetation needed for a required entry must be listed during the pre-planning analysis. 

203 
Illustration 35 Page 10 

Item 26. Trees 

A. Vegetation Type and Subtype (2706) - If photo land-use is Forest Land (20,30, or 

40 series), then a vegetation type and subtype must be entered from the five or six 

thousand series (Forest Type). 

If photo land-use is in the 30-39 group, then Density (B), Average Crown Diameter 

(C) and Average Height (D) must be recorded on the part of the two-story stand to 

be featured when the stand is put under intensive management. Recognition of the 

principle story requires considerable field experience and the interpreter will have 

to use his own judgment and experience to interpret multi-storied stand. In general, 

the overstory should be recognized as the dominant feature if it contains 40 percent 

or more crown density regardless of the density of the understory. (Understory trees 

are generally destroyed during harvesting operations when the overstory is mediumstocked or better.) Feature the understory in two-storied stands which have a very 

poorly stocked (5 to 20 percent) overstory. 

B. Crown Density (6510) - Record the percent of crown cover on the plot, stand, or 

SWA. This may be recorded in 1 percent increments. If the area is in nonstocked 

forest land, record 00. In the case of two-story stands, record the density of the stand 

to be managed. 

C. Average Crown Diameter (6009) - Record the average crown diameter to nearest 

foot. In two-story or all-age stands, record the crown diameter of the stand to be 

featured when the stand is put under intensive management. 

D. Average Height (5799) - Record the average height of the dominant trees in whole 

feet of the stand to be featured in management. 

Item 27. Shrubs 

A. Vegetation Type and Subtype (2706) - Record the dominant shrub type and 

subtype. If the species group is not listed in the data element dictionary, record the 

code for other shrubs. If the species cannot be identified, record 4000. If photo landuse is entered as brushland, then there must be an entry on this item. 

B. Crown Density (6510) - Record the crown cover of the shrubs. The density may be 

recorded in 1 increment. 

204 
Illustration 35 Page 11 

C. Average Crown Diameter (3522) - Record the average crown diameter of subtype 

listed under "A" to the nearest foot. 

D. Average Height (5799) - Record the average height of the dominant shrubs. 

Item 28. Grass and Forbs 

A. Vegetation Type and Subtype (2706) - Record the predominant type or subtype 

from the perennial forbs, grass, annual forbs, annual grasses, grasslike, or cryptog­

" ams. If photo land-use is recorded as grassland, there must be an entry. 

B. Crown Density (6510) - Record the percent of crown cover in the plot, stand, or site 

write-up area. This may be recorded in 1 percent increments. 

C. Average Crown Diameter (3522) - The crown diameter of bunch grasses can be 

recorded. Many other species have no crown visible. In this case leave the field 

blank. 

D. Average Height (3504) - Record the average height of the predominant vegetative 

type and subtype recorded in "A" above. This may be recorded in tenths of feet. The 

tallest may be 9.9 feet. 

Item 29. Landform (5132) - This is a description of a physical feature on the earth's surface 

which would best describe the location of the stand or site write-up area. (See Form 

4412-30a) 

Item 30. Aspect - Azimuth (3515) - Record the azimuth to the nearest degree. On a stand or 

site write-up area, the aspect is along a line through the stand center on the longest 

axis of the slope. 

Item 31. Slope Percentage (3874) - The slope estimation is based upon a line through the 

stand or site write-up area center on the longest axis of the SLOPE. 

If the stand is located at a slope break, an average slope estimation is determined for 

the two slopes. 

Slope percentages are obtained from computing the distance and elevational rise as 

indicated in large scale topographic maps, or by the use of a parallax wedge on aerial 

photos. 

Item 32. Physiographic Class (5747) - This is the position on the landscape which the 

majority of stand or site write-up area occupies. 

205 
Illustration 35 Page 12 

Item 33. Elevatnomi (0431) - Record the average elevation of the stand or point from the 

contour lines on USGS topographic maps. Use a three-digit code indicating 

elevation to the nearest 100 feet. Example: Stand falls on 5340 contour-Record 053. 

Enter for all stands. 

Item 34. Past Treatment (5834) - Record the most recent event on the stand or sample point. 

This data may be recorded from photos, timber or range atlas, or fire maps. 

Item 35. RestrnctnoES (6106 and 6107) - Record for all land classes. Land-use restrictions 

must be compiled from two sources by the Districts: (1) administrative restrictions 

currently in effect and, (2) multiple use restrictions as determined by following the 

processes described in BLM Manual Section 1605, Unit Resource Analysis, and 

1608, Management Framework Plans. Cutoff date for restrictions is December 31 

of the year immediately preceding the commencement of the photo interpretation 

phase of the inventory. 

Land-use restrictions are coded as a two-digit code, the first digit representing the 

type of restriction (6106), and the second digit the amount of restriction (6107). If 

there are no restrictions, leave columns blank. 

Item 36. (Reserved) 

Item 37. Soil Unit (4683) - Record the four-digit code representing the soil series (see BLM 

Manual Section 7312.13E on how to develop codes). All codes must be cleared 

through the Service Center Director (D-460). 

Item 38. SWA or Standi Acres (6520) - Record the acreage of all stands to the nearest acre. 

Stands or site write-up area as small as a 1 acre may be recorded. 

Item 39. Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) Coordinate (7515) - Record the point 

location or center of the stand or site write-up area to the nearest 10 meters. The 

designation of a point always follow the rule, read RIGHT and UP. 

206 
Illustration 35 Page 13 

Example: 


4336000m.N 


4335000m.N 


272000m.E 273000m.E 

Point X is located in the grid square 272,400m.E. and 


4,335,500m.N. Location is to the nearest 100 meters. 


To get to the nearest 10 meters, the 10-meter square is 


further subdivided and point X is located 272,430m.E. and 


433,554m.M." • This would be recorded on the form as 272,430 


under Item 39A Easterly and 4,335,540 unit item 39B Northerly. 


Enlargement of 100-meter grid square: 


4335500m.N 


4335400m.N 


272400m.E 272500m.E 


207 

Illustration 35 Page 14 

Item 40. Map Quad Code (5718) - The modified Texas Code Index Number is assigned by 

utilizing the whole degree designation of first the latitude and then the longitude of 

the southeast corner of the 1-degree area in which any may lie. The 1-degree 

quadrangle is then sectioned into four 30-minute quadrangles that are numbered in 

a clockwise fashion, from 1 to 4, beginning with the southeast quadrant. The 30­

minute quadrangles are then quartered to form four 15-minutes which are likewise 

numbered in a clockwise fashion, beginning in the southeast quadrant. Lastly, the 

15-minute quadrangles are then divided into 7-1/2-minute quadrangles, designated 

in the same clockwise fashion beginning with number 1 for the southeast quadrangle. 

A 1-degree quadrangle is thus subdivided into 64 parts which are easily and quickly 

identified by assigning the numbers as described 40A. Thus, for the 1-degree 

quadrangle whose southeast corner lies atlatitude39°00'00" and longitude 11900'00", 

the first five digits of the Code Number (A) would be 39119. After recording the 

latitude and longitude coordinates as the first five digits of a Code Index Number, the 

number designating the 30-minute, 15-minute, and 7-1/2-minute quadrangle in 

which a particular map is located is then shown. For maps covering a 15-minute 

quadrangle, a 0 (zero) is assigned to the last digit (representing the 7-1/2-minute 

quadrangle designation). Likewise, if a map covers a 30-minute quadrangle, two 0"s 

(zeros) are assigned (one each for the 15-minute and 7-1/2-minute quadrangles 

thereby identified). 

Referring to Figure 1 and carefully reading this explanation will enable the reader to 

understand and use the Modified Texas Code Index Number for any standard 

topographic map. 
• • • 

- Illustration 35 Page 15 

o 

o 

o O 

b = I 2 i ! o 

' ' o • o • . , 

r^ o o o O ! 

o • o o 

» • o •T> ' - ; •-

• H CM m! o C"> mr H , H 40°00\00 " *H sr 

40°00 ,0 0 " j ' 

1 

3 | «• 3 't • 3 | .'• j . 3 | 

52130" . Q i 

t 

__ 3 __. ! _•_/ , 

1 

_ .— t. • 

1 2 • i 

• 

2 i • i •;• 2 ; i" i 2 | 1 

'• I n45'00 " ..:....3­ 4 ­

1.•-•.•••,, 1 

i : : 3 | .«••:;: • 3 3 |-'-')•'-• ! 3 1 ** \ 

37130** 

! *»'••». " t" | 

!_.„._ , 2 — — ! 1

•• • 1 - - J 

­ i | | * j ::: ' ••} :::2....|....J.::i|.- 2 1 2 | 1 J 2 | 1 

i 30'00 " 

' ^^y/^my//^y/^ 1 j 1 • # 3' | «• I 3 4 ^ 3 1 «• ! 3 | «• 

22130" 

i

2 _ _ 

'

x i •• ^ 

|__3 -

--3--|-- 4 

2 | 1 1 2 j 1 . 

1 15'00 " I 

1 1 

3 ! '• 3 1 .<• 

07130" 

1 

y, i i ^ i

i 1 

V ; 2 i 1 i 2 I 1 ,/ Z 2 |. 1 1 2 I 1 

39°00'00 " 39°00 ,

0 0 " 

b b l b b | b | b o cv co 

• .' • T i . r.i o • i " i ' " ' • b • CM, r- O «/"»| c i CM, r- b <NJ 0 | o 

• o 0 a CM r-l 

r-H i H Qi .-T ­ oo 01 01 C at , i-* ,-J «0 •H 00 00 M 

00 c c •v to ­ • C . <0 <8 co c 'a >i-i • to n M 3 O C O <« 01 «-l TJ t J c r -H CO O i-l •O CO 05 v m oo « 3 3 0) fl 01 01 J-i c 3 C7* cr 4J e "3 U 01 CO 

cr 3 00 3 CO C ^ O 0) O 0) o 0) O U O AJ CM •c

H CM tO -H *H O C3 -* -H *J c u -a 0) O 3 CM H O £ - » 01 AJ T3 O 3 

i i 1 C I C I i i 'o co u cr • oo<j> tH <r> - H ON CM o\ H o u <U »-l S t-4. E i-< — t-i * J o « cv 

•O l-l 1 -H | r-i . rirt' c OS CJ CO 0) 

1 en o o\ m <r> C7> K JZ CU M 

H M n n ~i n r^ C I VJ U 0) J3 00 

1 

•o -o -u a • o « 01 3 3 t > ;;: 3 - 3 AJ 0 1 CT 3 i-t co i-H •H 00 rH U C 01 01 H C O < i -H .-1 <U 4J 

209 
Illustration 35 Page 16 

Map Type (5721) - Enter a one character code for the type of map. 

CODE 

O ORTHOPHOTO MAP is a corrected areal photograph which may have physical or 

topographic features drafted on. 

P PLANIMETEIC MAP is a map that presents the horizontal positions only for the 

natural or cultural features represented. (American Geological Institute.) 

Q ORTHOPHOTO QUAD is a photo map without contours or other features drafted 

on the map. 

T TOPOGRAPHIC MAP is a representation on paper that is designed to portray 

certain selected features of a section of the earth's surface plotted on some form of 

projection and to a certain scale, that primarily depicts the relief of the county mapped 

but shows also its drainage and cultural features, and that delineates all features in true 

latitude and longitude and then fixes all parts in a rigidly correct relative position 

(Beaman). 

Item 41. Owner Code (5895) - Enter the three-digit code for the owner of the land. 

Item 42. (Reserved) 

210 
Illustration 36 

Relationship Between Soil-Vegetation Inventory 


Method and Wildlife Habitat Inventory 


f~| svm 


Q Wildlife Habitat 


Inventory 


Preplanning Analysis 


Determine methods and •• '' 


intensity needed and 


prepare inventory plan. 


Preinventory Procedures 


Maps,, aerial photos,' 


training, etc. 


SWA delineation, feature 


mapping,and stratification. 


(See note.) 


Data Collection 


t 

Vegetation, soils, landform, and optional data 


collection. 


See additional SVIM data entry into 


wildlife methods in ADP 


BLM Manual Sections 


6602 and 6630. 


Habitat Condition 


interpretation for 


UBA, HMP, etc. 


Note: Site Wrlteup Area = Habitat Site (same site writeup number) 


Strata * Standard Habitat Site 


211 
Illustration 37 

WildliSe-ttocseatioa Oboasvatloa Bsport 

FORM 4412-39 

(Jul y 1979) 

WILDLIFE-RECREATIOR OBSERVATION REPORT 

AXLOTKEST HO. LtO\l RECORDER 

SKA NUMBER A -OID AERIAL PHOT D RO. A/?S - \-°*~\ 

DATE 1 1 -Ofc->"2 - VEGETATION SUB-TYPE 0*>4,\ 

TIME lO-O O <\<A 

WILDLIFE OBSERVATION 

SPECIES USE COSfitESTS 

OSscive O !3 /-*£/>£) 

Co7ot £ 

HECREATIOK OBSERVATION 

TYPE BSE COMMENTS 

\A u iM -\ UNJ Cr S«v\^v.v CAM S Tw o /l «N »ifet IT HMOILC S 

wn » OcsCULTURAL OBSERVATION 

TYPE USE COHMEKTS 

jNoift«i r^u»<v;s ON E

C.^£

 Cw'tVV'.ftJG 

 H« f ^ , " r 

|2E«V«AI<4S o f . floC.K 

212 
Illustration 38 Page 1 

Animal Species Occurrence 


.. 

^« 

in 

0 

o 

1

Q} O 1 ^. . 50 at T. 1

ps 

1- i 1 O

r* •A-

r- H <u 1 1 m 

1 • i 

• > » < "ifl O a 

1 * 

~m . Q O CM 

i B •4 I 

o as - O 

•il 

oi 1 $ » ^*j * •* -> < 1I 1 

< 

Ul X 1 c £ i S £ Ul t 

0 i 

Q c s s '2 s 

•» 

• 

i* 

*~ —— — n

w

5 . s o > 

 INT 

MANAOE 

OCCURR 

and Clan 

• * \3 

5 I" 1 

M . : * to o 0 o O ^ — C • = T o * . • • I -> H ! 2 * o u o U u a ^ c 

1

& 

- ? 

u z i i 

&* o o o o 0 u ^ I 

u £ 

C 1 • <3 1 I c

o 

u 

^

•

1 i i 1 < E * 0 ) ^ u 0 v; 01 . ^ I 1 I 

i o < D 

; i s . & V w 

• i * ' • 1 « «•> — 

« « 

B P z < s 1

s » ! i O tf <n v» > ' J 'sn 0 s = 

J u a < 

c BE 

X 

. - . < 

1 ' < 

< 51 OI 

frt 2 ' 0 a 1 i fc 1 < a 

I .1 X

1 «*J f ? |i = - « y 1 1 fml E u **• ' 1 *" 1 1 

35 e

s ; ?«>l < o ut < t-4 ut 4 1 Kt- m~ I i

I = lo> i !« o 3 z i 

>- >- >- i H 2l U •c 5 2 • I in ?- S! 

U S m~ w1 ^ c s s < or < or o r 5 < 

CO s

u. h <

TATES 

03 

THE

«l 

M W u. I 

> • >­ VI 7­ >­ 3 2 O t

^ r- r- K r- r- r­ •

S s O & Q 0 Oi z 

o 1 o O O O 1 o 

u

1 p

£3 i ! 4) £ 3 

1 B 1 1 i 1 u< ? 1 t V> • * . j * * 10 ^* Of 2£ f t IS 

-

P 1 

11

<*

W3 J t Oc 13 

"®1 3E 51 U M

H

* v> • ^ <

-J tl a Hi' * <0 < H UH (A I

•411 i

!

5 Ql s d OI "%) 01 H X • lul < I I 1 H ?

s of IS 

< 

s I

>c •*s» ?l or III X •x. a s $ e l/> 

V o o -v a u »-> !

<• in _

ti ! 0" £ " • 5 o o

« *i El 

Xe is 

• > 

X 1 •

* : 1 < i I 5 »• IS a s w o 

S S £ — *l 

m p! ui o i 

213 
Illustratio

n 38 Page 2 

"». •s 

ft Q. 

-

D «*5 

tn 

.2. eo t^ 

re» 

Q 

S 

^ 

E ac 

1 

^ 

0 

0 sr 

> 

* 

& 

ci 

0 

~>€ 

> 

. 0 

ro 

a 

a 

VJU 

•^ 

U S 

r u &B 

t - B 

< 

X 

H 

o l 

i 

i 

t «r 

1 

1 1

1 

' 

( 

s 

Ol 

I 

8 Ml N| Ol 

8 

< 

» 

*­* 

- j 

^ 

f»Jl 

1 

B 

! 

o 

u 

w 

~ 

1 

1 

1 

I

1 5

1 f? Si 

P 

z 

u 

a 

8 

o i 

a u 

1 

t ­

•8 

X 

B 

£ 

0 

-.' 

i 

u T5 

0 b. 

TC 

3 

S 

4 

a 

a 

« 

1 

° I

1 

1 

& 

z 

I 

E 

< 

at tn 

o 

7 

| 

< <e 

1

Q 

-> 

t •8 

o 

o 

B 

en 

u p0) 

E 

ft4 

n 

H im i

I 

s 

s 

1 

i s? 

s 

"B S"<5

a 

o S

 ' 

I 

1 

' 

| 

< 

< 

o 

u 

U 

z iu 

a 

u 

u 

z 

III B r i 3 — 

O 

a 

o 

a 

< 0. 

D 

a 

a 

s 

il .; 

i 

! ec 

1e» 

11 s! 

P§ if M 2 S B O 

P«5 3^ 

z 

»r? 

< 

2 

s to 

<fl| 51 

! 

X 

! 

= 

w 

ovl 

H 

d 

M)| 

1 

I 

" 

a 

1 

| 

U 5? 

*-

a 1 

fc - 1 

1«4| A 

leff l S" 

w 

3 (

O J 

< 

3 

< 

i 

U ui 

< Is B " 

U 

u 

3 

< 

a 

a. 

n 

B 

h 

1' • 

• 

• 

" s lgi l 

<£= 

s°« s $ tzz as 

p 5 _( ­ 2

u Ss 3 pt 

s 

8" 

C 

w 

d 

0 e> 

^ $

^ 

v» 

Q 

M 5* £1 

I zz 

i 

2 

p o

fib 

H 

Z HI 

a 0) 

< 

s 

< 

z 

1 

I 

2 |t

u cd 

H 

; 

1 

I 

i 

c 

u $z 

5 

3 

1

| 

3 

H 31 01 

1 

I e

I 

S 

1 

Ml 

•©I­

lul 

<Jl 

1 

i 

c 

s i

- 1 

a 

H 

£ | 

3° 

J 

ff Sin CO 

111 

O Id Q. cq 

1 z

< 

is 

Si 

! 

1 

1 

! 

E 

E 

! 

t 

1 

i 

i 

214 
Illustration 39 Page 1 

Special Habitat Feature 


n 0 *r r *! 

? *l * o o o OS a 

i ­ • ! *l o H 

tu 

O 

—I Id 

1 

M: u i 1 b. s - i 

1 1 A ^ 4 b.

bl 

o :. j °l I H o 

III

3 ? 

X* t» 

E 2 (A i • : 

C a. * ! i 1i - < i

c. 1 : • i- ! 

?:• 1 «• ta

Q. 

. •5 > s I ill a: 1 Z X

o g

l 1-­ H

* 

- H 

o a 

u 

m . • • .

n n *** G U as 

tft i • " 

« j ! H • y 

H !i !i 1 >\ 

'! >*. o Id III ttj « *A »

o 

- => 

1 ­ u 

b. < ^ } i U s

^ 'M <

>- b. 

>• 1 

- 1 m <* 1 *i IT Bl 

.... ' : 1 h UI o > •• • i 1 

O

J v, | H ^ < I 

o • • •• ! oJ *l 3 i

1 tn ! j til o j • i 

o a 1 1 -i 1. * j . 

' 1 . i "

: bl 

to n D S i 4 i

u 

.J * '

s

a!Id ui '•<i j i j SB 5 

A 1 < 

< 

2 

1 

• . 

. • 

u Id 5 Z ! ii 

• * , 1 H Id < CO

UI >I i 

*1 s i 

i n •

 o 2 i 

1 <> t> i 11 i

= 

1 1 

z . 

z u W 

3 £ 1 H H 

K H s! 

< H bl

a ^ u C l l =1 u 

Q H ui 

<>! ^ 

u a ; i ,

< 

; - \>l I t l o m o : j 11 8; J> (J < , 4 til <a: o •I c o J S « • (1) X i

It) 

M 7 

<t D 

• o«* 1 b - Ui « - Id Ji ^^ <v ! CJ J < •

O *• tu .«. • u. | i • ' i 

r: 

215 
Illustration 39 Page 2 

Special Habitat Feature 


GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 

t. Uildli/e biologist completes all entries while in the field. 

2. Consolidate oil completed forms (6502—1, la. end 2) and 

file In appropriate District Office along with other related information or completed forma to. 

SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS 

(Items not listed are self-explanatory) 

Items Items (2). (3), Enter otanderd two-digit codoo from BLE3 Manual B16 - Fish Migration Banter (Man-Caused) 

(4) Soction 126S. B17 — Gauging Station, Uoter 

818 - Mining Activity 

(5) Si to Vfrltaup Number - Enter first letter of the leot BlQ - Poles (Electrical and Telephone) 

noma of recorder ond three numbers indicating* con- B20 — Perches 

aocutivaly, the number of habitat oiteo in the planning B21 — Road 

usit. B22 - Trail 

B23 — Stream Improvement Structure (6) Data — Enter date inventory io conducted; record as 

B24 — Railroad year, month* day. 

B25 — Stream Crossing 

B26 — Shelter (Overnight)

(7) Habitat Si to Noma — Enter code for habitat oite af­ B27 — Recreation Area fected by opocial feature, cenoioUna of abbreviation B28 — Feeding Station for dominant and oubdominant plant opecias (six 

spaces each), and throe-letter land form cods. Refer B29 — Fire Break 

to BLO Manual Soction 4411 for plant symbols and B30 — Seiamogrophic Trail 

BLE3 Manual Section 6602 for land form codoo. B31 - Oil Sump Pit 

B32 - Windmill (9)

 Spociol Habitat Footura Coo*o — Enter code from the B33 — Irrigation Diversion and Ditch 

following Uot: B34 - Woter Gap 

B35 — Stock Uator Tanbo and Pondo 

B36 — Corral ond Loading Chute 

A01 — Avalanche-Glide Aroa B37 - Artificial Oildlifa Uatera 

A 02 — Cave B38 - B99 (Reserved) 

A03 — Cave, Ico 

A04 — Cove, Lava ;i0>-(14) (See BLM Manual Section 6602.) 

A05 - Cliff 

A 06 - Cone, Volcanic 

A. Natural Special Foaturoo 

Columns A07 - Dike, Volcanic 

A08 — Dune, Sand 

(o). (d). Species — Enter code, conaiotina of first two lettaro 

A09 — Insect Hounds (S)

 °f generic end species names. 

AIO — Overhang (b), (c). Use the following two-letter season of uoe codes 

A ll — Salting Area (°t)» ( 0 t o

 proceed the codes for general and specific use: A12 -Sco p A13 — Cold Springs SP Spring SF Summer/Fall 

A14 — Sinh Holo SU Summer FU Foil/Winter A15 — Snag or Group of Snogo FA Fall . US Dinter/Spring A16 — Talus, Slops VI U inter YL Year-Long A17 - Talus, Field SS Spring/Summer 

A18 — fallow, Elh A19 - Waterfall 0>), (e) Genera/ Use — Enter four-letter codes, recording the 

A20 — Haste Land first two letters for season of use, then the last A21 — Island (too small for habitat type) two from the following: 

A22 — Los Jam A23 - Down Timber BD Breeding .(mainly courtship, e.g., booming. 

A24 - Bluff strutting, rutting, etc.) A2S — Beaver Dam BY Bearing Young (nesting egg laying, and hatchA26 — E3uskrat Houae ing; denning, fawning, and calving, etc.) 

A27 — Cfltorocto (stream) RY Rearing Young (post-fledging care, postnatal 

A28 — Barren Lands care, rtc.) A29 - Hot Springs BB Breeding and Bearing Young 

A30 — Blowouts BR Bearing and Rearing Young 

A3I - Mudriow BA Brotd.nft, Bearing Young, and Rearing Young A32 — Temporary Pond MI Migration A33 - Small Natural Ponds WM Winter Maintenance 

A34 - A99 (Reserved) EC Entire Annual Cycle 

B. felan-&9ode Special Features (

c

)i (0 Specific Us* — Enter four-letter codes, recording B01 — Bridge the first two letters for season of use, then the last 

B02 — Fence two from the following: J 

B03 — Underpass 

B04 - Salting Area FE Feeding Area NE Nesl Site (knmm) 

BOS - Goose Nesting Platforms ft'A Vr.tctinp Area AN Active Nest 

B06 — Artificial Nesting Boxes EC Eii'.'ipf Cov«i SA Salting Area 

B07 - Small Seedlngs HE K's!inaArea RO Roost Area 

BOS - Buffer Strip ST Stanintf Are* for Migration 

B09 - Building UC Hooaiing oi Strutting Ground (Traditional) 

BIO — Bird Ramp MR Migration Rculr- {Tmditi'inal) 

S L ~ ?? " C A Calvinp or Fawning Area 'Traditional)

B12 — Culvert 

( h ) 2J2 ~ rwIlL.* * i Effect-- K-.T endangered or threatened plants «»/>. B 4 - Dredgrd Are a Fntc r ..E„ i: p|an , Kpecif: S 1S encouraged, and "D " if B15 - Exciofcurc. Study Area discouraged. 

m 

216 
Illustration 40 Page 1 

Sit e Writeup Area Acres' 

(By Legal Description) 

. ?i«t .... ' < For. 4412-29 

(June 1979) RECtfiDTYPE . . H i V A. U.S. ECPARTHEKT Cf THE INTERIOR FOMAT CODE . (2) D . 

BUREAU Cf LAND MANAGEMENT HJI ADMIN WIT (Sl/Dj/RA/PU). (3) \U;T;0;2;^\ji\(,

j 

SOIL-VEGETATION INVENTORY METHOD ALLOTMENT . . .-.. W,'£\k\L\L\ 

PASTURE (5) :?.:!; 

DATE (YYIWD) (4) •T.'.'kO.\k\J.\-S.l 

SIT E WRITEU P ARE A ACRE S 

ACTION CODE IA.D) ..... . (7) A 

( B Y Lol l Description ) 

(8) (9) 

HAP SCinCE MERIDIAN 

<?JL.; • at.. . 

: no) tin (12) (13) (1 1) : (15) (14) (17) (18) (19) 

NEW4 SW1/4 : FEftRi SL SURF AC E ONLY 

SWA N N S S N N S S : SURFACE TYPE : 

j TOWNSHIP RANGE . SECTION NUMBER E WW E fffi E WWE : ACRES OUNER JURIS. LAND 

I.JZ.AL 32L» _a_ Bixi X \2t £.£.: ADMN. £A2. 

ax.hi. _a_ RiXl *-. . I •' * N£ 

kL .3-- *** . \!2£. £P.._ ZtJj 

! : 

\ 

I3LH 

; ...' . 

—— :

—•— ! • - • 

-——" ... . 1 — ... . 

: 

•— 

: 

: ! ­

-• 

... . 

.— — ' 

i _ .... . 

: — 

: _ : _ ; 

1 ­... ---— 

I I- I I I I 1 I .1 • I -I I I 

i i i I i 1 1 i i i ; 1 1 

ABCDEF6|»JJKLnN0PORSTUVWXY l 1 2 3 4 5 4 7 8 9 0 

217 

Illustration 41 Page 1 

Forage Requirement Data 

For* 4412-31 

(June 1979) RECORD TYPE (1) V F 

U.S. OEPARTHENT OF THE INTERIOR FORMAT CODE . (2) D 

i BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT BUI ADMINISTRATIVE STATE (3) *LlT! • SOIL-VEGETATION INVENTORY METHOD BUI DISTRICT (4) :£:*=:­

DATE (YYnTODI (5) iZ\7:&k:k£ FORAG E REQUIREMEN T DAT A ACTION CODE (A.D) ..... . (&) A. 

(7) .18) (?) 

AN 1 HA L SPECIE S 

HONTrLY FORAGE HEIGHT CLASS AVAILABLE TO ANIHAL (Circle one) 

NAME CODE REeulREHENTIlbs) 0'-3' 3'-4.5' 4.5'-7' V PLUS 

•I6>c> Antelope AN •<f> Bison. Aaerican BA . 2 

Burros BU 
 2 

Cattle CA %^6 & 

Caribou CR 2 

Dter. Black-tailed OB 2 

Xc>c\ Deer. Iblt ON a> 

Dm . UMtetail DW ®. 

OS 2 

Elk. Rockr lit. £> 

Deer. Sitka' 

ER 


Elk. Roos«v«lt EO 
 2 

Elk. Tule ET 
 2 

Goat! 00 , 2 

Goats. fountain on 2 

Horses HO lP.f.'.^i. 

& 

Ibex IB 2 

Javelin* JA 2 

Hoose • no 
 2 

Sheep SH I£C> G> 2 

Sheep. Barbarv SB 2 

Sheep. Californi a Bi»horn sc 
 2 

Sheep. Dal I SD 
 2 

Sheep. Desert Bi9tiorn SE 
 2 

Sheep. Peninsula Bi9t>orn SP 
 2 

Sheep. Rockr nt. Bighorn SH 
 2 

2 

ABCDEFGHIJKLHN0R.ORSTUVUIY I 12345*789 0 

219 
Illustration 41 Page 2 

Posojp Ebtpsiirc—raft Data 

INSTRUCTION S FO R RECOR D TYP E V F 


DATA 

ITEM ELEMENT INSTRUCTIONS 

(1) DE 3529 RECORD TYPE: Preprinted on form. 

(2) DE 3579 FORMAT CODE: Preprinted on form. 

(3) DE 0003 BLM ADMINISTRATIVE STATE: Enter Administrative State 

Code (alpha). 

(4) DE 0003	 BLM DISTRICT: Enter BLM District code. 


(5) DE 6618	 DATE: Enter date of data collectio (Yr.Mo.Dav) n . 


<6> DE 7350	 ACTION CODE: Enter "A" to add new data; "D" to delete 
 existing data. 


(7) DE 3929	 ANIMAL SPECIES: The code for each animal is preprinted 


on form. No entry is required. 


(8) DE 3551	 MONTHLY FORAGE REGUIREMENT: Enter the monthly forage 
 requirement in pounds drv matter for an average month 


for each animal occurring on the District. 


(9) DE 354S	 HEIGHT CLASS AVAILABLE TO ANIMAL: Circle the height code 
 representing the highest forage available to the 9razing 


animal. 


220 
I 

Illustration 42 Page 1 

Livestock Use Data 


For* 4412-32 P«« of . 

(June l?7») 

RECORD TYTC ........ . (1) VL 

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

FORMAT CODE . . . (2) D BUREAU OF LAND nANAGEICNT 

BUI AW1IN UNIT (ST/DI/RWPU). (3) i&'^Q&.'&.&'.Q.'l-l 

SOIL-VEGETATION INVENTORY METHOD 

DATE (YYNHDO) (41 •Jiftj.Q.'&jL'.fZ 

ACTION COPE (A.D) ; (5) \A\ 

LIVESTOC K US E DAT A 

! to) i

 <7> (8) (9) no) :: <A) (71 (8) (?) 

AUTHORIZED PERIOD OF USE !! AUTHORIZED 

iANIHd 1 NUHBEROF .FRO M TO :: IAN1HAL ! NUMBER OF 

iALLOTNENT 'PASTURE :SPECIES ! LIVESTOCK MONTH DAY - MONTH DAY'.! ALLOTMENT PASTURE SPECIES LIVESTOCK HOriTHMY - NOMRDAY 

iw 1 2~6l> 6L,0l-0t,f'ft. 

! 4flt "/-OO mjiL--(SJu^\ .. . 

1 4oi\ '2 OO AJ«L - &lil£\\ 

!«fcnt- .Cd. M.,cl .to ,7o'\ 

\l£i£L -£!/-!(.:! •' 

14.oil Ity. c IDiO\ -6$,i\\\ — ....—~ 

, ^ • 

: 

Iz!z:z!zi . • t • 

/ - / !! 

z;z:zzi 

:. 

11 

—,-__ 

zz^zlz! 11 

" " " " n " -••• • — 

* i z:z:z!zj 

: /

 - / !! 

— 

- zl:;:z;zi 1 1 

/ - / !! 

| ; ' 

........ ... I zlz:z!z| . / - /. i: z!z:z!zi 

—/— - —/—j 

i > 

! 

zlz:z!d 

z!z:zd 

! 

, 

* i 

z;z:z;zi 

! 

ABCDFF&HIJKLHNB'PvSSTUVMXY i 1 2 3 456789 0 

221 
Illustration 42 Page 2 

Zg&vsotoch Uos Data 


INSTRUCTION S FO R RECOR D TYP E V L 


DATA 


ITEM ELEMENT INSTRUCTIONS 


<1> DE 3329	 RECORD TYPE: Preprinted on form. 


(2) DE 3579	 FORMAT CODE: Preprinted on form. 


(3) DE 0003	 BLM ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT: Enter Administrative State Code 


(alpha) and the District* Resource Area. and Planning 


Unit numbers. 


(4) DE 6618	 DATE: Enter date of data collectio (Yr.Mo.Dav) n . 


(5) DE 7330	 ACTION CODE: Enter "A" to add new data? "D" to delete 


existing data. 


(6) DE 096S	 ALLOTMENT: Enter designated RMAS. four-character number. 


<7> DE 3905	 PASTURE: Enter pasture number; blank if none-. (Must be 


unique within allotment.) 


(8) DE 3929	 ANIMAL SPECIES: Enter code for each authorized animal 


which occurs on the allotment. Code as follows: 


BA - Bison. American 


BU - Burros 


CA - Cattle 


GO - Coats 


HO - Horses 


SH - Sheep 


(9) DE 3926	 AUTHORIZED NUMBER OF LIVESTOCK: fnter authorized numbers 


of livestock for all species entered in Item (8). 


(10) DE 3845	 PERIOD OF USE: Enter periods of use (month and da.) for 


livestock entered in Item (8). If more than one use 


period occurs during the vear, make additional line 


entries. 


222 
Illustration 43 Page 1 

Ifaenology Adjuatnant Data 


For* 44U- S PiM Of . 

IJgM 1979) 

RECORD TYPE , (I) VP 0.8 .

 OEMRTIW I OF TIC INTERIOR FORMAT CODE (2) D Usui OF um mteeva 

BUI AB1IH UNIT (ST/DIffiA/KJ). (31 \&iXiOtZr.-j[l&'.Qihi 

S011-VEOETATIM DNQfTORY KTHOO OATEimne) (4) :!2iJfi^:u:ZiST , 

ACTION CODE <A.D> '. (5) 'A\ PHENOLOG Y JDJUSTnEN T DAT A 

: (t) : 17) ! 

! i PERCEN T OF HAIIBUHPRODUCTIO N BY PHENOLOG Y STAG E j 

! BEBIWMB ! VEGETATIVE BOOT .' , PEAK. SEED 

! PUNT SYMOL ! GROWTH . STAGE STAGE FLOWERING RIPE *'• HATURE DORMANT REGROUTH 1 

: : i i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ! 

\A&tf> !

\ fyse. \

 -2.C \

 -*« \

 *r 

*o 4SL. 

if

<rr fr j 

'\F£tt> ! */> ! * r Co _S£L _Zi23L i f 

IAW I i /pC i * r id~9 

— 

* ^ t i 

: : i 

! ! ! 1 1 1 

__ — — ­

1 . ' . • ­

— — — — ­

\. i 

: .. 

. _ • 

' I ! ,. , 

_ 

ABCPFFGH1JICLRN0PQRSTUVV\| J 123456789 0 


223 

Illustration 43 Page 2 

iFtonolooy MJuoecanfc Data 

INSTRUCTION S FO R RECOR D TYP E V P 


DATA 


ITEM ELEMENT INSTRUCTIONS 


(1) DE 3529	 RECORD TYPE: Preprinted on form. 


(2) DE 3579	 FORMAT CODE: Preprinted on form. 


(3) DE 0003	 BLM ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT: Enter Administrative State Code 


(alpha) and the Districti Resource Area. and Planning 


Unit numbers. 


(4) DE 6618	 DATE: Enter date of data'col 1ectio (Yr.Mo.Dav) n . 


(5) DE 7350	 ACTION CODE: Enter "A" to add new data; "D" to delete 


existing data. 


(6) DE 2646	 PLANT SYMBOL: Enter SCS standard plant symbol. 


(7) DE 3545	 PHENOLOGY ADJUSTMENT FACTOR: For each species recorded 


in the planning unit, enter air-dr-Y weight adjustment 


factors bY phenology stage as a percent of maximum 


production. If no adjustment factor data were collected 


for certain species, assign factors from snecios with 


similar phenological characteristics. 


224 

Illustration 44 Page 1 

Ecological Site Description 


Fore 4412-34 P» v ..... . f 

(June 19791 

RECORD IYPE . . . . (I ) V R 

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

FORMAT COK ... . :•••. .. . 12) D 

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT 

BL1 A0MINIS1RATIVE STATE . . !3> I&iT I 

SOIL-VEGETATION INVENTORY METHOD 

DATE (YYKM9P! (4) \l'3-\&k\L&\ 

ACTION CODE (A.U) 15) \A 

ECOLOGICA L SIT E DESCRIPTIO N 

(6) (7) (8) (?) (10) SOIL PttWHS Of PRODUCTION PER ACfc RANGE SITE NUMBER

 RANGE SITE NAME PRECIP. ZONE SURFACE AVERAGE FAVORABLE UfAVORASLE 

LCH HIGH FACTOR YEAR YEAR YEAR 

P L A N T SPE C I E S LIS T 

m (12) :j (11) (12) :: (111 (12) :: (i n : (12) i x : I '! ! • t :: i 

PLANT SYKBOL COtPOSITIONI ! PLANT SYMBOL COMPOSITION:: PLANT SYMBOL COMPOSITION:: PLANT SYMBOL COMPOSITION 

A&P 

1.e j :: 

to \

.£&£.. " :s~~~ ~ f&iD le i 

Jta.\ 

" i t 

-2rJL- ! ——~— 

Mr/L to ! 

j j „^„: 

!! . 

_ ... _ 

SOI L PHASE S AN D NAME S 

: , (13) 

(14) -•• . Si (13) (14) : PHASE OF 

! • PHASE OF : SOIL SERIES SOI L NAM E !! SOIL SERIES SOI L NAM E 

l

-H»t\ ALPAQ PiJe. sww UA*$\ 

:: 

ii 

ii 

:: 

» i 

­

|| 

i ii : 

: 

ABCDEFOHIJKLMNflPORSTUVIIXY i 123456789 0 

i i i i i l i . 1 

225 
Illustration 44 Page 2 

Ecological 84eo EtocxBir&pS&ca 

INSTRUCTION S FO R RECOR D TYP E V R 


DATA 
 ITEM ELEKENT INSTRUCT I CMS 


(I) BE 3329	 RECORD TYPE* Preprinted on form. 


(2> BE 3379	 FORMAT CODE: Preprinted on form. 


(3) DE 0004	 BLM ADMINISTRATIVE STATE: Enter Administrative State 


Code (alpha). 


(3> BE 6618	 DATE: Enter date of data collectio (Yr.Mo.Dav) n . 


(3) DE 7330	 ACTION CODE: Enter "A" to add new data? "D" to delete 


existing data. 


(fc.) DE 3328 ECOLOGICAL SITE NUMBER: Enter range or woodland site 


number according to the following example: 


D34A001ANU C 


where D = Major Land Resource Region 


34 c Major Land Resource Area 


A = Sobarea (If no subarc-a enter "X") 


O01 «= Consecutive Site Number 


and ANUC » State-s in which range site is 


correlated, e.g. Arizona. New Mexico. Utah, 


and Colorado. 


<7) DE 3914 ECOLOGICAL (Range) SITE NAMF: Fnter first ei«ht riisits 


of site name. 


(8) DE 3909	 PRECIPITATION ZONE: Enter average annual precipitation 


low and high for the site. 


(.9) DE 481S SOIL SURFACE FACTOR: Enter SSF for the site. This should 


be future SSF with management. 


(10) DE 3930	 POUNDS OF PRODUCTION PER ACRE: Enter potential 


production in pounds per acre for the average, favorable, 


and unfavorable Years. 


(II) DE 2646	 PLANT SYMBOL: Enter SCS standard Plant symbol. 


(12) DE 3535	 PERCENT COMPOSITION: Enter percent composition by 


species as shown on the SCS description or otherwise 


derived. Enter percents in whole numbers. When a range 


in percent is specified always fntsr the higher number 


(i.e. 20 to 25 "/.. enter 25 7.). 


(13) DE 4649	 PHASES OF SOIL SERIES: Enter the phases of soil series 


from the State Soil Inventory legend. 


(14) DE 44-48	 SOIL NfoMEs Enter soil name for the .Associated >-hase of 


soil serier. No more than 74 positions may be ent-."re-d. 


J 


226 
Illustration 45 Page 1 

Diet and Use Factors by Animal cod Season 

Forn 4412-35 P«« of 

(June 1979) 

RECORD TYPE (1) VI) 

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR FORMAT CODE ........ . (2) D 

«BEAU OF LAND HANAGEHENT 

. BUI ADMN UNIT (ST/DI/RA/PU). (3) \(\\tl'A\h'fi\%'.P.\h: 

SOIL-VEGETATION INVENTORY METHOD 

DATE tYYIWO) 14) ,\l$.'£.&.\L\t\ 

ACTION CODE IA.0) ..... . (5) 'A1, . 

DIE T AN D US E FACTOR S 


B Y ANIMA L AN D SEASO N 


: (t) (7) ! : (8) /~\ (circle one) '• ALLOWABL E US E FACTO R ] (9) ( M PROPER USE FACTOR 

(PERCENT OF PLANT UTILIZED) lANIRAL (10) D DIETARY PREFERENCE VALUE 

[PLANT SYMBOL SSPECIE3 

SPRING sunnER FALL UINTER SPRING SUNNER FALL MINTER 

irf#*2. 3e So To Co Ids.. o 0 

\Afl\iXT *h S~o ro 2~o ! 

:_q__ \M. .to... o 

\ } : 

j£o_ : 

let- J£L J.o_ 

'• ( 

;T i

: JtoL. : * 

JOBL. fo 

~Fo~ UK. \Ae*te *in>- ~Fo~' ! \ton So JtSL.££_ 

/F J-0 —1 H

IO to : ''•• ( —. -

_£_ _£L_ Jo . : •TO '• 

——- ;

!:

\u ro To 

So fo 1 ! • • ) 

— i T~ 5" _£T_ i- i 

— ' 

: 

—-"­ : - — 

\-,—.— — _ 

.. . • 

• 

---— = — = 

—1 

:

1 

. ; 

—— ... 1 1 ,— 

— : 

: 

! 

i' \ i : i n:nn:. z~zzzzz. ! 

— ! 

ABCDEFGHIJKLHN0P9RSTUVMXY Z 123451739 0 

227 
Illustration 45 Page 2 

Dioe affid Boo Pocttoiro by Aaieal oad Seaoon 

V 1.1 INSTRUCTION S F O R RECOR D TYP E 

DATA 

ITEM ELEMENT 

(1) DE 3329 


(2) DE 3379 


(3) DE 0003 


(4) DE 6618 


<5> DE 7350 


(6) DE 2646 


(7) DE 3923 


(S> DE 3929 


(?) DE 3511 


(10) DE 4114 


INSTRUCTIONS 

RECORD TYPE8 Preprinted on form. 


FORMAT CODE* Preprinted on form. 
 BLM ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT: Enter Administrative State Code 


(alpha) and the District. Resource Area. and Planning 


Unit numbers. 
 DATE! Enter Date of data collection (Yr.Mo.Dav). 
 ACTION CODE: Enter "A" to add new data; "D" to delete 


existing data. 
 PLANT SYMBOL: Enter SCS standard plant symbol. 
 ALLOWABLE USE FACTOR: Enter percent of annual production 


which can be utilized by season* and still allow the 


plant to maintain itself. 
 WILDLIFE ANIMAL SPECIES: Enter the code for the common 
 name of each animal species occurring in the allotment. 


Code as fol1ous: 


AN - Antelope 


BA - Bison. American 


BU - Burros 


CA - Cattle 


CR - Caribou 


DB - Deer. Black-tailed 


DM - Deer. Mule 


DW - Deer. Whitetailed 


DS - Deer. Sitka 


ER - Elk. Rocky n.t. 


EO - Elk. Roosevelt 


ET - Elk. Tula 


GO - Goats 


GM - Goats. Mountain 


HO - Horses 


IB - Ibex 


JA - Javelina 


MO - Moose 


SH - Sheep 


SB - Sheen. Barbary 


SC - Sheep. California Dishorn 


SD - Sheep. Dal 1 


SE - Sheep. Desert Bighorn 


SP - Sheep. Peninsulf B i 9 h o r ii 


SR - Sheep. Rocky Mt. Bighorn 


PROPER USE FACTOR: Circle "P" if proper use factors are 


being entered. Enter PUF'S b.- season* for each animal 


and plant species. 


DIETARY PREFERENCE VALUE: Circle "D" if dietary 


preference values are be-ins entered. Entc-r dietary 


percent bv season* for each animal and plant species. 


» Standard Seasons <f Use Dates (based on North American 


Solstice Dates): 


Spring 3/21 - 6/20 


Summer 6/21 - 9/2<> 


Fal1 9/21 - 12/20 


Winter 12/21 - 3/20 


Year lor * 3/21 - 3/20 


228 
Illustration 46 Page 1 

Vlldllfa 8 M Data 

PMt Of For* 4412-34 

(JU M 19791 RECORD TYPE It) VII 

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR FORMAT CODE (21 D 

BUREAU OF LAND HANAGEKENT 

BLH ftDNlN UNIT (ST/DI/RA/PU). (3) ii\T.:^\^\H\?.^:2< 

SOIL-VEGETATION INVENTORY METHOD 

DATE (YYIWO) . . W \2'H\&(glL\*& 

ACTION CODE (A.D) ..... . (5) l A 

WILDLIF E US E DAT A 

1 (6) (7) (81 (91 (101 (12) PERCENT WILDLIFE ESTIRATED LISTING OFSUA'S USED BY 1IILDL1FE SPECIES ! 

! HERD UNIT ALLOTMENT HER

OF 

D SPECIE

ANIMA

S 

L NUMBE

ANIMAL

R O

S 

F j£?2m SUA 1 SUA! ! SUA 1 SUA 1 SWAI 

! )(,A non Z° 30O 

i IC>A /— - —:/ 

o|<S 

|*3t>c3 Bo«W Qocky­

- ft? 07 • floes; 

\ IU-0 >4on /OO ISO 19ff • . • 

_ 

-

-—-— 

r 

—-— 

— -— -

— — 

— 

-

* 

i 

1 —­— iiziElz ........ 

..—:— 

ABC DEFG I I1J H HNflPG RSTUVHXY ? 123 4 56 7 8 S 

:—__ 

: • -

—.._ 

: .: 1 

i 

: 

:_•_ 

i 

J 

^_ 

j 

:_: 

0 

229 
Illustration 46 Page 2 

Hlldlifo Boa Botd 


INSTRUCTION S FO R RECOR D TYP E V W 


DATA 


ITEM ELEMENT


(1) DE 3529


(2) DE 357?


<3> DE 0003


(4) DE 6618


<5> DE 7350


(6) DE 6598


(7) DE 0968


(8) DE 3927


(9) DE 3929


(10) DE 3926


(11) DE 3845


(12) DE 3507


 INSTRUCTIONS 


 RECORD TYPE: Preprinted on form. 


 FORMAT CODE: Preprinted on form. 


 BLM ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT: Enter Administrative State Code 


(alpha) and the District. Resource Area, and Planning 


Unit numbers. 


 DATE: Enter date of data collection (Yr.Mo.Dav). 


 ACTION CODE: Enter "A" to add new data; "D" to delete 


existing data. 


 HERD UNIT: Enter herd unit number for each wildlife 


species. 


 ALLOTMENT: Enter designated RMAS four-character number. 


 PERCENT OF HERD: Enter percent of total herd that uses 


the allotment. 


 WILDLIFE ANIMAL SPECIES: Enter the code for the common 


name of each animal species occurring in the allotment. 


Code as fol 1 ouis: 


AN - Antelope 


BA - Bison, American 


BU - Burros (mild) 


CR - Caribou 


DB - Deer. Black-tailed 


DM - Deer. Mule 


DM - Deer. Uhitetailed 


DS - Deer, Sitka 


ER - Elk. Rockv mt. 


EO - Elk. Roosevelt 


ET - Elk, Tule 


GM - Goats. Mountain 


HO - Horses (mild) 


IB - Ibex 


JA - Javelina 


MO - Moose 


SB - Sheep. Barbarv 


SC - Sheep, California Bighorn 


SD - Sheep, Dal 1 


SE - Sheep, Desert Bighorn 


SP - Sheep, Peninsula Bighorn 


SR - Sheep. Rockv Mt. Bighorn 


 ESTIMATED NUMBER OF ANIMALS: Enter estimated number of 


animals that graze within allotment boundaries. 


 PERIOD OF USE: Enter periods of use (month and dav) for 


wildlife entered. If more than one period during rear, 
 make additional line entries. 


 LISTING OF SWA'S USED BY WILDLIFE SPECIES: Enter SWA 


numbers for all SWA'S the wildlife species uses on the 


allotment.. Enter "9999" if all SWA'S within the allotment 


are used bv the animal. 


230 
• • 

Illustration 47 Page 1 

Suitability For Livestock Graslng 

For* 4412-40 P»9« of _ (Junt 1979) 

RECORD TYPE (1) V I u.s.

 DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

FORmTCODE . (2) D 

BURUU CF UWI NMMCEHENT 

fill AOMN MIT IST/M/RA/PU). (3) U\Z\&\2.'.±l\$.\C>\& SOIL-VEGETATION INVENTORY METHOD 

ALLOTMENT . . . (4) \4L\£>'.l\L\ 

PASTURE (5) iSil : SUITABILIT Y FO R 
 DATE <YYBBK» it) :2:2i£:feiZ:£ 

LIVESTOC K 6RAZIN C 


ACTION CODE (A.D) (7) 'A: 

; (8) !

 (9) ii 18) ! (9) 

i PERCENT OF SUA BY SUITABILITY CLASS . i i ! PERCENT OF SUA BY SUITABILITY CLASS . : SITE : URITEUP 1 IPOTENTIALLY 1 LIIUTED : :: HRITEUP IPOTENTIALLY 1 LIMITED 

! AREA SUITABLE ! SUITABLE 1SUITABILITY : UNSUITABLE :: AREA 1 SUITABLE ! SUITABLE ! SUITABILITY ! UNSUITABLE 

: is­ : Q.£*LL /^° ! 

I —- — 

IfiooZ Jro \ S-o i t 

• —. 

. S

 /oo' \\ •~ \ it>o 

70 \ .J6 ii 

. \BccL> 

fdO ! | —. ] " " » 1 

!"0co7 

IOC i 

ico : !! > i * 

* • 

'• • . ii , _ _ • ­ J * * i * 

! • 

• i 

' * • — ** 

• i 11 

: 

' 11 

11 

• i ' 

, i i 

• t 

•• 

11 • 

• i 

* i 

.: 

_ 11 

: 

11 i 

- i . ! "" "

 '

ABrott,HIJKLnN0PQRSTUVWKY J 123456789 0 

! IN 

1 II I 

231 

i 
Illustration 47 Page 2 

Suitability For Llveotock Grasing 

INSTRUCTION S F O R RECOR D T Y P F. V I 

DATA 

ITEM ELEMENT INSTRUCTIONS 

(1) DE 3529 	RECORD TYPE: Preprinted on form. 


(2) DE 3579 	FORMAT CODE: Preprinted on form. 


(3) DE 0003 	BLM ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT: Enter Administrative State Code 


(alpha) and the District. Resource. Area! and Planning 


Unit numbers. 


(4) DE 0968 	ALLOTMENT: Enter designated RMAS four-character number. 


<S> DE 3905 	PASTURE: Enter pasture number', blank if none. (Must be 


unique within allotment.) 


(6) DE 6618 	DATE: Enter *ate of data collection (Yr.Mo.Dav). 


<7> DE	 7350 ACTION CODE: Enter "A" to add new data; "D" to delete 


exist ins data. 


(8) DE 3507 	SITE WRITEUP AREA: Enter SWA number. 
 • 

(9) DE 3925 	PERCENT OF SWA BY SUITABILITY CLASS: Enter percent of 


SWA by suitabi 1 i tv class in one or more of the four-


classes. The sum must enual 100 '/.. Definitions are as 


f ol 1 OIDS: 


SUITABLE - entirely suitable f.or livestock grazing. 


POTENTIALLY SUITABLE - would be suitable if production 


is increased, watershed conditions improved, or water 


deve1 oped. 


LIMITED SUITABILITY - livestock grazing due to 
 seasonal water availability or ephemeral range. 


UNSUITAE'LE - totally unsuitable for livestock grazing 


due to excessive slopes, poor watershed conditions, or 


low production. 


232 
Supplemental Studies — Fecal Analysis 

XII. FECAL ANALYSIS 

Editor's Note: This procedure was transcribed from a Bureau document entitled 

"4412 - PHYSICAL RESOURCES STUDIES/' 

A. Introduction 

Fecal analysis studies provide information which can be used to aid in the evaluation of 

present management practices or establishment of future management direction. These 

studies provide information on the relative percentages of plant species currently being 

consumed by various herbivores on a particular area of land. . 

B. Procedures 

1. Sampling Area 

The area to be sampled is selected on the basis of the use expected to be made of the 

data. For example, if it is desirable to determine the foraging habits and degree of 

competition between cattle and mule deer on habitats which only partially overlap each 

other, it will be necessary to include the total habitat of cattle and the total habitat of 

mule deer in the sampling area. On the other hand, if it is only necessary to determine 

the degree of competition between cattle and deer on their overlapping habitats, the 

sampling area can be reduced to include only that area where the habitats are overlapping- \ 

2. Sampling Procedures 

a. Method of Sampling 

(1) The sampling area should be traversed in a systematic manner, e.g. paced back 

and forth on transect lines, and subsamples collected as fecal material is encountered along each transect line. In large sampling areas, it may be desirable to 

utilize more transects of shorter distances, scattered throughout the sampling 

area. Non-permanent transects may be necessary in certain areas due to normal 

distribution patterns of the animals. Other sampling methods are. acceptable, 

providing the area, dates, or animals sampled do not providea biased sample. 

(2) From each pile of fecal material, extract a 2-3 gram subsample ("pinch") and 

place with other subsamples collected from a particular animal species into a 

single container. It is recommended that at least 50 defecations from each 

herbivore be sampled. The result will be a "composite sample" representing a 

particular class of herbivore in the sampling area. 

(3) Composite samples may be comprised of subsamples collected from individual 

transects or subsample from several transects combined. Composite samples 

representing individual transects will allow computation of mean and standard 

233 
Supplemental Studies — Fecal Analysis 

deviation which will provide statistical comparison between areas. However, 

such samples will also result in greater costs due to the fact that additional 

microscopic analysis will be required. 

b. Yearling Habitat. When animals remain in essentially the same location, composite 

samples may be collected on a seasonal basis to reflect seasonal diet preference or 

on a one-time basis to reflect a general overview of the diet for an entire year. If it is 

desirable to determine seasonal diets, it is absolutely necessary that only fresh fecal 

subsamples be collected. If it is desirable to determine an overview of the yearlong 

diet, it is necessary to collect subsamples from a variety of fecal age classes (from 

old to fresh fecal material) to assure that all seasons are represented in the composite 

sample. In this case, the maximum age of fecal subsamples should not exceed 2-3 

years. If any green color still occurs inside the dung, it is probably satisfactory for 

fecal analysis. 

c. Seasonal Habitat. When animals migrate from one habitat type to another, as part 

of their seasonal movement patterns, composite samples may be collected to determine: 1) seasonal diet by habitat type, or 2) overview diet for the entire yearlong 

habitat. If it is desirable to determine seasonal diets by habitat type, it may be 

necessary to collect only fresh fecal subsamples to prevent the diets of small resident 

populations from biasing the data. If it is desirable to obtain an overview diet for the 

entire habitat, it is necessary to assure that adequate fecal subsamples are collected 

from each habitat type. 

d. Comparison of diet. If it is desirable to compare the diet of one class of herbivore 

with the diet of other herbivores, fecal subsamples must be collected from all animal 

species being considered. If possible, fecal subsamples from different herbivores 

should be collected along the same transect line and in equal proportions. Fecal 

subsamples from each herbivore should be placed in separate containers to form a 

composite sample for each animal involved. 

3. Sample Identification 

A suitable means of identifying composite samples must be provided. As a minimum, 

the date of collection, location, species and/or class of animal should be firmly affixed to 

each composite sample container. Other useful identifying criteria for a particular 

sampling area should be used as appropriate, e.g. season represented by the composite 

sample, name of collector, age of fecal material, or number of subsamples included in 

the composite sample. 

4. Sample Preservation 

In order to arrest bacterial activity, composite samples should be oven dried at temperatures below 70 degrees centigrade. If this is not possible, the samples should be air dried 

until all moisture has been removed. Samples of fresh dung may also be preserved by 

adding common table salt (1:1 volumetric ratio), alcohol or formaldehyde. 
Supplemental Studies — Fecal Analysis 

5. Sampling Analysis 

a. Shipment of Samples. Composite samples should be mailed to an appropriate fecal 

analysis laboratory in suitable containers (plastic or paper bags, plastic bottles, 

boxes, vials, etc.). Samples should not be sent in glass containers due to possible 

breakage. Samples preserved with a liquid should have excess liquid drained off 

before shipment to reduce volume and weight. Do not send samples which have not 

been dried or fixed with a preservative. Duplicate samples should be retained in the 

district office in case of questions. ­

b. Microscopic Analysis 

(1) Fecal analysis laboratories will generally have comprehensive libraries of 

microscopic slides of plant parts, tissues, cells etc. Fecal samples are compared 

to these microscopic slides, and the ingested plants are identified. 

(2) The laboratories will generally prepare 20 slides from each composite fecal 

sample. Each slide will be examined through a binocular microscope at the rate 

of approximately 20 fields of view per slide. Botanical composition of the diet 

may then be determined by dividing the number of plant fragments recognized 

for a particular plant species by the total number of fragments of all species. 

(3) It is necessary that a list of plants, which are present in the area from which fecal 

samples are collected, be prepared and sent to the fecal analysis laboratory. The 

abundance of plants in the sampling area should be identified as abundant, 

common, or infrequent. The plant list will aid the laboratory in identifying plant 

fragments in the fecal samples and reduce the time required to search through, a 

large number of reference slides. 

(4) Even though fecal analysis laboratories have rather complete libraries of the 

major forage species, frequently the plant material is not on file. If the plant 

material is not on file, it will be necessary to collect the plant species involved 

and send them to the laboratory for preparation of reference slides. As a general 

rule, plant material should be collected during the same season and in close 

proximity to the area where animal use occurs. 

(5) After microscopic examination of fecal material, the laboratory will develop a 

table showing the percentages of forage categories found in the diets (Illustration 48). This table will be made available to the appropriate district office. 

6. Sampling Plan 

To insure continuity in sampling procedures, a sampling plan (Illustration 49) will be 

prepared for all fecal analysis studies which meet one or more of the following criteria: 

a. More than one year of data is to be collected. 

b. More than one species of herbivore will be involved. 

235 
Supplemental Studies — Fecal Analysis 

c. More than one habitat will be considered. 

d. More than one season of use will be involved. 

As a minimum, sampling plans will contain the following sections: 

- Section I Background Information and Purpose of Study 

- Section II Objective of Study 

- Section III Area(s) of Sampling 

- Section IV Methods of Sampling 

- Section V Identification of Samples 

- Section VI Preservation of Samples 

- Section VII Sample Collection Schedule 

7. Vegetation Commposntioin 

a. In order to make maximum use of fecal analysis data, it is frequently necessary to 

compare what is eaten with what is available. As a result, it may be necessary to 

collect data relative to percent composition of the plant species in the sampling area. 

b. Accurate vegetation composition data can best be obtained by using the Soil Vegetation Inventory Method (Section XI). Care should be taken when using vegetation 

composition information to assure that the data is representative of the sampling area 

and corresponds to any portions of the sampling area which may be seasonal habitat. 

c. In situations where the sampling area overlaps two or more site writeup areas and/or 

vegetation types, it will be necessary to compute a weighted average of vegetation 

composition for the entire sampling area. (See Illustration 50 for an example of 

weighted average computation.) The following formulae should be used when 

making this computation: 

Formula: X = (Pl)(Pa) + (P2)(Pb), where 

100 

PI = Percent Composition by Species in Vegetation Type No. 1 

Pa = Percent of Total Area Represented by Vegetation Type No. 1 

P2 = Percent Composition by Species in Vegetation Type No. 2 

Pb = Percent of Total Area Represented by Vegetation Type No. 2 

X = Percent Composition of Vegetation Types 1 and 2 combined (weight average) 
Supplemental Studies — Fecal Analysis 

C. Use of Data 

The percentage of forage categories found in the diets of herbivores can be used in several 

ways to provide information useful in making management decisions. In most instances, 

mathematical computations are required for development of useable data. 

1. Diet Similarity 

Diet similarity is the percentage to which two diets are similar to one another. The 

similarity of diets can be computed for different classes of herbivores on the same 

habitat, for different habitats used by one class of herbivore, or for different seasons of 

use by one herbivore on.the same habitat. Such computations will aid in the identification of competition or conflicts which may be occurring in a particular area. 

a. Diet Similarity Between Herbivores. To compute the similarity between diets of 

two herbivores on the same habitat, the following should be used. 

PS = I(2w) 

I(a+b) 

w = the smaller of two shared items 

a = percent in diet of herbivore No. 1 

b = percent in diet of herbivore No. 2 

EXAMPLE 

Percent in Percent in 

Plant Diet of Diet of 

Species Antelope (a) Sheep (b) 2W 

Bogr 20 50 40 

Spco 10 2 4 

OPUN 20 5 10 

Chna 40 20 40 

Artr JO _23 ^20 

1=100 1=100 1=114 

DS = 114 = .57 or The diets of antelope and sheep are 57% 

200 similar to each other. 

237 
Supplemental Studies — Fecal Analysis 

b. Diets Similarity Between Habitats. The same formula can be used to compute the 

similarity between diets of a particular class of herbivore on two separate habitats. 

Where, 

w = the smaller of two shared items 

a = percent in diet of habitat No. 1 

b = percent in diet of Habitat No. 2 

EXAMPLE Wild Horse Herd 1 Wild Horse Herd 2 

Plant Percent in Percent in 

Species Diet (a) Diet (b) 2W 

Brome 10 30 20 

Wheatgrass 25 40 50 

Fescue — 10 0 

Ricegrass 45 — 0 

Sage — 5 0 

Winterfat — 10 0 

Rabbitbrush 5 2 4 

Legumes 10 1 2 

Other Forbs 5 2 4 

X=ioo 1=100 1 = 80 

DS =8 0 = .40 or The diets of wild horse range 1 and 2 are 

200 40% similar to each other. 

(Note: This calculation would primarily be useful in instances where it is necessary to prove 

that the diets of one class of herbivore on two different areas are not identical.) 

238 
Supplemental Studies — Fecal Analysis 

c. Diet Similarity between Seasons. The same formula can also be used to compute 

the similarity of diet for one class of herbivore on the same habitat during different 

seasons. 

PS = I(2w) 

I(a+b) 

Where, . 

w = the smaller of two shared items 

a = percent in diet during season No. 1 

b = percent in diet during season No. 2 

EXAMPLE 

Percent in Percent in 

Plant Cattle Diet. Cattle Diet 

Species Mid-Winter Mid-Summer 2W 

Wheat grass 25 7 14 

Fescue — 25 . — 

Needlegrass 10 3 6 

Other Grasses 5 10 10 

Alfalfa 30 20 40 

Kochia — ' 25 •' — 

Other Forbs — 10 — 

Prickly • . . — Pear 5 — 

Sagebrush 20 —' — 

Other Shrubs ' 5 

I =100 I =100 1 = 70 

DS = 70 = .35 or The Mid-summer diets and mid-winter diets of cattle are 35% 

200 similar to each other. 
Supplemental Studies — Fecal Analysis 

2. Stocking Eschange Rates 

Stocking exchange rates are computed to estimate the day's use of forage consumption 

by one class of herbivore which will need to be removed in order to make a specified 

number of day's use of forage available for another class of herbivore. Such computations aid in quantifying the trade-offs needed to accommodate various types of range 

use. Stocking exchange rates are not used to establish carrying capacities or stocking 

rates. The following example depicts the procedure for computing stocking exchange 

rates between antelope and sheep when both make use of the same habitat: 

Formula: DU = d x a , where 

(c)(b) 

DU = The number of sheep days of use which need to be removed in order to make 

additional forage available for antelope. 

a = Average daily forage intake for antelope (1.84 pounds per day) 

b = Average daily forage intake for sheep (1.63 pounds per day) 

c = Similarity of antelope and sheep diets (21%) 

d = The number of antelope days of use of forage which is desired to be made 

available (20 antelope days of use) 

Computation: DU = 20 x 1.84 = 107.6 or 

(0.21)(1.63) 

107.6 sheep days of use will need to be removed to make 20 antelope days use 

available. , 
Supplemental Studies — Fecal Analysis 

3. Habitat Suitability 

Habitat Suitability is a comparison between percent composition of vegetation species in 

the diet and percent composition of vegetation species in the habitat. Habitat suitability 

will indicate the percent suitability or comparability of the plant composition in the diet 

to the botanical composition of the feeding habitat, i.e., which animal is more efficiently 

adapted to a particular habitat. Habitat suitability can be computed by use of the following formula: 

DS = I(2w) 

I(a+b) 

w = the smaller of two shared items 

a = percent composition of vegetation in the diet 

b = percent composition of vegetation in the habitat 

EXAMPLE 

Elk Range No. 1 

Plant Percent in Percent 

Species Diet (a) Composition (b) 2W 

Brome 8 4 8 

Wheatgrass 3 1 2 

Fescue ' — . — • — ] 

Ricegrass . 10 2 4 

Sage 10 4 8 

Pinon 2 44 4 

Mahogany 5 4 8 

Jumper 48 34 68 

Aspen — 1 —. 

Spruce-fir — — — 

legumes 6 2 4 

Other Forbs 8 4 8 

1=100 1=100 1=114 

241 
Supplemental Studies — Fecal Analysis 

EEk Range No. 2 

Plant 

Species 

Percent in 

Diet (a) 

Percent 

Composition (b) 2W 

Brome 6 2 4 

Wheatgrass

Fescue

 12 

 19 

3 

5 

6 

10 

Ricegrass

Sage

Pinon

 — 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Mahogany

Juniper

Aspen

Spruce-fir

legumes

Other Forbs

I

 6 

— 

8 

 13 

 16 

 20 

 =100 

1 

2 

33 

33 

5 

16 

I =100 

16 

26 

10 

JS2 

1=106 

Computation: 

Elk Range No. 1 HS=114=.57 

200 

Elk Range No. 2 HS=106=.53 

200 

NOTE: Elk Range No. 1 provides the best habitat for elk, i.e., elk diet was more similar to 

the habitat on Range 1 than on Range 2. 

242 
4. Dietary Preference 

a. Preference Index Indices of dietary preference are used to indicate the vegetative 

species which are highly preferred as food by herbivores. Preference indices are 

computed by one of the following formula: 

where a = percent composition of vegetation in the diet *=\ b = percent composition of vegetation in the habitat 

EXAMPLE 

Plant Percent in Percent Preference 

Species Diet (a) Composition (b) Index 

Blue grama 20 50 .4 

Globe mallow 10 V 4 

2.5 

Prickly pear 20 

6 -> 3.3 

Rabbitbrush . 40 20 2.0 

Sagebrush 10 20 .5 

NOTE: Increasing values of preference indices indicate greater desirability of a plant 

species as a source of food. 

b. Mean Preference Index. Mean indices of dietary preference may be used to 

indicate the relative amount of energy expended by an animal when searching for 

the foods in its diet. The following example computes the mean preference indices 

for antelope and sheep on a hypothetical range: 

Percent Percent , Antelope Sheep 

in Diet in Diet Percent Pref. Pref. 

Plant Species Antelope Sheep Composition Index Index 

Blue grama 20 50 60 .3 .8 

Globe mallow 10 2 2 5.0 1.0 

Prickly pear 20 5 10 2.0 •5 

Rabbitbrush 40 20 8 5.0 2.5 

Sagebrush 10 * 23 20 .5 1.2 

• ^ = 12.8 = 6.0 

Mean nreference ir idex for anteloi ,e = 12 -

8

=2.6 

* > 

Mean preference index for sheep = -f— = 1.2* 

*NOTE: As the mean preference index increases above one (1), increasing amounts of 

energy are used is searching for food. In the above example, antelope would spend 

more time and energy moving around in search of food. 

243 
01 

Illustration 48 

*t csiO <v ,V 1i u> I I 1 I 1 «r ? 1 1 1i ~ 1

>-> O c v <** •— O • 1 0 • (/I 

CT* t— '.'1 

a 

o **• - *r 

g 

_> 

i - \D M(7 » n LD Lrt ro uD 

a O a^r-O m 1— O O M> 

41 C 

, _ r _ vD r— oa o 

o. 2 

^3- r>» r*-) •— o> Ol t*n 0 O t—. • ~T 4-* 

( 9 3 

< 

c *o 

j ­

t. 

s> 

mc\j»-v D MOic i >~

KO

C7* 

 <*c o csjr— ooa> o^ n

 m

 >—

 f**> 

 00 0 f—CD 2 ^ O* — 2 2 mm 

3

i r— CM ^> fO rr W — ^ " 

•> 

ES Ol ** >» 

oc 

L. 

C

cC

 n

 0 Or ^>« —^ • • »£>^ ­

r0 . tn o . mo ^ . KT

r

.

 *t

 r­.

 -^ — _* csjj ^ J!J r-OO O . . . . 

V >— 

•o Ul 

K O -

o>Ol 

C 

a

/> 

0 i 

*-c » 

3; 

1

O <— r*.|in rs.

r-w* j O\ o

CM CM

i

 o^cn

 ChOD

 r— CM

 CM

 co 

 in m

 »— 0

 in ^

 incv

 CO 

 v£J 

»—

 rn

 1 iC IS 

 o n 

ro noooor^Lnr — rs. cr

>r^.r-<. r>» i*» y> ~~ OCMCMCM" — CMCM O COO O CM CM 

« . ....... m CM t— . .. . CT» r— 

S

M t 

o. c 0 ) 

01 

V» § 

«a> 

Ol • 

4-> 

to 

^trt 

O 

a 

E

O 

J 

r s uiNUDNOiuinc o CO. — |-^Of>CMC0C* O

CM (Njcnn m i£> 

 ^r O

 ro

 *o

 «3"

 m

 r^-vov o iflr - V

 c^.—

 in n ^-C M

 r ­

 ^£) 

"» 

•— 

Of 01 U 

* J 

4-* V&­

X 

Ol 

1 <TNC O cit- o

 a)NOinrsi/ i IOIOCOCON H

 CM 00 »—«— r^Oini n «— o> aocn coin OC M • * 

en 

n CM

 o^ 10 ro r*. «— U X 

/ J 10 o 

o 0 ) 

(A •» 

M ­ 01 

i— w "j-oootOfVino t 1 *r CM <t oo^n 90 lA OOCM^Ti — CT>»— MN^ l£> CO CM Oi - O O 

f l f— CM 0 <—r*. O «— CM 

Ei CM r— CO CM 

o 

_> 

u in^fr^.^fcr*cy< o') cr»CMt n in CM «*r-» 0> irx^coro at^ ' vo <cj- »— ^r CM^ - CMro »J 

c co CM in r^ 0 ^~ wl • r-». Ol S 

CD L - mcoioio**-c^io- n en 01 01 X rp . l£> CM o OCMCMr^CMCC^ r r*. •

 v: " 

j _ m r— i— CM r— CO

 * 

o> e L. co 1D1— OOJ« J ao \o 1— cr\ oor* . 

a> n *-in^uio»o n n CM O C M 

r— r- 0 •— •— i n

 r>* I

3 ~t ~— O 

O CO CM l O CO _ Q t— t— 00OtOC0U1\ O 9 CM fOCs i CT**n CMC g 01 . . . .rOCMinvOr-C M CO OC O CO' — c o o >^' c 

1-U -

[

Q I OXt - O r - r- ~t 01 

o 

«r CM r- co 

„^ I ff 

u (/I 

in 3 

oi t . 

o> >» 

O 

*o » o 

<a <a t - c V) 4 ­

(O 3 <­

vi W r ~ 

<t- QJ ( J <*

o 

-O — •a *fl vt - * 3 , - - ^ 

vt V) «o > •»- - ­

o u 

01 o 

o» 01 C f - l/» 

Ol •n > ist *-> 3 - ^ — . 

CO v - V» 3 . c «-» «o V o «•» « * l O — 3 C O l —» tQ v- Q. 

c VI — | C X C £ — irt — C > , 

Ol VI I0»-» - E *0 1-3— * 3—*"* - *-» 

u - c t. o ei t . . • £Z ** +-• o E L. O •»- E«o O fa. u o E > —- o i/» —* 3 —% a> c <* £ *Z u */» 

< o 3 •^.trt.c nj yi >, is CioE^ c o> '«­ I»J - f-a . N >> t- — o*-»oQ-a » > <a <o E 

o t O ~- o c -t~i.e e cr *o — vt -c r-a > © 

•-» v» W O C£Un ) ^OCt T <D V» O O 4-» 

i a u o> >. >- —» *-<• •—• u u — u E—T J « •«-» 3« > r- u 

^..• j ai E u e vt c «o —* o —' 3 —-31 . — e ••- 3 - ^ 4-» i •* o < 

(00«- > IU 3 «> 3 —« 0'"-X' E £ U »W L uJ 0> i r-*o*OEL . —­ ^ — -3-^+J—* D Li/lfliH)£irttflL''->- • «o 4-» «0 i/» r J3 I/) 3 4) ' • r-0>* ^ ~ * '-OQ . >,-r-— (/»V30;-O* « r- QJ U 3 •© O — C «J <V Oi 

l/t 3 H 3 »- </> —• O •«-» O <V '~- n ~- ~~> •— Ct-raoo^—O * O U 0--t/ ) O-r-'r ­

i - o o Ei-* a t-i/» i.wuao-o w nLija»t. — a. iz to >— O — a w «i oi 

at~-o t. ]0 t- —*>»<OU x — — a^'-Q — O—'trtc . w* -x

. W4->— >x «* •• ' 4J- •»o t. • D Li —i

•

 — J C3*o0i iJ i a c— 1/ x —-1 *Jl/ w —<» oo x c a . ao . E o 3 w a-,4j'-ai>ouiv)i o «^—vi 3 0 T; L ^ —- —- ^J 3 0 '*" 0 <U E E ^- CJ rOi/i-L.-^XU*-*-—-t/>L.i/ ) 0 O «) * J

 T 0J U yi 1 F-T?£0>^ - ^T O O O QJ 

£ lO <0 J 01 U - T3 i. ^ /I VI W L ?:}-O.Ol}0 0 ^ O « iQ 

« u w -'^i g a* CJ cr c \- 3 3 i^i-: — •-*->XL.»owScjza E cccc c 

0) »-»o» oj'ot-v> — o«^-OJ3*aa<r — >r o ^OJLT>^CX*->XV I •»-•«-* a* oooo o ftiai<BOiTj-'-'"0,

DCflO*Jwi'cri'>E-" CJI*-" oc-«- c o 13 w r UT J C C C C C W i. 3 fliro-

— xs 3001.^0)0'-'- ^ 3c : w 1— ' T c r— ~- c 3r-ajwaio<u^J ' -^P * • "

 w 

JZY~\C\QJ — <o c oil . a> cL c wT*o m n 0 »D oL"3^r|f l cxj 3 o.- c w 3!••-•— 0* c c c] c c 0 

»—pOM^CSWh-^lOpi ; z3ps|uo|in|mEft:)o^-i^CXi3PE^^nr^K3)o>MK^P=|oMl3t3t=3l-3 =3 2: 

244 
Illustration 49 Page 1 

Wild Horse Fecal Analysis Study 

Sampling Plan 

Ely District 

1. Background Information 

Approximately 3,000 wild horses inhabit national resource lands in the Ely District. These 

horses are scattered across most areas within the district boundaries. The habitat of these 

animals includes both yearlong and seasonal ranges. _ 

Depending on the location, wild horses graze side by side with a variety of animal species. The 

major species include mule deer, antelope, domestic cattle and domestic sheep. It is desirable 

that data relative to the diets of these animals be obtained to facilitate MFP and activity 

planning. 1 . '

 • . ' . " r . . . . ' 

2. Objectives 

a. Determine dietary components of wild horses by season on yearlong and seasonal 

ranges which are typical of wild horse habitat in the Ely District. . 

b. Determine possible competition for forage with other herbivores on yearlong and 

seasonal wild horse habitat. 

3. Methods 

In order to accomplish the above objectives, the following actions will be taken: 

a. Sampling Area 

The sampling areas will be established. These will be located on one yearlong wild 

horse habitat and one (1) seasonal wild horse habitat, respectively. 

The yearlong habitat is located in the Little Smokey and Sand Springs Valleys of the 

Duckwater Planning Unit and is grazed by sheep during the winter months and cattle 

during the summer months. This area also contains yearlong habitat for a small number 

of antelope. 

The seasonal habitat is located on Buck Mountain and in Long Valley of the Newark 

Planning Unit. Higher elevations of this area contain crucial winter habitat for mule deer 

and are grazed by cattle during the summer months. Lower elevations are grazed by 

sheep and cattle during the winter months. 

Both wild horse habitats (yearlong and seasonal) include a variety of vegetation types 

and plant species. 

245 
Illustration 49 Page 2 

b. Sampling Procedures 

The collection of fecal subsamples will be accomplished by use of non-permanent 

straight-line transects. Transects will be a minimum of one-quarter mile in length and 

will be repeated until the desired number of fecal subsamples are obtained. Fecal 

subsamples will be collected from both sides of the transect line within that area 

observable by the collector. Additional sampling procedures for the two sampling areas 

are as follows: 

(1) Yearlong Habitat 

An attempt to collect fecal material from four (4) geographic areas within the 

confines of the yearlong habitat will be made. At least one non-permanent transect 

will be used in each of the four geographic areas. These geographic areas dissect 

a variety of vegetation types and use areas of wild horses, antelope, cattle, and sheep. 

Subsamples will be collected four (4) times each year - during the summer, fall, 

winter, and spring periods - to obtain data on forage preference by season. Since 

the area is yearlong habitat, only fresh fecal material will be collected. 

A total of 50 wild horse fecal material subsamples (2-3 grams subsamples) will be 

collected from each of the four geographic areas within the yearlong habitat in 

response to many environmental factors, it will always be necessary to collect 

subsamples from areas where the animals are located to insure that only fresh fecal 

material is collected. 

Fecal material from cattle and sheep will be collected each time wild horse 

subsamples are collected. Due to the fact that cattle utilize only a portion of the area 

during the summer months and sheep utilize only a portion of the area during the 

winter months, it is expected that fecal material from these animals will be 

comparatively scarce. Therefore, it is necessary to collect subsamples from these 

animals whenever fecal material is collected for wild horses to insure that an 

adequate number of cattle and sheep subsamples are provided. 

Because the season on which cattle and sheep utilize the area is fixed by a grazing 

license, there should be on problem determining seasonal forage preference of cattle 

and sheep from fecal material collected during all seasons of the year. However, it 

will always be important not to collect cattle and sheep subsamples in excess of three 

years of age. 
Illustration 49 Page 3 

If possible, fecal material from antelope will be collected during each season wild 

horse subsamples are collected. Because there are very few antelope in this area, 

it will be necessary to collect subsamples from areas in which antelope concentrate. 

It is suggested that if antelope droppings are not readily available, the collector 

should search for droppings along roads or trails. This suggestion is made because 

antelope are known to deposit droppings when crossing roads. 

Since antelope use the sampling area on a yearlong basis, it is necessary to collect 

only fresh subsamples so that seasonal diets can be compared with those of wild 

horses. 

(2) Seasonal Habitat 

An attempt will be made to collect fecal material from three (3) geographic areas 

within the confines of the seasonal habitat. At least one non-permanent transect will 

be used in each of the three geographic areas. These geographic areas dissect a 

variety of vegetation types and use areas of a variety of animal species within the 

sampling area. 

The spring, summer, and fall portions of the seasonal wild horse habitat are located 

on the higher elevation of Buck Mountain. This area serves as spring, summer, and 

fall range for wild horses arid cattle'. It also serves as important winter range for mule 

deer. 

A total of 100 wild horse fecal material subsamples will be collected from this area. 

This fecal material will be collected three times each year during the spring, 

summer, and fall seasons to determine forage preferences by season. Only fresh 

fecal material will be collected. 

Fecal material from mule deer will be collected also. However, because it is not 

possible to gain access on Buck Mountain during the winter season, no attempt to 

collect mule deer fecal material during the winter months will be made. Therefore, 

in order, to obtain data on forage preferences for mule deer during the winter period, 

it will be necessary to collect mule deer subsamples during the spring. Mule deer 

fecal material will be collected only once each year, in the early spring, and only 

fresh subsamples will be collected. 

The winter portion of the seasonal wild horse habitat is located on the west side on 

Long Valley. This area dissects a variety of vegetation types and use area of wild 

horses, cattle, and sheep. Subsamples will be collected in the Dry Mountain 

Allotment (sheep use) and the Warm Springs Allotment (cattle use). A total of 50 

wild horse fecal material subsamples will be collected from each allotment for a 

total of 100 subsamples. Subsamples will be collected once each year during the 

winter season to determine forage preferences during the winter. 

247 
Illustration 49 Page 4 

Fecal material from cattle will be collected in the Warm Spring Allotment whenever 

wild horse subsamples are collected. If possible, 50 subsamples will be obtained. 

Fecal material from sheep will be collected in the Dry Mountain Allotment 

whenever the wild horse subsamples are collected. If possible, 50 subsamples will 

be collected. 

The Dry Mountain and Warm Springs Allotment are located in a winter use area 

for wild horses, cattle, and sheep. As a result, it will not be necessary to collect fresh 

fecal material from these animals. However, it is important not to collect subsamples 

older than three years old. 

4. Sample identification 

Samples collected in accordance with labels which include the following information: 

a. District 

b. Sampling Area:yearlong or seasonal habitat 

If seasonal habitat: spring, summer, 

fall, or winter portion 

c. Date of Collection 

d. Season Represented by Sample 

e. Class of Animal 

5. Sample preservation 

Samples will be air dried for a period of not less than 30 days prior to analysis. 

248 
Illustration 49 Page 5 

6. Collection Schedule 

The following schedule will be utilized in collection of subsamples: 

YEARLONG HABITAT 

Wild Horses Cattle Sheep ­

Number of As many as As many as 

Subsamples 200 possible up possible up 

to Collect . to 100 to 100 

by Season 

Season Winter Spring . Winter 

Subsample Spring Summer Spring 

Will be Summer Fall Fall 

Collected Fall 

Age of 

Subsamples 

to Collect fresh only 3 years old 3 years old 

SEASON HABITAT (Spring, Summer, Fall Portion) 

- Wild Horses Cattle . Deer 

Number of 

Subsamples 100 100 100 

to Collect 

by Season 

Season Spring Spring Spring 

Subsample Summer Summer 

Will be Fall Fall 

Collected 

Age of 

Subsamples fresh only fresh only fresh only 

to Collect 

Antelope 

As many as 

possible up 

to 100 

Winter 

Spring 

Summer 

Fall 

fresh only 

249 
Illustration 49 Page 6 

Number of 

Subsamples 

to Collect 

by Season 

Season 

Subsample 

Will be 

Collected 

Age of 

Subsamples 

to Collect 

Wild Horses 

50 

Winter 

3 years or 

less 

Cattle 

50 

Winter 

3 years or 

less 

Sheep 

50 

Winter 

3 years or 

less 

250 
Illustration 49 Page 7 

Plant Species 

Artemisia tridentata 

Artemisia nova 

Artemisia spinescens 

Atriplex confertifola 

Atriplex canescens 

Greyia spinosa 

Tetradymia canescens 

Halogeton glomeratus 

Salsola kali 

Purshia tridentata 

Cowania mexicana 

Rhus trilobata 

Lupinus spp. 

Juniperus utahensis 

Pinus monophyla 

Phlox spp. 

Chrysothamnus nauseosus 

Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus 

Chrysothamnus lanceolatus 

Ephedra spp. 

Sarcobatus vermiculatus 

Eurotia lanata 

Table 1 

List of Plant Species in 

Yearlong Wild Horse Habitat 

Duckwater Planning Unit 

Plant Abundance 

abundant 

abundant 

infrequent 

abundant 

. infrequent 

common 

infrequent 

common 

common 

infrequent 

infrequent 

infrequent 

infrequent 

infrequent 

infrequent 

infrequent 

common 

abundant 

infrequent 

infrequent 

common 

common 

251 
Illustration 49 Page 8 

PDaet Species

Sphaeralcea tenuiflora

Carex spp.

Hilaria jamesii

Oryzopsis hymenoides

Elymus salinus

Sitanion hystrix

Stipa comata

Stipa spp.

Sporobolus airoides

Bouteloua gracilis

Elymus cinereus

 Plant AbeHdance 

 common 

 infrequent 

 abundant 

 common 

 infrequent 

 common 

 infrequent 

 infrequent 

 infrequent 

 infrequent 

 infrequent 

252 
Illustration 49 Page 9 

Plant Species

Artemisia tridentata

Artemisia nova

Artemisia spinescens

Atriplex confertifola

Atriplex canescens

Greyia spinosa

Tetradymia canescens

Halogeton glomeratus

Salsolakali

Purshia tridentata

Cowania mexicana

Rhus trilobata

Lupinus spp.

Juniperus utahensis

Pinus monophyla

Phlox spp.

Chrysothamnus nauseosus

Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus

Chrysothamnus lanceolatus

Ephedra spp.

Eurotia lanata

Table 2 

List of Plant Species in 

Seasonal Wild Horse Habitat 

Newark Planning Unit 

 Plant Abundance 

" abundant 

 common 

 infrequent 

 common 

 . . infrequent 

 infrequent 

 infrequent 

 common 

 infrequent 

 common 

 infrequent 

 infrequent 

 infrequent 

­ common . 

i common 

^ infrequent 

 common 

, common 

 infrequent 

 infrequent 

 common 

253 
Illustration 49 Page 10 

Plant Species 

Sphaeralcea tenuiflora 

Carex spp. 

Oryzopsis hymenoides 

Sitanion hystrix 

Stipa comata 

Stipa spp. 

Elymus cinereus 

Plant Abumnidlainice 

common 

infrequent 

common 

common 

common 

infrequent 

infrequent 

254 
Illustration 50 

Example - Weighted Average Computation for Two Vegetation Types 

Vegetation Type No. 1

Pinon/Juniper - 30% of

Sampling Area

(a) . 0>) 

Plant Percent 

Species Composition 

Pied 15 

Juos 20 

Artr 40 

Arno 5 

Putr 10 

Eula — 

Agsp 3 

Stco 5 

Sihy 2 

Hija — 

Bogr 

Too 

r 

 Vegetation Type No. 2

 Sagebrush - 70% of

 Sampling Area

(c) (d) (e) 

(Column Plant Percent 

b x 30%) Species Composition 

.045 Pied — 

.060 Juos — 

.120 Artr 70 

.015 Arno 10 

.030, Putr 5 

0 Eula 2 

.009 Agsp 5 

.015 Stco 3 

.006 Sihy 3 

0 Hija 1 

0 Bogr 1 

100 

 Weighted Average 

or percent composition 

 of vegetation 

 Types 1 and 2 

Combined 

(0 

(Column 

e x 70%) 

0 

0 

.490 

.070 

.035 

.014 

.035 

.021 

.021 

.007 

.007 

(g) 

Sum of 

Columns 

c plus f 

xlOO 

4.5 

' 6.0 

61.0 

8.5 

6.5 

1.4 

, 4.4 

3.6 

2.7 

.0 

.7 

100.0 

255 

Supplemental Studies — Mediterranean Annual Study 

XIII. MEDITERRANEAN ANNUAL 

STUDY METHOD 

Editor's Note: The Photographic Utilization Method described below was taken from 

original BLM Manual Release 4-36, Part 4412.24, dated 05/26/70. The material was reorganized and edited to clarify the procedure. 

A. Introduction 

The purpose of this procedure is to analyze the productive condition and species composition 

in relation to mulch residue in the Mediterranean annual type.. This helps in determining the 

amounts of mulch needed for sustained production and evaluating the adjustments needed in 

stocking rates. Procedures apply only to Mediterranean ranges in the state of California. 

B. Plot Location 

1. Photo Plots 

Photo plots will be established in Key areas in accordance with the procedures for the 

Photo Plot Method described in Technical Reference 4400-4 for range trend studies. 

2. Mulch Residue Plots 

Two plots will be established using a 9.6 sq. ft. frame (round or square frames) located a 

minimum of 10 feet from the photographic plot. Plots will be moved each year, starting 

in the NW quarter from the photographic plots and then moving in a clockwise direction 

to the NE, SE, SW, and back to the NW. If a circular plot is used, a steel stake marker 

should be placed in the center of the plot. If a square plot is used, then angle iron stakes 

should be placed at opposite corners. 

C. Collection of Data 

Data collection for evaluation of the annual type requires six steps: photographs, estimates of 

composition, observed apparent trend, mulch residue determination,-climate, and actual use. 

1. Photographs 

Photographs will be taken at the photo plots at approximately the same time each year. 

Photos will include both a closeup shot and a general view. 

2. Composition 

Composition based on ocular weight estimates is determined on the photographic plot 

and also on the mulch plots clipped the previous fall. Composition estimates are recorded on Form 4412-23 (Illustration 51) for individual species considered most 

important to management objectives for the specific allotment; all other species are 

recorded as other. The species selected may have bad as well as good qualities, but they 

257 
Supplemental Studies — Mediterranean Annual Study 

must be valuable as indicators. Even though the selected species are not present each 

year, estimates in subsequent years will include only the original species chosen. Composition is estimated in the spring when plants are easily identifiable. After composition 

is estimated, the mulch plot stakes are removed (and reset for mulch plots to be clipped 

in the fall (See Section XIII.C.3). Care should be taken not to reuse an old plot after 

each cycle. 

3. Munich Residue DetermJEatDomi 

At each mulch plot, all standing vegetation is clipped to ground level and all 

undecomposed plant material that was produced on the plots is removed. Use caution 

not to include any soil or other foreign materials. This plant material will be kept in 

paper sacks until air dry weight can be measured. These plots will not be clipped again 

but will be used the next spring for composition estimates. Dry weights are recorded in 

grams for each clipped plot on Form 4412-22 (Illustration 52). Total weight (b) is that 

for all of the plot weights in grams. Average weight (c) is the average production in 

pounds per acre (total production/number of plots x 10= pounds per acre). Column (d) 

indicates composition plot direction and distance from the photographic plot. 

Clipping vegetation and removing mulch destroys the effects of mulch accumulation. 

Therefore, the mulch plots will have to be moved each year after composition is determined in the spring. 

4. Observed Apparent! Trend 

This is recorded on Form 4412-23 (Illustration 51) with a short narrative statement on 

soil stability that describes present erosion conditions and any indications of active 

erosion. Evidence of grazing is described by livestock use patterns that might be 

recognized or known. A short narrative statement is made by the examiner based on an 

overall observation of the apparent trend at the time of examination. 

5. Clnmate 

The basic factors to be considered are temperature and precipitation, which are significant because of their influence over growth processes. Summarize climatic data on 

Allotment Evaluation Summary Form 4413-1 (Illustration 53). 

6. Acfaal Use 

Records will be kept in accordance with the Actual Use Studies Technical Reference 

4400-2. 
Supplemental Studies — Mediterranean Annual Study 

D. Training 

Training required is minimal. The key area and plot location must be made by the resource 

manager, but the clipping and weighing can be performed by students or sub-professionals. 

E. Production 

If current production is desired, a caged plot could be added for each of the two mulch plots 

used, as is done in the paired plot method described in TR4400-3, Utilization Studies. 

Illustration 51 

Composition Studies Mediterranean Annual Rangea 


Fora 4412-21 UNITED STATES 

CJ.nu.,, 1970) DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR INSTRUCTIONS 

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT DISTRICT OPFICE PREPARES 

- ONE (1) COPY AS NEEDED. 

COMPOSITION STUDIES MEDITERRANEAN ANNUAL RANGES FILE WITH AMP STUDIES DATA. 

District Examiner (name) Date 

Planning Unit Allotment (name) Pasture (number or name) 1Vegetative Type 

&e+r thee* 

Class of Stock Season of Use Grazing Management System 

Semj0t* £+0*1 

COMPOSITION (percent) COMPO­

PHOTOGRAPHIC PLOT SITION CLIPPED.PLOTS* 

(Species) (percent) (Species) PLOT NUHBBB 

1 2 3 4 

3r»te jtr /jr*»+ /£> /r 

J3r*{ /*> & *ri. "?C /f 

frd* Jfi *~4* *4 2e 

/ffoiti /a *n*j>i /o X 

<£*!**. S &4i/* s /o 

0rer> r (P+e*> ts /o 

0*Ae* i? <2*Am+ 2e> ar 

TOTAL 100 - TOTAL 100 100 100 100 

Above is photo plot Location in relation to 

number £ photographic plot /C'AJU) ZC'AM* 1 

Remarks 

* Composition is tstimatnl the spring fatlnu-ing flipping of mulfb plots 

261 

Illustration 53 Page 1 

ALLOTMENT EVALUATION SUMMARY 


Form 4413-1 ' UNITED STATES District y 

(July 1968) DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

Planning Unit Date 

ALLOTMENT EVALUATION SUMMARY , LAS A Type of Management O / / A ...... ,^41/^ (/ fa^ta S/M/AJ 

TREND INDEX 

/4/ K 

_^-­

^^— 

100­

So 

too 

/ W 100 

90 

80 

mx '^r 

1 '° 

^ 8.. 60 \ ^, N \ O 50 

K 

< 40 \ 

9 30 

D

 20 

10 

0 

19fcJ. c / i. s V* Q «. LIVESTOCK LEGEND A H -il^JZ A CTL AL kBL( 

y? L

¥1 ~ //J­ >— ­ ?VJL •5 /*­

IUMC < s — , \

r £ ' 

\ -» ' o ,3 >*• ~

.-. J \ „ / > —t* v— 

If, iff - 4-\ > V 1 > 

a. 7 ^ ~T ' nitf 9 t­ u 7- * 

OB: J_ 

19*2 <^ ffr frf '/o 72. /O 7* LEGEND ACTUAL NORMAL LEGEND
 ACTUAL NORMAL 

,^w w &*-n»»v (?-/*•£ Sf^/ScJ ttft.-wy £***«, /2*ntf>. (*/f- t/rc/ 

263 
Illustration 53 Page 2 

PRODUCTION RANGE SUITABILITY 

PERCENT 

Current /4& AUMs SUITABLE POTENTIALLY SUITABLE UNSUITABLE 

Potential AUMs J?4t ?c O /o 

NARRATIV NAKK A E riV t 

Brief concise evaluation, alternative possibilities for improvement, recommendations for management changes, etc. 

(Attach additional sheets, if necessary) 

.^\. 

tJua. XZ,^. f-LetZtAtf 7-vdJt, .A^<t/u^^ cTMfy^'ty4&f 

%T<ru.U*t x-v>. ecu, .* ,-VAd-U C<-t 

c^r Ticket^Z*J7-t d4.j j , ^Ca^Z7^' •^t^'t y «•> 2fe£<A*? .1*1 1th/^tdlsty 

y / SPq^44 -902 

264 
Supplemental Studies — Missouri River Basin Study 

XIV MISSOURI RIVER BASIN STUDIES 

Editor's Note: The Missouri River Basin Studies procedures described below have been 

summarized from the Handbookfor the Resource Inventory of Lands for Field Personnel 

Engaged in Missouri River Basin Studies, published by the U.S. Department of the Interior, 

Bureau of Land Management, Denver, Colorado^ revised May 1963. 

A. Introduction 

These studies involved Range Site inventories in portions of Montana and Wyoming within 

the Missouri River Basin. The method identified range sites based on the productive capabilities of the sites. Each site was assigned a condition class based on a comparison of the 

existing plant community with the original (or potential) plant community. Range Condition 

represented the degree to which the present plant composition (an ocular estimate to the 

nearest 5 percent of annual growth, by weight, of the species making up the plant community) 

departed from that of the native potential plant community. 

B. Species Categories 

Plant species were segregated by their response to grazing use into three categories: 

Decreaser, Increaser, arid Invader plants. 

1. Decreasers 

Decreasers were those plants of the potential plant community that dwindle in relative 

abundance with continued moderately heavy to heavy grazing use, drought, wrong 

. season of use, wrong class of livestock, poor water distribution, etc. The total percent 

composition of all of these species is tallied in determining the range condition class. 

2. Increasers 

Increasers were those plants of the original plant community that occupy more space and 

hence increase as the decreaser plants drop out. Increaser plants are handled by the 

percent composition in which they normally occurred in the original plant community. 

Their present abundance up to, but not exceeding, this maximum was added to the total 

already derived from all of the decreasers. 

3. Invaders 

Invaders were those plants not part of the potential plant community. No invader was 

counted in determining the range condition class. 

C. Range Condition 

The percent composition (dry weight) for each species was determined by ocular estimate and 

recorded on the Range Site & Condition Write-up Form (Illustration 54). This same worksheet could then be used to determine the present Range Condition by comparing the degree 

265 
Supplemental Studies — Missouri River Basin Study 

of similarity between the existing vegetation with the potential plant community. The 

potential plant community for each range site could then be found on a series of guides for 

determining range condition. These Technicians' Guides (Illustration 55) list the increaser 

species and the percent composition (air dry weight) that each decreaser species contributes 

to the potential (climax) plant community for each range site . 

On this basis, there are four range condition classes. 

Percent of Present Composition 

Condition Class that is Potential for the Site 

Excellent 75-100 

Good 50-75 

Fair 25-50 

Poor 0-25 

D. Stocking Rate 

The Technicians' Guides also have recommended stocking rates for various parts of the 

region and different precipitation zones. These guides listed the key vegetation species and 

percent dry weight (composition) in the climax community for each range site. 

For further details of this survey method, refer to Handbook for the Resource Inventory of 

Lands for Field Personnel Engaged in Missouri River Basin Studies, as published by the U.S. 

Department of the Interior, Bureau of Land Management, Denver, Colorado, revised May 

1963; also refer to "Condition and Management of Range Land Based on Quantitative 

Ecology" by E.J. Dyksterhuis, Journal of Range Management., Vol. 3, No. 3, July 1949. 

266 
Illustration 54 

Ranee Site & Condition Write-up 


(Ecological Site Hethod) 


Date 

Plot No.^_ .Examiner, 

T R Sec 

Present Composition 

Species i 

Plants are listed by to 

symbol (See Sec IX ­

Plant List) as they < 


are encountered. to 

Relative abundance is P 


estimated by increments g 

of 5*. Oi 

p


3 


O 


to 

O' 


to

*i 

o 


to 

0 

c* 


• 


Total 100* 


CPO 840)81 

P.M. 

Climax 

% Usable 

Percentage of 


each plant species 


as it would be 


encountered in the 


original veget­


ation (See Guide 


Appendix A) 


% Condition 

AUM»s/Acre 

Field Writeup Sheet 

267 

Illustration 55 Page 1 

t> ' 

c 

N

ol 

S 

E TMc\j J (WW H n o 

ft> 

fc.

° P ti ^ a> i/\-j cn<M .-i 

u 

0> 

^ 

?l X +> 

t J 

X

c m

^ 

<- r^-

c 

+4 r-vo -* ro >-H 

3 

r v 4 i 

, 5 

j* o co ^r. -a- <y 8 1 

° 

£ iS "* 

«> t** ~ o

«• M 4) 3 

3^ 

o w. ^ x: OJ C\J *-i •-« cr 

<a t- u c •-•* p •-• O tr\ 

M PJ W H H a<• V 

111 

3 a) • :|ol i> co • 

IN 

S i 

l £ 

gg "8 U o| v 3SI§A -

*• o *J ftd 

•?.§i 

) 3 0 

i it < -J > c wl o 

269 
Illustration 55 Page 2 

U :-:n22:;33333333222222 — *. 0) P> 

ES 

I t 

ft «sea»a«.*R*«s*^*KSR8.88.g J. 

V 

11 5j4j!3!!i!34J4J4J4!322233 s| © t5£ 

<J •<

j t

 C\IPJC\JcCtCcO<\,t\»<\j<MCw.~IHHHHHrlrl H

 assasssssacsKR^K*^*.®^

 I T3 

 | : 

15

0)

* M

o 

-

* 

CO 

? * > 

O 

3 

S § 

! 

2 

•3 

V 

XX 

+» 

u 

o 

E 

o 

c 

CD 

5 

x : 

• o 

£ 

** x: 

o• H 

* 

5 

• 

'•2 

| 

83 

11 

• H CO 

3 « 

SS •o w 

4 ft) 

o •»> 

£ 9 

i l a 6 ca 

x : a 

r-t (d 

•8 •ai 

p 

! ! 

?a 

1 I 

s t 

I! 

ii 

..•3 

°5 

j l

jjjj

Jfc

| |

| | l |

^ If 

 gsaagsasss^^S^SSS

 e.?s*s8Es»ass33aasaa8

 ogssaBs.sssaqaa^aasag 

 os asssa assssa*sa»**RS 

 o8S»8»R»33«KS»eBSSRS8. 

 Jg 

 |.­

II 

II I

§

 * 

 S) 

•s 

3 

««> 

1 

V 

V 

fc<s 

n 

T* 

- D 

JC 

o 

•r* 

« 

w 

r H 

• H 

O 

n 

5 

a 

& 

§ 

« 

>. . .s+ J 

•S 

< j 

12 

e 

5 

Oil 

cf* 

•a 

fc. 

o 

o 

o 

*ft) 

• o • 

SS 

ft­ 10 

- ­t • 

r-t 

£ - H 

u o 

• H » 

i . r H 

- P ­ O 

63 

• i 

. &s • a fc. 

u « 

o x> 

£3 

&s 

ss 

a.. 

i& 

s 

x t a> 

a 

rt § 

"Si ffl - o 

fc. CD 

o 

fc. 3 

o -c X I eg • J fc, 

o • 

(9 - H <M 

fc. >»X ) 

o +> c 

v. ^ a u « * H 

r-J 8 " 01 <S CJ 41 

u to 

M w 

© C 

* i - H - C 

• H S O 

(0 U *9 

E CD 

x ; u «-. 

• P o 

n 

• H e c 

^ - .,-1 CD 

* • o 

^ e « 

Oo Cf ot a o o 

«0 s 6 0 

33 § X ! U 

t o u 

fif 

Bfl Si 

>« 

§ 

& 

03 

& 

ft) 

4 

S

O 

M a

o• o 

t 

•3 

§i 

­ A 

^s 

i)ft 

P-Si 

!tfl •.• H 

Tl« -

• H Si 

* > 3

t-< ofc, ft>

3 « • >

01 

+ * 

• H 

CO 

o 

c 

o 

• H 

• J 

U 

cd 

CO 

ej

in

CD

oi

*• >

P

to

CD

fi 

e 

a ) 

^3 

£ 

£ 

n 

n 

o 

o 

 - o 

a 

c 

T4 

n 

«fc. 

u 

a 

1! 

1! 

ft 

d co 

JJ" o « 

0) u 

ftii 

•32 

>

3 »

-S 

** CO 

CO 

fc. 

ft) 

V 

c• M 

& 

c 

i 

fc, 

s

£ 

+ J 

cu 

e 

o 

«CO 

• H 

x ; 

CJ 

>H 

x: 

fc. 

o- P 

a' 

- S 

8 * 

sa *i» 

m7? 

31 

5 5 

PH t 

H C 

c 

i 

>£ 

I 

•3 

* i 

c«l 

* J 

s.IS € 

270 
Illustration 55 Page 3 

i 

s ?,K m 

fi : i n 

• H ftj iftoiHH O V o 

0 CI 

c8) •£ a u 

V i 

(0 • ~ -3- CO C\J . ­ it* 

* J 

o c 01 u £ M. 

r 

o 

c 

D «/* "-• 

4-1 t~ r- -.TJ -a "-> --i 

CO g 8 X 5 F w O CO vO - * C\J 

°18 

r, 

V c 

*>«! ^ & 

o <

N• - i <a 

a « a to «i & it C • •"* O uTM* O **"• 

H CM ftl H i-l 

> u •t oi 

els 

to 

I

 a 

cy z 

*H 

S2 

fig > Gu i 2 C 

o 

c olio 

271 
Illustration 55 Page 4 

6 Q CM0*CJfMCufM^^»H»^F-t^H*-«»H»-<O0OOO<O^Af y 5 II 

t 

O 4 U

 V n o

QJ

 L

 o 

. I «? a-

o c & U • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • o « 1 

VH O 

«< « i-t »H €M \f\ U 

o £S x: S2 a.

 o o 

tn I I ^ 5 1 ^-. -P d 

t, g ••••••••••••••••••• • o as J-S a> I 

° &

1 u 

3§ 

J8 s P o

I 1: *-. x» 

+ J - § s o p 

§5 « £ © T! •3S 8 -< ^-t<M(*\^V/\vOI^«COsOr-t(M'* , l-3V/\vOf^OC>0\ 0 (-. O C h M U 

L, • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • JC i = X) -H -r4 <0

•< iu *J a SS) • H • H flu

 O• x *• : *

3

>) -

«

H 

J 

•

*

o

* - o » & ©

z-° i , d -a a> J= fe i 

c 

a •-* 4 

V <fl <d 3

TJ * J £ £ « § ° t , g • • .

 •••• • o > OS +J a) »c O •< (\ICJ(M{\iCM(\r\j(\i(M(ViniHHHHiHrlHH H EC "O § fetf u & • H 

0) C « x: 

S 5 o

B5 ^ CO • i TJ «J -H

m 

1 S3 Z 

S & | 3 £ c s . * o o

 -^ K s« ••

 < .Hc\j»^.ji/'\'Or-eo&»o,Hi\j'*'»_3Vi*or-coo\ o O ** •s $3 i-O 6 s -rg4 S J _3 -3 -3 _r» -3 -3 -3 -3 ^ U"

v U\ u\ \n \A \f* w v\ u\ 05 <a . «-£. • ?

T3 « s (0 9 *« •••• • • • « • • a.x: V 

u u •< © fir 

o x: • H « U *> cm 

© 

a £^ 1 c c ** •s u O •> * S V o a« V4 C (fcn

. 5 ^S Q ­ • H >

 £s f .

* J 

* o

H 

g 3 x* X t 0 ^ el S Q tr>i/\»*\cjOcor—vO-3<""<<Vi-<C)^Oscof-NO^ ^ C- H E I J 3 *» x: h -P 

o a *» V X I 

^* x> c +» L x; •^i -a <

 w O (0 « a 

o a u j = n !-. »

 +> J = fe J3 ^^ U

 C O —*r-4 

-• < r-*ryr^_3\As0r-C00^OrHfV'^-3V\s0r-C00\ O -rt £*»

n o o c *e « J i °$ r-l « U • • « • • • • • • • • • • • • • • * • • <»(-». - J a V 

< O U •rj .5 •s * s C M 1 If •3 

"a _ S ­ £ S Q Q f-%"> o r^-^^( H O c^f " r^ iH r-" \ Cs' O f ^ C Li O V

9 OUNi^Mf^HH-^Hi- l • • • • • • • • • 3 © I I •H

bo

 b 

v E . o +> © a (H C a o 

E S

©

x 

5 fi o « 

a o w) 5J v a 

E OOOOOOCCO-HrHi-t^r^t-t^H-H^HiHC j ,-( « 

^ rl a a

3 HI H H 

i s « O V 

3 . » c 

•J •(-• •"= ^3- Sg n L <t X! +J 

'i 

AS 

Si , 

If oS3*8SS^S8Sa«aR«^S3 5! 

II C w. H i S I u » II 

ft"

&­

| 3 | | o«8aa8aa»*333«*s«SPSS 1 1 ; ii 

x: u m _.

n s ,11 in o 1 '> i 

s V 0 s ** 

| | l | o»Sa8»R«33a«S»SK8!8RS8. * J a> IS 1 r " = 

i> n 

c

4 «« 

< 

u + * 

T3 c >£ 

5 5 & I £> S C c ^•3 t ID O Q) «H ! 4) O 3 • H 

O

O *^

£ S 

 C I 3 

1 « II © h C o a 

S-«. V o « 

o * J u 

V s

c o o a; a. £ 3 u o o 

272 
Illustration 55 Page 5 

1a 

a 

£ al 

O 

3 •8 

V 

4-* 

V 

o 

1* 

aa. 

nr4

o 

*J 

V 

8 O 

V -* 

1

c 

as 

». 

*" 

5 <d

^ 

K 

t r 

(\J 

S 

« 

.r\ 

o 

u 

8 

V 

N 

l / \ l ^ IT* 

cy cy >-t •-* o 

ir\ ^ r^»CVj r-* 

( A ^ I A 

h\0 4 M H 

oco\o-* cy 

O - j ON-S 

CU C\J <-i .-i a» 

WWH H 

* ! 

+J 

i)

« • * (0 

(8 V

8? -H 

<* V 1­

j; 

4) 

• * 

fi 

x 

* 

1

5 

_ 

x: 

o 

M 

J : 

H Ox C­ -o • X > -| 41 § 5

t_>l K c j= »H 

to § "5 o 

3 •o t,

 • O o a> j j P cd c

5 **6 «J 0) CO V 41 C 

1 en o 

c o c 3 a) * 3 ~ .C <0 (A a v> ,>- W 0) 0) V 3 - H 4> (0 52 3 :» ta 

P *> (0 a) .c c l o tt) *J .-t > > 

273 
Illustration 55 Page 6 

|i 2222222222222:3222222 —


 _ ; ; _ ;

£ si 33322333SS3222222222


i %

I |i 233325S53SS5S222SS5J 


| j a.8[5ss*E8^aaaaa»aftaa8 

„3 os s s assss ssq a qassrft as 

| | o8**8aaaaaasa*aR«^RS 

1 * | o3*.8.s»s.asi:RR**333««(K8 

i l H osa»8aR«s3s»s*e»8SRa8 

§1 °^S28$SWS3SKSISgKS££X8 

f 

| 

 s, 


4 

1*

3 d 

IE 

© o 

> X 

r-4 O 

TM e? 

§ 1 

1 f 

~ e 

5 5 

g 

3 | § 

1 5 

8 & 

to* 

g 

! 

S

•3 

g 

a 

•H

IS 

t 

O u 

£ 

3 

& IN 

n

i i 

S2 

8 a 

£ o ?*

1' 

3! 

1 -p

i 5

3 2 

O o 

•H CM 

n 3 H 

« u 5 

« «*< 

5Js 

£ S 

a s I 

s ^ ?

n 

H 

i! 

1

« i 

s 

•3 if i 

s i o 

a 

i

c 

& 

i !i a 

5 -3 

£ 

u 11 <H IP 3 

fl 3 S 5 *S 

8 o 

•at S j 

g.5 ft3 

gg * to I 2 U 

3 3 

11 

3? 

II 

» IS E .X 

C9 U 

n 

;t 3S 

I I a. I I * 

a o 

 •* .1 > I 5 £ •8 

I

O u 

Q> p . O & 

<£l2 $ 

274 
Illustration 55 Page 7 

IIIIII ;HI U to <-t > 

o PC Illl^llllsllllllii $** 

275 
Illustration 55 Page 8 

£P 

I: .d8S«»8e8eR«KS^«K«S8.88^ 

i 

SI 55352!3!3!21333334!32!4!43 

Q q 

ff 33S353sss««aa*»a«RR*^ 

§1 33333555555552252555 

ii 

I 

i! 

1 

r

1

H 

S 

b 

l 

a 

r

o

5 

o 

* 

£ 

• 

3 

•g 

3 

r 

« 

§ 

o 

Si t> 

s 

5 

• * 

B 

a 

«

& 

2 1

H 

» 

X I 

•» 

h 

6 

.5 

1i 

o 

* •> 

"3 

t 

§ 

a 

I

«H 

« 

•H 

S 

5 

1 

J D a 

r 

§5 

2 3 •H 

•X3 TJ 

3 

Sfl aS o 

O 

9 a 

sTJ (s O 

4 » t> 

o ** 

11 

3 & 

5 ­3 

S£ 

!° i 

j j §«R»8S3Sfls*5j:223S555 

S3

d

| g

a 6

 * a 

s 

3 

~S ° ° s sas« s.8. s a q a a;*** as a a 

St 

V 0} 

&) M 

£.§ 

O 

5 . 

I. II ;: 

I |[3 oS^5a.J3a.S*RRR*«S|3S««RS. | 3 

I I

I

 l |

 fo 

J 8

 o»a^8»R«SS««^*8B8»8a§ 

ow 338SRS338}RSSg}e88gK8 

1 I 

8 

13 1 c o o 

: 1 1 

8 

§

•H 

>* 

S 

S, 5 M l r-4 

ll 1 

1 i 

« o •p 

§ 2 

P CO 

b 3

21

as° ­ * » 9)

u a

!> s

 ­

* 

g

g CO 

o 

 a. 

I 

276 
Supplemental Studies — Photographic Utilization 

XV. PHOTOGRAPHIC UTILIZATION 

METHOD 

Editor's Note: The Photographic Utilization Method described below is based on original 

BLM Manual Release 4-31, Part 4412.22B7f, dated 12/12/68. 

A. Introduction 

The Photographic Utilization Method is a means for using comparison photographs to judge 

utilization on California Mediterranean annual. 

B. Objective 

The objective is to match the observed current utilization of the range against photographs 

depicting various degrees of use. 

1. Density 

Density, or the number of plants per unit area, will vary widely from area to area and 

will influence the judgement of the examiner. 

2. Making Observations 

The Examiner often will find that on-the-ground observations of a site do not match any 

particular picture because of differences in stand density and vigor, two factors which v 

vary on every site. The amount of use (number of seedheads remaining, amount of 

residue, etc.), however, will.be in proportion to the amount shown on one of the pictures, 

irrespective of density and vigor. For example, two sites may have densities of 20 and 

80 plants per square foot; both have been utilized 50 percent. Each stand, regardless of 

the density, will have a proportionate amount of litter left on the ground, number of 

seedheads remaining, etc. The pictures are used to show these proportionate relationships; sites will seldom look exactly like the photograph. 

3. Degree of Utilization 

Judge the degree of utilization, not stand density and vigor. 

C. California Mediterranean Annual Ranges 

Standards forjudging utilization are based on the current year's forage that remains on the 

ground at the end of the grazing period. Degrees of utilization from light to very close are 

depicted in photographs 1 through 6 (Illustration 56). Photographs 7 through 10 show 

contrasting use on swales, hillsides, and underbrush. Word descriptions accompany each 

photograph. 
Supplemental Studies — Photographic Utilization 

1. Area of Use 

This is specific for California Mediterranean annual ranges. The California State 

Director may require more detailed and refined photographic standards for each climatic 

region within the state. 

2. Advantages aed Liramitatioims 

The method is easy to use and requires little training. 

3. Eqeapment Needed 

Photographic equipment and Form 4412-21 (Illustration 57). 

4. Use of Standards 

See Illustration 56 for descriptions and photographs of degree of forage utilization on 

California annual ranges. 

a. Judge utilization of the range after grazing and prior to the beginning of the new 

growing season. 

b. Stratify the allotment or pasture on the basis of topography or a broad soils grouping 

(such as gravelly, clay, alluvium, etc). 

c. Prepare an allotment map showing boundaries of each stratum so that utilization 

ratings in subsequent years can be collected from the same strata. Utilization ratings 

by strata will assist in identification of distribution problems. 

d. Compare each range unit or stratum with photographs 1 through 6 and decide which 

photograph most nearly depicts the proportionate relationships. 

e. Examine the range more closely for specific indicators of degree of use (photographs 7 through 10) and, if necessary, adjust the first estimate. 

f. Rate the use of each stratum and the range as a whole by using the photographs and 

accompanying descriptions. Record the rating on Form 4412-21 (Illustration 57). 
Illustrationi-56: Rage 1 

Photograph No. 1 (V ery 1 light) . 375653 

"Photograph No. 2 (Light) 

279 
Illustration 56 Page 2 

Photograph No. 3 (Moderately light) 387986 


Photograph No.. 4 (Moderate) 
 387988 


280 

Illustration 56 Page 3 

Photograph No. $ (Close) 
 387978 


Photograph Wo. 6 (Very close) 
 387961 


281 

Illustratio

n 56 Page 4 

o 

co x ! 

CO CD -P 

CD H X* £ '£ a, •H co CO £ CO uo 

H 

(D 

ucd S

H•H 

X! 

g« co 

XI - p 

g CD O H ° 

bO 

S

O cd CO 

£ 

•H £ CD 

•H 

co xJ 

G £ 

•rH 

•H cd 

CD CD CO 

O XI 

H X! H 

•<-) - p 

O -P H 

X) 

Xi -H 

03 

CO 

£ a Xi 

CD •H 

C 

X I 

cd a> 

o 

•H CD X i 

CO co bO-P 

X) 

rH cd aJ 

G 

rH 

u c

cd •H CD O O 

Xi bO' M 

CO CD 

CD 

aJ a) c3 

<H 

X I U X! X ! 

-P -P -P £ £ CD (0 C X i CD U 

O -P tsl CD 

d 

cd bO 

•H 

CO <* U & CO O bO O 

CD 0 H co H CD ^ 

3 

co o cj 

X i 

? O 1) 

bO 

o -P CD 

& 

2 

U CO JH 

•r\ 

CD CD bO 

- P 

£

PH > 

co X> O -H CO 

cd 

CD ^ h

l fl 

U N 

PH - H 

- p ocJ crt 

C 

u

fn ° B

o 

bO O CO CD 

o =*fc f-. CD c l CD -P X l -P CD cd ci -H 

£>-X> ?H cd CD CD O CO X) ^O CO 

o 

cd g=*f

c 3 

X! 

6 cd CO o s X i CD box ! CD PH bO C P,X t cd cd •H cd 

?-< 

fn -P fn !>s 

bO O 

cd bOi H 

O «M O O CD 

-P 

•H -P CO 

O CD 

X) o o

x

X i 

C X! rH : 

a* E-< 

•H P, O

282 
Illustration 56 Page 5 

1 

CO CD 

CD 

x: H -P 

t •' c 

CO • •H 

•5. •

"X! 

§ 

- to ". - P nj 

CO 

H 

CD ' 

r-H. 

a. CD orH s CO CO 

cd . CD 

x: CO -P 

CD 

T> 

c •ri ­ o CO 

rH .T> •" rH CD T3 •H 

tSl CD 

x: aj co . U 3 

c b0 

o 3 rH 

CD 0) CO p CO 

3 CM O 

CD ^H CD 

CO H o 

o CO o rH •H O 

O -P 

CD 

| bO C • cd CD 00 

U CD 

O X I 

• CH 

o CO 

s CD nj U X ! X! o

o 6 CD . 

off C cd 

fn no: 

o-P 

C 

o CD CD • .c x:. x; cu IS -P 

283 
Illustration 56 Page 6 

Photograph No. 9 - Light use around and under shrubs. 


Light or no use around and under shrubs as shown here is one indication 


that the range has not been grazed closely. Compare with photograph f?10. 


284 

Illustration 56 Page 7 


Photograph No. 10 - Close use in relatively.inaccessible places. 


When livestock graze closely under shrubs and around and between the 


limbs and tangled masses of smaller branches of dead trees and bushes 


lying on the ground, it is an-indication that the range has been too 


heavily grazed. 


285 

Illustration 57 

4412 - PHYSICAL RESOURCE STUDIES 


RANGE UTILIZATION 


PHOTOGRAPHIC METHODS 

Porta 4412-21 UNITED STATES (September 1960) DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR 

BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT 

RANGE UTILIZATION 

PHOTOGRAPHIC METHODS 

District A" / _ . , , Da,e f *^ . -/, /Y66 

Planning Unit (,)c / J /)/' « O, £ X Eaaminer , / ^ £,' /J/cs Ay 

Allotment g , - £ tf££ ^// ^ Class of stock /"i „ _ & ,s //*> > 

Pastur c e ^ / Season of use •?// /•. - / / 

Grazing Management System >/s& /^C A*A £ iY ~* Ac •/•/} t'C * 

PHOTO NUMBER AND UTILIZATION INDEX 

19 6.-7 19 c i 19 4. '/ 19 ft. \*li.­

JZ 3 ¥ V 3 

M &c. /Au'j+tu s 3 J y /

' Clc^tj. /i<Srtt7-yi,U'i^-ci c 4 ' / • / •

z 3 y y 3 

3 V j • S 

/ 

/ 3 3 j * </ 

'4r*<jf~ S-CLlt i.'-tCisf •/*/&/' <f / / y S~ 

Average Utilization Indes (allotment) 3.3 J.Y S.6 y.^ '/•* Remarks Sec iti. ii^CZ^-t., '*f~, (i-^t. /*C'C -v-»*^/f i -l/'i . <•!»-»••• •*' 

/1k9' - ic£r*-yjti.: /7&/ «*tt<v)>Wl« « ••OtlCf » .^ru/ L*.T £? .-*•«»» 3^3. « UTILIZATION RATING SCALe 

/£' * Xf/«'.; >l>ta ' <-t-e-.\.- /"»-•«•<« * ^ ' Vor» liaw I. 

. ^ . y X' v. A) r: n^T7d *t '/ Liaht 21 Rotor to 

/ ^ J«.±r" / Unrt-lJS. Ci»y* ( 1**-*'1 '/• a £ , nttl , Iiah , . 3 phot^opto 

' .-• / • ~ J , ,. ( Uoderote 4 ( for t /ni.,u(A-'^ l-iJ*t *~{—f /C yji " ^ •"<-U<2u Slct7l.(U *.^(CJi-'f . *^CIooo sjdcocripllon 

.- y ' ^ / Very clooo 6 

Si-cZ7i.nA 7-CM ^<—/• /t-' /J+if' <-/­

286 
Supplemental Studies 

XVI. SOIL SURFACE FACTOR 

Editor's Note: The procedures for determining a Soil Surface Factor rating were summarized from BLM Manual 7322 - WATERSHED CONSERVATION AND DEVELOPMENT 

SYSTEM, release 7-47, dated 3/20/72. 

A. Introduction 

Procedures for collecting Soil Surface Factors (SSFs) were a small part of the Watershed 

Conservation and Development inventories conducted in the 1970s and the Soil-Vegetation 

Inventory Method in the late 70s and early 80s. The SSF values were also used to determine 

the erosion condition classes described in BLM Manual 7317.12. 

The SSF procedures are no longer recognized as an approved resource data collection 

procedure. 

B. Criteria 

The SSF, as evaluated by completing Form 7310-12 (Illustration 58), is an expression of 

current erosion activity. Seven categories of surface features are considered by the field 

observer while examining the area represented by each transect. Both wind and water erosion 

are considered, as applicable, to each category. The seven surface feature categories are soil 

movement, surface litter, surface rock, pedestalling, rills, flowpatterns, and gullies. In the 

process of determining the SSF, the field observer must consider the features as they represent the total area of the vegetative subtype, not just the area near the transect or soil pit. SSF 

values may provide an indication of changes in erosion activity over time under various 

intensities of use. 

1

Illustration 58 Page 1 

DETERMINATION OF EROSION CONDITION CLASS 


SOIL SURFACE FACTORS 


—r 

: - • ; ' •• ^ J. ' • o .

:

. X ^ 

1 '• 

: 

1: S 

•: jj . * 

<< •'SI' :'.r-~­ jj

a > . — 3 ^ ' 3 -•-il V • S l • -• il'" •!• ' c ^ ieS: "• 

o & 

# : t: w: '

f ";J 

^ - ** i • 

^ r :

.Sfir ;i;l •• ^.n '-H" •Ifr" ; •* .m?

^ i l i ; vr< , v si. • i l -.- - 4 If) Is SI';'' *; • ^ * 

c — ,r- .So' 2 ••5 2?- ­

; j o 

r.- = is . - i ! •• '. i 

^! — • C

 * 2 *

 n O V W: 

• a" : -• = 

•r­ «

£ e

 2 *u  • - 15 '-= - 1 ! •=• =

? E 3 . '.*•' 5 e • ' 2 • e -° • !I f 

$ "2 ° ..ir . t .11. 2 

8 5 s * 

-'". '- •m -m I" •

4

 :li , •. - « -i 

.'fS'i.i ' V M i ,'• • ^ • . - ; . i. .• .* § i

:is i'i O. O­

• = 1 1:: 1.1: c - : Hi V 

I§9 ife X 

> ^ Is - I-- 2 ; 11 :• t

*. o 

• i " •r ill . D 

.2 w H I 0 •'• 

' r •lif:1 l i 

X » 2.C ST3 • - C O O Ofi a — -f • to j=i! J5 

f - *- ^ u ^ \ 

N CLASS. . 

SOIL SURFACE FACTI 

- o z = .. 

is 

7310-12 . UNITED STATES •1 1970) DEPARTMENT OF THE IN' 

BUREAU OF LAND MANA

elC

ETERMINATION OF EROSION CO 

r \ J8 •' 

* •--'• • . 

'I 

I' i .-S * li:­

.' r : f ­

1.. • H."\ 

J"

o ­ > 

o 

E s. -" »* •V 

i. 

to 

I:

'-•' 2f 

ill 

li!

- • 2. 

:• f- >> 

a illi-o ! L. 

•"•Si 

s . 

*. S ' 

i"° —; ; ! * 7 ;

* s 

, -i ; : \S ei ' ! ; ^ i - .1! - <NHj.-.:

. o •

is 

o ­ o ­ ? ,

'" ' •J ­

•s .ss -

O > «K

•is 9

y i •' I- " 

a ' • . ! . ! " 

4.'> b « 0 • 

" '. - » _. ?..- - . o y

e !••-- • !•* - •II - z 5 ' O I ; E o " 1 - -° P 

* U o 1"- !r: < 1 '; '« '". 

3 s • in­ < t J.N3W3AOW H3ii. n lN3W3AV d omnv i SN»3i.XV d .5] E i STII H • ssmn o • iios . 30VJM0 S .Noisoaa .-S303 d ..­ moid >s 

OQ 

^ .*

.,». . , , , . . 

• 

289 

Illustratio

n 58 Page 2 

B 5 4 2 c 

" a 

^r •v ^ ^ ^ i n i n 8 

SB 

III u: 

X c 

P 

111 

J 

a. 

s 

< 

X HI 

± o 

S 

> 

oo 

o» o o 

00 o o 

g s . D £ 

a ­ ~ 

Z ad > • > > 

01 

> 

(A 4) 

> • 

(0 4) 

> > 

S l ! a. 

V T 1 V V i n 1 

r* 

I i; i j 

1 1 

2" 

E .2! 0 o s t­bl 00 a* 1 o OO o 1 

" = = a. s

< 

X 

III > 

«2 f Ji! 

l a 

& 

s >• 

1 1 

10 

at 

> 

•J) 

V 

> 

ta 4) 

>-

o 

z 

• 

2 H SB V 

^ v V m i n 8 

S < 

U! 

Z 

c 

III 

OH r- o 

O0 o t o 

00 

0. 

< 

8* X > u Z u s 

>• S >• 

>• 

V) 

> 

U) 41 > 

to 4) 

» » -. 2 

a 

3 HI (­

i 

1Qfi 

e 

W 

c 

-1 

< 

o 

I -

! 

1 1 Cft 4> 4) 

a 

(A 

CD 

a 

l u. 

C/l 

o 

i 

1 

2.5 

C J3 

290 
Supplemental Studies — Photo Plot Method 

XVII. PHOTO PLOT METHOD 

Editor's Note: The Photo Plot Method procedures were transcribed from the original text in 

BLM Technical Reference 4400-4; Rangeland Monitoring - Trend Studies, dated May 1985. 

A. General Description 

The Photo Plot Method includes taking a close-up photograph of either a 3- x 3-foot plot or a 

5- x 5-foot plot and a general-view photograph of the study site. In addition, measurements 

and/or estimates are made to provide quantitative data concerning vegetation characteristics 

that may or may not be seen in the photographs. The following indicators of trend are monitored 

with this method: 

1. Foliar and basal cover (including litter) 

2. Composition (by cover) 

3. Reproduction of key species 

4. Density 

B. Areas of Use 

This method has wide applicability and is suited for use with grasses, forbs, and shrubs. 

C. Advantages and Limitations 

This method provides both a photographic record and a measurement or estimate of the vegetation cover and composition. Depending on the density of the vegetation, it may take considerable time to measure and estimate the vegetation on the plot. Limitations of this method 

are the extremely small area sampled, the difficulty in identifying seedlings, and the variation 

in the data collected among examiners. 

D. Equipment 

• 1. Study Location and Documentation Data form (see Illustration 59) 

2. Trend Study Data - Photo Plot Method form (see Illustration 60) 

3. Photo Identification Label (see Illustration 61) 

4. Frame to delineate the 3- x 3-foot or 5- x 5-foot plots (see Illustrations 62 and 63) 

5. Square-foot gridded frame with 16 equal divisions (see Illustration 62) 

6. Stakes: 3/4-or 1-inch angle iron not less than 16 inches long 

7. Hammer 

8. Permanent yellow or orange spray paint 

9. Camera: 35-mm with a 28-mm wide-angle lens 

10. Exposure meter (if camera is not equipped with one) 

291 
Supplemental Studies — Photo Plot Method 

11. Film 

12. Tripod (optional) 

13. Small step ladder (for 5- x 5-foot photo plots) 

14. Black felt-tip pen 

15. Measuring tape calibrated in tenths of inches 

16. Steel post 

17. Post driver 

18. Compass 

Eo Training 

Examiners must be able to identify plant species. They must know how measurements and 

estimates on the plots are collected and recorded. The accuracy of the data depends on how 

well examiners are trained and on their ability to measure or estimate cover. 

E Establishing Plots 

Careful establishment of plots is a critical element in obtaining meaningful data. 

1. Site Selection 

Stratify the allotment, wildlife habitat area, herd management area, watershed area, or 

other designated management area; select the key area(s) and key species; and determine 

the number, size, and location of the plots. 

2. Number of Plots 

Establish one plot on each key area; establish more if needed. 

3. Plot Size and Shape 

Use a 3- x 3-foot plot in herbaceous vegetation and a 5- x 5-foot plot in shrub vegetation. 

If the herbaceous vegetation is sparse, the 5- x 5-foot plot may be used. 

a. Plot Frame -3-x 3-foot Rods are used to divide the 3-x 3-foot frame into nine 

equal square-foot sections. A square-foot frame gridded into 16 equal units can be 

used to obtain more precise data. Each of these grid units represents 0.7 percent of 

the area of a 3- x 3-foot plot (see Illustration 62). 

b. Plot Frame -5-x 5-foot. The 5- x 5-foot frame is supported above the vegetation by 

six telescoping legs. A gridded overlay frame, 1 foot wide and 5 feet long, divides 

the plot frame into smaller units. The overlay frame is constructed of welding rod 

and is gridded into 1/16-square-foot units. The plot frame is marked at 1-foot intervals on two parallel sides so that the gridded overlay frame can be positioned at 1­

foot intervals across the plot (see Illustration 63). 

292 
Supplemental Studies — Photo Plot Method 

4. Plot Location 

a. Permanently mark plots with angle-iron stakes driven into the ground at two diagonal 

corners of the plots (see Illustration 64). 

b. Paint the stakes with bright-colored permanent spray paint (yellow or orange) to aid 

in relocation. Repaint these stakes when subsequent readings are made. 

5. Reference Post or Point 

Permanently mark the location of each plot by means of a reference post (steel post) 

placed about 100 feet from the plot. Record the bearing and distance from the post to the 

plot. An alternative is to select a reference point, such as a prominent natural or physical 

feature, and record the bearing and distance from that point to the plot. If a post is used, : 

it should be tagged to indicate that it marks the location of a monitoring study established 

by the Bureau of Land Management and that it should not be disturbed. 

6. Plot Identification 

Number plots for proper identification to. ensure that the data collected can be positively 

associated with specific sites on the ground (see Illustration 65). 

7. Plot Documentation 

Document the location, size, and other pertinent information concerning the plot on the 

Study Location and Documentation Data Form (see Illustration 59). Plot the precise 

location of the photo plots on detailed maps and/or aerial photos. 

G. Taking Photographs 

Take close-up photographs of the plot, as well as the general-view photographs, before making 

any measurements or estimates. 

H. Sampling Process 

Count seedlings and mature plants by species and determine vegetation cover and composition by measurement and/or estimation. Record the data on the Trend Study Data - Photo 

Plot Method form (see Illustration 60). When repeat measurements or estimates are made, 

follow the same process used in making the initial measurements or estimates. In addition to 

collecting the specific studies data, general observations should be made of the study sites. 

1. Number of Plants 

Count and record on the form the number of seedlings and mature perennial plants, by 

species, within the plot. In dense vegetation, the plants may be counted on a randomly 

selected small portion of the plot and converted to the total for the plot. The form 

293 
Supplemental Studies — Photo Plot Method 

includes space for a plot diagram where the examiner can sketch in all the plants or just 

the key species. 

2. Measuring Cover 

Record basal and foliar cover in square inches on the form. Measurements are made 

where the growth form is a bunch type and clearly defined, such as occurs with bluebunch wheatgrass (Agropyron spicatum) or Indian ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides). 

Measure vegetation in its natural state, not "bunched" or "compressed" (see Illustration 

66). Most plant species grow in the form of an ellipse rather than a circle. Therefore, 

basal area measurements of bunchgrass and foliar cover measurements of forbs and 

shrubs will consist of two measurements—the long and short diameters. Area is calculated by using the formula, Area =rcab, where a and b are lengths of major and minor 

radii. (Radii are obtained by taking half of the measured diameters.) 

a. Grasses. Measure basal area of bunchgrasses to the nearest 1/10 inch at 1 inch 

above the soil surface. Measure any dead or vacant central portions of a grass clump 

and subtract this from the total if the portion is larger than 10 percent of the plant 

basal area. ~ 

b. Forbs and Shrubs. Measure foliar cover of forbs and shrubs, projected to the 

ground surface as viewed from directly above, if they are clearcut in outline. 

Subtract dead or vacant central portions exceeding 10 percent of the plant cover. For 

example, a shrub measures 14 x 20 inches but an area in the center, 5x 8 inches, is 

"open." The area of the shrub is: 

A = Jiab - Tta'b' = (3.14)(7)(10)-(3.14)(2.5)(4) = 188 square inches. 

3. Estimating Cover 

Estimates are made on litter and plants that are difficult to measure, i.e., creeping or 

decumbent forms. Estimations are more rapid than measurements but not as sensitive 

because small changes in plant size may not be readily detected. 

a. Making Estimates Using the 3- x 3-foot Plot. Place the square-foot gridded frame 

over each square foot of the plot (see Illustration 62). Observe the vegetation cover 

from directly above the grid and count the number of 1/16-square-foot units of basal 

or foliar cover by species. Do this for each species on the plot. Record the number 

of units of basal or foliar cover by species on the form. If the observed cover does 

not fill any specific 1/16-square-foot unit, estimate the percent of a unit that is filled. 

Estimate the amount of litter cover in the same manner. 

b. Making Estimates Using the 5- x 5-foot Plot. Place the 1- x 5-foot gridded frame 

over a 1- x 5-foot section of the plot frame (see Illustration 63). Observe the vegetation cover and count the number of 1/16-square-foot units of basal or foliar cover by 

species in the same manner as described for making estimates using the 3- x 3-foot 

plot (see preceding section). Advance the gridded frame a foot at a time until the 

294 
Supplemental Studies—Photo Plot Method 

plot has been covered. Litter cover and cover by understory species can be estimated 

with the 1-square-foot griddedframe if desired. 

c. Estimating Cover of Stoloniferous Grasses. Generally, the cover for stolohiferous 

grasses can be estimated because they form a dense closed sod cover. Determine 

basal ground cover, as viewed through the 1/16-square-foot units of the grid. 

d. Estimating Cover of Forbs and Shrubs. Record the foliar cover of forbs and shrubs 

as viewed through the small grids. Do not count gridsfilled with dead portions of 

the plants. 

4. Combining Measurements and Estimates 

Measurements and estimates are used if both clearly defined and irregularly shaped 

plants occur in a plot. For example, a plot contains a very irregular-shaped shrub, two or 

three bunchgrasses, and a thin cover of rhizomatous grasses. Estimate the foliar cover of 

the shrub and the basal area of the rhizomatous grasses, but measure the basal area of the 

bunchgrasses. . 

a. Rhizomatous Grasses. Rhizomatous grasses are difficult to measure or estimate. 

Where only a few stems are present, count and record the number. Where the entire 

plot contains widely spaced stems, count the stems in randomly selected grids and 

then convert this to a total number for the plot. Count stems in at least 10 percent of 

the grids that contain the species. Convert these to basal area. Measure the area of 

15 to 20 stems (or some other unit) and multiply by the total number. [Editor's note: 

To make calculations easy, measure the number of stems in one square inch and then 

divide the total number of stems in the plot by the number of stems in the 1 -squareinch area to determine the number of square inches.] For example, if a plot contains 

1,000 stems of western wheatgrass (Agropyron smithii) and 20 stems have an area of 

one square inch, the area of this species on the plot is 50 square inches. 

b. Annual Grasses. For annual grasses, use the same procedure used for rhizomatous 

grasses (see preceding section). Estimate, as nearly as possible, the basal cover of 

the plants and not the foliar cover. 

I. Calculations 

Calculate the trend index by totalling the following factors and recording them on the Trend 

Study Data - Photo Plot Method Form (see Illustration 60). 

1. Composition 

The composition factor is the percentage that the key species make up of the total plant 

composition on the plot. 

295 
Supplemental Studies —Photo Plot Method 

2. Vegetation Cover 

The vegetation cover factor is the percent ground cover provided by all live vegetation 

(basal cover of grasses plus foliar cover of forbs and shrubs) on the plot. 

3. Seedlings 

The seedlings factor is the total number of seedlings of the key species on the plot. 

4. Litter 

The litter factor is the percentage of the plot area that is covered by litter. 

296 
Illustration 59, page 1 

United States Department of the Interior Page^of _ 

Bureau of Land Management 

Study Location & Documentation Data 

Study Method !Study Number 

Allotment Name & Number . Pasture • 

District Resource Area 

Ecological Site Plant Community 

Date Established Established by (Name) Map Reference 

Elevation Slope Exposure Aerial Photo Reference . 

Township .. Range .. Section 1/4 1/4 1/4 

' Scale: ' inches 

Location equals one mile 

Key Species 

. • 

•'•'.. '

1 2 3 

Distance and bearing between reference post or reference point and the transect' • * 

location stake, beginning of transect, or plot 

-, . . • ; • ' ' 

Distance and bearing between location stake and bearing stake 

Transect Bearing Vertical Distance Between Ground & Aligned Tape 

Length of Transect Plot/Frame Size 

Sampling Interval Total Number of Samples 

Notes (Description of study location, diagram of transect/plot layout, description of photo points, etc. If more 

space is needed, use reverse side or another page.) 

Note: Depending on the study method, fill in the blocks that apply when a study is established. This 

documentation enables the examiners to conduct follow-up studies in a consistant manner to provide 

comparable data for analysis, interpretation, and evaluation. 

297 
Illustration 59, page 2 

Page. .of. United States Department of the Interior 

Bureau of Land Management 

Study Location & Documentation Data 

Study Method Study Number 

£>ceLe&e**py}tVG °7r>ena£ 03S°- 2?7Ul- oS -OS 

Allotment Name & Number Pasture £sp&n - //037 ££g&&p ^r&&& 

District Resource Area //OUIG. JLoSr Afo&fpsrcn/w 

Ecological Site 6 / — Plant Community AKTR 2, -AGSP- P&Mg1

3 

Date Established Established by (Name) Map Reference 

Elevation Slope Exposure Aerial Photo Reference 

&30O ffa:/ JrazS^ 

Township Range Section 1/4 1/4 1/4 

3S Z7U & rV\*} SB" Aft*/ Scale: & inches 

Location equals one mile 

Key Species 

1 AGSP 2 POA/& 3 

Distance and bearing between reference post or reference point and the transect 

location stake, beginning of transect, or plot 

Jke /sa^scc/ /oca//on s-/<x/e /s /Oo/K So&tMf/WJ of/Ac 

fcfsrcnc^ pes/. ^/«r«ic e pas/is 3's*>;/cs AX*>S¥'a/\&<gefiG>p ffieservti>t. 

Distance and bearing between location stake and bearing stake /02, £*s/ a/ /3S' 

Transect Bearing Vertical Distance Between Ground & Aligned Tape 

3 snc/jcs 

Length of Transect Plot/Frame Size /oo /£«• / 20x.SOc*n - £ cover c/etss^s 

Sampling Interval £*ery 2M 6*s'»ninq *4H*e. t'f*>»+ mark or> /AcTotal Number of Samples SO S>.rtrS Ater* ntemfk a/a*** Mc r*oA4 sStJef of***.*. •/» tape. 

Notes (Description of study location, diagram of transect/plot layout, description of photo points, etc. If more 

space is needed, use reverse side or another page.) 

75fcc ?^ye> pho/» p/o-/s cxre toCae/^-^ ex/ 3? ^naf S3 fe^e/ OS/O^G •J^C "/ape. 

C/0S*S'np pAo/es ar<?- •/<*£<?„ fro** 4h< norfbeas/ siafe cf/Av pho/o p/ofs. 

Note: Depending on the study method, fill in the blocks that apply when a study is established. This 

documentation enables the examiners to conduct follow-up studies in a consistant manner to provide 

comparable data for analysis, interpretation, and evaluation. 

298 
Study Number 

United States Department of the Interior

Bureau of Land Management 

Trend Study Data 

Photo Plot Method 

Date Examiner 

Illustration 60, page 1 

Page — o f 

Allotment Name & Number 

Species 

3

S 

o 

•e 

(a) 

.Q 

5 

JZ 

to 

Pasture 

Part I—Plot data by square foot section 

11 

(b) 

i 

(c) 

l 

CO 

(d) 

» 

(e) 

if 

(b) 

I 

(c) 

2 

c 

CO 

(d) 

U 

(e) 

II 

(b) 

. 

i 

(c) 

c 

co 

(d) 

If 

(e) (b) 

i 

(c) 

I 

co 

(d) 

II 

(e) 

• 

II 

(b) 

-

-

I 

(c) 

c 

CO 

(d) 

II 

(e) 

LIT! •ER 

• • 

11 m ; 1 | S i n < li l 

LITI rER ', , 

LITTER ' ' 1 

, S i 

LIT! •ER ^ m P, 

.*;«.« • & * < *l> 

. 

%:* • ;*?-*' ,,^. 

: 

< m 

* 

Li n •ER m 

s

m '' '"'•• ' 

* 

299 

M m&?' JIJ m\m m 
Illustration 60, page 2 

Page. .of. 

Part II—Summary of Plot Data ' Part III—Plot Diagram 

List by 

Species 

(a) 

Grasses 

(Basal Cover) 

Number 

Mature 

Plants 

(b) 

Seedlings 

(c) 

1/16 

Sq. Ft. Units 

(estimate) 

(d) 

Total 

Sq. In. (measure­ ment) 

(e) 

Percent 

Cover 

(0 

Composition 

(g) 

__

I

 JI

I

4

I

 I 

_LI 

I 

II 

. 1 

L 

1 

1 

4­

1 

I I l 

i i 

Grass Totals ! i' i 

Forbs 

(Foliar Cover) "1 "l 1 

1 1 |F,l..'irwmmLllii.«iu....i.,'!. n.

Part IV—Trend Index Summary 

Composition, Key Species 

(percent) 

Forb Totals Cover, Live Vegetation 

Shrubs (percent) (Foliar Cover) 

Seedlings, Key Species 

(number) 

Litter, Plot Total 

(percent) Shrub Totals 

Veg. Totals TOT£' 

Litter 

Specific Instruetions 

(Items not listed are self-explanatory) 

Part I—Plot Data by Square Foot Section 

Record data for each 1' x 1' section of the plot 

Column (a) - Use the standard plant code (Scientific Symbol). Indicate which species are the key species. 

Column (b) & (c) - Enter number 

Column (d) - Estimate -1/16 sq. feet units covered by species. 

Column (e) - Measure - Total sq. inches covered by species. 

Note: Use either estimate or measurement for each species. Do not use both. 

Total - Total data for each species and enter in Part II. 

Part in—Summary of Plot Data 

To convert Measured sq. inches (Column (e)) .._ 

Column (f) - measurement data - i —^— x 100 = percent cover 

to percent cover

 1296 (3' x 31

 plot) or 3600 (51 x 5' plot) 

To convert 

- estimate data - Multiply Column (d) by 0.7 (3' x 3" plot) or 0.25 (5' x 5' plot) = percent cover 

to percent cover 

To calculate % Cover (Column (f)) of each species Column (g) - composition 

x 100 = percent composition 

Total % vegetation cover (ofplot in Column (f)) 

300 

iMIu.. •* 
Illustration 60, page 3 

United States Department of the Interior Page_i_of-2_ 

Bureau of Land Management 

Trend Study Data 

Photo Plot Method 

Study Number Date Examiner 

3VS ~OZ U/ - 11 -02. St/ 2JsA 

Allotment Name & Number Pasture 

3$/*e£ 2?c*//<- - /z 3V 

Part 1—Plot data by sq uare foot section 

CO 

CO 

s 

A6SPVose 

Species 

o u. 

(a) 

^ ( M 

r * 1 

PtfUO 

.o 

3 

CO 

il 

(b) 

2 

2. 

/ 

i 

(c) 

& 

c 

3 

CD 

(d) 

.t 

.2 

. / 

Lis­

(e) 

If 

(b) 

/ 

^ 

I 

(c) 

£2 

c 

3 

CD 

(d) 

•y 

.5" 

. / 

CO CD 

CO 0 

(e) 

2 CO 

3 C 

ca JS 

(b) 

I 

(c) 

CO 

c 

co 11 

isL 

U 

.(b) 

-

1 

CO 

c 

CD 

CD 

CO 

(c) 

1 

CD 

(d) 

"Ay/ « 

^*A: e 

cr co 

(0 CD 

Co 0 

££ 

(e) /*•< 

H 

(b) 

7 

CO 

CD 

c 

CD 

CD 

W 

(c) 

c 

-3 

co 

(d) 

II 

(e) 

pose

sif/y 

FexoA6SP 

LITTER 

PHHO 

, _t. 

7 

-

t 

y.3 

. 6 

. 2 

. 2 

H 

/ 

.8 

.s 

./ 

-_ 

2 . 

2 

2 

. / 

. 3 

..f 

.V 

* 

M 

.< 

fl i 

pose 

F£XD 

A&SP 

Li n 

PMO 

'ER 

ARARS 

z 

3 

" . 7 

. 2 

V./ 

* 

— 

-

-

/ 

.1 

T 

<H 

T 

a 

2 

1 

.e 

.8 

. 6 

. / 

* 

Y 

. • f§§ 

Li n •ER 

r 

C 

' ­

-/), 

s+ 

<r/< 

»* « 

tf? 

T** » 1 

1 

. 3 

k 

Vi, /%/ 

w»» 

»* • 

a. 

. 6 ' ' - l i 

Li n "ER TV; '<'> 47 _ <, ',/">< '-, "'" ' " ' '. ­* '; „ t • ­ • . :.'-'' 

_,

. 

r .V,<,v' '

 f s 

-J < • " LITTER ; tfe •m , £& m -•;. - ' • id 

301 
Illustration 60, page 4 

Page_i£-of. 

Part II—Summary of Plot Data 

PartJII—Plot Diagram 

Number 1/16 Total Percent 

Sq. Ft. Sq. In. 

List by Mature Seed­ Units (measure­ Compo­ Species Plants lings (estimate) ment) Cover sition if —3—— — —L —/< • • - — — L— — — 

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (0 (g) 

Grasses 

(Basal Cover) _ jyzkJS- |-_ - 4 

A<SSP (A* S£) * 0.9 .£3 8? 

POSB «&£? Sol 29.0 

SIHY 

i 2. o>& o3S 47 I i 

F£XD fay&.) 3 / </7 3.29 43.9 I I I 

Grass Totals 3*7 / 92 CW &6.0 I I I 

Forbs 

(Foliar Cover) i i i i 8 

PMO & /.<& .98 /3°i Part IV—Trend Index Summary 

Composition, Key Species 

(percent) 52. 3 

Forb Totals £ AY ,98 /&./ Cover, Live Vegetation 

Shrubs (percent) %*/9 (Foliar Cover) 

ATZA&& I CL/ .07 . ? Seedlings, Key Species 

(number) 1 

Litter, Plot Total 

(percent) Shrub Totals t o°t .07 .9 8.8Z 

Veg. Totals 

7.V9 /oo.o •mrr/n 

Litter /Z.€> e.&z 6 T . 6 / 

Specific Instructions 

Pos F L-/Wi,l « (Items not listed are self-explanatory) _ 

Part I—Plot Data by Square Foot Section © 5 4 A U c Record data for each 1' x 1' section of the plot 

Column (a) - Use the standard plant code (Scientific Symbol). Indicate which species are the key species. 

Column (b) & (c) - Enter number 

Column (d) - Estimate-1/16 sq. feet units covered by species. 

Column (e) - Measure - Total sq. inches covered by species. 

Note: Use either estimate or measurement for each species. Do not use both. 

Total - Total data for each species and enter in Part II. 

Part II—Summary of Plot Data 

To convert Measured sq. inches (Column (e)) Column (f) - measurement data x 100 = percent cover 

1296 (3' x 3' plot) or 3600 (5' x 5" plot) to percent cover 

To convert 

- estimate data Multiply Column (d) by 0.7 (3' x 3' plot) or 0.25 (5' x 5' plot) = percent cover 

to percent cover 

To calculate % Cover (Column (f)) of each species Column (g) - composition 

x 100 = percent composition Total % vegetation cover (of plot in Column (f)) 

302 
Illustration 61, page 1 

LU O 

< o 

DC < Q. 

303 
Illustration 61, page 2 

8 

f 

50 

§

f 

* 

N 

2 

LU 8

< o 

Q 

4 • 

<5 

O 

<1% 

DC < Q. 

304 
Rangeland Monitoring—Trend Studies 

Photo Plot Frame - 3- x 3-foot 

7ZJ ---3'0"­

(inside) -V0"-i- VO" •••••' -1'0"-~ 

...Hinge Hinge--.. 

•> = m ....-1/4" Round or'square 

steel rod 

1/8° Removable 

steel rods 

JL L 

Rod stabilizers (see detail) • 

Spot weld all ••- ­

•-- * ~1'0". —^ 

t --1/4"Rods 

;b . > 

1/8" Rods 

•«... 1/8° Steel rod 

(removable) " 

Rod stabilizer Gridded overlay frame for 

1/4" Steel rod use with 3'x3' plot frame. 

Each grid 1/16 sq. ft. (3"x3") 

DETAIL 

305 
Illustration 63 

Rangeland Monitoring—Trend Studies 

Photo Plot Frame=§° x §• 

Gridded overlay frame fits—... 

over 5'x5' plot frame 

Hooks fit over 5'x5" frame—' 

1/4" 0 Steel rod • 

1/8° (J) Steel rod3°x3" Subdivisions (1/16 sq. ft.)­

3/4 Light tubing-"" 

Telescoping legs ­

(see detail) 

r 

I I^Vftfl 2" 

rh i ** Set screws 

: 20" 

Lk.1 

18" DETAIL 

306 
Rangeland Monitoring 

Permanent Photo Plot Location 

(3- x 3-foot, 5- x 5-foot, or 1- x 1-meter outline) 

angle iron Camera Point—Permanent Stake stake (locate on north side of plot) 

/ 

Paint the stakes with bright-colored permanent spray paint 

(yellow or orange) to aid in relocation. Repaint these stakes 

when subsequent photographs are taken. 

307 
Illustration 65, page 1 

RANGELAND MONITORING/TREND STUDIESSTUDY AND PHOTOGRAPH IDENTIFICATION 

Ao Numbering Studies 

Studies should be numbered to assure positive identification. These numbers can also be 

used to identify photographs. Following are three alternative schemes for numbering studies: 

1. Numbering Scheme 1 

Consecutive numbers may be assigned to studies within an allotment. For example, 

Mooncreek #1 and Mooncreek #2 would be studies Number 1 and 2 within the 

Mooncreek Allotment. A disadvantage to using the names of allotments in a numbering 

scheme is that these names can, and often do, change. 

2. Numbering Scheme 2 

Studies may be numbered based on their location within a township, range, and section. 

A 10-character number can be assigned in the following manner: 

a. The first three characters are the township (03S), the second three are the range A 

(27W), the next two are the section (08), and the last two are simply a series number TM 

(01) assigned to a study based on the number of studies located within a section. 

b. The numbers for studies located in Section 8 would be 03S-27W-08-01, 03S-27W08-02, and so forth. 

c. Depending on the local situation, this scheme can be modified by adding characters to the 

code where there are fractional townships or ranges, where there are more than 99 sec­

tions/tracts within a township, and/or where there is more than one public land survey 

principal meridian and baseline within the area of jurisdiction. 

3. Numbering Scheme 3 

Studies may be numbered based on their location relative to the initial point of survey 

(principal meridian and baseline governing public land survey). 

a. Under this scheme, the first character is a letter assigned to a principal meridian and 

baseline quadrant. Using the initial point of the survey as the center point, the north­

east quadrant (townships located to the north and east of the initial point) is coded 

308 
Illustration 65, page 2 

"A". The northwest, southwest, and southeast quadrants are coded "B", "C", and 

"D", respectively. For example: 

Salt Lake Meridian 

(initial point) 

b. The next characters are the township number (3,16, etc.) followed by the range number 

(7, 32, etc.) and the section number (8, 21, etc.). 

c. The next three characters are used to identify the subdivisions within a section (down 

to 10 acres) in which a study is located. These subdivisions have letter designations . 

as follows: 

•B 

b | a 

—a— c | d 

d. The last characters) is (are) simply a series number (1, 2, 3,.. . 10, 11, etc.) 

assigned to a study based on the number of studies located within the smallest subdivision. 

e. For example, Studies 1 and 2 located in the SE1/4NE1/4NW1/4 of Section 8, T3S, 

R2IE would be numbered (D-3-21)8Bad-l and (D-3-21)8Bad-2. 

f. Depending on the local situation, this scheme can be modified by adding characters 

to the code where there are fractional townships or ranges, where there are more than 

99 sections/tracts within a township, and/or where there is more than one public land 

survey principal meridian and baseline within the area of jurisdiction. 

309 
Illustration 65, page 3 

B. Identifying Photographs 

In most cases, the number that has been assigned to a study is the number used to identify the 

photographs associated with that study. Following is a description of three labels that can be 

used to include the study number in the photographs: 

1. Label 1 

The Photo Identification Label included as Appendix C can be copied and used to identi­

fy photographs. This label provides space for documenting the date, number, and loca­

tion (Resource Area, allotment, and pasture) of a study. A large black felt-tip marking 

pen should be used to print the information on the label. 

2. Label 2 

A slotted sign board with a black felt background and movable white plastic letters can 

be used as a photo identification label. Room permitting, the user may include any infor­

mation desired on such a label. A 9- x 12-inch board with slots running lengthwise at a 

spacing of 1/4-inch and 1-1/2-inch white letters makes a highly visible label for most 

photographs. 

3. Label 3 ^^ 

A placard on which identifying characteristics can be entered can be developed to meet 

local field needs. The placard can be constructed of heavy white cardboard on which 

such things as Date, "T" (township), "R" (range), Section Number, etc., are preprinted. 

A heavy mylar film can be placed over the preprinted placard. The specific identifying 

information can be handprinted on the mylar with a heavy grease pencil or other readily 

removable, highly visible, marking material. After taking the desired photographs, the 

mylar can be wiped clean and the placard reused for other photographs. A more perma­

nent placard can be constructed of plywood and painted enamel white. The grease pencil 

markings can be wiped from the enameled surface and the placard reused for other pho­

tographs. Caution must be exercised in the placement of the placard to prevent glare 

from the mylar or enameled surface. 

NOTE - Labels can be placed flat on the ground immediately adjacent to photo plots for 

close-up photographs. 

- Labels can be placed in an upright position in the foreground of general view 

photographs. 

310 
Rangeland Monitoring—Trend Studies 

Diagrammatic Sketches of Vegetation Growth Forms 

and Measurement Techniques 

311 

Supplemental Studies — Community Structure Analysis 

XVIII. COMMUNITY STRUCTURE 

ANALYSIS 

Editor's Note: The Community Structure Analysis procedures were transcribed from the 

original text from BLM Technical Reference 4400-4, RangelandMonitoring - Trend Studies, 

dated May 1985: 

A. General Description * 

The Community Structure Analysis (CSA) Method assigns an "importance value" to each, 

species to describe its status in the community. This value is based on relative coyer, relative 

density, and relative frequency. A 100-point pace transect is run to collect the vegetation 

data Close-up and general-view photographs should be used with this method. The following 

indicators of trend are monitored with this method: 

1. Foliar cover (including litter) 

2. Density 

3. Frequency . 

4. Composition by foliar cover and density 

B. Areas,bf Use 

This method is recommended for grass-shrub vegetation types. 

C. Advantages and Limitations 

The method is easy to use and interpret. Because the importance is based on "relative" rather 

than " absolute" values, it is less affected by estimator bias. The relative position of a plant 

species in the community is essentially undisturbed by year-to-year differences in rainfall, as 

density and frequency tend to compensate for fluctuations in production. 

D. Equipment 

1. Study Location and Documentation Data form (see Illustration 59) , 

2. Trend Study Data - Community Structure Analysis Method-Foliar Cover Data 

form (see Illustration 67) 

3. Trend Study Data'.- Community Structure Analysis Method-Density and 

Frequency Data form (see Illustration 68) 

4. Trend Study Data - Community Structure Analysis Method-Summary form 

. (see Illustration 69) 

5. Photo Identification Label (see Illustration 61) 

313 
Supplemental Studies — Community Structure Analysis 

6. Frame to delineate the 3- x 3-foot photo plots 

7. Stakes: 3/4- or 1-inch angle iron not less than 16 inches long 

8. Hammer 

9. Permanent yellow or orange spray paint 

10. Camera: 35-mm with a 28-mm wide-angle lens 

11. Exposure meter (if camera is not equipped with one) 

12. Film 

13. Tripod (optional) 

14. Black felt-tip pen 

15. Microplot frame: 5x10 centimeters divided into quarters 

16. Circular plot frame: 9.6 square feet or smaller if vegetation is dense 

17. Tally counter (optional) 

18. Compass 

19. Steel post 

20. Post driver 

E« Training 

The accuracy of the data depends on the training and ability of the examiners. 

1. Examiners must be able to identify the plant species. 

2. Examiners must know how to collect foliar cover data. 

3. Examiners should be consistent in determining the number of individual 

plants. For most plant species, individuals are readily distinguished. However, most 

communities contain some species that reproduce vegetatively. Determination of 

what constitutes a plant unit in such cases is somewhat arbitrary. For rhizomatous 

grasses such as western wheatgrass (Agropyron smithii), each culm group can be 

visualized as an actual or potential plant unit, as can rooted stoloniferous units of 

such species as vine mesquite (Panicum obtusum). Mat or sod-forming plants such 

as blue grama (Bouteloua gracilis) or alkali sacaton (Sporobolus airoides) usually 

start growth as small, distinct clumps but may spread to become plants that are a 

yard or more in diameter. As this occurs, they tend to fragment into more-or-less separate units, and it is these separate units that should be counted as actual or potential 

individuals. 

4. Examiners must be familiar with the operation of the camera equipment. 

F. Establishing Transects 

Careful establishment of transacts is a critical element in obtaining meaningful data. 

1. Site Selection 

Stratify the allotment, wildlife habitat area, herd management area, watershed area, or 

other designated management area; select the key area(s) and key species; and determine 

the number, length, and location of the transacts. 

314 
Supplemental Studies — Community Structure Analysis 

2. Number of TYansects 

Establish one transect on each key area; establish more if needed. 

3. Transect Layout 

a.J Drive an angle iron location stake into the ground to permanently mark the location 

of each transect (see Illustration 70). 

b. At the location stake, determine the transect bearing and select a prominent distant, 

landmark such as a peak, rocky point, etc., that can be used as the transect bearing 

point. Drive an angle iron stake into the ground at a point 6 feet from the location 

stake along the transect bearing (see Illustration 70). , : 

c. Paint the transect location and transect bearing stakes with bright-colored permanent spray paint (yellow or orange) to aid in relocation. Repaint these stakes when 

subsequent readings are made. 

4. Reference Post or Point ~ ; <••.'•" 

Permanently mark the location of each transect by means of a reference post (steel post) 

placed about 100 feet from the transect location stake. Record the bearing and distance 

from the post to the transect location stake. An alternative is to select a reference point, 

such as a prominent natural of physical feature, and record the bearing and distance from 

that point to the transect location stake. If a post is used, it should be tagged to indicate ' 

that it marks the location of a monitoring study established by the Bureau of Land 

Management and that it should not be disturbed. 

5. Transect Identification 

Number transacts for proper identification to ensure that the data collected can be positively, 

associated with specific sites on the ground (see Illustration 65). 

6. Transect Documentation 

Document the location, starting point, bearing, sampling interval, and other pertinent 

information concerning the transect on the Study Location and Documentation Data form 

(see Illustration 59). Plot the precise location of the transacts on detailed maps and/or 

aerial photos. . ; 

G. Taking Photographs 

Take close-up photographs of the photo plot, as well as the general-view photographs, before 

making any measurements or estimates. 

315 
Supplemental Studies — Community Structure Analysis 

H. Sampling Process 

The studies data are collected by species along a 100-point pace transect. Microplots are read 

at each point and a 9.6-square-foot, or other size, circular plot is read at each tenth microplot. 

Data are recorded on the Trend Study Data - Community Structure Analysis Method"—Foliar 

Cover Data form and the Trend Study Data - Community Structure Analysis Method— 

Density and Frequency Data form (see Illustrations 67 and 68). When the transacts are 

reread, follow the same process that was used when they were established. In addition to collecting the specific studies data, general observations should be made of the study sites. 

1. Collecting Cover Data 

a. Beginning at one pace from the transect bearing stake along the transect bearing, collect cover data with a 5- x 10-cm microplot frame at every pace (every alternate 

step), or at some other prescribed interval, along the transect for a total of 100 samples (see Illustration 70). Center the microplot frame in front of the toe. 

b. With each placement of the microplot frame, estimate the foliar coverage of each 

perennial plant species. Record the dot count tally for each species by cover class on 

the Trend Study Data - Community Structure Analysis Method—Foliar Cover Data 

form (see Illustration 67). Foliar coverage data may also be collected for annual plant 

species. The cover classes are as follows: 

Cover Class Raege of Coverage Midpoint of Range 

1 1-5% 2.5% 

2 5-25% 15.0% 

3 25-50% 37.5% 

4 50-75% 62.5% 

5 75-95% 85.0% 

6 95-100% 97.5% 

c. Alternative cover classes can be used with this method. When transacts are reread, 

use the same cover classes used when the studies were established. An example of a 

ten-cover-class system is as follows: 

Cover Class Range of Coverage Midpoint of Range 

1 1-5% 2.5% 

2 5-12.5% 8.75% 

3 12.5-25% 18.75% 

4 25-37.5% 31.25% 

5 37.5-50% 43.75% 

6 50-62.5% 56.25% 

7 62.5-75% 68.75% 

8 75-87.5% 81.25% 

9 87.5-95% 91.25% 

10 95-100% 97.5% 

316 
Supplemental Studies — Community Structure Analysis 

d. Estimate the undisturbed foliar cover for grasses, forbs, and shrubs. Consider all 

individuals of a plant species in the microplot as a unit. All other kinds of plants are 

ignored as each plant species is considered. The plants do not have to be rooted in 

the plot. 

e. The 5- x 10-cm microplot frame is divided into fourths to assist in estimation. 

f. Overlapping foliar cover is included in the cover estimates by species; therefore, 

total cover may exceed 100 percent. Total cover may not reflect actual ground cover. 

g. Estimate and record the cover for litter (loose plant material or standing dead material) 

and rock (1/2 inch in diameter and larger). 

2. Collecting Density and Frequency Data 

a. At each tenth microplot, collect density data with a 9.6-square-foot circular plot (see 

Illustration 70). Center the circular plot frame in front of the toe. A total of ten samples is collected. Depending on the density of the vegetation, a smaller size circular 

plot may be used. Record the number of plants by species for all perennial grasses, 

forbs, and shrubs on the Trend Study Data - Community Structure Analysis 

Method—Density and Frequency Data form (see Illustration 68). Density and 

frequency data may also be collected for annual plant species. 

b. Count by species all plants rooted within the plot. The majority of the base of the 

plant must be in the plot to be counted. 

I. Calculations 

1. Cover 

Calculate the percent cover by species as follows: 

a. Convert the dot count for each species in each cover class to the number of plots that 

included that species in that cover class. 

b. Multiply this value times the midpoint of the appropriate cover class. 

c. Total the products for all cover classes by species. , 

d. Divide the sum by the total number of microplots sampled on the transect (usually 

100). 

e. Record the percent cover by species on the Trend Study Data - Community Structure 

Analysis Method—Foliar Cover Data form and on the Trend Study Data ­

Community Structure Analysis Method—Summary form (see Illustrations 67 and 69). 

317 
Supplemental Studies — Community Structure Analysis 

2. Density 

Calculate the density for each plant species by adding the number of plants of the species 

counted in the 10 circular plots. Record the totals on the Trend Study Data - Community 

Structure Analysis Method—Density and Frequency Data form and on the Trend Study Data ­

Community Structure Analysis Method—Summary form (see Illustrations 68 and 69). 

3. Frequency 

Calculate the percent frequency for each plant species by dividing the number of circular 

plots in which the species occurred by the total number of circular plots sampled (usually 10) 

and multiplying the value by 100. Record the percent frequency on the Trend Study Data ­

Community Structure Analysis Method—Density and Frequency Data form and on the Trend 

Study Data - Community Structure Analysis Method—Summary form (see Illustrations 68 

and 69). 

4. Importance Value 

The importance value of a species is a composite score of the relative cover, relative density, 

and relative frequency; it represents the relative importance of that species in the plant community. Calculate the relative values by dividing the individual species values for cover, 

density, and frequency, by the total values for these data categories for all species. Plant 

species can be ranked by importance value. The total community has an importance value of 

3.00. The importance value is calculated and recorded on the Trend Study Data ­

Community Structure Analysis Method—Summary form. The percent plant cover, litter 

cover, rock cover, and bare ground are also recorded on this form (see Illustration 69). 

318 
Illustration 67, page 1 

* ^ TM . 

. 1 

c t­ 1 

<D $ i 1 

2 8 

<»; 

£ 0 o , - 1 ­ • ;:• _ -..- <- .. 

,-; , - ;- .-^ •- • t-;-'; - /": , '~~ ^i . 

~ v~" "~~ -.^i I *,*' L '\ l 1 

-- : "-?'H. ". --; , -;

"i ! :

 ob"; •** 

-. - "3 ..".- •

* - —"•' '-- -* -, * : ; * , ' 

^ 

j . I 8 3 CO £ • 

o 

-CO.O) 

. ^ ^ "^. ." - 7 ­ I

> 

CO ; ' ' • .-•-- ; • 

i ~ • - • ­ ?co.w 

c ;

 '

_--',-." .*• - - ',"' „ 

, ' > - •O) O S * 3 •• 

/

O 

- i ^ 'i^~ 

fi 

O 

; .'•••- ' '',."."• ' 

_ ', •C ,' \ \':-'-' : • ' ' * 8 • ^ - v -

/

 ? A ''­ - -,:- ;- '" -~' 

\ , -, O ! -o"* in 7 O. "

Q 

-; \" - ;'; :"'-. 3 "J ' 7 

2 

: -.- , I

10 

Q 4 t 

V . CO f » ­ CD C 1 . O 3 

E fe ">' O

o 3 <D O) O Z > 1 

1

co 

' 08 O

o I ms

- o 

CD Q

p

t E 

CO 

^^^^m 

Z 

c f In % CD 

COS • * E C O g S 3 

< IK 

O 

• 

' 

O • 

lysi

o

s Method1 Stud

yData 

TJ (0 

Q , 

c '' -

'', c 

I - 0) co In * 3 

U 

3 3 s C 

CD 

3 

(0 C O

CD O 

O 

CO o 

X u CM Q 

E 

C 

c CM LU 3 o CO

Q. CO 

' C , ' i " ~ m

E /*, ^^^ en * ,. . 

•D 

' *, <~ ' ' 

'' f. •r " 5 0 E "•• ^

o 

CNl'V * 

* ' • ' '

i * -, . . ~ i, 

r CM o 

CO co -—' d O s5 •3 "; 

"•>'' . • , , '• ' 8 r o - ',' 

•- ' '.J " ''", : • , o

O ; .' •' , I ', •V,;.; ,; - ': / '"' '•'•'• ' + •':''' ' 

o - ', • ffl '&* Q s ', 

,!, ' ' '"'•'• : 

1

 •', r / " i 

0B i \ c' ' , '»i','' . : • '/ 

i"'1/, ':•?•'( *c , .. 

, . / *

a ,'', ,'.,'. ', ' '• , "' 0) o '•'' ';T-" ';'<' " •,"•:' , . ";'', '. *:.' v ,"'' "',•''' J, + 

c c CM

0) o CO 

a CO *- 4 t 

TJ CO 

ntofl 

ment

co fn S O CO " i 

CO CM C i^»i k (\t 

O _c co 3 

0> 0> gjin O 

ro Dep 

igco CD 

o co O T^-

• o O

o Q • 

' 

H I 

; 

dM 

15. 

CD O g> 

0> CD • 

t«

J | 

E 

3 co "2 °­ CD £ ®

'5 oO 3 

Z. ® Z Al

fl) fl) >, <u £ •D JC Q. 

^= 8 ^ 

3 J9 Q. CD <f> S C O CO O cr CD - O 

319 a. 

II 

c
• • 

• 

• • 

• • 

Illustration 67, page 2 m ili'l',1

 1-. L" "M3 

0) 

C >­ CO 9) 

CO N J ^ DL N , 0 \ %» <*> V, 

*»*. • v . ^ «^ =»o ^* 

rend 

id

y Data 

s MethodO 

£0 1 

CO **> * 

3 c

£

* 

3 

CO 

CO 

en CO O) 

w 

CD CO c 

• 0 O S * 3 'co 

O

O 4 

CD 

0 

O 0 

O •°§ CD 

\ : 

CO 

CO 3 * • * (0 «*^ 

Q w ^-» % 1 

1 *-

w £. 5". i - V co 2 . 

s 1 O 55 3

 s i - i n O o 5 * CD CD > • (0 z

 ^ 6 jo oa o f- Q 

,o CO

 1 « u. E ' 1 

n\ 

CO 

**«»> «*«, °>to 

5 59 ^t in * ** 

° vi C OjjS 3

< O 

5 f- O 

s 

« • • • » Q 

$

Ana 

1 - 0) «t) to) 05 ^ H C^o "0 

• co UJ" * 5 

• » ^ 

3 

* • > O * 

3

i_ CO C \ O3S C 

3 

CO CO 0 O

O 

% g "• ' a *9 CO glO O 9 • • ID X 0

c UJ CM Q . E CM « • 

• • t • • Q © 0 • 1: O CO 3 8 

Q . CO 

T3 CO 

E 

E W 

S O 

% 1 * w <Q t>» t^ NO ^» ON CM CO % 

CM * » o & •^C M **> o — co CO — " n CO 0 CO c « 3 

O

055 O 

c n + 

B 

* O CO 

6 • • • H 

1: n 8 1: t3 • • • • D 

Q c S * ^ +

0 . 

• « *s^» o» O CO 

rm. Q . CO * 

03 

SJ «5 k) cl ^h 

S iS 

nt of th

e Interior 

ment 

Jo" 1 " S O 

CO CM c 

3

O 

n 

u

B 

•— 2§ ITJ) O n 

• • 0> CD 

£ co 

 co n

O O

O ^9, H H is 1: B a

• • • 

1: H • • • • i" 

fLan 

S CO 

Q -O 

a> * ates one ISP 

£ £ 

.c 

O CO 5 S\ O) '75 

c* * fll) \o «i CO tn J s _ CO CO £M 

O CD CO ^ Q . tf 

9 25 

V) P O O Al _ J 

CD 

# CD CO 5 i ^ 5 S Vk ) 0. .^ -$ Q. k 3 

O

8

* to V) «l ^ V) ^

VJ ^ ^ = 

CO X 3 CO Q . 

320 

53 

11 
Illustration 68, page 1 

United States Department of the Interior

 Page:— "~~ 

Bureau of Land Management 

Trend Study Data 

Community Structure Analysis Method—Density and Frequency Data 

Study Number Date Examiner 

Allotment Name & Number Pasture 

Plant Species 

' 

1 2 3 4 

Plot Number 

5 6 

s 

7 8 9 10 

Density 

(Total) 

Frequency 

/ ' 

. 

. 

', . ' / 

• " 

• 

', 

Density = Total number of plants by species recorded for all ten plots. Notes (Use other side or another page) 

Frequency (%) = No. of plots in which a species occurs x 10 0 

321 
Illustration 68, page 2 

Page_£_of_Z- United States Department of the interior 

Bureau of Land Management 

Trend Study Data 

Community Structure Analysis Method—Density and Frequency Data 

Study Number 

CUBA # / 

Date 

?//s/89 

Examiner 

Allotment Name & Number Pasture 

CUBA ­ 293/ 

Plant Species 

1 2 3 4 

Plot Number 

5 6 7 8 9 10 

Density 

(Total) 

Frequency 

(%) 

&TJA ? 3 - 7 z 3" 7 - JE .6 36 SO 

SPAT / - 3 - 9 — — / ^ - / / SO 

*ItfY — Z 9 / 3 2 S S 3 - 3 20 7c 

BOG&2. 3 2 S z 9 9 - _ 3 9 27 go 

ASTHA — / — — - - - / — c= 3 <$& zo 

^P£>T3 / — — / — / C=S» - / =» 9 90 

SUJLAS" 2 9 vsr _ - X­ — £ - - /? £~0 

StlSA 2. — ~ — — / s 3 * *S=W — /S SO 

OF>CJ­ _ / V Q — / — ~ — — — ^& ZO I 

AT0& — — — — — — =_ / — tea / /e? (] 

11 

Density = Total number of plants by species recorded for all ten plots. 

Frequency (%) = No. of plots in which a species occurs x 1Q0 

10 

322 

Notes (Use other side or another page

1 

) 
Illustration 69, page 1 

•D 

. u C 

_eo •o •p" 

2 

a> o. § CJ CO 

o eo £ 

a > co 1 >> 

> > £ & 3 _ 

CO o £ a 8 . (0 x : k. 

m *>» > 

o s & i u

> c CJ S 

£ u " Q •* P 2 Q 

fi 3 

c U o o a. c w U 

• S I o y « 

o I 

.r E 1 ~ 

"8 « '~ S c <u 

u 5 = 

1 8 i . 

Q P . -• uT e s2 £ £ 

O 

u 

o Hi u 

8. SJ « o 

X> 5-AI 

•s rr 

o . a 'o' ' 8 | | § • I u © 8. •s ^ v 

•8 

o — CO CO Is # 

o _ J= s s SI 

If II 

E Vi 

. CO 

u • : • & • ' • CO I 8 

# i' .•2 £ u o E cj = 

CJ CJ c > a. o u 55 ? CJ • — o i 

u •dj CO > & = c CD 

c u . o . C u 7? o E 3 I I : 

CD 

00 u O 3

Cw) E S" E 

CO 

li

si e ill ii 

y ,5 s 8 CO u c3 is. «8 

CO 

3 z c 

i# Q • c « 

E 

Z O 

il m 8-S 1 a) >» > CJ E 

" IS o 4> « O u Q o 1-4 1 S SL 

« ii eS 

 CO o <° ^ a CJ •- o s s- •3 " = 3

pi 

- Ente

1

r 

1

H o. 1 

> U Cover 

» " cj - S If 

0) 

I

1

73 41 C I < . 3 III 

u CJ CJ

1

E 

{2 '§• u g.­ = C a ai

9 

B3. E 3 ej. 1. ,C w £ CO ca O £ , 1 . = (0 l" I c «

o Z U

o c « 

= . o U. t# ^

I 

a o

£. 

as . D. a> <

E <0 ® o 

u

CO = 

Q .2 o 

>. w o iS 3 o •o >» o .5 CO 3 CO 

,2 3 I-' 

O i 

3 o a)-, « •: 

o c 

c cr;; a> CO "E 3 (0 

X a> LU 

3 

E

E 

o •I 

? : o 

s •<u: 

C/3 rr 

C 

a> 

I 

Q Q) 

E 

0) 

3 

c 

fl> I 

o D) 

Q . •S O 

^ i 5 CO 

0C CD O x : 2 E ffl o 

c

I

0) 8O "5 

ca 

o 

cu CO CO T3 O -O 

c 0) I- CO g> 

a> a> o

a> CO <•_ 

E o. CD 3 w CO 

Z c >» (0 w 

C 3 3 0) 

3 m 55 

323 
Illustratio

n 69, page 2 

o CD 

k . (0 

£ 

£ 

3 CO 

• 

o 

1 1< I !» 

E 

3 

Z (D «S i . c ^ I 5 

2CD

£ CD CD 

I CD 

e 

c 

0 . 

 ^o <g 

C/2 

2 

O 

H 

< 

_! 

U 

< 

u 

<0 

C 

o "§ o •2 *8

i if 

n I* is II 2ta

2 

Q 

& 

a 

-

1

 Q 

> o

U 

 •­ 3 -O ••= "8 

u 

o •a 

_ u £ "2 o u u t: « is o — P & 8 

1] II 

a. 

fl Ji i! 

If! to 

 g. o • J2 

1

"* O . > a ca 

111 ^ 

CO 

u 

.J 

E2 

I 

8 65 m 

m 

II 

lit CO 

u 

a 

I 

£ 

c 

o •i 11 If 

i 

& 

I 

£ a) 

c 

o 

I 

u o E 2 ,» u a. o. II 3

8 o. 

1 9J 

u ii 

S 

r •5" 

a 

c u

Q 

c 

o c fc 

§• £ £ 2 # Q 

£ 

8. 

Q .2 > w •o >» 

CD 

o 

00 S K 

3 <U 

£3 H­ o 

I 

E 

>> 

o 

CD 

> 

w 

^0 

SP Q 

o 

o 

o 

• 

c 

CD 

3 E ^ 

CD 

CC 

CO 

c 

3 

( 0 

X UJ 

cr CD 

§ 

*0 £ o CO 

Q § § Q 

^ 

^ 

£

£ o

o 

I 03 CD CC 

NO s 

lo 8 -O , 

o 

1 I 

CD 

E 

3 

Z 

^ 

^ 

1^ *i O 

19 ^ 

w 0) € E (D v C D) E « S « Q -O 

c (B 

(0 ** — 

( 0 Mw 11 C 3 3 CD 

8 

CD 

. Q 

E 

3 

Z 

> s 

• D 

3 55 

I 

I 

I 

CO CD 

o CD 

Q . CO 

C 

m 

Q . 

c*> 

s? 

Q <0 

oo 

CD €*) 

if) 

s 

K 

Q 

N »0 

5 

M 

01 

o 

o 

N 

CD 

0 5 CD 

Q . 

i— CD 

O 

c CO 

o CD 

" D 

'tn 

Urn CD 

z 

a CO 

ID CO CD 

324 
Rangeland Monitoring—Trend Studies 

Community Structure Analysis Method Transect Layout 

CD 

Q 9.6 square foot 

circular plot 

Photo plots may be 

permanently located 

anywhere along the • 

transect. 

CD T 

1 Pace or other prescribed interval 

> Microplots—5 x 10 cm 

UD 

Microplot Frame— 

5x 10 centimeters 

(divided into quarters) 

CD 

CD 

CD 

T x - Transect Bearing Stake 

6 

feet 

l x . Transect Location Stake 

325 

Supplemental Studies — Stem Count Method 

XIX. STEM COUNT METHOD 

Editor's Note: The Stem Count Method procedures were transcribed from the original text in 

the BLM Technical Reference 4400-3, Rangeland Monitoring - Utilization Studies, dated 

September 1984. 

The Stem Count Method involves counting grazed and ungrazed stems in plots along a transect. It is based on the theory that percent utilization is directly related to the total number of 

stems grazed. 

A. Areas of Use 

This method was developed for use on mixed grass prairie rangelands. It is recommended 

for rangelands where western wheatgrass (Agropyron smithii) or other single-stem rhizomatous grasses are the important forage species. If the key species is not present at the proper 

interval at least 50 percent of the time, a different method for determining utilization should 

be used. 

B. Advantages and Limitations 

The method is simple and comparatively free from personal or procedural error. Some problem may arise in determining what is a single plant when more than one stem appears from a 

rhizome. Count stems—not plants. 

C. Equipment 

1. Study Location and Documentation Data form (see Illustration 59) 

2. Utilization Study Data - Stem Count Method form (see Illustration 71) 

3. Frame to delineate plots (a 1-square-foot plot is suggested) 

D. Training 

Little training is required for this method. Examiners must be able to identify the plant 

species as they count and record the number of grazed and ungrazed stems of the grasses on 

the plots. 

E. Establishing Studies 

Select key area(s) and key species and determine the number, length, and location of the 

transacts. Document the location and other pertinent information concerning a transect on 

the Study Location and Documentation Data form (see Illustration 59). 

327 
Supplemental Studies — Stem Count Method 

R Sampling Process 

After examiners are trained, proceed with the collection of utilization data. 

1. At each interval along the transect, place the frame immediately in front of the toe or 

on the nearest site having the key species. 

2. Count all grazed and ungrazed stems of the key species in each plot and record the 

numbers separately on the Utilization Study Data Stem Count Method form (see 

Illustration 71). 

G= Calculating Percent Utilization 

Calculate the percent utilization (percent of stems grazed) by dividing the total number of 

grazed stems by the total number of stems (grazed plus ungrazed) and multiplying the result 

by 100. Record the percent utilization on the Utilization Study Data Stem Count Method 

form (see Dlustration 71). 

328 
Illustration 71, page 1 

 Pagt5 of United States Department of the Interior

Bureau of Land Management 

Utilization Study Data 

Stem Count Method 

Study Number 

Date Examiner 

Allotment Name & Number 

Pasture 

Kind and/or Class of Animal 

Period of Use 

Key Species Stem Count by Plot , 

• Plot- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Totals ; 

Grazed • - ' 

• • ' -"' .

Ungrazed , .,; • * - . " 

Plot 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Totals 

•

Grazed • , . 

Ungraze •'- ; d • 

Plot 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 Totals 

- Grazed T 

Ungrazed 

Notes (Use other side or another page if Total GR Stems Total GR + UNGR Stems 

necessary) 

Grazed Stems x100 _ 0/o utilization Y inn 

Total Stems (Stems Grazed) 

• 

329 
Illustration 71, page 2 

Page ^ of—Z- United States Department of the Interior 

Bureau of Land Management 

Utilization Study Data 

Stem Count Method 

Study Number Date Examiner 

/3A/° W£~27~0¥ 9/30/8V J9&& <JaeJcs-/f€X6J 

Allotment Name & Number Pasture 

J?/ue %/Wge - oo79 ^AoAecA&rry 

Kind and/or Class of Animal Period of Use 

Morses S// /o 9/30 

Key Species AGSM Stem Count by Plot 

Plot 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Totals 

Grazed 8 6 9 82. 

Ungrazed 9 & f O /O 8 S s 3 

Plot 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Totals 

Grazed 9 /oo 

Ungrazed j3_ O / 39 

Plot 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 Totals 

Grazed 7 W /£ 

Ungrazed 8 9 9 /O & 9 7V 

Notes (Use other side or another page if Total GR Stems Total GR + UNGR Stems 2SB 9S4 necessary) 

Grazed Stems x 10 0 = % utilization ZS& v1nna 5*?% 

Total Stems (Stems Grazed) 

h&ezcf ^/fots/ef &c /&*t<r&c/ erne/ ?*A(z Aoerfc- pj^xscf' /e> or ^rocf^^ • 

330 


Form Approved REPORT DOCUMENTATION PAGE OMB No. 0704-0188 

Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 1 hour per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and 

maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this burden estimate or any other aspect of this collection of information, 

including suggestions'for reducing this burden, to Washington Headquarters Services, Directorate for Information Operations and Reports, 1215 Jefferson Davis Highway, Suite 1204, Arlington, . 

VA 22202-4302, and to the Office of Management and Budget, Paperwork Reduction Project (0704-0188); Washington, DC 20503. 

1. AGENCY USE ONLY (Leave blank) 2. REPORT DATE 3. REPORT TYPE AND DATES COVERED 

October 1992 Reprint of BLM Range Management Publications 

4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE 5. FUNDING NUMBERS 

Rangeland Inventory and Monitoring—Supplemental Studies 

6. AUTHOR(S) t 

iEdward'E.iHabich j 

7. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME(S) AND ADDRESS(ES) 8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION 

REPORT NUMBER 

U.S Departmentof the Inferior 

Bureau of Land.Management—Service1 Center 

P:0. Box 25047 BLM/SC/PT-92/005+4400 -. 

Denver, CO 80225-0047 

9. SPONSORING/MONITORING AGENCY NAME(S) AND ADDRESS(ES) 10. SPONSORING/MONITORING 

AGENCY REPORT NUMBER 

11. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES 

12a. DISTRIBUTION/AVAILABILITY STATEMENT 12b.

 DISTRIBUTION CODE 

r

 r 

13. ABSTRACT (Maximum 200 words) 

This Technical Reference contains the rangeland inventory and monitoring techniques historically used in the 

Bureau of Land Management (BLM) since formation of the Grazing Service. It is designed to be a reference 

document. BLM contains numerous files and documents containing historical vegetation and other resource 

data. Much of this data is being used today to determine grazing preference on public lands and the carrying 

capacity on nonfederal lands. However, the procedures employed to gather this data are now obscure. This 

document explains how data was collected in the past and provides instructions on how to collect data for future 

comparison. Historical procedures are described as they were originally published. 

Historical inventory and monitoring data is often useful for making long-term analyses of trends and ecological 

change. Although some historical techniques may be considered technically inadequate by'today's standards, 

older data may be useful in making general interpretations. Knowledge of the intent or purpose of historical 

methods aids in understanding why previous range managers managed the range the way they did, and in 

determining if certain reports, such as range condition, can be compared to.the concepts and reports used today. 

14. SUBJECT TERMS 

15. NUMBER OF PAGES 

• Public Lands • Vegetation Inventory and Monitoring 

294 

• Range Management • Historical Range Management Techniques 16. PRICE CODE 

17. SECURITY CLASSIFICATION 18. SECURITY CLASSIFICATION 19. SECURITY CLASSIFICATION 20. LIMITATION OF ABSTRACT 

OF REPORT OF THIS PAGE OF ABSTRACT 

Unclassified Unclassified 

Unclassified UL 

NSN 7540-01-280-5500 

Standard Form 298 (Rev. 2-89) 

Prescribed by ANSI SM.Z39-18 . •fru.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE! » « - 774*03/62020 298-102